Home

SYSMAC CS and CJ Series CS1W-EIP21 (100Base-TX

1. CJ1W EIP21 CJ2 CJ2H CPU6 CJ1W EIP21 OK CJ2H CPU6 CJ2H CPU6 CJ2M CPU3 CJ2M CPU3 CJ2M CPU1 See note CJ1W EIP21 CJ1 CPU Unit CJ1W EIP21 CS1W EIP21 CS1 CPU Unit CS1W EIP21 Note Symbols cannot be set for tags with CJ2H CPU6L and CJ2M CPU1L CPU Units 6 1 4 Data Link Data Areas Tags A data link between the local I O memory and a remote I O memory is called a tag A tag can be set using a network symbol name or an I O memory address Tag Sets When a connection is established from 1 to 8 tags including PLC status is configured as a tag set Each tag set represents the data that is linked for a tag data link connection Tag data links are thus created by connecting one tag set to another tag set A tag set name must be set for each tag set Note A connection is used to exchange data as a unit within which data concur rency is maintained Thus data concurrency is maintained for all the data exchanged for the tags in one data set Example In the following example input tags a to g at the originator are a tag set named SP1_IN and output tags i and ii are a tag set named SP1_OUT A connection is set between these two tag sets 116 Overview of Tag Data Links Section 6 1 Originator device Target device Connection Information IP address Target IP address Originator tag
2. m Overview of Setup Methods 1 Starting FinsGateway Settings Select FinsGateway FinsGateway Setup to start the FinsGateway Setup 2 ETN_UNIT Driver Setup 1 Double click on ETN_UNIT in the settings for the network and Unit The fol lowing ETN_UNIT Properties Window will be displayed e Network Tab Page ETN_UNIT Properties Communication Unit UDP nodes TCP nodes Network number 0 Local node number 100 Communication unit number 117 Cancel e Network number Set the network number for the personal computer Ethernet port e Local node address Set the personal computer Ethernet port node address 1 to 254 on the Ethernet network e Communication unit number Set the unit number in decimal 16 to 31 for the per sonal computer Ethernet port 215 216 Using FINS Applications Section 8 5 e Communication Unit Tab Page ETN_UNIT Properties UDP nodes TCP nodes UDP port number 3600 Primary IP address IPAddress 192 168 250 30 DHCP FALSE Intel R PRO 100 VE Network Connection Packet Schedule w FINS IP Conversion C Automatic generation Dynamic C Automatic generation Static Donot support DHCP client IP table automatic generation IP address table r Cancel n Set the local UDP port number for the personal com puter Ethernet port The default is 9600 If multiple Network Cards are mounted at the personal
3. FA F2 F3 F4 FS Fe F F8 F9 F10 Shift F2 Help Edit Cell Show Prev Show Next Insert Delete Move Down Move Up Datalink Check the Switch table Node Node TagSet TagSet TagSet TagSet Wizard table focus Ready i NUM The following items will be displayed in the Node Area on the left side of the window e IP Address The IP address of the node e Device The name model number of the device at the node The node list will display the node registered in the Network Configurator Nodes cannot be added or deleted from this window The data link table of the node selected on the left will be displayed on the right Each row specifies word that are allocated for data links for that node Each row specifies the node settings for the words area where a data link has been created You can set only area 1 or both area 1 and area 2 e IN OUT Specifies whether the link inputs data to the node or outputs data from the node OUT can be selected only once Once OUT has been selected for one row IN will automatically be selected for other rows A asterisk will be displayed if the Over Load function is disabled See note Note The Over Load function is used to clear output data when all out puts are turned OFF from the CPU Unit of the PLC This setting is not necessary for inputs a Over Load function enabled Output data will be cleared to all ze ros when all outputs from the PLC are turned OFF f
4. Note 1 Data cannot be written to words A000 to A447 in the Auxiliary Area 2 A maximum of 13 banks in the EM Area can be used for a CS1 CJ1 CPU Unit A maximum of 25 banks in the EM Area can be used for a CJ2H CPU Unit A maximum of 4 banks in the EM Area can be used for a CJ2M CPU Unit For details regarding the EM Area refer to the operation manual for the PLC that is used Refer to the operation manual for your CPU Unit to confirm EM Area support 221 Communicating between OMRON PLCs Section 8 6 8 6 3 Using SEND 090 RECV 098 and CMND 490 SEND 090 222 SEND 90 Make the settings shown below when using the SEND 090 RECV 098 and CMND 490 instructions in the user s ladder diagram program in the PC The SEND 090 instruction sends the data in n number of words starting from the beginning word S at the local node to the words starting from the begin ning word D at the remote destination node node address N Local node Destination node number N 15 0 D gt n S Local node beginning word D Destination beginning word C First word of control data below 15 o 15 10_ 87 3 o c i i l C 3 0 0 a Number of words n L Number of retries 0001 to 03DE Hex 1 to 990 words 0 to F Hex 0 to 15 retries 15 15 Communications port number 0 to 7 11 87 0 ale ta i Response a os 0 Required I Destination network number
5. The percentage of the allowable communications bandwidth for tag data links for each EtherNet IP Unit is displayed as the Usage of Capacity and the band width used for tag data link communications in the entire network is displayed as the Mbit s The usage of capacity and used network bandwidth that are displayed in parentheses are for a switching hub that does not use multicast filtering In this case multicast packets will be sent to even the nodes without connection settings so the displayed values will include these packets as well These values can be adjusted according to instructions in 10 2 4 Changing the RPI When using a switching hub that provides multicast filtering there must be enough multicast filters for the network being used The number of multicast IP address used in the entire network that is displayed by the Network Config urator as the Network Total of Max Mbit s is based on connection settings Make sure that the number of multicast IP addresses used in the entire net work does not exceed the number of multicast filters supported by the switch ing hub If necessary change to a switching hub with enough multicast filters or adjust the usage of capacity and network bandwidth for tag data links Mbit s values given for a switching hub without multicast filtering i e the values in parentheses Adjust these values according to instructions in 10 2 4 Chang ing the RPI The Network Configurator displays
6. Description For details refer to EXPLICIT MESSAGE SEND 28 01 on page 241 in 9 1 1 Sending Explicit Messages Using CMND 490 CIP UCMM MESSAGE SEND Sends a message in the CIP message UCMM format Command Transport Message monitoring Command Block l 2810 hex l code ID timer lt 502 bytes max gt iee ee ee E ns E A a SE Request bus size Request data variable length variable length Request bus size Service code Response Block 2810 hex 0000 hex Command End Transport Number of code code ID bytes received 502 bytes max gt 00 00 00 hex hex hex variable length Reserved General status Reserved Service code response Service response data Response Codes Response code Description Normal end The local node s network has not started up Duplicate address error The remote node s network has not started up Remote node busy cannot send No response returned from remote node Monitoring timer timed out Command length exceeds maximum command length Command length is less than minimum command length Command block format does not match 417 FINS Commands Addressed to EtherNet IP Units or Built in EtherNet IP Ports Appendix E Response code Description Header error
7. Changing tag data link parameters during operation Supported See note 5 Multicast packet filter function See note 6 Supported 17 EtherNet IP Unit and Built in EtherNet IP Port Specifications Item CS1 CJ1 CJ2H CJ2M Explicit messaging Class 3 connected Section 2 1 Number of connections 128 UCMM unconnected Number of clients that can communicate at one time 16 max Number of servers that can communicate at one time 16 max Number of clients that can communicate at one time 32 max Number of servers that can communicate at one time 32 max CIP routing CS1W EIP21 CJ1W EIP21 CJ2H CPU CJ2M CPU3L FINS service See note 7 FINS UDP Supported FINS TCP 16 connections max SNMP Agent SNMPv1 SNMPv2c MIB MIB II EtherNet IP conformance test Conforms to A5 Ethernet interface 18 Note 10BASE T or 100BASE TX Auto Negotiation or fixed settings 1 In this case pps means packets per second and indicates the number of packets that can be processed in one second 2 To use 505 to 1 444 bytes as the data size the system must support the Large Forward Open standard an optional CIP specification The SYS MAC CS CuJ series Units support this standard but before connecting to nodes of other companies confirm that those devices also support it 3 If the maximum data s
8. OFF when the parameters above are valid BOOTP Server Error One of the following errors occurred when using the BOOTP server The IP address received from the BOOTP server is incorrect A communications timeout occurred with the server OFF when the errors listed above did not occur Not used Address Mismatch ON when the target IP address conversion method is set to Automatic generation but the local IP address host ID does not match the FINS node address OFF when the values match Non volatile Mem ory Error ON when an error occurred in the Unit s internal non volatile memory OFF when the Unit s internal non volatile memory is oper ating normally Words n 16 to n 19 show the registration status of the target nodes that are connected with the EtherNet IP Unit as the originator These words show the status of nodes 0 to 63 only If it is necessary to show the status of nodes higher than node 63 select user settings as the layout pattern For details refer to 4 4 User Settings Area CIO Area Allocations Section 4 2 Normal Target Node Table EtherNet IP Unit to CPU Unit n 20 to n 23 FINS TCP Connection Status EtherNet IP Unit to CPU Unit n 24 n 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 n 17 a i A 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 a I E ee a eei a e Manipulated Unit operation by Registered T
9. Response sent back to changed IP address Automatic IP Address Setting by DHCP Service DHCP service is a method whereby a DHCP server collectively manages all of the IP address in a network Nodes that are functioning as clients acquire IP addresses from the DHCP IP Addresses in FINS Communications Section 5 2 server whenever the system is started Therefore at a personal computer using the DHCP service IP addresses may be different with each system startup DHCP service is mainly used for automatic settings in devices such as per sonal computers that are used for client applications Nodes used for server applications such as mail servers are normally allocated fixed IP addresses EtherNet IP Units and built in EtherNet IP ports in PLC systems are also allo cated fixed IP addresses Simultaneously Running Multiple Applications on a Personal Computer FINS UDP Communications Method FINS TCP Communications Method In communications involving previous models multiple communications appli cations were configured on personal computers according to data accessing uses and the fact that no more than one UDP port number for FINS commu nications could be used on any given computer created a problem This Eth erNet IP Unit provides a practical solution with an internal table that pairs remote nodes applications with FINS node addresses enabling dynamic changes FINS nodes are allocated individually for each application
10. 0 2 ms peripheral servicing time 1 ms max for peripheral servicing of each Special I O Unit CPU Bus Unit peripheral port RS 232C port and Inner Board Note CJ2 CPU Units support only Normal Mode For details refer to the CPU Unit s Operation Manual The following table shows the CPU Bus Unit service processing time which depends on the CPU Unit s CPU processing mode setting CPU execution mode Processing time details Normal Mode See note Set peripheral servicing time Priority peripheral servicing Default 4 of CPU Unit cycle time 10 for CJ2 CPU Units 1 ms max Parallel processing with syn chronous memory access Parallel processing with asyn chronous memory access Note CJ2 CPU Units support only Normal Mode 297 Message Service Transmission Delay Section 10 5 Send Processing Transmission Delay Receive Processing CPU Bus Unit Service Cycle Remote Node CPU Bus Unit Service Processing Time Remote Node 298 For details refer to the CPU Unit s Operation Manual Command 0 550 ms Response Number of words being transferred x 0 002 0 550 ms The transmission delay time depends on the baud rate set for the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port as shown in the following table There may be additional delays due to the other devices in the network such as switch ing hubs 100Base TX Command 0 0118 ms Response _ Number of wor
11. Command Block Command IP address Subnet mask code Response Block Command Response code code Parameters IP Address Command Specify the local IP address of the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port using 4 pairs of 2 digit hexadec imal numbers in the range 00 00 00 00 to FF FF FF FF 0 0 0 0 to 255 255 255 255 decimal Specify 0 0 0 0 to enable the local IP address set in the allocated DM Area words Example 150 31 2 83 96 1F 02 53 Subnet Mask Command Specify the local IP address of the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port using 4 pairs of hexadecimal numbers in the range 00 00 00 00 to FF FF FF FF 0 0 0 0 to 255 255 255 255 decimal Example 255 255 255 255 FF FF FF 00 404 FINS Commands Addressed to EtherNet IP Units or Built in EtherNet IP Ports Appendix E Response Codes Response code Description 0000 Normal end 1001 Command too large 1002 Command too small Precautions e The local IP address and subnet mask set by this command are written to the CPU Bus Unit System Setup for the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port e The new local IP address and subnet mask settings will become effective when the PLC or EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port is restarted IP ADDRESS TABLE READ Reads the IP address table Command Block Command Number of code records Response Block Command Response Maximum Number Number IPaddress IP
12. Note Use CX Programmer version 4 0 to use TCP IP For lower versions of CX Pro grammer FinsGateway Version 2003 or higher is required to use TCP IP Communications Services Overview Section 1 4 EtherNet IP Unit The FINS gateway function enables access to PLCs on not only the same Ethernet network but on various other networks including SYSMAC LINK and Controller Link Network Configurator Overview Section 1 5 1 5 Network Configurator Overview 1 5 1 Overview The Network Configurator Ver 3 0 or higher is a software package designed for building setting and controlling a multi vendor EtherNet IP Network using OMRON s EtherNet IP It is included in CX One version 4 0 or higher The Network Configurator provides the following functions for building setting and controlling EtherNet IP Network Control The Network configuration can be created and edited regardless of whether the Network Configurator is online or offline The Network configuration can be read from a file or the network Hardware EDS File EDS files used by the Network Configurator can be installed and deleted Control 1 5 2 Network Configurator Requirements Operating environment Refer to the CX One Setup Manual W463 CXONE ALLI_IC V4 CXONE ALLILID V4 Network CS1 CJ1 CJ2 connection method Serial interface CPU Unit s Peripheral or RS 232C port CPU Unit s USB or RS 232C port Ethernet
13. RJ45 Modular Connector a EtherNet IP Unit 45 Creating I O Tables Section 3 6 3 6 Creating I O Tables 3 6 1 I O Table Overview I O tables are used to identify Units mounted to the PLC and to allocate I O to them With CS series and CJ series PLCs whenever there is a change to the Unit configuration it is necessary to create I O tables and register the mounted Units in the CPU Unit The I O tables can be created in the following ways e Using the CX Programmer offline e Using the CX Programmer online to create the I O table based on the Units mounted to the PLC e Using the Programming Console to create the I O table based on the Units mounted to the PLC e Using the CPU Unit s automatic I O allocation at startup This method is available for the CJ Series only 3 6 2 Connecting Programming Devices to the PLC To create the I O tables connect a Programming Device such as a CX Pro grammer or Programming Console to the PLC Applicable Programming Devices The following Programming Devices can be used with CS CJ series PLCs Programming Console Model number Key Sheet required Recommended cable required C200H PRO27 E CS1W KS001 E CS1W CN224 cable length 2 0 m CS1W CN624 cable length 6 0 m CQM1 PRO01 E CS1W CN114 cable length 0 1 m Note A Programming Console cannot be used with the CJ2H CPULIL EIP and CJ2M CPU3L CPU Units Use the CX Programmer
14. Tag set SP2_OUT group of tags d e Tag set SP2_IN Connection EtherNet IP The I O memory words used in tags in a tag set do not have continuous addresses The tags can also be from different I O memory areas To enable a connection however each tag set must include only input tags or only output Note Specifications tags Both input and output tags cannot be included in the same tag set The following table shows the tag and tag set specifications Tags Tag sets CS1W EIP21 CJ1W EIP21 CJ2H CPULILI EIP CJ2M CPU3 CS1W EIP21 CJ1W EIP21 CJ2H CPULILI EIP CJ2M CPU3 Total size of all tags lt 184 832 words Total size of all tags lt 640 words Maximum size of 1 tag set lt 722 words The maximum size is 721 words when the tag set includes the PLC status Maximum size of 1 tag set lt 20 words The maximum size is 19 words when the tag set includes the PLC status Maximum size of 1 tag lt 722 words The maximum size is 721 words when the tag set includes the PLC status Maximum size of 1 tag lt 20 words The maximum size is 19 words when the tag set includes the PLC status Number of tags per tag set lt 8 7 tags tag set when the tag set includes the PLC status Note Input and output variables cannot be combined Number of registrable tags lt
15. 342 Checking Status with the Network Configurator Section 14 1 Connection Tab Page The Connection Tab Page s Target Node Status Field shows the connection status of the target nodes that are connected with the EtherNet IP Unit as the tag data link originator The icon will be blue if the connection is normal or red if an error occurred In addition the Connection Status Area shows the current status each con nection that is set as the originator This information can be used to identify the cause of tag data link errors For details on the connection status refer to 14 3 Connection Status Codes and Error Processing Monitor Device Controller Error History Tag Status Ethernet Information Status 1 Status 2 Connection Error History Target Node Status am Start Connection Stop Connection Connection Status Connection Name Type Status 1921682502 002 CN01 01 h 00 0000 Close 343 Checking Status with the Network Configurator Section 14 1 Error History Tab Page Controller Error History Tab Page 344 The Error History Tab Page displays the error log stored in the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port Errors that occurred in the past are recorded and can be cleared or saved in a computer file as required In some cases error records are cleared when the power is turned OFF and in other cases the records are retained For details on the error log refer to 14 4 Error Log Function
16. CX Programmer For information on how to connect and operate the CX Programmer refer to the CxX Programmer Operation Manual Cat No W446 Connecting a Programming Console To connect a Programming Console attach a CS CJ series Key Sheet and then connect the Console to the CPU Unit s peripheral port It cannot be con nected to the RS 232C port 3 6 3 Procedure for Creating I O Tables Programming Console This section provides the procedure for creating the I O tables using a Pro gramming Console For details on using the Programming Console refer to the Programming Console s operation manual Note 1 With the CJ Series it is necessary to create I O tables only when the user is allocating I O manually With the CS Series it is always necessary to create I O tables 46 Creating I O Tables Section 3 6 2 With the CJ2H CPULILI EIP and CJ2M CPU3L CPU Units the built in EtherNet IP port is set in the I O tables by default and cannot be changed It is not necessary to register it in the I O tables Use the following procedure to create the I O tables Initial screen CH WRITE Save or clear the CPU Bus Unit System Setup CX Programmer Version 8 0 or Higher 1 2 3 This section describes how to register an EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port in the I O tables using the CX Programmer version 8 0 or higher Refer to the CX Progra
17. Connection Status Connection Name Type Status 1921682502 002 CNOT_01 h 00 0000 Close Start Connection Button Starts all connections for which the device is the originator Stop Connection Button Stops all connections for which the device is the originator Note Connections will be cut off if any of the following errors occurs in the CPU Unit that is the originator while tag data links are active e Fatal CPU Unit error e I O refresh error e CPU Unit WDT error e I O bus error 6 2 14 Clearing the Device Parameters The device parameters saved in the EtherNet IP Units in the EtherNet IP net work can be cleared returned to their default settings The following proce dure shows how to clear the device parameters For details on connecting to the network from the Network Configurator refer to 6 2 9 Connecting the Net work Configurator to the Network 1 2 3 1 Connect the Network Configurator to the network 2 Selectthe icon of the EtherNet IP Unit in which you want to clear the device parameters In the following example 2 nodes are selected 192 168 250 1 and 192 168 250 2 To select multiple nodes press and hold the Shift Key while selecting additional icons 92168 2501 EZA yai 192 168 250 3 192 168 250 4 GS1W EIP21 GS1W EIP21 GS1W EIP21 CS1W EIP21 2 192168 250 2 4 192168 2501 192168 250 1 192 168 2501 176 Setting Tag Data Links Section 6 2 3 Select Device Reset The fol
18. Routing service data gt Request path Route path 01 02 20 01 24 01 08 00 12 OD 31 39 32 2E 31 36 t t Route path 1 T 2 1 6 size 8 words Route path size 13 bytes Instance ID Ethernet port 12 Hex 8 bit instance ID 24 Hex Class ID identity object i 8 bit class ID H Request path size 2 words i L Service code Get_Attribute_All service lt __ Last hop data ri Routing service data gt Route path 38 2E 32 35 30 2E 32 00 8 2 5 0 2 T Padding data Routing service data gt 243 Sending Explicit Messages Section 9 1 Setting the Command Data for CMND 490 Bit S 0 S 1 S 2 S 3 S 4 S 5 S 6 S 7 S 8 S 9 S 10 S 11 S 12 S 13 S 14 S 15 S 16 S 17 S 18 S 19 244 15 08 07 28 10 00 00 05 DC 52 02 20 06 24 01 0A oc 06 00 01 02 20 01 24 01 08 00 12 0D 31 39 32 2E 31 36 38 2E 32 35 30 2E 32 00 FINS command code Transport ID Message monitoring time Service code 52 hex Request path size 02 hex 8 bit class ID 20 hex Class ID 06 hex Connection Manager 8 bit instance ID 24 hex request path Instance ID 01 hex Priority Time Tick OA hex Time Out Ticks OC hex Message request size Service code 01 hex Get_At
19. 000024 i END 247 Receiving Explicit Messages Section 9 2 9 2 Receiving Explicit Messages The CS CJ series EtherNet IP Units and built in EtherNet IP ports are equipped with a PLC Object that is functionally compatible with CS CJ series DeviceNet Units The Unit will receive messages addressed to the PLC Object process service requests addressed to the CPU Unit and return responses The CS CJ series EtherNet IP Units and built in EtherNet IP ports support CIP unconnected message UCMM communications and CIP con nected Class 3 communications as reception functions The following services are provided by the PLC Object e CPU Unit status read write e CPU Unit I O memory read write e CPU Unit error log read clear Explicit messages can be received from the following sources e EtherNet IP nodes made by other manufacturers OMRON PLCs with a CS CJ series EtherNet IP Unit or a CPU Unit with a built in EtherNet IP port Messages from CS CJ series EtherNet IP Units and built in EtherNet IP ports must be CIP unconnected messages UCMM Messages from CS CJ series EtherNet IP Units and built in EtherNet IP ports must be CIP unconnected messages UCMM Example CS CJ series CS CJ series EtherNet IP Unit EtherNet IP Unit CS CJ series Other company s CS CJ series CPU Unit Ethernet node CPU Unit Explicit messages can be sent m Ethernet Et
20. 379 TCP Status Transitions Appendix C 380 Appendix D CIP Message Communications This appendix describes CIP message communications The basic concepts of CIP message communications are described in this appendix from C P Object on page 381 through Example of CIP Message Creation on page 386 Read these sections to improve your understanding of CIP message communications CIP Object Object Model In the CIP Common Industrial Protocol system each device is modeled as a group of Objects An Object abstractly represents a related group of the device s data values Device When accessing the device from the outside access an Object An Object represents the abstracted device function processing and the resulting data A request from the outside of Object such as Read Data is called Service Data belonging to the Object is called Attribute The actual entity of Object is called Instance or Object Instance When Object is generalized it is called Class For example Japan is one of Instances Object Instances of Class Nation External request Example Read Write Service gee Processing Object Instance 381 CIP Message Communications Appendix D Terminology In CIP specifications Object Class Instance Attribute and Service are defined as follows Object An abstract representation of a particular component w
21. Changes the specified current file name to the specified new file name rename can be used only to change the file name It cannot be used to move the file to a different directory 309 Using FTP Commands mkdir Format Function rmdir Format Function pwd Format Function cd Format Function cdup Format Function 310 Section 11 5 mkdir DIRECTORY NAME Creates a directory of the specified name at the remote host Memory Card or EM File Memory An error will occur if a file or directory of the same name already exists in the working directory rmdir DIRECTORY NAME Deletes the directory of the specified name from the remote host Memory Card or EM File Memory The directory must be empty to delete it An error will occur if the specified directory does not exist or is empty pwd Displays the remote host s Ethernet Unit current work directory cd directory name Changes the remote host Ethernet Unit work directory to the specified remote directory The files in the Memory Card are contained in the MEMCARD directory under the root directory The files in EM File Memory are contained in the EM directory under the root directory The root directory is the directory used when logging into the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port No MEMCARD directory will exist if a Memory Card is not inserted in the PLC or if the Memory Card power indicator is not lit
22. I switching hub Contact Output Unit 5 43 Connecting to the Network Section 3 5 3 5 Connecting to the Network 3 5 1 Ethernet Connectors The following standards and specifications apply to the connectors for the Ethernet twisted pair cable e Electrical specifications Conforming to IEEE802 3 standards e Connector structure RJ45 8 pin Modular Connector conforming to ISO 8877 Connector pin Signal name Signal direction Transmission data Output Transmission data Output Reception data Input Not used Not used Reception data Input Not used INI OD om BR ow hm gt Not used I O 0 oe Frame ground 3 5 2 Connecting the Cable N Caution Turn OFF the PLC s power supply before connecting or disconnecting twisted pair cable Z Caution Allow enough space for the bending radius of the twisted pair cable as shown in below OMRON 35 mm 44 Connecting to the Network Section 3 5 1 2 3 1 Lay the twisted pair cable 2 Connect the cable to the switching hub Be sure to press in the cable until it locks into place 3 Connect the twisted pair cable to the connector on the EtherNet IP Unit Be sure to press the connectors both the switching hub side and Ethernet side until they lock into place Example CS1W EIP21
23. Operation stops Replace the CPU Unit if the error recurs when the CPU Unit is restarted 347 Using the LED Indicators and Display for Troubleshooting Indicator NS 7 segment EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port faulty Unit operation Flag status Operation stops Section 14 2 Countermeasure Replace the Ether Net IP Unit or fora built in EtherNet IP port the CPU Unit if the error recurs when the Unit is restarted Flashing red Node address setting error The node address set on the switches is invalid 00 or FF Operation stops Set the node address correctly and restart the Eth erNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port Flashing red Not lit CPU Unit faulty Records the error in the error log time date all zeroes Operation stops Replace the CPU Unit if the error recurs when the CPU Unit is restarted Flashing red Not lit I O table not registered The CPU Unit s I O table is not registered Operation stops Create the I O table Flashing red Simple backup function restore error The simple backup func tion s data resto ration failed The settings of the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port are all cleared unless the backup file does not exist a Memory Card is not mounted or the PLC model does not match Perform the simple backup operation again If the error recurs
24. The RPI was set to a value that exceeds the specifications This error does not occur Check the target s RPI setting specifica tions Set the originator s RPI setting to 10 seconds or less Error code generated by origi nator or returned from target Attempted to open more con nections than allowed by the specifications CJ2M 32 other CPU Units 256 Check the con nection settings number of con nections at the originator and tar get Check the connec tion settings number of connections at the originator and target Check the connec tion specifications for another company s devices Check the connec tion settings number of connections at the originator and target Check the connec tion specifications for another company s devices Error code returned from target The Vendor ID and Product Code did not match when open ing connection This error does not occur Depends on the tar get s specifications Contact the target device s manufac turer Confirm that the tar get device s EDS file is correct Check the origina tor s connection set tings Error code returned from target The Product Type did not match when opening connection This error does not occur Depends on the tar get s specifications Contact the target device s manufac turer Confirm that the tar get device s EDS file is correct Check t
25. computer select the Network Card that is to be given priority e UDP port number e Priority Network Card FINS IP address conver Set the IP address conversion method sion e UDP Nodes Tab Page Automatic Generation Method Dynamic or Passive ETN_UNIT Properties About Network Communication Unit UDP nodes TCP nodes Network number 0 Network type Ethernet Node IP address Model Automatically Conversion Using FINS Applications Section 8 5 e UDP Nodes Tab Page IP Address Table Method or Combined Method ETN_UNIT Properties About Network Communication Unit UDP nodes TCP nodes Network number 0 Network type Ethernet Node IP address Model g a Add Delete Property Explore cov toh Click the Add Button and then set the IP address table in the following Ether net Node Definition Dialog Box Ethernet Node Definition Node number mo Se lt a IP address jo fo jo jo r Cancel C e Node address Set the remote FINS node address IP address Set the remote IP address 217 Using FINS Applications Section 8 5 e TCP Nodes Tab Page ETN_UNIT Properties About Network Communication Unit UDP nodes TCP nodes Network number 0 Network type Ethernet Node IP address Model Portno Keep live lt Add Delete Property Cancel Apply Click the Add Button and then set the IP address table in the following Ether net Node D
26. 01 to FE 1 to 254 decimal The left switch sets the sixteens digit most significant digit and the right switch sets the ones digit least significant digit The node address is factory set to 01 Turn OFF the power supply before setting the node address When IP addresses are generated automatically either dynamic or passive the rightmost byte of the host ID of the IP address of the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port is set to the same value as the node address Refer to Section 5 Determining IP Addresses If the same node address value can not be used the IP address table method or the combined method must be used for address conversion For details refer to SECTION 5 Determining IP Addresses If the FINS communications service is not being used on the Ethernet net work then it is all right for the same node address to be set on two or more EtherNet IP Units or built in EtherNet IP ports The setting however must be made within a range of 01 to FE If a value outside of this range is set the MS indicator will light red the 7 segment display will indicate code H4 node address setting error and the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port will stop operating 37 Mounting to a PLC Section 3 3 3 3 Mounting to a PLC 3 3 1 Mounting to a CS series PLC Note EtherNet IP Units can be mounted to any slot in a CS series CPU Rack ora CS series Expansion CPU Rack but the number of slots to wh
27. 130 25 36 8 PING Statistics 9 packets transmitted 9 packets received 0 packets loss Refer to the OS command reference manual for your computer for details on using the PING command SECTION 4 Memory Allocations This section describes the words allocated in the CIO Area and the DM Area for EtherNet IP Units or built in EtherNet IP ports 4 1 Overview of Memory Allocated to the EtherNet IP Unit 68 42 ClO Area Allocations 0 00 eee eee E es 70 4 2 1 Overview of the Allocated CIO Area Words 70 4 2 2 Details of the Allocated CIO Area Words 0005 71 4 3 DM Area Allocations 0 ccc teen eens 83 4 3 1 Overview of the Allocated DM Area Words 83 4 3 2 Details of the Allocated DM Area Words 0005 83 4 4 UseriSettings Area vcs t ee gee eas Beats SH AE oa SR A 85 4 4 1 Overview of the User Settings Area 0 0004 85 4 4 2 User Settings Area 2 eee eee 85 4 5 Auxiliary Area Data pi repe saua pE eens 88 4 5 1 Read only Bits Words 00 0 0 cee eee eee 88 4 5 2 Read Write Bits User Settings 00 0 ee ee ee ee 89 67 Overview of Memory Allocated to the EtherNet IP Unit Section 4 1 4 1 Overview of Memory Allocated to the EtherNet IP Unit The following CPU Unit words are allocated to the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port e CPU Unit s allocated CIO Area word
28. 256 Number of registrable tags lt 32 Number of registrable tag sets lt 256 Number of registrable tag sets lt 32 PLC Status A characteristic function of the CS1W EIP21 and CJ1W EIP21 EtherNet IP Units and CJ2 built in EtherNet IP ports is the ability to specify the PLC status as a member of the tag set This function reads the operating status operat ing and error status of the CPU Unit of the PLC in which the EtherNet IP Unit is mounted and includes the PLC status as status flags in the data trans ferred by the tag data links When the PLC status is specified as an output produce tag it is actually 118 transferred as the tag set s leading data in the following format PLC Operating Flag PLC Error Flag Overview of Tag Data Links Note Section 6 1 To receive the PLC status specify the PLC status in an input consume tag in the reception tag set as well When the PLC status is specified in an input tag the PLC status flags will be reflected in the corresponding location in the tag data link s Target Node PLC Operating Flags and Target Node PLC Error Flags The following example shows the relationship between the Target Node PLC Operating Flag location and target ID of the target node with 192 168 250 2 IP address 192 168 250 2 Last byte 2 Target ID 002 Target Node PLC Operating Flags 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 F 6 5 4 3 n2 15 14 13 12 11 10
29. PLC 3 Unit 0 relay node PLC 4 destination node PLC 1 local node PLC 2 relay node Node 1 T hoce 1 1 node 2 Unit 1 Node 2 Network 1 i Network 2 Network 3 R PLC 1 PLC 2 PLC 3 End network relay network table relay network table local network table End Relay network network Relay node To go to network 3 first go to node 3 at according to the local SO go to node 2 at network 3 network 1 Note Local network address Unit number To go to network 3 first go to node 2 at network 2 To go to network 3 The network is the same network table go through unit number 1 of the local CPU Rack In the above example the routing tables required for a message to reach PLC 4 from PLC 1 are shown Additional settings would be required in the rout ing tables for a message to reach PLC 1 from PLC 4 Refer to 8 4 3 Rout ing Table Setting Examples for routing table setting examples 8 4 2 Connecting and Using a Peripheral Device for the PLC 208 Note Routing tables must be created by a CX Integrator connected to the PLC They cannot be created using a Programming Console For details on how to connect and use the CX Integrator refer to the CX Integrator Operation Manual W445 CX Integrator is automatically installed when CX One is installed 1 When routing tables are
30. TCP IP Ethemet FINS UDP FINS TCP FTP Auto Adjust Time Status Area SNMP SNMP Trap IP Address Not use DNS Use the following address C Use DNS IP Address 194 168 1 1 Primary DNS Server Sub net Mask 25 25 25 0 E OS a ii Secondary DNS Server Default Gateway 0 0 0 Daman Name C Get IP address from the BOOTP server The BOOTP setting is valid only for next unit IP Router Table restart power restoration Then the BOOTP setting will be cleared The obtained IP address will be automatically IP Address Gateway Address Insert saved as system setting in the unit s Broadcast AN1 4 3BSD All0 4 2BSD Set Defaults Cancel 4 Place the CX Programmer online with the PLC and transfer the settings to the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port 5 After transferring the settings a message will ask if you want to restart the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port The Unit port must be restart ed to enable the settings 6 Check the 7 segment display for the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port 7 If the 7 segment display is tested again after it goes OFF and finally displays the IP address it indicates that the EtherNet IP Unit has recognized the new TCP IP Configuration settings the IP address in this case Note 1 The EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port must restart in order to enable the parameter settings that are transferred to it Verify that restart ing th
31. There is no Forward Open or Large Forward Open service in the target device This error does not occur Depends on the tar get s specifications Contact the target device s manufac turer Depends on the orig inator s specifica tions Contact the originator device s manufacturer Error code generated in origina tor The connection operation is stopped The connection was stopped because the Tag Data Link Stop Bit was turned ON or the settings data is being down loaded Either turn ON the Tag Data Link Start Bit or wait until the settings data has been downloaded Includes Control ler stop errors Unit failure and EM bank files at the refresh desti nation To handle these errors refer to 14 2 1Errors Occurring at the EtherNet IP Unit or built in Ether Net IP port The meaning of this error code is defined by each vendor so it depends on the tar get s specifications Contact the target device s manufac turer Depends on the orig inator s specifica tions Contact the originator device s manufacturer 362 Error code generated in origina tor The connection is being opened opening processing in progress Wait until the opening process ing is completed The meaning of this error code is defined by each vendor so it depends on the tar get s specifications Contact the target device s manufac turer Dep
32. amic method data in an internal table that has been generated mically converted according to FINS messages received from remote nodes This is enabled when the remote node is a device such as a personal computer and IP addresses are dynamically changed by a method such as DHCP A Must be fixed Local FINS node number l Can be changed Local IP address EtherNet IP Unit CPU Unit ee Py Remote FINS node number Change Local FINS node number registration Automatic generation dynamic setting Internal table Y Remote IP address Local IP address IP address FINS command Ethernet EtherNet IP IP address FINS response For the remote IP address a response is returned to the changed IP address IP Addresses in FINS Communications Section 5 2 Automatic Generation Static Personal computer Local FINS node number Local IP address A A Must be fixed A Must be fixed Internal table With the static method as well the following values are set for addresses in the internal table when the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port is turned ON or restarted Remote IP address Local IP address network number remote FINS node address Remote UDP port number UDP port number set for local Unit e Connection method FINS UDP With the sta
33. and the Programmable Controllers Programming Manual W394 CXONE AL C V4 CXONE AL D V4 CS One Setup Man ual Describes the setup procedures for the CX One Informa tion is also provided on the operating environment for the CX One WS02 CXPC V9 CX Programmer Operation Manual Provides information on how to use the CX Programmer a Windows based programming device Use together with the Programmable Controllers Operation Manual W339 for CS series PLCs and W393 for CJ series PLCs Programmable Controllers Programming Manual W394 and the Programmable Controllers Instructions Reference Manual W340 to perform programming CXONE AL CXONE AL CS CJ CP NSJ series CX Integrator Ver 2 L Operation Manual Describes the operating procedures of the CX Integrator that can be used to set up and monitor networks N WARNING Failure to read and understand the information provided in this manual may result in per sonal injury or death damage to the product or product failure Please read each section in its entirety and be sure you understand the information provided in the section and related sections before attempting any of the procedures or operations given xiii xiv Read and Understand this Manual Please read and understand this manual before using the product Please consult your OMRON representative if you hav
34. cations ODVA Headquarters 4220 Varsity Drive Suite A 239 Sending Explicit Messages 240 Section 9 1 Ann Arbor Michigan 48108 5006 USA TEL 1 734 975 8840 FAX 1 734 922 0027 Email odva odva org WEB www odva org Sending Explicit Messages Section 9 1 EXPLICIT MESSAGE SEND 28 01 EXPLICIT MESSAGE SEND will send a DeviceNet Unit compatible explicit message to the specified class of another node and receive a response The other node is specified with the destination node address in the com mand The actual destination IP address is as follows Destination IP address Local IP address amp Subnet mask Destination node address Command Block 28 01 468 bytes max _ Command Class ID Instance ID Service data code Service code Destination node address Response Block Normal Response I I I 28 01 00 00 498 bytes max l n a ae E a o Service data Service code Command Response No of bytes code code received Destination node address remote node Error Responses The following response is returned if an error occurs for the explicit message I I I I 28 01 00 00 94 l l l l Error code Service code 94 Hex Command Response No of bytes code code received Destination node address remote node The following response is returned if the explicit message can
35. specifications for the Connection could not be estab have been been received Use originator Consult lished because the buffer was _ received Use the the Network Configu the originator manu full due to high traffic Network Configu rator Device Monitor facturer rator Device Moni or the Ethernet Tab tor or the Ethernet Page to check the Tab Page to check bandwidth usage the bandwidth and correct the load usage and cor If there are places rect the load If where broadcast there are places __ storms occur such where broadcast as loop connections storms occur in the network con such as loop con nection format then nections in the correct them network connec tion format then correct them 01 011B Error code returned from target This error does Depends on the tar Set the originator s The RPI was set to a value that Not occur get s specifications RPI setting to 0 5 ms is below the specifications Contact the target or greater device s manufac turer 01 0203 Error code returned from target Tag data link communications from the target timed out Check The connection timed out the power supply and cable wiring of the devices in the commu nications path including the target and switches If performance has dropped due to heavy load change the performance set tings For example increase the timeout time or RPI setting 01 0204 Error code returned from target There was
36. ters are incorrect Check the command data and set the parameters correctly Cannot change IP address conversion method A FINS message was received from an IP address that differed from the ones in the Unit Setup with FINS node addresses that could not be dynamically changed Correct the relationships between IP addresses and FINS node addresses Refer to SECTION 5 Determining IP Addresses for details 373 Troubleshooting with FINS Response Codes Main response code Sub response code Value and meaning Status error operating mode dis agreement Value and meaning Cannot execute because service is being processed Item to check Socket status area Likely cause The same socket service is already in progress at the specified socket num ber Section 14 6 Corrective action Use the corresponding socket status flag in PLC memory to be sure that socket service has finished before starting services again Socket not open Socket status area The specified socket is not open Open the socket For TCP sockets wait until the connec tion is made Local node busy send failed System load Lack of available space in internal buffers The load traffic on the Ether net Unit is too heavy Check your user applications FINS TCP not con nected Unit Setup Not opened due to sys tem settings Not open
37. 0000 Normal end 1001 Command too large EXPLICIT MESSAGE SEND Sends a explicit request message to the specified object and receives a response The rightmost 8 bits of the remote destination IP address are used as the remote MAC ID and the remote IP address is the network ID of the local IP address the rightmost 8 bits of the remote IP address Command Block 28 01 468 bytes max ER Command Class ID Instance ID Service Data code Service Code Destination node address Response Block 28 01 00 00 498 bytes max es Command End Number of Service Data code code bytes received Service Code Destination node address remote node Response Codes Response code Description Normal end The local node s network has not started up Local node setting error A BOOTP errors occurs and the IP address is undetermined Duplicate address error The remote node s network has not started up Remote node busy cannot send No response returned from remote node Monitoring timer timed out Command length exceeds maximum command length Command length is less than minimum command length Command block format does not match Header error 416 FINS Commands Addressed to EtherNet IP Units or Built in EtherNet IP Ports Appendix E 110B Response length exceeds maximum response length 2211 Unit is busy
38. 1 010 03 1 030 010 005 2 020 02 2 3 3 Relay network table Local CPU Bus End Relay Relay No network Unit No No network network node 1 010 04 1 020 010 004 2 030 07 2 3 3 PLC 4 Routing Table Local network table Relay network table No Local CPU Bus End Relay Relay network Unit No No network network node 1 020 00 1 010 020 003 2 2 030 020 003 3 3 PLC 5 Routing Table Local network table Relay network table PLC 6 Routing Table Local network table No Local CPU Bus End Relay Relay network Unit No No network network node 1 020 01 1 010 020 003 2 2 030 020 003 3 3 Relay network table PLC 7 Routing Table Local network table No Local CPU Bus End Relay Relay network Unit No No network network node 1 030 05 1 010 030 015 2 2 020 030 015 3 3 Relay network table Local CPU Bus End Relay Relay No network Unit No No network network node 1 030 06 1 010 030 015 2 2 020 030 015 3 3 Using FINS Applications Section 8 5 8 5 Using FINS Applications 8 5 1 CX Programmer CX Server The following examples show how to connect online from a CX Programmer on an Ethernet network to a PLC on the Ethernet network m System Configuration Example 1 No Routing In this example an online connectio
39. 100 words Local memory Flags and control bits 25 words Target node PLC s operating and error information Unit status communications status registered normal 25 words target node and FINS TCP connection status 25 words 64 words Target node PLC s operating and error information and registered normal target nod 100 words IP Address Display Setting Area Local memory l Local memory 25 words 64 words 100 words it settings ils Network Configurator Non volatile memory in the EtherNet IP Uni Uni Settings such as the IP address of the EtherNet IP Unit and FINS UDP settings Refer to 3 8 TCP IP and Link Settings and 3 10 Other Parameters for details Device parameter settings tag data link settings Refer to Section 6 Tag Data Links for deta 69 CIO Area Allocations Section 4 2 4 2 ClO Area Allocations 4 2 1 Overview of the Allocated CIO Area Words Default Settings 70 ON Da A WHY O 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 Offset n 1 n 2 n 3 n 4 n 5 n 6 n 7 n 8 n 9 n 10 n 11 n 12 n 13 n 14 n 15 n 16 n 17 n 18 n 19 n 20 n 21 n 22 n 23 n 24 The various kinds of data are stored in the allocated CIO Area words which are identified by the offset from the beginning word n allocated to each Unit There are two
40. 4 of CPU Unit cycle time 10 for CJ2 CPU Units Parallel processing with syn chronous memory access Parallel processing with asyn 1 ms max chronous memory access Note CJ2 CPU Units support only Normal Mode For details refer to the CPU Unit s Operation Manual Number of words being transferred x 0 002 0 550 ms The transmission delay time depends on the baud rate set for the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port as shown in the following table There may be additional delays due to the other devices in the network such as switch ing hubs 100Base TX Number of words being transferred x 0 0013 0 0118 ms 10Base T Number of words being transferred x 0 0019 0 0157 ms Number of words being transferred x 0 003 0 704 ms The following table shows the CPU Bus Unit service cycle which depends on the CPU Units CPU processing mode setting CPU execution mode Processing time details Normal Mode See note One CPU Unit cycle time Priority peripheral servicing EtherNet IP Unit or Time slice instruction execution built in EtherNet IP time port is given prior ity EtherNet IP Unit or One CPU Unit cycle time built in EtherNet IP port is not given priority Parallel processing with syn One CPU Unit cycle time chronous memory access Parallel processing with asyn 0 2 ms peripheral servicing time 1 ms max for chronous memory access peripheral servicing of each Spe
41. 6 2 Concepts xxii xxii xxii xxiv XXIV xxvi xxvi xxvi xxi Intended Audience 1 2 3 xxii Intended Audience This manual is intended for the following personnel who must also have knowledge of electrical systems an electrical engineer or the equivalent e Personnel in charge of installing FA systems e Personnel in charge of designing FA systems e Personnel in charge of managing FA systems and facilities General Precautions N WARNING The user must operate the product according to the performance specifica tions described in the operation manuals Before using the product under conditions which are not described in the manual or applying the product to nuclear control systems railroad systems aviation systems vehicles combustion systems medical equipment amuse ment machines safety equipment and other systems machines and equip ment that may have a serious influence on lives and property if used improperly consult your OMRON representative Make sure that the ratings and performance characteristics of the product are sufficient for the systems machines and equipment and be sure to provide the systems machines and equipment with double safety mechanisms This manual provides information for programming and operating the Unit Be sure to read this manual before attempting to use the Unit and keep this man ual close at hand for reference during operation It is extremely important t
42. C Edit All Change Target Node ID To From File OK Cancel 4 Target node IDs are assigned to devices registered in the Register Device List This target node ID determines the location in the originator node PLC of the Target Node PLC Operating Flag Target Node PLC Error Flag Reg istered Target Node Flag and Normal Target Node Flag By default the target ID is automatically set to the rightmost 8 bits of the IP address In the example above the target device s IP address is 192 168 250 2 so the device number is 002 If a target node ID is duplicated and you want to change the device number click the Change Target Node ID Button and change the target ID Change Target Node ID amp New Target Node ID q Range 0 255 Cancel Editing Settings for You can edit each connection separately Individual Connections Note Refer to the following page for information on how to perform batch editing in a table format 142 Setting Tag Data Links Section 6 2 1 2 3 1 Select the Connection Tab and then click the New Button The following Edit Connection Dialog Box will be displayed according to the type of device that is selected Using an OMRON EtherNet IP Unit or Built in EtherNet IP Port as the Target 192 168 250 1 MC1 Edit Connection It will add a connection configuration to originator device Please confiaure the Taa Set each of originator device and taraet device Origi
43. Destination node address FF broadcast data Destination unit address FE EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port Response no response flag 1 no response ERROR LOG READ Reads the error log Command Block Command Beginning Number code record of number records Response Block Command Response Maximum Number Number Error log data Error log data code code number of stored of of stored records records records Parameters Beginning Record Number Command The first record to be read The first record number can be specified in the range between 0000 and 003F 0 to 63 decimal where 0000 is the oldest record Number of Records Command Response The number of records to read is specified between 0001 and 0040 1 to 64 decimal in the command The response returns the actual number of records read Maximum Number of Stored Records Response Indicates the maximum number of records that can be stored in the error log The maximum number of error log records depends on the model of CPU Unit or CPU Bus Unit being used In an EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port the maximum number of stored records is fixed at 40 64 decimal Number of Stored Records Response The number of records stored at the time the command is executed is returned Error Log Data Response The specified number of error log records from the beginning record number is returned sequentially The total number of bytes
44. Estimate the total processing time for all of the FINS frames processed at that node For details refer to 10 5 1 Maximum Transmission Delays Ex cluding Delays in the Network 3 Set the timeout value for all of the SEND 090 RECV 098 and CMND 490 FINS commands at all the remote nodes to at least 1 5 times the total processing time for all of the FINS frames 4 As much as possible implement communications traffic testing up to the point of actual system operation If any problem occurs adjust the traffic 5 If acommercially available protocol analyzer can be used then the actual FINS frame processing time i e the time from when a command is re ceived at the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port until a response is sent can be measured under high traffic conditions and the communi cations traffic can be further adjusted as required SECTION 9 Message Communications This section describes message communications using FINS commands sent from the ladder program in the CPU Unit of the PLC 9 1 9 2 Sending Explicit Messages Sending Explicit Messages Using CMND 490 Receiving Explicit Messages 9 1 1 9 2 1 List of PLC Object Services 234 243 248 249 233 Sending Explicit Messages Section 9 1 9 1 Sending Explicit Messages CS CuJ series EtherNet IP Units and built in EtherNet IP ports can send explicit messages Only CIP unconnected message UCMM communicat
45. Item Specification Protocol SNTP Port number 123 UDP Can also be set from the CX Programmer in the Unit Setup Adjustment timing Automatic fixed time and manual manual only cannot be set Access to SNTP Writes the clock information Obtains the clock information server from the SNTP server to the from the SNTP server set up local CPU Unit on the Network and applies the information obtained to the local CPU Unit Refresh timing When the automatic clock adjustment switch is turned from OFF to ON and at a specified time 12 2 Using the Automatic Clock Adjustment Function 12 2 1 Procedure 1 2 3 1 Make the basic settings Refer to Initial Settings on page 34 With the CX Programmer online right click the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port in the IO Table Dialog Box of the CX Programmer and se lect Edit Unit Setup Set the following on the Auto Adjust Time Tab Page of the Edit Parameters Dialog Box SNTP server specification required Access to the SNTP server is enabled when writing clock information from the SNTP server to the local CPU Unit when the Automatic Clock Adjust ment Switch is turned from OFF to ON and at a set automatic adjustment time Automatic clock adjustment setting To perform automatic clock adjustment manually turn the Automatic Clock Adjustment Switch from OFF to ON The Automatic Clock Adjustment Switch is word n bit 05 in the words allocated in
46. No EM directory will exist if EM File Memory does not exist cdup Changes the working directory at the remote host to the parent directory one directory above the current working directory Using FTP Commands type Format Function get Format Function mget Format Function put Format Function mput Format Function Section 11 5 type data_type Specifies the file data type The following data types are supported ascii Files are transferred as ASCII data binary image Files are transferred as binary data All files are treated by the PLC as binary files Before reading or writing any files always use the type command to set the file type to binary File con tents cannot be guaranteed if transferred as ASCII data The default file type is ASCII get FILE NAME receive file name Transfers the specified remote file from the Memory Card or EM File Memory to the local host A receive file name can be used to specify the name of the file in the local host mget FILE NAME Allows the use of a wildcard character to transfer multiple remote files from the Memory Card or EM File Memory to the local host put file name DESTINATION FILE NAME Transfers the specified local file to the remote host Memory Card or EM File Memory A destination file name can be used to specify the name the file is stored under in the Memory Card or EM File Memory Any existing file with the sa
47. Overview of Initial Setup Procedures Section 3 1 3 1 Overview of Initial Setup Procedures 3 1 1 Procedures Initial Settings 1 2 3 34 Set the unit number and node address with the switches on the front of the EtherNet IP Unit or for the built in EtherNet IP port on the front of the CPU Unit Refer to 3 2 Switch Settings Mount the Unit in the CPU Rack A maximum of seven EtherNet IP Units can be connected to a CJ2H CPULILI EIP CPU Unit making eight EtherNet IP ports including the built in EtherNet IP port A maximum of two EtherNet IP Units can be connected to a CJ2M CPU3 CPU Unit Refer to 3 3 Mounting to a PLC Wire the Ethernet network with twisted pair cable Refer to 3 4 Network Installation and 3 5 Connecting to the Network Prepare a computer with Support Software installed on it and a serial cable or an Ethernet cable twisted pair cable to connect to the PLC These are required to perform network settings using the Support Software e g Net work Configurator CX Programmer and CX Integrator Connect the PLC to the computer and create the I O tables using the CX Programmer I O tables do not need to be created for the built in EtherNet IP port on the CJ2H CPULILI EIP or CJ2M CPU3 Refer to 3 6 Creating I O Tables Set the IP address of the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port using one of the following methods a Using the Unit without setting the IP address e The default IP address is 192 168 2
48. Response length exceeds maximum response length Unit is busy Description For details refer to CIP UCMM MESSAGE SEND 28 10 on page 236 in 9 1 1 Sending Explicit Messages Using CMND 490 418 Appendix F EDS File Management This section explains the EDS file management functions used in the Network Configurator Installing EDS Files Note Using Windows Vista or Windows 7 Is recommended that you start the Network Configurator from Run as administrator when you install an EDS file in the Network Configurator If the EDS file is installed on a Network Configurator that is started in any other way Windows security user management will cause the installed EDS file to not be recog nized when you log in using a different user account You can run the Network Configurator as the administrator by using the following procedure 1 Select the Network Configurator from the Start Menu and then right click 2 Select Run as administrator from the pop up menu that is displayed J Windows Photo Gallery Open Run as administrator Accessories Extras and Upgrades Open file location Games Pin to Start Menu Maintenance Add to Quick Launch OMRON Restore previous versions CX One a CKX 0 A Uod a CX One Auto Upg Send To Release Notes CX ConfiguratorF Cut CX Integrator Copy CX Programmer CX Simulator Delete Introduction Guid Rename work Conti Network Configut properties Network Confers EDS File Ins
49. Set Packet Interval RPI Total usage of IP multicast addresses Network Total of Max Mbit s 16 342Mbit s In this case if there is no multicast filter the value becomes 106 33 If there is no multicast filter for a switching hub communications errors may occur depending on the communications load of the EtherNet IP Unit or built in Eth erNet IP Unit port 280 Adjusting the Communications Load Section 10 2 Method 3 Changing the Packet Interval RPI of Only Specific Connections In this example we want a faster tag data links for just a particular connection of device 192 168 250 1 Double click device 192 168 250 1 in the Network Configuration Window Edit Device Parameters Connections Tag Sets Unregister Device List Product Name Connections 38 256 O 19 T 19 bod Register Device List Product Name 192 168 250 1 CS1W EIP21 Variable Target Variable 192 168 2502 002 CS1W S CNO 01 Input TagSet2 192 168 250 1 TagSet2_192 168 250 2 p 192 168 250 3 003 CSTW S CNOI 02 Input TagSet3_192 168 250 1 TagSet3_ 192 168 250 3 192 168 2504 004 CSTW SONO 03 Dnput TagSet4_ 192 168 250 1 TagSet4_ 192 168 2504 192 168 2505 005 CS1W S ONDI 04 Input TagSet5 192 168 250 1 TagSet5_ 192 168 250 5 p 192 168 250 6 006 CSTW S CN01 05 Input TagSet6 192 168 250 1 TagSet6 192 168 250 6 192 168 250 7 007 OS1W Edit All Change Target Node ID To F
50. Tag data link com munications will be stopped for origina tor connections Communications will continue for target connection If PLC status is included in the communications data the target node PLC error flag for the relevant target node will be turned ON Note Recovery is possible from this error If recovery is achieved the tag data links will be restarted to return to nor mal status Flashing Not lit CPU Unit A timeout Operation stops Replace the Ether red event servic occurred during Net IP Unit or fora ing timeout an operation built in EtherNet IP such as reading port the CPU Unit the routing if the error recurs tables to the when the Unit is CPU Unit restarted Flashing Routing table There is a logic The Unit continues Create the routing red error error in the rout operating without the tables again ing table set routing tables tings Flashing I O refresh The EM Area Tag data is not Stop using the EM red error bank in which refreshed if it is Area bank in the device assigned to a non which the device parameters existent area parameters were were set was Note set as file mem converted to file Recovery is possible ory or correct the memory while for this error device parameters the tag data link was operating 349 Using the LED Indicators and Display for Troubleshooting Indicator Flashing red 7 segment CPU Unit ser vice mo
51. The usage of capacity without multicast filtering can be adjusted against the tag data link s allowable band width by changing the packet interval RPI If the required communications performance cannot be achieved by changing the settings reevaluate the net work starting with the network configuration Make the required settings in the Network Configurator s Network Config uration Window 2 Click the Detail Button in the Usage of Device Bandwidth Area at the bot tom of the Network Configuration Window EtherNet IP 1 192 168 250 1 192 168 250 2 CS1W EIP21 CJ1W EIP21 2 250 2 l 250 1 Usage of Device Bandwidth The Usage of Device Bandwidth Dialog Box will be displayed Adjusting the Communications Load Section 10 2 Usage of Device Bandwidth Comment Usage of Capacity Mbit s without M Usage of IP multic 1921 68 250 1 C51 W EIP21 1 00 4 00 0 048 0 048 Mbit s 1921 68 2502 CJ1W EIP21 1 00 4 00 0 048 0 048 Mbit s semester cone muimenrt The Usage of Capacity column will show the percentage of the allowed tag data link bandwidth being used and the Mbit s column will show the net work bandwidth being used 3 The usage of capacity can be adjusted by changing the associated devic es RPI settings The RPI settings can be changed with the following three methods Method 1 Same Packet Interval Set for all Connections The usage of capacity can be adjusted by changing the RPI fo
52. When you are finished registering the required tags click the OK Button at the bottom of the Edit Tags Dialog Box In Consume Qut Produce Name D00000 D00001 D00002 D00003 New Edt Delete Usage count 5 256 10 At this point a confirmation dialog box will be displayed to check whether the registered tag names will registered without changes as tag sets A tag set can contain up to 8 tags but tag sets will be registered with one tag per tag set if the tags are registered as tag sets In this case the Yes Button is clicked to register one tag per tag set Network Configurator t The new Tags will be registered as Tag sets L If the No Button is clicked more tags can be registered at the end of the tag set Refer to step 18 for details on adding tags to the end of the tag set 130 Setting Tag Data Links Section 6 2 Changing and Registering 11 The following dialog box will be displayed when the tags in the Edit Tags Tag Sets Dialog Box are registered directly as tag sets Edit Device Parameters Connections Tag Sets In Consume Out Produce Name DOOO00 D00001 D00002 D00003 New Edit Delete Expand all Collapse All Edit Tags Delete all of unused Tag Sets Usage Count 4 256 Import To From File g OK Cancel 12 Ifan input tag has already been registered in an input tag set and you want to change its regist
53. figuration devices Section 3 explains how to install and make the initial settings required for operation of the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port Section 4 describes the words allocated in the CIO Area and the DM Area for EtherNet IP Units or built in EtherNet IP ports Section 5 explains how to manage and use IP addresses Section 6 describes tag data link functions and related Network Configurator operations Section 7 describes message communications using FINS messages and explicit messages Section 8 provides information on communicating on EtherNet IP Systems and interconnected net works using FINS commands The information provided in the section deals only with FINS communi cations in reference to EtherNet IP Units or built in EtherNet IP ports Section 9 describes message communications using FINS commands sent from the ladder program in the CPU Unit of the PLC Section 10 describes the communications performance in an EtherNet IP network and shows how to estimate the I O response times and transmission delays Section 11 describes the functions provided by the FTP server Section 12 provides an overview of the automatic clock adjustment function including details on spec ifications required settings operations from CX Programmer and troubleshooting Section 13 describes cleaning inspection and Unit replacement procedures as well as the Simple Backup Function Section 14 describes error processing p
54. for details on checking the connection status on the Monitor Device Window s Connection Tab Page Eliminate any errors which can be identified in the tables in 14 3 Connection Sta tus Codes and Error Processing 370 Troubleshooting with FINS Response Codes Section 14 6 14 5 5 Message Timeout Problems Timeout errors e When there is a high load in the tag data link and the CPU occur frequently in Unit s cycle time is relatively long or there are messages message services coming in from many nodes the message service response CIP UCMM CIP time may be delayed and messages may be discarded occa Class 3 or FINS sionally In this case the communications load must be reduced by increasing slowing the tag data link s RPI reducing the message load or increasing the timeout value e The tag data link s bandwidth usage can be checked on the Monitor Device Window s Ethernet Information Tab Page Refer to 14 1 Checking Status with the Network Configurator for details e The error log error codes that indicate discarded messages insufficient memory due to heavy communications loads are 0117 0119 0123 0125 03C2 detail code 08 09 or 0A 03C3 and 03D2 Refer to 14 1 Checking Status with the Network Configurator for details on reading the error codes on the Error History Tab Page e For information on preventing high loads in FINS communi cations refer to 8 7 Precautions on High Traffic in FINS Communica
55. gt For Help press F1 NewPLC1 Offline rung 0 0 0 100 NUN 1 Start the CX Programmer and open the project that was saved When multiple copies of the CX Programmer are running at the same time it is possible to import only from the CX Programmer project that was started first If the global symbols that are to be imported are stored in multiple CX Programmer project files the projects must be started one by one to import the symbols 2 From the devices registered in the Network Configurator double click the icon of the device for which to import the network symbols The Edit Device Parameter Dialog Box will be displayed You can also right click the icon and select Device Parameters Edit from the pop up menu 3 Click the Import Button on the Tag Sets Tab Page of the Edit Device Pa rameter Dialog Box Setting Tag Data Links Section 6 2 Edit Device Parameters Connections Tag Sets In Consume Out Produce Name New Delete all of unused Tag Sets Usage Count 0 256 Ce To From File A confirmation message will be displayed Click the Yes Button Network Configurator t All of the network variables will be imported e OK Yes No The symbols will be imported as shown below on the Tag Sets Tab Page Each symbol will be imported into a different tag set and the device param eters will be automatically edited The symbol name will be used for the tag set name 137 Setting Ta
56. routing tables Set routing tables at the local node remote node and any relay nodes Routing table error Routing tables Routing table error Set the routing tables cor rectly Too many relay points Network con figuration The maximum number of network levels 3 was exceeded in the com mand Redesign the network or reconsider the routing tables to reduce the number of relay nodes in the command Troubleshooting with FINS Response Codes Main response code Sub response code Value and meaning Command format error Value and meaning Command too long Item to check Command data Likely cause The command is too long The command exceeded 1 473 bytes when broad casting Command too short Command data The command is too short Section 14 6 Corrective action Check the command format of the command and set it cor rectly Number of items does not match amount of data Command data The specified number of items does not match the amount of write data Check the number of items and amount of data and make them agree Header parameter error Command data Data for another node on the same network was received from the net work Attempted to send response data fora broadcast address Check the command format of the command and set it cor rectly Parameter error Parameter error Parameters i
57. switching hub is stopped Not used Word n 14 contains status flags related to the Ethernet errors as shown in the following diagram 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Basic Ethernet Settings Error IP Address Table Error IP Router Table Error Routing Table Error Ethernet Expansion Settings Error BOOTP Server Error Address Mismatch Non volatile Memory Error Status Manipulated Unit operation by Not used Basic Ethernet One of the following parame Settings Error ters is invalid TCP IP Configuration set tings IP address subnet mask or Link settings OFF when the parameters above are valid ON when the IP address table IP Address Table Error information is incorrect OFF when the IP address table information is correct 79 CIO Area Allocations Section 4 2 Registered Target Node Table EtherNet IP Unit to CPU Unit n 16 ton 19 80 IP Router Table Error Status Manipulated by Unit operation ON when the IP router table information is incorrect OFF when the IP router table information is correct Not used Routing Table Error ON when the routing table information is incorrect OFF when the routing table information is correct Not used Ethernet Expan sion Settings Error One of the following parame ters is invalid e FINS settings
58. time information BCD Structure of Each Record Bit 15 Bit 00 Error code Detail code Minutes Seconds Day of month Hour Year Month 14 4 2 Error Log Registration Error Log Storage Area When an error occurs information on the error and the time stamp are stored in the Unit s internal RAM as an error log record Serious errors are recorded in non volatile EEPROM as well as RAM The time read from the CPU Unit during cyclic servicing is used for the time stamp The error log records stored in EEPROM are copied to RAM when the Unit starts operating so these records are retained even when the Unit s power is turned OFF or the Unit is restarted When the error log is read the error log records in RAM are read When the error log is cleared the error log records in both RAM and EEPROM are erased Error Log Overflows The error log can record up to 64 records If another error occurs when the log is full the oldest record will be erased to make room for the new error record Power Interruptions when If the power supply is interrupted or the Unit is restarted while the error log is Saving to EEPROM being written to EEPROM the error log may be corrupted When the Unit starts it performs a checksum test on the error log data read from EEPROM to detect corrupted data 14 4 3 FINS Commands for Error Logs The following FINS commands can be sent to the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port to read or clea
59. 000 pps CJ2M 3 000 pps so they can transfer data 263 Communications System Section 10 1 10 1 2 Calculating the Number of Connections The maximum number of connections for the Unit is 32 for the CU2M and 256 for other CPU Units The number of connections must be set to 32 or less for the CJ2M and 256 or less for other CPU Units combining both connections that the Unit opens as the originator and connections that are opened from an originator with the Unit as the target Example Node 1 opens two connections as the target with node 2 and one connection as the originator with node 3 Therefore the total is three connections Node 2 opens two connections as the originator with node 1 and one connection as the target with node 3 Therefore the total is three connections Node 3 opens one connection as the target with node 1 and one connection as the target with node 2 Therefore the total is two connections In either case the con nections can be opened because the maximum number of connections for the Unit is less than 32 for the CJ2M and less than 256 for other CPU Units O Originator Node 1 T Target WA N O O T Noe2 Node 3 O T Also if multicast is set one packet will be sent but the number of connections will be consumed Example Node 3 sends one multicast packet to node 1 and node 2 At that time node 3 opens one connection as the target with node 1 and one connection as th
60. 1 Not required 00 Hex Local network 01 to 7F Hex 1 to 127 11 87 0 T T T T T C 2 C 4 f f L ee Destination unit address L Response monitor time 00 Hex CPU Unit 0000 Hex 2 s 9 r T Hex CPU UTE aag 0001 to FFFF Hex 0 1 to 6 553 5 s E1 Hex Inner Board Gn units of 0 1 s FE Hex Unit connected to network Destination node number N 00 to FE Hex 0 to 254 The same data can be broadcast to all nodes on the network by setting the destination node number to FF Hex The range of node addresses is different for networks other than Ethernet Note The message service does not guarantee that a message will reach the desti nation node A message may be lost during transmission due to factors such as noise To prevent this from occurring when using message services it is common to set up retry processing at the node from which instructions are issued With the SEND 090 RECV 098 and CMND 490 instructions retry processing is executed automatically by specifying the number of retries so specify a number other than 0 Communicating between OMRON PLCs Section 8 6 RECV 098 With the RECV 098 instruction the data in m number of words starting from the beginning word S at the remote node node address M is received at the words starting from the beginning word D at the local node Local node Remote node number N 15 0 RECV
61. 10 bit 01 and Commu nications Controller Error Flag n 10 bit 05 will go ON Section 14 3 Countermeasure Replace the Ether Net IP Unit or for the built in Ether Net IP port the CPU Unit if the error recurs when the Unit is restarted Flashing red Errors Related to the Unit Indicator NS Lit red Not lit 14 3 Connection Status Codes and Error Processing 7 segment Note Node Address Setting Changed Dur ing Operation The Node Address Setting Switch was changed during operation Operation will con tinue The IP Address Changed During Operation Flag n 11 bit 02 will turn ON Restart the Ether Net IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port after setting the correct node address The 7 segment display alternates between the node address and error code Special Unit Error An error occurred ina Special I O Unit or CPU Bus Unit Unit operation Flag status Records the error in the error log Operation stops Countermeasure Restart the CPU Unit Replace the Ether Net IP Unit or for the built in Ether Net IP port the CPU Unit if the error recurs This section explains how to identify and correct errors based on the tag data link s connection status The connection status can be read using the Connec tion Tab Page of the Network Configurator s Monitor Device Window For details refer to 14 1 1 Th
62. 10 FINS response returned Note When an internal table IP address has been changed with the reception of a FINS command this is sent to the IP address in the internal table Prohibiting Dynamically With EtherNet IP Units and built in EtherNet IP ports it is possible to prohibit amani Remote IP protect against dynamic changes to remote IP addresses by each method resses automatic generation IP address table or combined method Use the CX Programmer to make this setting When dynamically changing remote destination IP addresses is prohibited the internal table for each method is maintained in the same state it had when the power was turned ON or restarted Therefore protection can be provided against access using FINS UDP from personal computers or other devices that have dynamically changing IP addresses To prohibit dynamic changes clear the selection of the Dynamic change the target IP addresses Option on the FINS UDP Tab Page in the Edit Parameters Dialog Box of the CX Pro grammer Using the ETN11 With EtherNet IP Units and built in EtherNet IP ports operating specifications compatible Mode can be made compatible with the CS1W ETN11 CJ1W ETN11 for all methods automatic generation dynamic I O address table or combined Dynamic changes however are prohibited for the destination IP address in ETN11 compatible mode While in ETN11 compatible mode the following operations will be performed the same as they are for t
63. 168 250 node_ address The Unit Error Occurred Flag n 10 bit 00 Network Error Occurred Flag n 10 bit 01 and BOOTP Server Error Flag n 14 bit 10 will go ON Perform one of the following Correct the BOOTP server settings e Check the com munications path EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port cable connec tions hubs rout ers and servers and correct any problems An error occurred in communica tions with the STNP server The SNTP Server Error Flag n 14 bit 11 will turn ON Perform one of the following e Correct the SNTP server settings e Check the com munications path EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port cable connec tions hubs rout ers and servers and correct any problems Using the LED Indicators and Display for Troubleshooting Section 14 2 Indicator Unit operation Flag Countermeasure 7 segment status Server Con An error Perform one of the nection Error occurred in following transmission to Correct the the SNMP trap SNMP trap set tings e Check the com munications path EtherNet IP Unit or built in Ether Net IP port cable connections hubs routers and servers and cor rect any prob lems IP Address The IP address The Unit will be Check the IP Duplication of the EtherNet offline and unable to addresses set on IP Unit or built in communicate Errors other nodes EtherNet IP port will
64. 192 168 250 2 EtherNet IP Unit unit number 0 Controller Link Unit node address 1 Controller Link Unit unit number 1 i i Controller Link Unit Ethernet or EtherNet IP Controller Link Unit Target PLC network address 1 PLC2 PLC3 Routing 0 according to Z routing table Node address 2 A Nadedddress 3 Routing to final network address 2 requires relaying through node address 2 of relay network address 1 EtherNet IP Unit Controller Link network address 2 CX Programmer s Change PLC Dialog Box Settings for target PLC PLC3 s Change PLC Dialog Box PLC name PLC3 Network classification Ethernet Network Tab FINS destination FINS transmission 1 Page source address Network number 2 Node address 3 Frame length 2 000 bytes Response monitor time 2 seconds 213 Using FINS Applications 214 Section 8 5 Settings for target PLC PLC3 s Change PLC Dialog Box Setting Driver Tab Page Workstation node address 1 Automatic generation method Not selected IP address 192 168 250 2 Eth erNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port IP address Port number 9600 CX Programmer s FINS UDP Tab Page in Edit Parameters Dialog Box Same as for System Configuration Example 1 Routing Table Settings and Transfer to Each PLC Set the routing tables with CX Integrator and transfer them 1 Using CX Integrator connect online and select Routing table Settings
65. 2 0 The class ID is C4 Version 1 0 The class ID is 2F Class ID Attribute ID Service Code Attribute Value Instance ID 253 Receiving Explicit Messages Section 9 2 CPU Unit Status Read Service Code 40 Hex This PLC Object service reads status details operation status operating mode fatal and non fatal errors etc from the CPU Unit Command Block C4 40 2F 00 A The class ID depends on the unit version Version 2 0 The class ID is C4 Version 1 0 The class ID is 2F Class ID Service Code Instance ID Note A body format of either 8 bits or 16 bits is possible Response Block co N Service Code f Detailed status Parameters Service code command response 40 Hex is specified for commands For responses the highest bit will turn ON and CO Hex will be returned Class ID command Always C4 2F The class ID depends on the unit version The class ID is C4 for unit version 2 0 and 2F for unit version 1 0 Instance ID command Always 00 Hex Read data response The read data is given in the following table The data is returned after the service code in the order shown in the table high to low RUN mode Fatal error information L Fatal error information H Non fatal error information L Non fatal error information H Message exists does not exist L Message exists does not exist H Error code L Error
66. 20 to n 23 Layout set to user settings Words n 16 to n 31 Note Does not correspond to the PLC status Each flag indicates the connection status of the corresponding target node PLC of connec tions in which the EtherNet IP Unit is the origi nator The flag corresponding to the target node s target ID will be ON when connections are established for all connections with that target node indicate that the PLC is operating Each node address s flag location target ID can be changed from the Network Configura tor The data in this table is refreshed when neces sary When the PLC status is not selected in the input consume tags the PLC sta tus information 16 bit data can be used as reception data Setting Tag Data Links Section 6 2 6 2 Setting Tag Data Links 6 2 1 Starting the Network Configurator Procedure Tag data links are set by using the Network Configurator Use the following procedure to start the Network Configurator Starting from the Windows Start Menu To start the Network configurator select OMRON CX One Network Con figurator for EtherNetv IP Network Configurator from the Windows Start Menu E Starting from the IO Table Dialog Box in CX Programmer To start the Network configurator select the Unit in the PLC IO Table Dialog Box and select either of the options for Start Special Application from the pop up menu Only operation will be started even if Start with Settings Inher ited is se
67. 9 478Mbit s Usage of IP mult Ka paak pai oS fai fat ae Pa a oa fa a faa re aa In this case the tag data link bandwidth being used by device 192 168 250 20 Usage of Capacity also increases from 39 67 to 56 33 I O Response Time in Tag Data Links Section 10 3 10 3 I O Response Time in Tag Data Links Note This section describes the data processing time for an EtherNet IP Unit or a built in EtherNet IP port on a CJ2H CPU6L1 EIP CPU Unit The data process ing time for a built in EtherNet IP port on the CJ2M CPU3L CPU Unit is differ ent For details refer to 10 4 Tag Data Link Performance for CJ2M Built in EtherNet IP Ports 10 3 1 Timing of Data Transmissions The following diagram shows the timing of tag data link transmissions between the EtherNet IP Unit or CJ2H built in port and the CPU Unit The data transmission is processed during the I O refresh period Send data is processed with transmission at regular intervals and received data is pro cessed together with the send data when new data has been received from other nodes The following diagram shows the timing of data transmissions Data received EtherNet IP Unit processing EtherNet IP Unit data processing time Refer to 10 3 2 Basic P Basic CPU Unit processing pro Program O refreshing Peripheral pro cesses execution servicing cessed Data exchange processing CPU Unit s cycle time If th
68. 98 S S Remote node beginning word D D Local beginning word C C First word of control data below 15 0 15 10 87 3 0 EEEREN c i Number of retries Number of reception words m i L 0 to F Hex 0 to 15 retries 0001 to 03DE Hex 1 to 990 words Communications port number 0 to 7 15 11 87 0 T c 0 0 i Response i Destination network number 9 Required 1 Not ired 00 Hex Local network ewes 01 to 7F Hex 1 to 127 5 a1 87 o C 2 T C 4 T T T 1 L fi i L Destination Unit address cob a yator time 00 Hex CPU Unit F 10 to 1F Hex Unit 0 to 15 0001 to FFFF Hex 0 1 to 6 553 5 s E1 Hex Inner Board in units of 0 1 s FE Hex Unit connected to network Remote node number M send source 00 to FE Hex 0 to 254 The range of node addresses is different for networks other than Ethernet Note The message services function does not guarantee that a message will reach the destination node A message may be lost during transmission due to fac tors such as noise In order to prevent this from occurring when using mes sage services it is common to set up retry processing at the node from which instructions are issued With the SEND 090 RECV 098 and CMND 490 instructions retry processing is executed automatically by specifying the num ber of retries so specify a number other than 0 223 Communicating between OMRON PLCs Section 8 6 CMND 490 The CMND 490 instruc
69. A467 Work EM6 Area Parameter G7 10 Table and Unit Setup PEM WORD A468 Work EM Area Parameter Settings P EM8 Work EM8 Area Parameter L Memory j pemo DEZI Work EM9 Area Parameter 8 Pai mm PEMA Work EMA Area Parameter nE opii P EMB Name NO1 _OutData Work EMB Area Parameter S Symbols Section P_EMC Data type CHANNEL Work EMG Area Parameter END PEQ Work Equals EQ Flag i Address or value F Function Blocks PER Work Instruction Execution Error PFirstCycl Comment Work First Cycle Flag P First Cycl Work First Task Execution Flag PGE Work Greater Than or Equals G PGT I Network Variable Publication Input Output Work Greater Than GT Flag PHR Work HR Area Parameter lt P10 Verity I Link the definition to the project s OX Server file Work I O Verification Error Fleg PLE Advanced Settings Cancel Work Less Than or Equals LE Plow Batt ET Work Low Battery Flag PLT BOOL GF007 Work Less Than LT Flag P _Max Cycle Time UDINT A262 Work Maximum Cycle Time PN BOOL F008 Work Negative N Flag PNE BOOL FOO Work Not Equals NE Flag POF BOOL F009 Work Overflow OF Flag POf BOOL F114 Work Always OFF Flag Pon BOOL OFN13 Work Always ON Flag P Output Off Bit BOOL 500 15 Work Output OFF Bit P Step BOOL 20012 Work Step Flag PUF BOOL OFO10 Work Underflow UF Flag PWR WORD A451 Work WR Area Parameter a f Project lt
70. Bus Unit The unit number determines which data area words are allocated to the Unit to contain data such as con trol bits flags status information and connection information Wane as ay Setting method Setting range One digit hexadecimal Note The unit number is factory set to 0 The unit number can be set to any number in the setting range 0 to F as long as the same number is not set on another CPU Bus Unit in the same PLC Note 1 Use a small screwdriver to make the setting and be sure not to damage the rotary switch 2 Always turn OFF the PLC s power supply before setting the unit number 3 The unit number is factory set to 0 4 If the same unit number is set on more than one CPU Bus Unit mounted in a PLC a unit number duplication error will occur in the PLC and the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port will not be able to start oper ating 26 Nomenclature and Functions Section 2 2 Node Address Setting Switch Note The Node Address Setting Switch sets the node address of the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port asd X16 ass X16 Setting method Setting range Two digit hexadecimal 01 to FE Note The node address is factory set to 01 With the default settings the values set on these switches become the last two digits of the local IP address of the Ether Net IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port Default IP address 192 168 250 node address With the factory defau
71. CPU Units support only Normal Mode For details refer to the CPU Unit s Operation Manual The following table shows the CPU Bus Unit service processing time which depends on the CPU Unit s CPU processing mode setting CPU execution mode Processing time details 4 of CPU Unit cycle time 10 for CJ2 CPU Units Normal Mode See note Priority peripheral servicing EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port is given prior ity Time slice peripheral servicing execution time EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port is not given priority Set peripheral servicing time Default 4 of CPU Unit cycle time Parallel processing with syn chronous memory access 4 of CPU Unit cycle time Parallel processing with asyn chronous memory access 1 ms max Note CJ2 CPU Units support only Normal Mode For details refer to the CPU Unit s Operation Manual Note Depending on the actual operating environment the transmission time may be longer than the one calculated with the equations given here The following factors can cause longer transmission times other traffic on the network win dow sizes of network nodes other traffic at the EtherNet IP Unit or built in Eth erNet IP port itself e g simultaneous tag data link communications and the system configuration 299 Message Service Transmission Delay Section 10 5 Example Calculation In this example RECV 098 is used to r
72. Check the I O tables with the I O Table Verification operation and correct it if necessary After correcting the I O tables perform the I O Table Create operation A CPU Bus error e Confirm that the Unit is connected properly occurred e Restart the Unit Replace the Unit if it doesn t restart An I O Bus error e Confirm that the Unit is connected properly occurred e Restart the Unit Replace the Unit if it doesn t restart For details refer to the CPU Unit s Operation Manual 368 Troubleshooting Section 14 5 14 5 2 General Ethernet Problems The 100M and 10M Indicators on the EtherNet IP Unit or CPU Unit are both OFF e Confirm that the cable being used has the correct ratings e Confirm that the cable is properly connected to the switching hub and the hub s power supply is ON The 7 segment dis play will indicate error E1 e If the switching hub s settings can be changed confirm that the Ethernet link settings are the same as the settings for the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port For details refer to 3 4 Network Installation The NS Indicator on the EtherNet IP Unit or CPU Unit is lit red 14 5 3 Tag Data Links Fail to Start e Check whether the same IP address is set on another node The 7 segment display will indicate error FO Use the following table to troubleshoot tag data links when the Tag Data Links Operating Flag bit 15 in Communications Status 1
73. Configu ration Note CX Programmer Unit Setup Setup TCP IP Con figuration Dialog Box The IP address set in the Setup TCP IP Configuration Dialog Box is stored in the allocated DM Area words 1 If an IP address other than 00 00 00 00 is set as the local IP address in the TCP IP Configuration the IP Address Display Setting Area words m 98 and m 99 will be overwritten with the TCP IP Configuration s IP 83 DM Area Allocations Section 4 3 address even if a non zero IP address was set in the IP Address Display Setting Area words beforehand 2 It is not possible to set the following IP addresses If any of these values are set the ERH indicator will flash e IP addresses where all network number bits are 0 or 1 e IP addresses where all host number bits are 0 or 1 IP addresses where all subnet number bits are 1 IP addresses that start with 127 7F hexadecimal e g 127 35 21 16 84 User Settings Area Section 4 4 4 4 User Settings Area 4 4 1 Overview of the User Settings Area When the layout of the allocated CIO Area words is set to user settings the user settings area can be used in addition to the allocated ClO Area words and allocated DM Area words The beginning word of the user settings area can be set in the Status Area Tab Page in the Edit Parameters Dialog Box of the CX Programmer 4 4 2 User Settings Area The user can allocate any available area to contain the r
74. Configuration Window Configuration with the devices connected on the EtherNet IP network and check the IP addresses and device types This function cannot be used to verify device parameters 1 2 3 1 Connect the Network Configurator to the network 2 The following progress monitor will be displayed to show the progress as data is read from the network and compared Uploading Device Information 192 168 250 1 J gt a 3 The results of the comparison between the network configuration file and data from the network are displayed as follows Differences Not Found in the Comparison Network Configurator X 1 L No differences found e Differences Found in the Comparison Comparison Result Description Local Network Q Wrong device type 192 168 2 CJ2B EIP21 Not present Q Wrong device type 192 168 2 CJTW EIP21 CJ1W EIP21 C e Differences Found in the Device Type 173 Setting Tag Data Links Section 6 2 Network Configurator x t Invalid device type e Click the OK Button or the Close Button Verifying the Device Use the following procedure to compare the device parameters for the devices Parameters selected in the Network Configuration Window with those of the devices con nected on the EtherNet IP network The IP addresses device types and device parameters are compared 1 2 3 1 Connect the Network Configurator to the network 2 Click the icon of the Et
75. EN 215 8 6 Communicating between OMRON PLCs 00 00 0000 00 220 8 6 1 Communications Specifications 00 0 220 8 6 2 PLC Communications Data Areas 00 00 0405 221 8 6 3 Using SEND 090 RECV 098 and CMND 490 222 8 6 4 Writing Programs 0 0 eee eee 226 8 6 5 Program Example psss eise repoa e iesen a eee eee 230 8 7 Precautions on High Traffic in FINS Communications 232 197 Overview of FINS Communications Section 8 1 8 1 Overview of FINS Communications 8 1 1 Communications On an Ethernet Network The EtherNet IP Units and built in EtherNet IP ports support the FINS com munications service which can be used simultaneously with the CIP commu nications service FINS communications data is sent and received as UDP IP packets or TCP IP packets oe or host computer EtherNet IP Unit Packet FINS command Ethernet EtherNet IP Packet FINS response EtherNet IP Unit PLC In the FINS communications service both an IP address for IP the Internet layer and a FINS node address for FINS the application layer are used for the remote device Also 9600 is used as the default setting for the local UDP or TCP port number i e the transport layer for identifying the application layer i e the FINS communications service Another number can be set for the FINS UDP port from the Setup Tab Page in the Unit Setup Fo
76. EtherNet IP gt CPU 6 432 words Note The total for output transmission and input reception is 12 864 words Configuration Example This example configuration is based on the maximum specifications for CJ2M built in ports where all nodes send and receive data to the other nodes In this case the maximum send area for each node in a 17 node configuration is 20 words For example node 1 establishes 16 send connections and 16 receive connec tions to the other 16 nodes for a total of 32 connections The maximum data size per connection is 20 words so the send area in node 1 is 20 words and the receive areas in node 1 are each 20 words 291 Tag Data Link Performance for CJ2M Built in EtherNet IP Ports Section 10 4 If the same RPI is set for all connections 12 ms is the lowest setting that can be used m Calculation Example 1 000 12 ms RPI 1 000 100 ms heartbeat transmission period x 32 connections 2 987 pps lt 3 000 pps Send connections 16 All nodes use CJ2M built in ports 20 words x 16 320 words saibtend ene n Node 1 M Node 2 Node 3 Node 16 Node 17 i I Receive 20 words z 1 Send 20 words EF Receive 20 words Receive 20 words Receive 20 words H Ss 1 Receive 20 words 4 Receive 20 words toe Receive 20 words Receive 20 words ME r 1 Receive 20 words A Send 20 words Receive 20 words Receive 20 words i EE 7 7 1 Receive 20 word i Rece
77. EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port e The Network Configurator can be connected directly to the EtherNet IP network from the computer s Ethernet port When connecting directly to the EtherNet IP network an Ethernet port must be set up in the computer in advance In this case the Network Configurator will be connected to the EtherNet IP network as a single node If there isn t an unused node address available the Network Configurator can t be connected directly to the EtherNet IP network 11 Network Configurator Overview Section 1 5 12 SECTION 2 Unit Specifications This section provides the specifications of EtherNet IP Units and introduces recommended network configuration devices 2 1 EtherNet IP Unit and Built in EtherNet IP Port Specifications 14 2 1 1 General Specifications 0 0 0 eee ee eee 14 2 1 2 Unit Specifications 0 0 eee eee eee 14 2 1 3 Communications Specifications 000000005 17 2 1 4 Dimensions 3 6 3 i sale hie ka Sd yp iad Sei a teak ee 19 2 1 5 Software Configuration 0 0 0 0 cece eee eee 20 2 2 Nomenclature and Functions 0 0 c eee ee eee 21 2 2 1 Nomenclature and Functions 0 00 0 00 eee 21 2 2 2 Switch Settings cece utii ee eee 26 2 3 Selecting the Network Devices 0 0 0 c eee eee eee ee 28 2 3 1 Recommended Network Devices 0 00 0 00005 28 2 3 2 Network Devices Manuf
78. Ethernet Problems 000000005 369 14 5 3 Tag Data Links Fail to Start 2 0 00 ce eee ee eee 369 14 5 4 Tag Data Link Problems 00 00 0000 0005 370 14 5 5 Message Timeout Problems 0 000000 0 eee 371 14 6 Troubleshooting with FINS Response Codes 0005 371 339 Checking Status with the Network Configurator Section 14 1 14 1 Checking Status with the Network Configurator 14 1 1 The Network Configurator s Device Monitor Function Status 1 Tab Page 340 Note Connect the Network Configurator online select the device to be checked right click to display the pop up menu and select Monitor EtherNet IP_1 Parameter gt 192 x i Reset ee The Monitor Device Dialog Box will be displayed If a communications error occurs during monitoring the dialog box will con tinue to show the last information that was collected To start monitoring again close the Monitor Device Dialog Box and then open the dialog box again The information displayed on the Status 1 Tab Page shows the status of the flags in the following allocated CIO Area words Unit status 1 Unit status 2 Communications status 1 Communications status 2 and Communications status 3 There will be a check mark in the box when the corresponding flag is ON In addition the Target Node Status Field shows the connection status of the target nodes that are connected with the EtherNet IP Unit
79. If the revision is unknown select the newest revision i e the revision with the highest number The following table shows the relation between the CIP revision and the unit version Ver 1 0 Revision 1 01 Ver 2 0 Revision 2 01 or 2 02 2 When mounting the CJ1W EIP21 to a CJ2 CPU Unit select CJ1W EIP21 CJ2 from the Hardware List 2 Click the right mouse button over the registered device s icon to display the pop up menu and select Change Node Address 125 Setting Tag Data Links Section 6 2 Ghanee IP Address New IP Address Ea Cancel e 3 Set the IP address to match the node address IP address actually being used in the device 4 Repeat steps 1 to 3 and register all of the devices participating in the tag data links o EtherNet IP 1 E Network Configurator a Sid za z amp EtherNet IP Hardware r S Vendor a Omron Corporation CH2 S Communications Adapter 192 168 250 1 192 168 250 2 192 168 250 3 192 168 250 4 CJTW EIP21 CJTW EIP21 CJTW EIP21 C32 CJ2B EIP21 CS1W EIP21 Rev1 Rev 2 CJ1W EIP21 CJ2 CJ2B E1P21 CS1TW EIP21 Rev1 i Usage of Device Bandwidth 3 Rev 2 5 SYSMAC Gateway 6 2 4 Creating Tags and Tag Sets Specifying I O The tag sets and set member tags required to create connections for a regis Memory Addresses tered EtherNet IP Unit must be created The I O memory addresses or net work symbols that are use
80. Monitor Device Controller Error History Tag Status Ethernet Information Status 1 Status 2 Connection Error History Time of Error Error Inf Detailed Content 08 05 23 11 41 13 03D5 0002 Tag data link error Update Close The error history of the CPU Unit for the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port is displayed on this tab page The error history shows errors that have occurred It can be cleared or saved in a file in the computer Checking Status with the Network Configurator Section 14 1 Refer to the operation manual of the CPU Unit for details on error information Monitor Device Status 1 Status 2 Connection Error History Controller Error History Tag Status Ethernet Information Time of Error Error Inf Detailed Content 08 05 23 11 44 11 80E9 0000 Number Duplication Error Update Tag Status Tab Page This tab page shows if the tag settings for each tag for tag data links is set so that data can be exchanged with the CPU Unit The following status is dis played Ok Data was exchanged normally Processing to solve The symbol or I O memory address for the tag is being resolved When the resolution is completed normally a connection will be established and the data exchange will start Area type error The area e g EM bank specified by the tag setting does not exist in the CPU Unit A connection will not be established for a tag for which this error occurs Out of address range T
81. Moreover because OMRON is con stantly striving to improve its high quality products the information contained in this manual is subject to change without notice Every precaution has been taken in the preparation of this manual Nevertheless OMRON assumes no responsibility for errors or omissions Neither is any liability assumed for damages resulting from the use of the information contained in this publication TABLE OF CONTENTS PRECAUTIONS 30055 420 0 sacsacesedssewascsguagew XXL 1 Intended Audience sy ie i2e T toniiins E eee Ge Ene BAe aod eee xxii 2 Ge neralcPrecautions eret ec Fact eo gue Ow a i he nae r aeh ae a e aa dao xxii 3 Safety Preca tionSa i aaae EE E Oat EE O E E A ER S xxii 4 Operating Environment Precautions 2 0 0 0 eee eee eee eae XXiV 5 Application Precautions s sosio 0 0 00 c ec cent e eee eee XXIV 6 Conformance to EC Directives 0 cece eee ence e nee xxvi SECTION 1 Overview of EtherNet IP ccc ceeeeeeeeee 1 1 EtherNet IP Unit Features sis ipen 0 eee E a nen eee e eee 2 1 2 Devices Required for Constructing a Network 0 0 00 00 eee 4 1 3 Support Software Required to Construct a Network 0 00 0 000 e eee eee eee 4 1 4 Communications Services Overview 00 cece eee tenn ences 6 1 5 Network Configurator Overview 00 0 cece cece eee eens 10 SECTION 2 Unit Specifications ssssssssscssssosesssssee D3 2 1 EtherNet IP Unit and Buil
82. Node PLC 1 1 B A b PRIETA ut 2 Cc A b Node a Network A PLC 2 a Node 6 a 3 Node c PLC 3 1 A B Network B Node d 2 C B e PLC 4 Node 1 A B c Node REPEAT 2 B C f Node g In the table for PLC 3 for example if network A is taken as the end net work then network B becomes the relay network and node c becomes the relay node If network C is taken as the end network then network B still becomes the relay network and node e becomes the relay node 209 Routing Tables 210 m Example 3 All Nodes This example uses the following configuration to show the routing tables for all nodes Section 8 4 PLC 1 Routing Table Local network table Unit 5 T PIG Node 6 P Network 10 Unit 3 Unit 4 Node 4 CE pic EJS pic Node 5 Unit 2 kip Akl ae Node 3 ode Network 20 Network 30 PLC S pic pic H Ik Unit 0 Unit 1 Unit 5 Unit 6 Node 1 Node 2 Node 5 Node 10 Relay network table PLC 2 Routing Table Local network table No Local CPU Bus End Relay Relay network Unit No No network network node 1 010 05 1 020 010 004 2 2 030 010 005 3 3 Relay network table PLC 3 Routing Table Local network table No Local CPU Bus End Relay Relay network Unit No No network network node
83. Note Word Data Read reads I O memory area data in a CPU Unit The read word data is in word units The response block data is returned in low to high byte order 1D SA The class ID depends on the unit version i i Version 2 0 The class ID is C4 E Version 1 0 The class ID is 2F Class ID Address L No of words read Service Instance ID Address H Code A body format of either 8 bits or 16 bits is possible 257 Receiving Explicit Messages Response Block Parameters Important Points Section 9 2 9D Service Code Word data H Word data H Word data L Word data L x gt Read data 200 bytes max Service code command response ID Hex is specified for commands For responses the highest bit will turn ON and 9D Hex will be returned Class ID command Always C4 2F The class ID depends on the unit version The class ID is C4 for unit version 2 0 and 2F for unit version 1 0 Instance ID command The type of memory area that will read the data is specified as shown in the following table Instance ID Hex CPU Unit memory area Word range for read 0000 to 6143 DM D00000 to D32767 WR W000 to W511 HR H000 to H1535 EM banks 0 to 18 En_00000 to En_32767 n 0 to 18 Address L Address H command The address of the first word to read the data from is specified in hexadecimal as shown below Address L The lower 2 digits when the first word ad
84. Precautions 0 00 00 008 3 4 2 Recommended Products 0 00 e eee eee eee 3 4 3 Precautions i oses bes eae ea he oh i de i ee 3 4 4 Using Contact Outputs Common to All Units 3 5 Connecting to the Network 0 0 00 0 eee eee eee 3 5 1 Ethernet Connectors 00 0 0 eee eee eee ees 3 5 2 Connecting the Cable 0 0 eee eee eee 3 0 Creating VO Tables it ance ew ans gat Oe BORER PA ee Rte Sees 3 6 1 I O Table Overview s bsan n cece cee eee 3 6 2 Connecting Programming Devices to the PLC 3 6 3 Procedure for Creating I O Tables 0 00 3 7 Setting the Local IP Address 0 0 0 3 8 TCP IP and Link Settings 0 0 0 ee ee ee eee 3 8 1 Setting Procedure with the CX Programmer 3 8 2 Making TCP IP Settings with the Network Configurator 3 9 Tag Data Link Parameters 0 00 cee eee 3 9 1 Network Configurator Setting Procedure 3 10 Other Parameters 0 seat aain a ele Goole he idea ke 3 11 Communications Test 0 00 cece eee 3 11 PING Command eite a be Bet eat Slee Cee pen 3 11 2 EtherNet IP Unit or Built in EtherNet IP Port Operation 3 11 3 Host Computer Operation 0 00 0 e eee eee ee 34 34 36 36 37 38 38 38 39 40 41 41 41 41 43 44 44 46 46 46 46 50 52 52 55 57 57 61 65 65 65 65 33
85. Programmer is used to set basic parameters such as the local IP Programmer address of the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port and the subnet mask The CX Programmer is included in the CX One The CX Programmer can also be used to check if data I O is being performed correctly for tag data links Support Software Required to Construct a Network Section 1 3 Computer CX Programmer EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port Edit Parameters Dialog Box Unit settings Built in non volatile memory CS CJ series CPU Unit Refer to the CX Programmer Operation Manual Cat No W446 for informa tion on the CX Programmer Tag Data Link Settings The Network Configurator is used to set the tag data links for the EtherNet IP Network Configurator Unit or built in EtherNet IP port The Network Configurator is included in CX One version 3 0 or higher The main functions of the Network Configurator are given below 1 Setting and Monitoring Tag Data Links Connections The network device configuration and tag data links connections can be cre ated and edited After connecting to the network the device configuration and tag data link settings can be uploaded and monitored 2 Multivendor Device Connections EDS files can be installed and deleted to enable constructing setting and managing networks that contain EtherNet IP devices from other companies The IP
86. Registering Devices Register all of the devices required in the equipment such as EtherNet IP Units performing tag data links as a network configuration 1 2 3 1 Register the devices that will participate in the tag data links by dragging the devices from the Hardware List and dropping them in the Network Con figuration Window To drag and drop an icon click and hold the left mouse button over the icon move the icon to the destination and release the mouse button The icon will be displayed in the Network Configuration Window as shown in the following diagram E EtherNet IP_1 amp Network Configurator s Ex EtherNet IP Hardware Vendor 4 Omron Corporation ee Communications Adapter 5 CJ1W EIP21 Rev 1 3 CJ2B EIP21 ___ Drag and drop icons from the Hardware List CSTW EIP21 E How Usage of Device Bandwidth SYSMAC Gateway Hardware List EtherNet IP Unit Built in EtherNet IP port on CJ2H CPU Unit CJU2H CPULIL EIP Built in EtherNet IP port on CJ2M CPU Unit CU2M CPU3L CJ1W EIP21 EtherNet IP Unit connected to CJ1 CPU Unit CS1W EIP21 EtherNet IP Unit connected to CJ1 CPU Unit CJ1W EIP21 EtherNet IP Unit connected to CJ2 CPU Unit Name in hardware list CIP revision CJ2B EIP21 Rev 2 CJ2M EIP21 Rev 2 CJ1W EIP21 Rev 1 or 2 CS1W EIP21 Rev 1 or 2 CJ1W EIP21 CJ2 Rev 2 Note 1
87. TT COCOOHOOOOONANNH a a by Target Node PLC Operat The corresponding PLC ing Flags is operating The pro gram is being executed The PLC is not operating Target Node PLC These words show the error status logical OR of fatal and non fatal errors of Error Information the target node PLCs that are connected with the EtherNet IP Unit as the orig EtherNet IP Unit to inator This status information is enabled when the PLC status is included in CPU Unit n 6 to n the communications data in both the originator and target node 9 These words show the error status of nodes 0 to 63 only If it is necessary to show the error status of nodes higher than node 63 select user settings as the layout pattern For details refer to 4 4 User Settings Area The flags are valid only when the corresponding Normal Target Node Flag is ON If the corresponding Normal Target Node Flag is OFF the Target Node PLC Error Flag indicates the previous error status 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 re usle nose s s s 2 o 63 62 61 60 so se s7 se 55 54 sa 52 51 so 49 48 Manipulated Unit operation by Target Node PLC Error i A fatal or non fatal error Flags occurred in the corre sponding PLC No error occurred in the PLC Unit Status 1 EtherNet IP Unit to CPU Unit n 10 n 10 Unit Error Occurred Network Error Occurred Unit Memory Erro
88. Time in Tag Data Links Section 10 3 EtherNet IP Input switch external input device Output relay external output device Input Ww000 01 wo00 01 Output Tag Data Link Table PLC 1 PLC 2 Connection 1 wooo e ww 722 words x 16 connections RPI 10 Outputs 4 ee Inputs 4 Total 11 552 words RPI 100 ms 256 words x 16 connections Inputs 4 Outputs 4 Total 4 096 words The following table gives the items required to find the I O response time and values used in calculations for this system configuration Value used in calculation example PLC 1 PLC 2 External I O device delay time Input device delay Output device delay 1 5 ms 2 0 ms Cable length 50 m CPU Unit model CJ2H CPU Unit CJ2H CPU Unit RPI 10 msec Number of receive connections 0 32 CPU Unit cycle time 10 msec Total number tag Number of send 11 552 data link words words Number of None receive words Maximum Tag Data Link I O Response Time You can find the maximum I O response time from the total of 1 to 6 in the following figure 286 I O Response Time in Tag Data Links Section 10 3 I O processing Data exchange Tag data link I O response time 1 Input ON 2 Send data 4 Ne
89. addresses of EtherNet IP devices can also be changed Computer EtherNet IP Unit Network Configurator or built in EtherNet IP port 9 Se Edit Device Parameters Tag Data Link Settings O Dialog Box Built in non volatile memory J E 7 uu yp CS CJ series CPU Unit For details on the Network Configurator refer to SECTION 6 Tag Data Link Functions Routing Table Settings Propriety OMRON FINS network system can be constructed from OMRON CX Integrator Communications Units When FINS services are used the CX Integrator allows you to set routing tables to define transmission paths The CX Integra tor is included in the CX One If FINS services are not used then routing tables are not required Communications Services Overview Section 1 4 Personal computer running Windows CX Integrator Routing table settings EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port a ee BAZ CS CJ series CPU Unit Refer to the CX Integrator Operation Manual Cat No W464 for information on the CX Integrator 1 4 Communications Services Overview The following communications services are supported CIP Common Industrial Protocol Communications Services 1 Tag Data Links Cyclic Communications A program is not required to perform cyclic data exchanges with other devices in the EtherNet IP network N
90. and Link Settings on page 52 When the Server specification type field in Auto Adjust Time Tab is set to Host Using the Automatic Clock Adjustment Function Section 12 2 12 2 3 Auto Adjust Time The contents in the CPU Bus Unit System Setup that are set for using mail send and receive functions are shown in the CX Programmer s Edit Parame ters Dialog Box CJ1W EIP21 Edit Parameters TCP IP Ethemet FINS UDP FINS TCP FTP Auto Adjust Time Status Area SNMP SNMP Trap Not get the time information from the SNTP server C Get the time information from the SNTP server Auto Adjust Time 3 i him s Server Specification Type IP Address Host Name Port No 0 default 123 Retry Timer sec 0 default 10 Adjust Time k h m 12 00 to 13 00 Set Defaults Cancel Contents Default Get the time Enable to set the CPU Unit s clock to the time atthe Not information from SNTP server s clock selected the SNTP The clock can be changed only for the CPU Unit to disabled Server which the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port is mounted Auto Adjust Set the time at which the SNTP server is to be Time accessed to synchronize the clocks When the time that is set here arrives the SNTP server is accessed and the CPU Unit clock is adjusted to match the SNTP server clock Server specifi Select whether the SNTP server used for automatic IP Address cation type cloc
91. and subnet mask have been made correctly for the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port then it should be possible to communicate with nodes on the EtherNet IP network This section describes how to use the PING command to test communica tions with the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port 3 11 1 PING Command The PING command sends an echo request packet to a remote node and receives an echo response packet to confirm that the remote node is commu nicating correctly The PING command uses the ICMP echo request and responses The echo response packet is automatically returned in the ICMP The PING command is normally used to check the connections of remote nodes when configuring a network The EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port supports both the ICMP echo request and reply functions If the remote node returns a normal response to the PING command then the nodes are physically connected correctly and Ethernet node settings are cor rect EtherNet IP Unit Remote Node host computer or EtherNet IP Unit TCP UDP IP Ethernet Echo request Echo response 3 11 2 EtherNet IP Unit or Built in EtherNet IP Port Operation The EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port automatically returns the echo response packet in response to an echo request packet sent by another node host computer or other EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port An echo request packet can be sent to another node
92. any error or when a severe failure alarm FALS instruction is executed As a countermeasure for such errors external safety measures must be provided to ensure safety in the system The PLC will turn OFF all outputs when its self diagnosis function detects any error or when a severe failure alarm FALS instruction is executed Unexpected operation however may still occur for errors in the I O con trol section errors in I O memory and other errors that cannot be detected by the self diagnosis function As a countermeasure for all such errors external safety measures must be provided to ensure safety in the system Provide measures in the computer system and programming to ensure safety in the overall system even if errors or malfunctions occur in data link communications or remote I O communications Execute online editing only after confirming that no adverse effects will be caused by extending the cycle time Otherwise the input signals may not be readable e Emergency stop circuits interlock circuits limit circuits and similar safety measures must be provided in external control circuits Fail safe measures must be taken by the customer to ensure safety in the event of incorrect missing or abnormal signals caused by broken signal lines momentary power interruptions or other causes Serious accidents may result from abnormal operation if proper measures are not provided Confirm safety at the destination node before changing
93. at its default settings Only the IP address is set 15 14 13 1 2 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Hex IP address 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Hex If the local IP address is set to a value other than 0 0 0 0 in the TCP IP Config uration this area words m 98 and m 99 will act as an IP Address Display Area and the local IP address set in the TCP IP Configuration will be read and stored here when the power is turned ON or the Unit restarted If the local IP address in the TCP IP Configuration is set to 0 0 0 0 this value is read by the EtherNet IP Unit when the power is turned ON or the Unit restarted and is used as the local IP address If the local IP address in these words and the TCP IP Configuration are both set to 0 0 0 0 the default IP address 192 168 250 Node_address will be used For details on the IP address settings refer to SECTION 5 Determining IP Addresses 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 m 98 m 99 Remarks Setting device Setting area Programming Con sole CX Program mer can also be used Allocated words in the DM Area e The setting in the allocated DM Area words is enabled only when the IP address is set to 0 0 0 0 in the TCP IP Configuration If the IP address is set to a value other than 00 00 00 00 in the TCP IP Con figuration this value is stored in the allocated words in the DM Area Operation with the desired IP address set in the TCP IP
94. be returned to all Restart the Ether is the same as communications Net IP Unit or built the IP address requests in EtherNet IP port set for another Data exchanges after correcting the node refreshing will con IP address settings tinue with the CPU to eliminate dupli Unit cations The Unit Error Occurred Flag n 10 bit 00 Network Error Occurred Flag n 10 bit 01 and IP Address Duplication Error Flag n 10 bit 06 will go ON Flashing Address mis The target IP e Operation will con Check the IP red match address conver tinue with the set IP address and the sion method is address as the local Node Address Set set to Automatic IP address ting Switch setting generation but The Address Mis the last byte of match Flag n 14 the local IP bit 14 will turn ON address does not match the value set on the Node Address Setting Switch 357 Connection Status Codes and Error Processing Indicator NS Flashing red 7 segment Communica tions Control ler Error An error occurred in the Communica tions Controller in the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port Unit operation Flag status e The Unit will be offline and unable to communicate Errors will be returned to all communications requests Data exchanges refreshing will con tinue with the CPU Unit The Unit Error Occurred Flag n 10 bit 00 Network Error Occurred Flag n
95. be used Be sure to check first with the communications technician 110 SECTION 6 Tag Data Link Functions This section describes tag data link functions and related Network Configurator operations 6 1 Overview of Tag Data Links 1 0 0 0 ce eee 112 6 1 1 Tag Data Links 00 0 0 eee eee 112 6 1 2 Overview of Operation 0 0 00 eee eee eee 113 6 1 3 Tag Data Link Functions and Specifications 115 6 1 4 Data Link Data Areas 0 eee eee 116 6 2 Setting Tag Data Links 0 2c ee 121 6 2 1 Starting the Network Configurator 0 121 6 2 2 Tag Data Link Setting Procedure 04 124 6 2 3 Registering Devices 0 00 cee eee eee 125 6 2 4 Creating Tags and Tag Sets 0000 126 6 2 5 Connection Settings 0 cee ee ee eee 141 6 2 6 Setting Tags Using Data Link Tool 0 150 6 2 7 Creating Connections Using the Wizard 156 6 2 8 Creating Connections by Device Dragging and Dropping 159 6 2 9 Connecting the Network Configurator to the Network 161 6 2 10 Downloading Tag Data Link Parameters 168 6 2 11 Uploading Tag Data Link Parameters 171 6 2 12 Verifying the Tag Data Links 000 172 6 2 13 Starting and Stopping Tag Data Links 175 6 2 14 Clearing the Device Para
96. being executed ON Execution disabled not being executed Communications Port Enabled Flag Communications Port Error Flag 0 Normal completion 1 Abnormal completion Note In CS CJ series PLCs communications ports 0 to 7 are also used when exe cuting the PCMR 260 PROTOCOL MACRO TXDU 256 and RXDU 255 instructions so these flags are shared by SEND 090 RECV 098 CMND 490 PCMR 260 TXDU 256 and RXDU 255 SEND 090 RECV 098 and CMND 490 cannot be executed at a communi cations port if PCMR 260 TXDU 256 or RXDU 255 is being executed at that port 227 Communicating between OMRON PLCs Section 8 6 Communications Port Completion Codes The status of a SEND 090 RECV 098 and CMND 490 instruction after execution is reflected as a communications port completion code in one word two bytes of data as shown in the following table The value is 0000 during instruction execution The recorded status is saved until execution of the next instruction Word Contents Communications Port 0 Completion Code Communications Port 1 Completion Code Communications Port 2 Completion Code Communications Port 3 Completion Code Communications Port 4 Completion Code Communications Port 5 Completion Code Communications Port 6 Completion Code Communications Port 7 Completion Code The meanings of the communications port completion codes are the same as those for FINS comm
97. bit 02 n 6 bit 02 Programming to Detect The following programming can be used to check for errors for each target Errors Example 1 node This programming is used to detect errors only after the data links for all nodes have started normally Programming for Revision 2 or Higher Tag Data Link Normal Target Node Operating Flag 1 m n 11 bit 01 n 20 bit 01 Node 1 Error output Normal Target Node Node 1 Flag 1 Error output ae n 20 bit 01 Normal Target Node Flag 2 Node 2 Error output n 20 bit 02 Normal Target Node Node 2 Flag 2 Error output Vt n 20 bit 02 Programming to Detect The following programming can be used to detect tag data link errors at the Errors Example 2 local node 184 Ladder Programming with Tag Data Links Section 6 3 Example of Programming to Process Data Programming for Revision 1 or Higher Tag Data Link Unit Error Operating Occurred n 11 bit 01 n 10 bit 00 Unit Error Occurred n 10 bit 00 10000 Release Flag Local node Error output Local node Error output The following type of programming can be used to process data only when the data links are operating normally The parts of the ladder program that use the data link area for the relevant node are processed only when the corresponding Normal Operation Flag is ON Additional part Normal Operation Flag Interlocks IL and ILC instructions and jumps JMP and JME in
98. both output and input tag sets at the target and specify the corresponding input output or both input and output tag sets at the originator If there is no applicable tag set at the originator you can create a new one by using the Edit Tag Sets Button and Edit Tag Button e The following display will appear when you click the Show Detail But ton Detail Parameter Packet Interval RPI 50 0 ms 0 5 1000 0 ms Connection Name Timeout Value Packet Interval RPI x 4 EEA A arora Connection Structure 192 168 250 100 MC_Master 5 MC1_Error M 50 0ms 192 168 250 1 MC1 S MC_Error Regist Close The specified values for detailed parameters will be displayed Change the values as required Connection names are automatically created using the following rule default_N where N is a 3 digit number 001 002 etc starting from 1 160 Setting Tag Data Links Note Section 6 2 The following dialog box will be displayed if a target device that does not have I O data is dropped Network Configurator This device does not have Output Tag Sets Before dropping again refer to the manual of the applicable device and create the I O data i e output tag sets required to create a connection 3 After you have set all of the connection click the Regist Button to create the connection When creating the connection has been completed the in put tag set and output tag se
99. built in EtherNet IP port It is normally not necessary to change this setting Two ports are used with the FTP a control port and a data transfer port Only the control port can be set The data transfer port num ber will be one larger than the control port number 62 Other Parameters Section 3 10 Using the Automatic Time Adjustment Tab Page in Edit Setting Function Parameters Dialog Box Auto Adjust Time Not get the time informa Specifies whether to set the clock in the CPU Unit to the time on tion from the SNTP the SNTP server Server or The time can be set only in CPU Units with an EtherNet IP Unit or Get the time information a built in EtherNet IP port from the SNTP server Auto Adjust time Sets the time to access the SNTP server to automatically adjust the CPU Unit clock When the specified time arrives the SNTP server will be accessed and the clock in the CPU Unit will be set to the time on the SNTP server Server Specification Type Specifies whether to use an IP address or a domain name i e host name to specify the SNTP server to use for automatic time adjustment IP Address Sets the IP address of the SNTP server to use for automatic time adjustment This IP address is valid only when the Server Specification Type is set to an IP address Host Name Sets the host name of the SNTP server to use for automatic time adjustment This IP address is valid only when the Server Specifica
100. built in EtherNet IP port on a CJ2H CPULILI EIP CJ2M CPU3 CPU Unit When the EtherNet IP Unit s setup data is written to the Memory Card using a simple backup operation it is stored in the Memory Card as a Unit Board backup file with the file name BACKUPLILI PRM The digits in the backup file name indicate the unit address of the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port which is the unit number 10 hex This backup file is also used when reading data from the Memory Card or comparing data with a file in the Memory Card EtherNet IP Unit CPU Unit Memory Card Power Supply Switch All data e Backup e Restore e Compare All setup data The following table shows the Units that support the simple backup function Confirm that the Units being used support the function CPU Unit EtherNet IP Unit CS1W EIP21 CJ1W EIP21 CS1D CS1 H 333 Simple Backup Function Applications Backup Sources and Restore Targets Restore target Backup source CS1W EIP21 CJ1W EIP21 Rev 1 1 Section 13 2 CPU Unit EtherNet IP Unit CS1W EIP21 CJ1W EIP21 Use the simple backup function when creating a backup data file for the entire PLC including the CPU Unit EtherNet IP Units built in EtherNet IP port and Serial Communications Units Boards or when replacing all the Units The data t
101. by CPU Unit Error codes Error code for the most serious errors Error messages Messages stored in CPU Unit when FAL FALS instruction executed 249 Receiving Explicit Messages Section 9 2 I O Memory Read Write for CPU Units Service Service Class ID Instance ID Request Contents code service data Byte Data Read C4 Hex Specifies Address No Reads the specified node data in byte units 2F Hex area 01 Hex of read bytes The word data is read in order from high to See note to 14 Hex low bytes Read data 200 bytes max Word Data Address No Reads the specified node data in word Read of read units The word data is read in order from words high to low bytes Read data 200 bytes max Byte Data Write Address Writes the specified node data in byte units byte data The word data is specified in order from high to low bytes Write data 200 bytes max Word Data Write Address Writes the specified node data in word word data units The word data is specified in order from high to low bytes Write data 200 bytes max Note With a EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port with unit version 2 0 or later the PLC object class ID is C4 hex With unit version 1 0 the PLC object class ID is F2 hex The commands and responses for the explicit messages that can be sent and received are described on the following pages In the following command and response formats all
102. catalog number on the front cover of the manual Cat No W465 E1 05 Revision code The following table outlines the changes made to the manual during each revision Page numbers refer to the previous version Revision code June 2007 Revised content Original production July 2008 Added information for CJ series CJ2 CPU Units and for new unit version 2 0 func tions December 2008 Added the CJ series CJ2 CPU Units CU2H CPULIL December 2009 Added information on methods to create connections and heartbeats Greatly changed the structure of sections 1 and 2 Added and improved information on communications performance and communica tions load in section 10 Made changes accompanying a new version of the Network Configurator V3 10 February 2010 Added the CJ series CJ2M CPU Units CU2M CPU3L 435 Revision History 436 Authorized Distributor
103. code H Error message 16 bytes e Operation status Returns the operation status of the CPU Unit in 1 byte 2 digit hexadecimal The values of bits 3 to 6 are not fixed Always mask them when address ing the status data 254 Receiving Explicit Messages Section 9 2 Unspecified t Operation status 0 Stopped User program is not being executed 1 Operating User program is being executed Flash memory access status CS1H CJ1 H CJ1M and CS1D only 0 Memory is not being written 1 Memory is being written Battery status CS1H CJ1 H CJ1M and CS1D only 0 No battery 1 Battery installed CPU status 0 Normal 1 CPU standby waiting for SYSMAC Bus Remote I O or other event e Operating mode Returns the operating mode of the CPU Unit in 1 byte 2 digit hexadecimal 0001 Hex PROGRAM mode 0002 Hex MONITOR mode 0004 Hex RUN mode Fatal error information Returns the fatal error information for the CPU Unit in 2 bytes low to high 1514131211109 8 765 43 210 1 System error FALS 1 Cycle time over 1 Program error 1 1 0 setting error 1 No of I O points exceeded 1 Inner Board fatal error 1 Number duplicate use error 1 I O Bus error 1 Memory error Non fatal error information Returns the non fatal error information for the CPU Unit in 2 bytes low to high 15 14131211109 8 7 6 5 43 2 0 1 Special I O Unit error Unspecified reserved
104. confirm that the changes will not create security problems before proceeding with the changes The changes described in this document are required only when you connect using Ether Net IP through an Ethernet port No changes are necessary if you are connecting through any other port such as a USB port Changing Windows Firewall Settings Windows XP 1 When you attempt to connect the CX Programmer or Network Configurator to a PLC on an EtherNet IP net work through an Ethernet port the Windows Security Alert Dialog Box will be displayed Click the Unblock Button Do you want to keep blocking this program Name Main executable of CX Programmer lt gt Publisher OMRON Corporation Keep Blocking Ask Me Later An EtherNet IP connection will be accepted from CX Programmer or Network Configurator and EtherNet IP connections will be enabled in the future as well Windows Vista or Windows 7 Use the following procedure to change the settings before attempting to connect from the CX Programmer or Network Configurator 423 Precautions for Using Windows XP Vista or Windows 7 Appendix G The User Account Control Dialog Box may be displayed during this procedure If it appears click the Continue Button and continue with the procedure 1 Select Control Panel from the Windows Start Menu and change the display to Classic View OW a gt Control Panel Name Control Panel Home Classic View a Add Har
105. data between the parameter area and the file memory PROGRAM AREA FILE TRANSFER Transfers or compares data between the UM User Memory area and the file memory CREATE DELETE DIRECTORY Creates or deletes a directory Debugging FORCED SET RESET Force sets or force resets bits or releases force set status FORCED SET RESET CANCEL Cancels all bits that have been force set or force reset 8 6 4 Writing Programs Programs incorporating the SEND 090 RECV 098 and CMND 490 instructions are generally created using the Communications Port Enabled Flag and the Communications Port Error Flag as input conditions CS CJ series CPU Units have eight communications ports Only one instruction can be executed at any given port at one time however so the program must not overlap the use of any of the ports A program example is provided below Communications port EtherNet IP Unit CPU Unit Hira ae a E H instruction 2 Hi nstruction 3H pH HH Instruction 5 pfr 1H Instruction 7 iL Instruction 8 There are eight communications ports so up to eight communications instructions can be executed at a time The number of messages that can be sent or received with a single CPU Bus Unit service though is not more than two each for the CPU Unit to the EtherNet IP Unit and for the EtherNet IP Unit to the CPU Un
106. data could not be refreshed because the CPU Unit could not write clock data in that operation mode The automatic clock adjustment function is not supported by cer tain CPU Units models lot num bers if they are in RUN or MONI TOR mode See note 329 Automatic Clock Adjustment Error Processing Section 12 4 Note 1 For details on other error log information refer to the Operation Manual Construction of Networks SECTION 14 Troubleshooting and Error Pro cessing 2 An error will occur in the following CPU Units when the automatic clock adjustment function is executed under the conditions shown in the table CPU Unit Conditions CPU Units manufactured on or When the CPU execution mode is set to other before January 31 2003 lot num than normal mode priority peripheral servicing bers 030131 or earlier mode parallel processing with synchronous CJ1G CPU H memory access mode or parallel processing CJ1H CPUL with asynchronous memory access mode H CS1G CPULILIH AND H CS1H CPU When the CPU Unit operating mode is set to RUN or MONITOR mode 3 The manufacturing date can be determined from the lot number on the side or top corner of the CPU Unit 4 The lot numbers are as follows YYMMDDnnnn in which YY indicates the last two digits of the year MM the month DD the day and nnnn the serial number 330 SECTION 13 Maintenance and Unit
107. data links are exe cuted and any of the following conditions is met e The tag data links are set to share the same data with all nodes in the net work The multicast packets are transferred to all nodes in the network just like a broadcast e The tag data link settings are all one to one unicast and multicast pack ets cannot be used e There is little traffic in the tag data links No special settings are required for an L2 switching hub without multicast fil tering We recommend this kind of switching hub when only tag data links are exe cuted and the following condition is met e There are many 1 N links where N represents some number of nodes in the network in the tag data link settings i e there are many multicast packets used or there is heavy traffic in the tag data links Special settings are required for an L2 switching hub with multicast filtering There must be enough multicast filters for the network being used Selecting the Network Devices Section 2 3 L3 Switching Hub with Multicast Filtering and L4 QoS Functions Note We recommend this kind of switching hub when both tag data links and mes sage communications are executed By setting tag data links for higher priority transmission it is possible to pre vent problems such as transmission delays due to message communications traffic and packet losses due to buffer overflow Settings must be made in the switching hub to enable this function and giv
108. does not go ON The indicators on the EtherNet IP Unit or CPU Unit are all OFF e Check whether power is being supplied to the PLC e Check whether the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port is mounted in the Backplane correctly e lf a watchdog timer WDT error has occurred in the PLC fol low the procedures described in the PLC s Operation Man ual to correct the problem All of the indicators for the EtherNet IP Unit or built in Ether Net IP port will be OFF if a CPU Bus Unit error has occurred Check for a CPU Bus Unit error e Restart the Unit Replace the Unit if it doesn t restart The MS indicator on the EtherNet IP Unit or CPU Unit is lit green but the NS indicator remains OFF e If the EtherNet IP Unit s 7 segment display is displaying an error code refer to the tables in 14 2 Using the LED Indica tors and Display for Troubleshooting e Confirm that the cables are properly connected to the switching hub and the power supply to the switching hub is ON If data is being restored by the simple backup function wait until the restore operation is completed The MS indicator on the EtherNet IP Unit or CPU Unit is lit green but the NS indicator contin ues to flash green lf the EtherNet IP Unit s 7 segment display is displaying an error code refer to the tables in 14 2 Using the LED Indica tors and Display for Troubleshooting e The NS indicator will continue to flash green if the t
109. execution time port is given prior ity EtherNet IP Unit or Set peripheral servicing time built in EtherNet IP Default 4 of CPU Unit cycle port is not given time priority Section 10 5 Message Service Transmission Delay CPU execution mode Processing time details Parallel processing with syn 4 of CPU Unit cycle time chronous memory access Parallel processing with asyn 1 ms max chronous memory access Note CJ2 CPU Units support only Normal Mode For details refer to the CPU Unit s Operation Manual CPU Bus Unit Service Cycle Local Node 2 The following table shows the CPU Bus Unit service cycle which depends on the CPU Units CPU processing mode setting CPU execution mode Processing time details CPU Bus Unit Service Processing Time Local Node 2 Normal Mode See note One CPU Unit cycle time Priority peripheral servicing EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port is given prior ity Time slice instruction execution time EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port is not given priority One CPU Unit cycle time Parallel processing with syn chronous memory access One CPU Unit cycle time Parallel processing with asyn chronous memory access 0 2 ms peripheral servicing time 1 ms max for peripheral servicing of each Special I O Unit CPU Bus Unit peripheral port RS 232C port and Inner Board Note CJ2
110. following cases IP Address Duplication Error Ethernet Communications Controller Error hardware error BOOTP Server Error 75 CIO Area Allocations 76 Tag Data Link Operating Status Manipulated by Section 4 2 Unit operation Indicates that the tag data link is operating Turned OFF when communications stop in the following cases e Hardware error IP Address Duplication Error BOOTP Server Error e Basic Ethernet Settings Error Memory Error MAC Address Error Indicates that the tag data link is stopped Turned ON in the following cases e The Unit is set as the origi nator and the power supply was turned ON or the Unit was restarted e The Unit is set as the origi nator and the Tag Data Link Start Bit was turned ON Operating IP Address Change ON if the node address set ting is different from the set ting when the power was turned ON OFF if the node address set ting is the same as the setting when the power was turned ON Not used User Setting Area Enabled Indicates that the user set tings area data is enabled ON when user settings have been specified as the layout of the allocated CIO Area and refreshing of the user settings area has started Indicates that the user set tings area data is invalid The bit is turned OFF in the following cases because communications stop e The allocated CIO Area lay out is set to d
111. frame used to open the con Contact the target tions Contact the nection device s manufac originator device s turer manufacturer 01 0315 Error code returned from target This error does Depends on the tar Depends on the orig There was a parameter error in Not occur get s specifications inator s specifica the frame used to open the con Contact the target tions Contact the nection device s manufac originator device s turer manufacturer 361 Connection Status Codes and Error Processing Connection status General Additional Status Status hex hex Source of error Error code returned from target There was a parameter error in the frame used to close the con nection Handling Section 14 3 Configuration 1 This error does not occur Configuration 2 Depends on the tar get s specifications Contact the target device s manufac turer Configuration 3 Depends on the orig inator s specifica tions Contact the originator device s manufacturer Error code generated in origina tor Some other error occurred This error does not occur The originator gener ates this code when an unsupported response code is returned from the target in reply toa connection opening request Depends on the orig inator s specifica tions Contact the originator device s manufacturer Error code returned from target
112. have been created Write access denied Writing is not possible Write access denied FINS error 0 x 2101 313 Checking FTP Status Section 11 6 PPP Path name XXX IP address YY Port number MM FINS error code NN Socket error code 11 6 Checking FTP Status 11 6 1 FTP Status Flag 314 n 13 The current status of the FTP server can be obtained from the service status in the words allocated to the EtherNet IP Unit in the CPU Bus Unit Area in the CIO Area The word containing the FTP Status Flag can be computed as fol lows CIO 1500 25 x unit number 13 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 L FTP Status Flag Status of bit 00 FTP server busy a user is connected FTP server free 1 File operations for files on the Memory Card are performed during FTP communications Do not remove the Memory Card or turn OFF power to the PLC while FTP is being used 2 When using File Memory Instruction from the program in the CPU Unit program exclusive control using the FTP Status Flag so that the same data is not manipulated simultaneously by more than one instruction Using File Memory Section 11 7 11 7 Using File Memory There are two media that can be used to store files in memory for CS CJ series PLCs e Memory Cards EM File Memory CPU Unit Memory Card File EM File Memory File 11 7 1 File Memory Memory type Capacity File data recognized by CPU Un
113. i i i i i i Memory clo X Memory D X Start Address Start Address Size words Size words J Enable Output Inhibit k OK Cancel 2 Select the memory area here W in the Memory Field and enter the start ing address here 0 and number of words here 50 in the Start Address and Size Fields for Area 1 3 Select the memory area here D in the Memory Field and enter the start ing address here 50 and number of words here 100 in the Start Ad dress and Size Fields for Area 2 4 Select the Enable Over Load Check Box if the Over Load function is nec essary Datalink Wizard a Datalink Wizard will make the datalink table data Please specify the memory area start address size The nodes which participate the datalink have to be created by Network Configurator Datalink Configuration Areal Area2 Node1 Node2 Node3 Node1 Node2 Node3 Start ps Start Bg Y Address Size Address Size IN lt BRR Size HE Size OUT i 1 7 1 i i i i i i Memory w X Memory D 3 Start Address 0 Start Address 50 Size words 50 Size words mod V Enable Output Inhibit le OK Cancel 5 Click the OK Button The following dialog box will be displayed Click the Yes Button to continue creating the data link table or click the No Button to cancel the operation DatalinkTool datalink table data will be created newly This operation will delete current datalink ta
114. in the error log is calculated as the number of records x 10 bytes record Each error log record thus comprises 10 bytes configured as follows 398 FINS Commands Addressed to EtherNet IP Units or Built in EtherNet IP Ports Appendix E 1st byte 10th byte Errorcode Detailed Minutes Second Day Hour Year Month information Error Code Detailed Information Details of the error stored in the record Refer to 14 4 4 Error Log Error Codes for details Minute Second Day Hour Year Month Indicate the time at which the error stored in the record occurred Precautions e If the error log contains fewer records than the number specified in the number of records parameter all records stored in the error log at the time the command is executed will be returned and the command exe cuted will end normally Response Codes Response code Description Normal end Command too large Command too small Beginning record number is out of range The number of read records is 0 ERROR LOG CLEAR Clears the error log for the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP ports and resets the number of stored records to 0 Command Block 21 03 Command code Response Block Command Response code code Response Codes 0000 Normal end 1001 Command too large PING Performs processing equivalent to a UNIX computer s PING command see below 399 FINS Commands Addressed to EtherNet IP Units or Built in Ether
115. interval RPI of each connection between the originator and target The interval can be set between 1 and 10 000 ms for the CJ2M and 0 5 and 10 000 ms for other CPU Units in 0 5 ms units The default setting is 50 ms data refreshed once every 50 ms Timeout Value Sets the time until a connection timeout is detected The time out value is set as a multiple of the packet interval RPI and can be set to a 4 8 16 32 64 128 256 or 512 multiple The default setting is 4x the packet interval RPI 2 When the settings are completed click the OK Button 145 Setting Tag Data Links Section 6 2 Confirming the Connections Settings 1 2 3 1 An overview of the connections set in the Register Device List is displayed in the Connections Tab Page Edit Device Parameters Connections Tag Sets Unregister Device List Product Name 192 168 250 3 CJ1w E1P21 CJ2 Connections 1 256 0 1 7 0 lt Register Device List Product Name 192 168 250 1 CJ2B EIP21 Variable Target Variable 4 192 168 250 2 002 C Sa TEST Input D00000 D00000 Edt Al Change Target Node 1D To From File convapcagened ssssnsreceosecenscasen josai 192 168 2502 68 2503 Colweerel CS1W EIP21 JIW EIP21 Z 192168 250 1 Indicates the IP address of the originator where the connection was set 3 Repeat the Connections setting procedure until all of the connections have been set Note After completing
116. item consists of 4 bytes 1 Short Buffer Application Two items are returned 8 bytes 1 The number of short buffers currently being used 2 The number of short buffers in the system fixed at 23 928 decimal 2 Short Buffer Application by Type Thirteen items are returned 52 bytes The number of short buffers used for storing communications data The number of short buffers used for protocol headers TCP UDP IP ICMP ARP The number of short buffers used in socket structures The number of short buffers used as protocol control blocks The number of short buffers used for routing tables Not used always 0 Not used always 0 The number of short buffers used for IP fragment re assembly queue headers The number of short buffers used for storing socket addresses 10 Not used always 0 11 The number of short buffers used for storing socket options 12 The number of short buffers used for storing access rights 13 The number of short buffers used for storing interface addresses 3 Long Buffer Application Two items are returned 8 bytes Oo Noah WN gt 9 1 The number of long buffers currently being used 2 The number of long buffers in the system fixed at 64 decimal 4 Not Used Always 0 4 bytes 5 Network Memory Application Two items are returned 8 bytes 1 The number of bytes used in K bytes 2 The percentage used 6 Memory Exhaustion Log 12 bytes Counts for the following values indicate a h
117. maximum and minimum I O response times would be as fol lows for the above system Maximum response time 1 5 ms 5 ms x 2 12 ms 10 ms x 2 2 0 ms 45 5 ms Minimum response time 1 5 ms 5 ms 10 ms 2 0 ms 18 5 ms If the message service is used at the same time on the CJ2M built in port the tag data link I O response time will change 293 Message Service Transmission Delay Section 10 5 10 5 Message Service Transmission Delay This section explains the maximum transmission delay that can occur between the execution of a SEND 090 RECV 098 or CMND 490 instruc tion in the ladder program until completion of the instruction This delay does not include the time required for the tag data link or the execution time of the ladder program itself 10 5 1 Maximum Transmission Delays Excluding Delays in the Network Use the following equation to calculate the maximum transmission delay that can occur between the execution of a SEND 090 or RECV 098 instruction in the ladder program until completion of the instruction SEND 090 Instruction Execution of SEND 090 in user program i CPU Bus Unit service processing time CPU Bus Unit service cycle Local node Local node Send processing Y Transmission delay Y Receive processing i CPU Bus Unit service cycle i Remote node Maximum transmission delay l CPU Bus Unit service processing time Remote node CPU data s
118. memory address e g 100 W100 DO or a network symbol as a character string 6 Input the size of the tag in the Size Field in bytes 7 Click the Regist Button to register the tag If an I O memory address is specified for a tag name the Edit Tags Dialog Box will be displayed with the next consecutive address as the tag name for editing the next tag Once you have registered the tags click the Cancel Button 8 Click the Out Produce Tab and click the New Button The Edit Tag Dialog Box will be displayed like the dialog box for input tags except for the Over Load setting The Over Load setting determines whether outputs are cleared or continue their previous status when outputs are turned OFF with the PLC s Output OFF function Output inhibit settings are not required for input reception tag sets e Follow the output inhibit function Enabled default Output data is cleared to 0 when a PLC output inhibit occurs Do not follow the output inhibit function Disabled Output data maintains its previous status even after a PLC output in hibit occurs Edit Tag Name 0000 Size Over Load O Disable Enable Select Disable or Enable Note When any of the following errors occurs in the originator PLC while tag data links are in progress the connection will be forcibly disconnected e Fatal CPU Unit error e I O refreshing error e CPU Unit WDT error e I O bus error 129 Setting Tag Data Links Section 6 2 9
119. na 2 054 sii 4 Bedok sie ttl ORR ERs AOS RO CRA Re eae E 315 11 8 FTP Pile Transfer Time se rpn isa shat iaker en Bae a eles PRES Bele g RS ens 320 11 9 Host Computer Application Example 0 0 0 eee eee 321 SECTION 12 Automatic Clock Adjustment Function 323 12 1 Automatic Clock Adjustment 0 0 0 0 324 12 2 Using the Automatic Clock Adjustment Function 0 002 000 008 325 12 3 Automatic Clock Adjustment Switch 0 0 0 22 eee eee 328 12 4 Automatic Clock Adjustment Error Processing 0 0 c eee eee eee ee 328 SECTION 13 Maintenance and Unit Replacement 331 13 1 Maintenance and Replacement 0 0 0 ccc eee eee 332 13 2 Simple Backup Function 0 0 eee a 333 13 3 Using the Backup Tool 0 cece p Ao poe 336 SECTION 14 Troubleshooting and Error Processing 339 14 1 Checking Status with the Network Configurator 0000 00 0 02 eee eee 340 14 2 Using the LED Indicators and Display for Troubleshooting 347 14 3 Connection Status Codes and Error Processing 00 000 e ee eee eee eee 358 14 4 Error Los Function riinan cerns sere a SGA SRR ae E RE Sos 364 14 5 Troubleshooting cc 0543 4 whe shack we ecieheuse e wes Malet Waiew ee eure 368 14 6 Troubleshooting with FINS Response Codes 0 0 00 cece eee eee 371 ix TABLE OF CON
120. of the product The abbreviation Ch which appears in some displays and on some OMRON products often means word and is abbreviated Wd in documentation in this sense The abbreviation PLC means Programmable Controller PC is used however in some Program ming Device displays to mean Programmable Controller Visual Aids The following headings appear in the left column of the manual to help you locate different types of information Note Indicates information of particular interest for efficient and convenient opera tion of the product 1 2 3 1 Indicates lists of one sort or another such as procedures checklists etc Trademarks and Copyrights EtherNet IP is a registered trademark of the ODVA Open DeviceNet Vendor Association Ethernet is a trademark of the Xerox Corporation Microsoft Windows Windows NT Windows 2000 Windows XP and Windows Vista are registered trademarks of the Microsoft Corporation Other names of systems or products that appear in this document are trademarks or registered trade marks of the respective company OMRON 2007 All rights reserved No part of this publication may be reproduced stored in a retrieval system or transmitted in any form or by any means mechanical electronic photocopying recording or otherwise without the prior written permission of OMRON No patent liability is assumed with respect to the use of the information contained herein
121. on the computer and the respective FINS UDP port numbers that are used are also allocated individually When FINS UDP FINS commands are sent from individual appli cations to the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port the respective remote IP addresses and remote port numbers in the internal table are dynamically changed With this method as well FINS nodes are allocated individually for each appli cation on the computer and the respective FINS TCP port numbers that are used are also allocated individually Each application is positioned with a FINS TCP client and requests the opening of a connection with the FINS TCP server of the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port When the connection is established the respective remote IP address and remote port number in the internal table are dynamically changed 5 2 4 Related Products and Communications Setting Methods Models Supporting Automatic Generation Method Dynamic Product Model Series Supports automatic Version generation method dynamic CS series Ethernet 100BASE TX CS1W ETN21 Yes Unit 10BASE 5 CS1W ETNO1 No Set by automatic 10BASE T CS1W ETN11 generation method or combined method Com munications are not pos sible with personal computers with variable IP addresses CJ series Ethernet 100BASE TX CJ1W ETN21 Yes Unit 10BASE T CJ1W ETN11 No Set by automatic CV CVM1 series 10BASE 5 CV500 ETNO1 generation method or Ethe
122. or transferring to another node the contents of a program the PLC Setup I O tables I O mem ory or parameters Changing or transferring any of these without confirming safety may result in injury Tighten the screws on the terminal block of the AC Power Supply Unit to the torque specified in the operation manual The loose screws may result in burning or malfunction xxiii Operating Environment Precautions 4 4 Operating Environment Precautions N Caution Do not operate the control system in the following locations e Locations subject to direct sunlight e Locations subject to temperatures or humidity outside the range specified in the specifications e Locations subject to condensation as the result of severe changes in tem perature e Locations subject to corrosive or flammable gases e Locations subject to dust especially iron dust or salts e Locations subject to exposure to water oil or chemicals e Locations subject to shock or vibration N Caution Take appropriate and sufficient countermeasures when installing systems in the following locations e Locations subject to static electricity or other forms of noise e Locations subject to strong electromagnetic fields e Locations subject to possible exposure to radioactivity e Locations close to power supplies 5 Application Precautions Observe the following precautions when using the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port N WARNING Always he
123. request reply Address mask request Address mask reply Appendix E 5 The number of received ICMP packets discarded because the type indication code was out of range 6 The number of received ICMP packets discarded because the overall packet length value in the packet header was smaller than the minimum ICMP packet length 7 The number of received ICMP packets discarded because of an incorrect checksum value in the packet header 8 The number of received ICMP packets discarded because the ICMP header length value in the packet head er did not match the lengths of individual header types The number of responses returned to received ICMP packets requiring a response 10 Total number of inputs of each packet type during ICMP input The 19 statistical values are returned in the order shown below Contents are defined for 13 types only all other types contain 0 Echo reply Undefined always 0 Destination unreachable Source quench Routing redirect Undefined always 0 Echo Undefined always 0 Time exceeded Parameter problem Time stamp Time stamp reply Information request Information request reply Address mask request TCP Status Response Address mask reply Three types 46 items of TCP status information occupying 4 bytes each are returned in the following sequence Each value is returned as an 8 digit hexadecimal value
124. selecting addi tional icons In the following example 2 nodes are selected 192 168 250 1 and 192 168 250 2 After selecting the icons click the right mouse button over the icon to dis play the pop up menu and select Parameter Upload EtherNet 1P_1 S 192 168 250 1 192 CS1W EIP21 cs Reset lt UE Register to other Device gt 3 Download External Data The following confirmation dialog box will be displayed Network Configurator A Uploading parameters from selected devices will start e OK Click the Yes Button or No Button During the upload the following progress monitor will be displayed to show the progress of the upload Uploading Device Parameter 192 168 250 1 J Uploading Parameter 3 The following dialog box will be displayed indicating that the upload was completed Network Configurator e J Upload of device parameter was completed 6 2 12 Verifying the Tag Data Links 172 Tag data link parameters such as the tag set settings and connection set tings can be compared with the EtherNet IP Units in the EtherNet IP network The following procedure shows how to compare the parameters For details on connecting to the network from the Network Configurator refer to 6 2 9 Connecting the Network Configurator to the Network Setting Tag Data Links Section 6 2 Verifying the Network Compare the list of registered devices in the Network
125. set for every node on the same Ethernet network 5 1 2 Allocating IP Addresses IP Internet Protocol is a standard communications protocol used throughout the world and is designed to enable communications between any Ethernet nodes regardless of the networks on which they exist To achieve this net work numbers are allocated by the Network Solutions InterNIC Registration Services to ensure that all Ethernet networks have unique numbers regard less of where they exist The local system administrator is left the responsibil ity of allocating unique host numbers locally You therefore should obtain a network number from the InterNIC Registration Services to ensure unique ness and allow for future network expansions if required 92 IP Addresses Section 5 1 5 1 3 EtherNet IP Unit IP Address Settings An IP address must be set even for the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port before Ethernet communications can proceed Use one of the following methods to set the IP address of the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port Either use the default IP address setting use a Programming Device to set a particular IP address in the DM Area words CS CJ Series only allo cated to the Unit as a CPU Bus Unit or set a particular IP address in the Eth erNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port e If you want to connect the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port immediately the default IP address is 192 168 250 Node_addr
126. table contains fewer records than the number specified in the number of records parame ter all the records contained in the IP address table when the command is executed will be returned and the command execution will end normally An error response will be returned if the IP address conversion method in the system mode settings is set to the automatic generation method on the FINS UDP Tab Page of the Unit Response Codes Response code Description Normal end Command too large Command too small IP address conversion method is set to the automatic genera tion method IP ROUTER TABLE READ Reads the IP router table Command Block Command Number code of records Response Block Command Response Maximum Number Number IP router IP router code code number of stored of records table records table records of stored records records Parameters Number of Records Command Response The number of records to read is specified between 0000 and 0008 0 to 8 decimal in the command If this value is set to 0 the number of stored records will be returned but the IP router table records will not be returned The response returns the actual number of records read 406 FINS Commands Addressed to EtherNet IP Units or Built in EtherNet IP Ports Appendix E Maximum Number of Stored Records Response The maximum number of records that can be stored in the IP router table is returned The maximum numbe
127. that has a global address e FINS TCP is recommended as the FINS communications service method FINS TCP is more reliable than FINS UDP in terms of communications errors involving IP routers e The IP address table method is used as the IP address conversion method of the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port The TCP port number to be used for FINS TCP cannot be used if prohib ited by a firewall in the communications path E Explicit Message Communications Service e A device such as a personal computer a CIP application including the Network Configurator can connect online and communicate over the Internet with an EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port that has a global address 109 Private and Global Addresses Section 5 3 If the TCP port number 44818 or UDP port number 44818 that is used for EtherNet IP cannot be used if prohibited by a firewall in the communi cations path Note Network Security and Firewalls Setting a global IP address for an EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port involves network security considerations It is recommended that the user contract with a communications company for a dedicated line rather than using a general line such as a broadband line Also be sure to consult with a network specialist and consider security measures such as a firewall Once a firewall has been set up by a communications technician on the other hand there may be some applications that cannot
128. the Close Button 5 If multiple nodes have been selected the following message will be dis played Click the Yes Button Network Configurator 1 Verifying parameters to next selected device will start e OK Yes The comparison results will be displayed in order of the selected nodes 6 2 13 Starting and Stopping Tag Data Links Automatically Starting Tag Data Links Tag data links will start operating automatically immediately after the tag data link parameters are downloaded from the Network Configurator They will also start automatically when the power to the PLC is turned ON or the CPU Unit is restarted Starting and Stopping All Tag Data Links on the Network Using the Network All tag data links on the network can be started and stopped by selecting I O Configurator Connection Start Stop from the Network Menu Starting and Stopping Tag Data Links for Individual Devices Using the Network You can start and stop tag data links for individual devices using the following Configurator buttons in the Monitor Device Dialog Box This applies only to tag data links for which the device is the originator Access the Monitor Device Dialog Box by selecting Monitor from the Device Menu 175 Setting Tag Data Links Section 6 2 Monitor Device Controller Error History Tag Status Ethernet Information Status 1 Status 2 Connection Error History Target Node Status am Start Connection Stop Connection
129. the Memory Card 335 Retry timer field 326 328 rmdir command 303 308 route path 383 routing tables 207 precautions Xxvi relay network table 207 setting examples 209 S safety precautions xxii SEND 090 instruction 190 220 222 accessible data areas 221 delays 294 sending explicit messages 243 Server specification type field 326 327 Setup Tab 306 seven segment Display 24 seven segment display error status 347 351 353 355 358 short circuits precautions xxv Simple Backup Function 333 SNMP 3 64 SNMP trap 64 SNTP 3 63 324 SNTP server automatic clock adjustment errors 328 obtaining clock information 324 SOCKET STATUS READ 379 413 sockets reading status 413 TCP sockets status 379 testing communications 399 specifications 14 432 Index CJ series general specifications 15 16 communications specifications 17 CS series general specifications 14 FINS communications 220 FTP server 303 message communications 193 Network Configurator 10 startup procedure 34 static electricity xxiv precautions xxv status reading memory status 411 reading protocol status 407 reading socket status 413 status flags for tag data links 186 subnet mask 93 subnet masks 54 reading from Unit 392 switch Node Address Setting Switch 27 switching hub connection methods 42 environment precautions 42 functions 29 precautions when selecting 29 recommended mod
130. the Unit Setup and correct if neces sary Configuration error IP address conversion in Unit Setup IP address conversion is set for automatic conver sion only Check the IP address conver sion setting in the Unit Setup This error will be generated for the READ IP ADDRESS TABLE command only Appendix A CS CJ series Ethernet Unit Function Comparison Tag data link communications service Support for function Ethernet Unit EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port Unit version 1 0 Unit version 2 0 CIP message communications service FINS UDP service FINS TCP service Socket service File transfer FTP Mail send receive Web functions Automatic adjustment of PLC s internal clock Simple backup function Error log Response to PING command SNMP SNMP trap CIDR function for IP addresses Online connection by EtherNet IP using CX One Online connection by Ethernet FINS using CX One Online connection by EtherNet IP using Network Configu rator 375 CS CJ series Ethernet Unit Function Comparison Appendix A 376 Parameter TCP send buffer Appendix B Ethernet Network Parameters 4 096 bytes Description Maximum capacity of the TCP send buffer TCP receive buffer 4 096 bytes Maximum capacity of the TCP receive buffer UDP send buffer 9 000 bytes Maximum capacity of th
131. the point that the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port extracts the CIP explicit message from this command until a response is received The moni toring time can be set between 0 01 and 655 35 s Service code command response In the command this code is the service code defined for EtherNet IP In the response bit 15 of the service code specified in the command is turned ON and the resulting value is returned 237 Sending Explicit Messages 238 Section 9 1 In the routing format for rely hops the first service code in the routing service data is 52 Hex which is the Unconnected Send service Request path size command Specifies the number of words of data that are specified in the request path field In the routing format for relay hops the first request path size in the routing service data is 02 Hex Request path command Specifies the request path class ID instance ID etc in bytes If there is an odd number of bytes pad the last byte with a 0 so that the data is in full word units In the routing format for relay hops the first request path in the routing ser vice data is 20 06 24 01 Hex Connection Manager For details refer to the description of the Route Path in Appendix D CIP Message Communications Request data command In the command specify the data determined by the service code In the response the reception data determined by the service code will be returned Pri
132. the settings always click the OK Button before closing the Edit Device Parameters Dialog Box and performing an other operation If the Cancel Button is clicked and the dialog box is closed the new settings will be discarded 146 Setting Tag Data Links Section 6 2 Automatically Setting Connections 4 If the tag set s size is changed in either the originator or target after the connection was set the size will not match the other node and a parameter data mismatch will occur In this case if the connection settings have been changed be sure to check the connections Refer to 6 2 17 Checking Connections Tag set names set for devices can be automatically detected to automatically set connections between input and output tag sets with the same name or the same names excluding specified ellipses Connections are automatically set under the following conditions Output tag set names Except for specified ellipses the output tag set name must be the same as the input tag set name Ellipses can be set for the beginning or end of tag set names Input tag set names Except for specified ellipses the input tag set name must be the same as the output tag set name Ellipses can be set for the beginning or end of tag set names Connection types The connection type must be nput Only Multicast and single cast connection types can be specified when executing a connection RPI The default sett
133. the total maximum bandwidth that can be used for the entire network as the Network Total of Max Mbit s This value indicates the maximum bandwidth that can be used on the transmission paths when switching hubs are cascaded If the value exceeds the bandwidth of a cascade connection in the actual network the maximum bandwidth for part of the communications path may be exceeded depending on how the network is wired If this occurs either calculate the bandwidth usage for each communications path and be sure that the maximum bandwidth is not exceeded for any cas cade connection or adjust the bandwidth for all cascade connections so that the total maximum network bandwidth is not exceeded Adjust the bandwidth according to instructions in 10 2 4 Changing the RPI 10 2 2 Tag Data Link Bandwidth Usage and RPI 270 The usage of capacity can be adjusted using the RPI setting If the RPI is made shorter the usage of capacity will increase If the RPI is made longer the usage of capacity will decrease The RPI can be set in any one of the following ways e Setting the same interval for all connections e Setting a particular device s connection e Setting a particular connection When the same RPI is set for all connections the usage of capacity will basi cally increase proportionally as the RPI is made shorter Adjusting the Communications Load Section 10 2 Note Switching Hubs without Multicast Filtering 100 Mbps Hubs Switchi
134. tions for the target PLC The current PLC model and network type will be displayed Refer to the CX Programmer Operation Manual for detailed procedures 337 Using the Backup Tool Section 13 3 338 SECTION 14 Troubleshooting and Error Processing This section describes error processing periodic maintenance operations and troubleshooting procedures needed to keep the EtherNet IP network operating properly We recommend reading through the error processing procedures before operation so that operating errors can be identified and corrected more quickly 14 1 Checking Status with the Network Configurator 340 14 1 1 The Network Configurator s Device Monitor Function 340 14 2 Using the LED Indicators and Display for Troubleshooting 347 14 2 1 Errors Occurring at the EtherNet IP Unit or Built in EtherNet IP Port 0 0 00 0 00 ee eee 347 14 3 Connection Status Codes and Error Processing 0 04 358 14 4 Error Log Function s ceseco perseroan eronda pa ne pone pa a h e 364 14 4 1 Error Log Data Specifications 00 0 00000 364 14 4 2 Error Log Registration 0 0 eee eee ee eee 364 14 4 3 FINS Commands for Error Logs 02 00000 364 14 4 4 Error Log Error Codes 2 0 0 2 0 0 eee eee 365 14 5 Troubleshooting pe ce eee eee 368 14 5 1 CPU Unit s ERR ALM Indicator Lit or Flashing 368 14 5 2 General
135. to exchange data with another node The node that requests opening the connection is called the originator and the node that receives the request is called the target CPU Unit EtherNet IP Unit EtherNet IP Unit CPU Unit Inputs Outputs l Tag set name OUT1 VarOuti DMo fo Var Out2 DM100 e Connection Input tags Tag set name ABC VO refreshed DM00100 Var In DM20000 Originator Var Out1 Output tags Var Out2 VO refreshed Var Out3 Sosa Var Outa DM200 I O refreshed PLC status Outputs I O refreshed XYZ Output tags PLC status C Ethernet EtherNet IP C For communications between PLCs the connection information is set in the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port of the PLC that receives data i e the originator Note For communications between a PLC and an I O device the connection infor mation is set in the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port that is the orig inator If an I O device is used the Network Configurator must have an EDS file installed that includes connection information for the I O device Refer to Appendix F EDS File Management for the installation procedure The output words and input words for each node for which data is exchanged must be set in the connection information These words are called the output tag set and input tag set A ta
136. to install an Ethernet System Unless you are already experienced in installing com munications systems we strongly recommend that you employ a profes sional to install your system Do not install Ethernet equipment near sources of noise If a noisy envi ronment is unavoidable take adequate measures against noise interfer ence such as installing network components in grounded metal cases or using optical cable in the system When installing an EtherNet IP network that combines an information sys tem with the control system and the communications load may be heavy due to tag data links we recommend configuring the network so that the load does not affect communications For example install the tag data links in a segment that is separate from the information network Note The maximum current consumption of the CS1W EIP21 and CJ1W EIP21 EtherNet IP Units is 410 mA Be sure that the total current consumption of all the Units connected to the same CPU Backplane or Expansion Backplane does not exceed the output capacity of the Power Supply Unit 3 4 2 Recommended Products The following table shows the devices recommended for use with the Ether Net IP Unit 2 3 Selecting the Network Devices 3 4 3 Precautions Precautions on Laying Twisted pair Cable e Noise resistance may be reduced by ground loops which can occur due to improper shield connections and grounding Ground the shield at one location as shown in the following dia
137. to the Ether net network The EtherNet IP Unit s address is listed in 12 digit hexadecimal on the right side of the Unit omron CS1W EIP21 ETHERNET IP UNIT Lot No OMRON Corporation MADE IN JAPAN Oc Ethernet Address Ethernet address 12 digits Note 1 The Ethernet Address can also be checked with the CONTROLLER DATA READ command For details refer to Appendix E FINS Commands Addressed to EtherNet IP Units or Built in EtherNet IP Ports 2 An IP address label is included with the EtherNet IP Unit so the user can record the user set IP address and subnet mask on the label and affix the label to the front of the Unit When this label is affixed to the front of the Unit it is easy to confirm the Units IP address and subnet mask 22 Nomenclature and Functions Section 2 2 Indicators Status Indicators MS NS COMM 100M and 10M Example label 192 168 250 1 SUBNET MASK 255 255 255 0 Ka NODE x16 ei Affix the label on the front of the EtherNet IP Unit between the node address switches and the Ethernet connector EtherNetv IP A 192 168 250 1 SUBNET MASK 255 255 255 0 100BASE TX 10BASE T A EtherNet IP Units or built in EtherNet IP port is equipped with the following indicators that indicate the operating status of the node itself and the overall network CS1W EIP21 a CS MS NS mm COMM pae 100M
138. transferred from the CX Integrator to the PLC all of the CPU Bus Unit are reset so that the routing tables that have been cre ated can be read and enabled Before transferring the routing tables con firm that there will be no problems in the system when the CPU Bus Units are reset 2 To transfer routing tables for multiple nodes to a PLC in one batch connect the CX Integrator to a PLC with only one Communications Unit mounted Routing tables cannot be transferred to other nodes from a PLC with mul tiple Communications Units mounted 3 Routing tables can only be transferred as a batch to multiple nodes within the same network as the PLC to which the CX Integrator is connected Routing Tables Section 8 4 8 4 3 Routing Table Setting Examples m Example 1 Local Network Table for a PLC With Multiple Units Mounted This example shows the local network table settings for a PLC to which multi ple CPU Bus Units are mounted Ethernet EtherNet IP network Controller Link network Network A Network B Unit a Unit b PS Power Supply Unit CPU CPU Unit EIP EtherNet IP Unit CLK Controller Link Unit Local Network Table No Local CPU Bus network Unit 1 A a 2 B b m Example 2 Three Interconnected Networks This example shows the relay network table settings for three different inter connected networks Relay Network Table No Re MN rk Aik
139. transmissions are more reliable but somewhat slower Compared to the FINS UDP method the FINS TCP method has the following characteristics e Data transmission is more reliable due to factors such as retry process ing at the TCP IP layer The FINS TCP method is thus better suited to dealing with communications errors in an IP network that spans several layers e Remote clients can be restricted by means of settings at the server i e the server can be protected from access by non specified IP addresses e Broadcasting cannot be used e TCP IP has various retry procedures and this tends to lower its perfor mance in comparison with UDP IP e There is a limit to the number of connections that can be made i e 16 connections maximum and any given node can communicate only with up to 16 other nodes at a time FINS TCP Method FINS TCP Frame Format TCP Port Number for FINS TCP FINS TCP Connection Numbers Section 8 3 e After a FINS TCP connection connection number remote IP address has been set in the FINS TCP Tab Page of the Network Configurator s Edit Parameters Dialog Box it can be dynamically changed from the lad der program using a FINS command i e FINS TCP CONNECTION REMOTE NODE CHANGE REQUEST The following diagram shows the structure of a TCP packet sent over an Ethernet network Ethernet Ver 2 ip top FINS TCP header FINS frame FCS TCP packet As the diagram shows a nested structure i
140. used Current consumption Unit Weight Dimensions For CJ2 CPU Units refer to the CJ2 CPU Hardware Operation Manual W472 Other general specifications Other specifications conform to the general specifications of the CJ2 or built in Ether Net IP port CJ2 CPU Unit Note If tag data links are being used use 100Base TX Otherwise 10Base T can be used but this is not recommended 16 EtherNet IP Unit and Built in EtherNet IP Port Specifications 2 1 3 Communications Specifications Item CS1 CJ1 CJ2H CJ2M CIP service Tag data links Cyclic communi cations Number of connections 256 Section 2 1 32 Packet interval refresh cycle 0 5 to 10 000 ms in 0 5 ms units Can be set independently for each connection Data is refreshed over the network at the preset interval and does not depend on the number of nodes 1 to 10 000 ms in 0 5 ms units Can be set indepen dently for each connec tion Data is refreshed over the network at the pre set interval and does not depend on the number of nodes Allowed communica tions bandwidth per Unit 6000 pps See note 1 Note Including the heartbeat 3000 pps See note 1 Note Including the heartbeat Number of tags that can be registered 256 32 Tag types CIO Area DM Area EM Area Holding Area Work Area and network symbols See note 8 Number of tags per connecti
141. v3 nvf v Option C Select target network C Add to current network 3 Click the Open Button to read the network configuration file 4 The Network Configurator s Title Bar will display the name of the file that was read C Equip1 Nebvork Configurator Network Device EDSFile T Dai a ER Network Configurator i EtherNet IP Hardware ro Vendor rs Omron Corporation rs DeviceType 3 Communications Adapter 179 Setting Tag Data Links Section 6 2 5 Select any of the options as necessary The options are listed below Select target network Allows you to select specific networks from the net work configuration and open them Add to current document Allows you to add the networks from the network configuration file being opened to the current config uration file Note The save format will vary depending on the Network Configurator version Configuration files ncf created using the Network Configurator for Ether Net IP version 2 or higher can be imported opened by selecting External Data Import from the File Menu 6 2 17 Checking Connections Check the consistency of connection parameters for network configuration files with device parameters set using the Network Configurator and device parameters uploaded from the network 1 Select Check Connections in the Network Menu The following dialog box will be displayed if parameters are normal Network Configurator x
142. will be ON when connections are estab lished for all connections with that target node indicate that the PLC is operating Each node address s flag location i e target ID can be changed from the Network Configurator The data in this table is refreshed when neces sary SECTION 7 Message Communications Functions This section describes message communications using FINS messages and explicit messages TI VOVEIVIEW casio Kote es a dail e en n OS HOE OS 188 7 2 FINS Message Communications 00 0 0 ce eee eee eee 190 7 3 Explicit Message Communications 0 00 cee ee eee ee 192 7 4 Message Communications Specifications 00 0002 e eee 193 7 5 Message Communications Error Indications 0004 194 7 6 Message Communications Errors 00 000 erruer erre 195 187 Overview Section 7 1 7 1 Overview The message communications functions send command response messages between nodes on the Ethernet network The messages can be sent between a computer and PLC between two PLCs between an OMRON PLC and a master made by another company or between slaves The messages can be used to send receive data read time data error logs and other data or con trol operation e g by force setting resetting bits There are two types of messages FINS messages and explicit messages FINS messages Explicit messages Outline Message communications for Standard ODVA mes
143. without Usage of IP mult P 192 168 250 1 CS1W EIP21 39 67 39 67 4 837 4 837 Mbi P 192 168 250 2 CS1W EIP21 39 67 39 67 4 837 4 837 Mbi g 192 168 250 3 CS1W EIP21 39 67 39 67 4 837 4 837 Mbi 192 168 250 4 CS1W EIP21 39 67 39 67 4 837 4 837 Mbi g 192 168 250 5 CS1W EIP21 39 67 39 67 4 837 4 837 Mbi ed 192 168 250 6 CS1W EIP21 39 67 39 67 4 837 4 837 Mbi 192 168 250 7 CS1W EIP21 39 67 39 67 4 837 4 837 Mbi g 192 168 250 8 CS1W EIP21 39 67 39 67 4 837 4 837 Mbi 192 168 250 9 CS1W EIP21 39 67 39 67 4 837 4 837 Mbi 192 168 250 10 CS1W ElP21 39 67 39 67 4 837 4 837 Mbi 192 168 250 11 1W EIP21 39 67 39 67 4 837 4 837 Mbi g 192 168 250 12 Tw EIP21 39 67 39 67 4 837 4 837 Mbi 192 168 250 13 1W EIP21 39 67 39 67 4 837 4 837 Mbi g 192 168 250 14 Tw EIP21 39 67 39 67 4 837 4 837 Mbi F lt 192 168 250 15 Tw EIP21 39 67 39 67 4 837 4 837 Mbi g 192 168 250 16 1w EIP21 39 67 39 67 4 837 4 837 Mbi g 192 168 250 17 1W EIP21 39 67 39 67 4 837 4 837 Mbi 192 168 250 18 Tw EIP21 39 67 39 67 4 837 4 837 Mbi g 192 168 250 19 1W EIP21 39 67 39 67 4 837 4 837 Mbi 192 168 250 20 1W EIP21 39 67 39 67 4 837 4 837 Mbi eoeeoceceoeg f Set Packet Interval RPI Total usage of IP multicast addresses 20 Network Total of Max Mbit s 7 190Mbit s Method 1 Same Packet Interval Setting for Al
144. working directory in the remote host cd Changes the Ethernet Unit work directory to the specified directory cdup Changes the working directory at the remote host to the parent direc tory pwd Displays the Ethernet Unit work directory type Specifies the data type of transferred files get Transfers the specified file from the Memory Card to the local host mget Transfers multiple files from the Memory Card to the local host put Transfers the specified local file to the Memory Card mput Transfers multiple local files to the Memory Card delete Deletes the specified file from the Memory Card mdelete Deletes multiple files from the Memory Card close Disconnects the FTP server bye Closes the FTP client quit Closes the FTP client The EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port is considered to be the remote host and the host computer FTP client is considered to be the local host e A remote file is a file on the Memory Card or in EM File Memory in the CPU Unit A local file is one in the host computer FTP client e The parent directory is the directory one above the working directory 11 5 2 Using the Commands open Format open IP_address or host name of FTP server Function Connects the FTP server Normally when the FTP client is booted the FTP server IP address is specified to execute this command automatically 308 Using FTP Commands user Fo
145. 0 00 00 2000 0 276 10 3 I O Response Time in Tag Data Links 0 0 0 0 nern 283 10 3 1 Timing of Data Transmissions 0 0002 00 00 283 10 3 2 EtherNet IP Unit or CJ2H Built in Port Data Processing Time 283 10 3 3 Effect on the CPU Unit s Cycle Time 0 0 284 10 3 4 Tag Data Link I O Response Time Calculation Example 285 10 4 Tag Data Link Performance for CJ2M Built in EtherNet IP Ports 291 10 4 1 OVELVIEW we ods be eS ea in sie ES ea Si DE ee as 291 10 4 2 Tag Data Link I O Response Time 00 292 10 5 Message Service Transmission Delay 0 0 0 2 eee ee eee 294 10 5 1 Maximum Transmission Delays Excluding Delays in the Network 294 261 Communications System Section 10 1 10 1 Communications System 10 1 1 Tag Data Link Communications Method Packet Interval RPI In EtherNet IP tag data links the data transmission period is set for each con Settings nection as the packet interval RPI The target device will send data i e out 262 put tags once each packet interval RPI regardless of the number of nodes Also the heartbeat frame is sent from the originator to the target for each con nection The target uses the heartbeat to check to see if errors have occurred in the connection with the originator The data transmission period of the heartbeat frame depends on the packet interval RPI settings m Heartbeat
146. 00 c eee eee eee 10 1 5 1 OVERVIEW 535s 56 a SAO oS SG A Se Re OR eat a WAS 10 1 5 2 Network Configurator Requirements 10 1 5 3 Precautions When Using the Network Configurator 11 EtherNet IP Unit Features 1 1 Section 1 1 EtherNet IP Unit Features CX One Support Software 3 Switching hub 2 Twisted pair cable High speed High capacity Data Exchange through Data Links Tag Data Link Cyclic Communications Cycle Time Note Communicating with FINS Messages FINS TCP and FINS UDP Note Network Connections with Controller Link 1 Built in EtherNet IP port on CJ2 CPU Unit CJ2H CPULIL EIP CJ2M CPU3L 1 CS1W EIP21 EtherNet IP Unit for CS series 1 CJ1W EIP21 EtherNet IP Unit CS series PLC EtherNet IP System Configuration Example EtherNet IP is an industrial multi vendor network that uses Ethernet compo nents The EtherNet IP specifications are open standards managed by the ODVA Open DeviceNet Vendor Association just like DeviceNet EtherNet IP is not just a network between controllers it is also used as a field network Since EtherNet IP uses standard Ethernet technology various gen eral purpose Ethernet devices can be used in the network The EtherNet IP Unit and built in EtherNet IP port have the following features The EtherNet IP protocol supports implicit communications which al
147. 000 to D32767 WR W000 to W511 HR HO000 to H1535 EM banks 0 to 18 En_00000 to En_32767 n 0 to 18 Address L Address H command The address of the first word from which to read the data is specified in hexadecimal as shown below Address L The lower 2 digits when the first word address is given in 4 digit hexadecimal Address H The higher 2 digits when the first word address is given in 4 digit hexadecimal No of Read Bytes command The number of bytes of read data is specified in 1 byte 2 digit hexadecimal The range is 01 to C8 Hex 1 to 200 decimal No of bytes received response The number of bytes received from the destination node address remote node is returned in hexadecimal Destination node address response The node address of the CS CJ series EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port that returned the response is returned in hexadecimal Read data response The specified area word and byte data is returned in order from word H high byte bits 8 to 15 to word L low byte bits 0 to 7 If an odd number is specified for the number of read bytes the last 1 byte of data will be read to the high word The actual address L address H and number of read bytes that can be spec ified depends on the model of the CPU Unit and the data area being read Do not exceed the boundary of the data areas for the PLC you are using Word Data Read Service Code 1D Hex Command Block
148. 006 D1004 r 021 J MOV 2401 D1005 r 021 MOV 0A0C D1006 F 021 5 MOV 0600 D1007 F 021 5 MOV 0102 D1008 F 021 5 Mov 2001 D1009 F 021 E Command data MOV 2401 D1010 fa Set the CIP UCMM MESSAGE SEND command s command data F 021 J Nov 0800 D1011 in words D01000 to D01019 in routing data format r 021 J MOV 120D D1012 021 5 MOV 3139 D1013 r 021 5 MOV 322E D1014 r 021 3 MOV 3136 D1015 r 021 J MOV 382E D1016 m 021 MOV 3235 D1017 r 021 J MOV 302E D1018 021 MOV 3200 D1019 021 Execution MOV 0001 0000 Moves 0001 into CIO 0000 condition 000000 A20200 151100 490 000013 ewno D01000 D02000 D00000 Sends 8 bytes of command data to destination node address 06 receives Communications Online Flag 14 bytes of response data and stores it in the local node starting at D02000 Enabled Flag n 11 bit 00 ies D00000 is control data ASL 0000 Shifts the contents of CIO 0000 one bit to the left 000001 A20200 A21900 021 T 000018 mov A203 D00006 Copies the completion code network communications error response code Communications Network Communication 026 jax from A203 to D00006 EnabiediFied Execution Error Flag ASR 0000 Shifts the contents of CIO 0000 one bit to the right and 001 e retries in the next cycle CIO 000000 ON
149. 1 Connection Information 60 Bytes Fifteen items are returned in the following sequence 409 FINS Commands Addressed to EtherNet IP Units or Built in EtherNet IP Ports Appendix E 90 008 NO Oe NSS 13 14 15 The number of times active connections were correctly established The number of times a SYN packet was received while waiting to establish a passive connection The number of times active or passive connections were correctly established The number of times an established connection was cut off The number of times the connection wait status was cut off The number of times protocol control blocks or other actively allocated structures were released The number of segments for the round trip time time from segment transmission to ACK The number of times the round trip time was changed The number of times a delayed acknowledgement ACK was sent If the order of the received segments is reversed ACK is sent with a packet of data separate from ACK response to input data etc or is immedi ately sent with the ACK for other data The number of times the connection was cut off because no ACK was returned after several resend at tempts The number of times no ACK was returned within the resend timer set time The resend timer sets the max imum time limit between the data being output and ACK being returned The number of times no window advertisement is received within the time set on the duration timer
150. 1 CJTW EIP21 CJ1W E1P21 1a Ja te la e Usage of Device Bandwidth lt gt x Message Code Date Description Ready LEtherNet IP T Unknown Realtek RTL8139 810x Family Fast Ethernet NIC 192168250200 100M Off line Connections In this example there are 10 CS1W EIP21 Units and 10 CJ1W EIP21 Units for a total of 20 devices connected in the network Each device has one 100 word tag for transmission and nineteen 100 word tags for reception so that the Units exchange data mutually By default the packet intervals RPI are set to 10 ms for all of the connec tions The devices IP addresses range from 192 168 250 1 to 192 168 250 20 IP address 192 168 250 1 192 168 250 2 192 168 250 3 192 168 250 20 CS1W EIP 21 CS1W EIP 21 CS1W EIP21 CJ1W EIP21 jii 7 100 words Tag data link area with 100 word words 100 words x 20 Units 100 words 10 CS1W EIP21 Units 10 CJ1W EIP21 Units 20 Units total The RPI is 10 ms ethernet default for all connections Checking the Device When the Detail Button is clicked in the Usage of Device Bandwidth Area it is Bandwidth Usage apparent that the percentage of the allowed tag data link bandwidth being used by each device s tag data link Usage of Capacity is 39 67 as shown in the following dialog box 277 Adjusting the Communications Load Section 10 2 Changing the Settings 278 Usage of Device Bandwidth Comment Usage of Capac Mbit s
151. 1 H 0 1 ms 0 1 ms 0 1 ms Number of words x 0 7 us 0 2 ms x Coefficient 2 0 2 ms x Coefficient 2 1 5 ms Number of words x 1 us x Long distance Rack Coefficient 3 Note 1 When one of the listed CPU Bus Units is mounted in a CS series Long distance Rack the I O refreshing time is extended by the distance to the Rack in which the Unit is mounted regardless of the model of the CPU Unit The following graph shows the coefficients 2 and 3 required to cal culate this effect Coefficient i i i i 7 i i i i i fec i i t i meen AA i i i DEAN S i 10 15 20 25 w 35 40 45 50 Distance to Long distance Rack m 2 The additional time for CJ2H CPU Units with unit version 1 1 or later will be as follows if high speed interrupts are enabled 0 1 ms Number of words transferred x 0 87 us 10 3 4 Tag Data Link I O Response Time Calculation Example When using the tag data link functions of the EtherNet IP Unit or CJ2H built in port there is a time lag between the point when the data link area s data changes due to an input at a node and the point when the change is output at another node s data link area This time lag is called the tag data link I O response time This example shows how to calculate the minimum and maximum I O response times in the following configuration for connection 1 opened between node 1 and node 2 285 I O Response
152. 100 Mbps Full Duplex Operates in 100Base TX full duplex Note Adjust the EtherNet IP Unit s link settings to match the communications set tings of the connected switching hub If the settings do not match the link will become unstable and prevent normal communications The following table shows the allowed settings for each switching hub communications mode Switching hub setting EtherNet IP Unit setting Auto 10 Mbps fixed 100 Mbps fixed negotiation Full Half Full Half duplex duplex duplex duplex Auto negotiation 10 Mbps Full duplex fixed Half duplex 100 Mbps Full duplex fixed Half duplex Note Best Recommended OK Allowed Not allowed 3 8 2 Making TCP IP Settings with the Network Configurator 1 2 3 Use the Network Configurator to change IP address settings for any device other than a CS CJ series EtherNet IP Unit or built in port You can also use the Network Configurator to change IP address settings for a CS CJ series EtherNet IP Unit or built in port 1 Connect the Network Configurator online Refer to 6 2 9 Connecting the Network Configurator to the Network for details on connecting the Network Configurator to the EtherNet IP Unit 55 TCP IP and Link Settings Section 3 8 2 Select Tools Setup TCP IP Configuration to display the following Setup TCP IP Configuration Dialog Box and set the TCP IP Configuration for th
153. 11 hex 8 355 840 390 Appendix E FINS Commands Addressed to EtherNet IP Units or Built in EtherNet IP Ports Command code Function name Remarks MRC SRC RESET CONTROLLER DATA READ CONTROLLER STATUS READ INTERNODE ECHO TEST BROADCAST TEST RESULTS READ BROADCAST DATA SEND ERROR LOG READ ERROR LOG CLEAR PING FINS TCP CONNECTION REMOTE NODE CHANGE REQUEST FINS TCP CONNECTION STATUS READ IP ADDRESS TABLE WRITE IP ADDRESS WRITE IP ADDRESS TABLE READ IP ROUTER TABLE READ PROTOCOL STATUS READ MEMORY STATUS READ SOCKET STATUS READ ADDRESS INFORMATION READ IP ADDRESS READ EXPLICIT MESSAGE SEND CIP UCMM MESSAGE SEND RESET Resets the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port Command Block e _ Command code Response Block esos y Command Response code code 391 FINS Commands Addressed to EtherNet IP Units or Built in EtherNet IP Ports Appendix E Precautions e No response will be returned if the command ends normally A response will be returned only if an error occurs In some cases send requests SEND 192 RECV 193 instructions made from the PLC to the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port just before execution of the RESET command may not be executed e Applications that use TCP IP such as FINS TCP communications services are closed immedi
154. 168 2501 CJ2B EIP21 192 168 2502 CJ2B EIP21 5 Use the device connection structure tree as required to change the RPI and timeout settings Connection settings can be displayed on the network configuration Select View Device s Connection Structure Tree from the Network Menu 149 Setting Tag Data Links Section 6 2 Device s Connection Structure Tree Display Type Based on Master Device Originator D Based on Slave Device Target Display Option Display Route Path Structure ER Network Configurator EtherNet IP_1 p 192 168 2501 CJ2B EIP21 5 NO1InData M 500ms ed 192 168 250 2 CJ2B EIP21 5 NO1_OutData The Display the detail of Connection Check Box can be used to switch between device level and connection level displays of tag data link com munications e An asterisk will be displayed after the device name of the originator set for the connection e The Edit Device Parameters Dialog Box can be displayed by selecting a connection and clicking the Edit Button The connections can be edited in this dialog box 6 2 6 Setting Tags Using Data Link Tool Using the EtherNet IP Datalink Tool enables easily setting data links similar to those for the Controller Link by using only I O memory addresses This method has the following restrictions e Settings can be made only for tag data links between OMRON EtherNet IP Units and built in EtherNet IP ports e Tags must b
155. 2 168 250 4 CS1W EIP21 192 168 250 5 CS1W EIP21 P 192 168 250 6 CS1W EIP21 192 168 250 7 CS1W EIP21 192 168 250 8 CS1W EIP21 192 168 2509 CS1W EIP21 P 192 168 250 10 CS1W EIP21 192 168 250 11 CJ1W EIP21 192 168 250 12 CJ1W EIP21 P 192 168 250 13 CJTW EIP21 9 192 168 250 14 CJ1TW EIP21 192 168 250 15 CJ1W EIP21 192 168 250 168 CJ1TW EIP21 P 192 168 250 17 CJ1TW EIP21 p 192 168 250 18 CJ1TW EIP21 192 168 250 19 CJ1W EIP21 192 168 250 20 CJ1W EIP21 Usage of Capac 73 00 73 00 73 00 73 00 73 00 73 00 73 00 73 00 73 00 73 00 73 00 73 00 73 00 73 00 73 00 73 00 73 00 73 00 73 00 73 00 73 00 73 00 73 00 73 00 73 00 73 00 73 00 73 00 73 00 73 00 73 00 73 00 73 00 73 00 73 00 73 00 73 00 73 00 73 00 73 00 Mbit s without 9 413 9 413 Mbi 9 413 9 413 Mbi 9 413 9 413 Mbi 9 413 9 413 Mbi 9 413 9 413 Mbi 9 413 9 413 Mbi 9 413 9 413 Mbi 9 413 9 413 Mbi 9 413 9 413 Mbi 9 413 9 413 Mbi 9 413 9 413 Mbi 9 413 9 413 Mbi 9 413 9 413 Mbi 9 413 9 413 Mbi 9 413 9 413 Mbi 9 413 9 413 Mbi 9 413 9 413 Mbi 9 413 9 413 Mbi 9 413 9 413 Mbi 9 413 9 413 Mbi Usage of IP mult eoeoeoeogeg Set Packet Interval RPI Total usage of IP multicast addresses Network Total of Max Mbit s 11 766Mbit s Method 2 Changing the Packet Interval RPI of On
156. 2H CPU64 EIP PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER open sw setna BATTERY bA loBUSY PERIPHERAL 101 mm co 100M 1 e IMI CS1W EIP21 130 mm CJ1W EIP21 90 mm CJ2H CPUULI EIP 2 7 mm y a 90 mm y 4 2 7mm 79 8 mm EtherNet IP 100BASE TX 1 E T Section 2 1 65 mm 74 5 mm EtherNet IP Unit and Built in EtherNet IP Port Specifications CJ2M CPU3 CONTROLLER SW SETTING OPEN sarreny V PERIPHERAL J 90 mm 1o0BASE TK JOBASE T EtherNet IP 2 1 5 Software Configuration Section 2 1 76 16 mm Memory Card Interface with CPU Unit EM file memory FINS FINS f ovate ie oe FINS encapsulization Tag data link function Explicit messaging FINS Service Automatic FINS UDP and FINS TCP CIP clock adjustment Encapsulation A TCP UDP IP ARP ICMP IGMP LAN controller driver LAN controller 20 Nomenclature and Functions Section 2 2 2 2 Nomenclature and Functions 2 2 1 Nomencla
157. 3 1 Hook the claw on the top of the Unit onto the Backplane Backplane 2 Insert the Unit into Backplane connectors and securely tighten the screw at the bottom of the Unit Tighten the screws to a torque of 0 4 N m 39 Mounting to a PLC Section 3 3 3 When removing the Unit first loosen the screw at the bottom of the Unit Fixing screws Note When mounting the Unit provide the clearance shown below to facilitate easy mounting or dismounting T 20 mm min Backplane T 20 mm min Phillips screwdriver 3 3 4 Handling Precautions e Always turn OFF the power supply to the PLC before mounting or dis mounting a Unit or connecting or disconnecting cables e Provide separate conduits or ducts for the I O lines to prevent noise from high tension lines or power lines e Leave the label attached to the Unit when wiring Removing the label may result in malfunction if wire clippings or other foreign matter enters the Unit Remove the label after the completion of wiring to ensure proper heat dissipation Leaving the label attached may result in malfunction Remove the label after wiring 40 Network Installation Section 3 4 3 4 Network Installation 3 4 1 Basic Installation Precautions e Take the greatest care when installing the Ethernet System being sure to follow ISO 8802 3 specifications You must obtain a copy of these specifi cations and be sure you understand them before attempting
158. 454 bytes RECV 098 990 words 1 980 bytes max CMND 490 1 990 bytes max broadcasting 1 462 bytes after FINS com mand code Data contents The following data is sent and received with the execution of each instruction SEND 090 Sends request for remote node to receive data and receives response data RECV 098 Sends request for remote node to send data and receives response data CMND 490 Sends any FINS command and receives response data Communications Ports 0 to 7 Eight transmissions can occur simultaneously port number Response moni 0000 tor time 2 s default 0001 to FFFF 0 1 to 6 553 5 s in 0 1 s increments specified by user Number of retries 0 to 15 retries Note 1 The maximum data length is limited to 512 bytes for data exchange be tween the PLC and SYSMAC LINK Systems or the PLC and SYSMAC BUS 2 Remote I O Systems 2 When broadcasting do not require a response Use the FINS UDP method for broadcasting 220 Communicating between OMRON PLCs Section 8 6 8 6 2 PLC Communications Data Areas The following table shows the I O data areas involved when SEND 090 and RECV 098 are used CIO Area CIO 0000 to CIO 6143 Work Area W000 to W511 Holding Area H000 to H1535 Auxiliary Area A000 to A959 See note 1 Timer Area TIMO000 to 4095 Counter Area CNTO0000 to 4095 DM Area D00000 to D32767 EM Area E00000 to E32767 See note 2
159. 50 2 P 192 168 250 3 192 168 250 4 P 192 168 250 5 amp 192 168 250 6 P 192 168 250 7 192 168 250 8 192 168 250 9 P 192 168 250 10 192 168 250 11 192 168 250 12 P 192 168 250 113 192 168 250 14 192 168 250 15 192 168 250 16 192 168 250 17 192 168 250 18 P 192 168 250 19 192 168 250 20 Comment CS1W ElP21 CS1w ElP21 CS1W ElP21 CS1W EIP21 CS1W ElP21 CS1W EIP21 CS1W ElP21 CS1w ElP21 CS1W ElP21 CS1W ElP21 1TW EIP21 Tw EIP21 Tw EIP21 Tw EIP21 Tw EIP21 1W EIP21 TW EIP21 1W EIP21 Tw EIP21 1TW EIP21 ppg Usage of Capac 54 67 56 33 39 67 56 33 39 67 56 33 39 67 56 33 39 67 56 33 39 67 56 33 39 67 56 33 39 67 56 33 39 67 56 33 39 67 56 33 39 67 56 33 39 67 56 33 39 67 56 33 39 67 56 33 39 67 56 33 39 67 56 33 39 67 56 33 39 67 56 33 39 67 56 33 56 33 56 33 Mbit s without 6 897 4 837 4 837 4 837 4 837 4 837 4 837 4 837 4 837 4 837 7 125 Mbi 7 125 Mbi 7 125 Mbi 7 125 Mbi 7 125 Mbi 7 125 Mbi 7 125 Mbi 7 125 Mbi 7 125 Mbi 7 125 Mbi 4 837 7 125 Mbi 4 837 7 125 Mbi 4 837 7 125 Mbi 4 837 4 837 4 837 4 837 4 837 7 125 Mbi 7 125 Mbi 7 125 Mbi 7 125 Mbi 7 125 Mbi 4 837 7 125 Mbi 7 125 7 125 Mbi Set Packet Interval RPI Total usage of IP multicast addresses Network Total of Max Mbit s
160. 50 Node_address b Setting a particular IP address e If you want to store the setting in the CPU Unit set it in the EtherNet IP Unit s allocated DM area within the CPU Unit e If you want to store the setting in the Unit set the IP address in the Edit Parameters Dialog Box of the I O Table Dialog Box from the CX Pro grammer and transfer the setting to the Unit Refer to 3 7 Setting the Local IP Address and 3 8 TCP IP and Link Settings When necessary set the following items in the Edit Parameters Dialog Box and transfer them TCP IP Ethernet FINS UDP FINS TCP FTP Auto Ad just Time Status Area SNMP and SNMP Trap Refer to 3 10 Other Parameters When necessary set the routing tables If the FINS communications service is being used and multiple network Communications Units are mounted in the PLC set the routing tables from the CX Integrator and transfer the table Refer to the Cx Integrator Operation Manual Cat No W464 for the set ting procedure Overview of Initial Setup Procedures Section 3 1 9 Test communications Send a PING command to the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port Refer to 3 11 Communications Test Settings Required for Tag Data Link Service Cyclic Communications 1 Using the EtherNet IP Datalink Tool in the Network Configurator to Set the Parameters With this method there is no flexibility in the settings but you can
161. 501 CJ2B EIP21 amp 1921682502 CJ1W EIP 1 Download after changed to Program mode F Cancel When the Download after changed to Program mode Button is clicked all CPU Units will be changed to PROGRAM mode and the parameters will be downloaded Confirm safety for all controlled equipment if the CPU Units are changed to PROGRAM mode The operating mode can be re turned to the previous setting after the parameters have been downloaded During the download the following progress monitor will be displayed to show the progress of the download Downloading Device Parameter 192 168 250 1 Downloading Parameter Setting Tag Data Links Section 6 2 If the operating mode of one or more CPU Units was changed to download the parameters the CPU Units can be returned to the previous operating mode If the No Button is clicked the CPU Units will remain in PROGRAM mode Network Configurator i Controller s mode will be returned to the state before starting download Yes No 4 The following dialog box will be displayed indicating that the download was completed Network Configurator e J Download of device parameter was completed 6 2 11 Uploading Tag Data Link Parameters 1 2 3 Tag data link parameters such as the tag set settings and connection set tings can be uploaded from EtherNet IP Units in the EtherNet IP network The following procedure shows how to upload the parame
162. 7 tags can be registered and two byes will be added to the size if the PLC status is included in the tag set To confirm the changes click the OK Button at the bottom of the Edit Tag Set Dialog Box Click the OK Button at the bottom of the Edit Device Parameters Dialog Box Advanced 135 Setting Tag Data Links Section 6 2 2 Importing Network Symbols Created with the CX Programmer to the Network Configurator Creating Global Symbols Importing Symbols to the Network Configurator 1 2 3 Note 136 If the CJ2H CPU6LI EIP or CJ2M CPU3LI is used you can create network symbols using the CX Programmer import them into the Network Configura tor and then create tags and tag sets Use the following procedure Create global symbol with the Global Symbol Editor of the CX Programmer and select Input or Output for the network variable properties Safe the project when you are finished Any global symbols with nput or Output set for the network variable property will be imported when the import procedure is performed from the Edit Device Parameters Dialog Box 2 Tex DW ASR ME S As amp Ww S a be oS RAR aA 6 88 zix Name Data Type Address Value Net Variable Rack Locati Usage Comment Be NewProject PEM WORD A465 Work EM4 Area Parameter ffi NewPLO1 CJ2H Offline P_EMS WORD A466 Work EMB Area Parameter ma Symbols P EM WORD
163. 715 CPU Bus Unit Error Unit Number Flags Function When an error occurs in a data exchange between the CPU Unit and a CPU Bus Unit the CPU Bus Unit Error Flag A40207 and the corresponding flag in A417 are turned ON Bits 00 to 15 correspond to unit numbers 0 to F The ERR ALM indicator on the front of the CPU Unit will flash but CPU operation will continue Section 4 5 Settings 0 No error 1 Error A42700 to A42715 CPU Bus Unit Set ting Error Unit Number Flags When a CPU Bus Unit Setting Error occurs A40203 and the corresponding flag in A27 are turned ON Bits 00 to 15 correspond to unit numbers 0 to F The ERR ALM indicator on the front of the CPU Unit will flash but CPU operation will continue 4 5 2 Read Write Bits User Settings AS50100 to AS50115 CPU Bus Unit Restart Bits Description Bits A50100 through A50115 can be turned ON to reset CPU Bus Units number 0 through 15 respectively Note The CPU Bus Unit Initializing Flags A30200 to A30215 will turn ON when initialization of the Units begins and turn OFF when it is com pleted Note When turning ON the CPU Bus Unit Restart Bit from a ladder program use the SET instruction 0 No setting error 1 Setting error Settings OFF to ON Unit restarted Automatically turned OFF by system after restart processing has been completed 89 Auxiliary Area Data Section 4 5 90 This section ex
164. 8 sending 234 sending using CMND 490 243 F FALS instruction xxiii FINS communications 233 overview 8 specifications 199 220 testing 399 FINS communications service 106 107 FINS communications services 94 FINS message communications 187 190 FINS node address relationship to IP address 94 105 FINS response codes troubleshooting with response codes 371 FINS TCP 202 communications 204 connection numbers 203 connection status 204 features 202 frame format 203 procedure 205 TCP port number 203 FINS TCP communications method 100 FINS TCP Connection Status Flags 81 FINS UDP 200 frame format 200 procedure 201 UDP port numbers 201 FINS UDP and FINS TCP comparison 199 FINS UDP communications methods 96 FinsGateway 215 flags Error Flags 394 FTP Status Flag 314 FTP 3 62 302 FTP server application examples 307 commands 308 bye 312 cd 310 close 312 delete 312 dir 309 get 311 Is 309 mdelete 312 meget 311 mput 311 open 308 put 311 pwd 310 quitting 312 type 311 user 309 connecting 304 308 data type 311 displaying current directory 310 file types 303 protection 303 protocol 303 quitting 312 See also Memory Cards specifications 303 status 314 FTP Status Flag 314 full duplex 55 G gateway default gateway 54 general specifications 14 get command 303 308 311 320 Get the time information from
165. 9 and carriage returns CR after specified fields CR LF ODOA 317 Using File Memory Section 11 7 Example Data format using words delimited by tabs and CRs after every 10 fields I O memory 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1234 5678 9ABC DEFO 1234 5678 9ABC DEFO 1234 5678 10 9ABC DEFO 1234 5678 9ABC DEFO 1234 5678 9ABC DEFO TXT file contents 31 32 33 34 09 35 36 37 38 09 39 41 42 43 09 1 2 3 4 HT 5 6 7 8 HT 9 A B C HT 35 36 37 38 0D 0A 39 41 42 43 09 5 6 7 8 CRI LF 9 A B CHT TXT file displayed as text 1234_15678_I9ABCL_IDEF0L11234 15678_J9ABCL_IDEF0L11234 _15678 9ABCLIDEF0L11234 15678_LI9ABCLIDEF0L11234 15678LI9ABCLIDEFO HT Used to display tab space when displayed as text m CSV Format The CSV format is a data format using comma delimiters that is specified by ladder instructions READ DATA FILE FREAD 700 and WRITE DATA FILE FWRIT 701 in the CPU Unit The CSV format is configured according to the specified FREAD 700 and FWRIT 701 parameters as follows Data format Use of CRs and CR position Words delimited by commas e No CRs Double words delimited by com CR after every 10 fields mas e CR after each field e CR after every 2 fields e CR a
166. 9 8 7 e 5 4 3 2 To n 3 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 n 4 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 ms 63 62 59 CPU Unit CPU Unit 2 1 PLC status when included PLC status PLC status PLC status when included Output t t 1 O memory EG Input tag set I O memory a J Connection 7 b pe gt on nal AA P le g h i Target data link status EtherNet IP The target ID may be duplicated depending on the IP addresses of the target nodes In this case it is necessary to change the target ID with the Network Configurator For information on how to change the device number refer to step 4 under Registering Devices in the Register Device List on page 141 119 Overview of Tag Data Links Section 6 1 The following table shows the operation of each the bits when multiple con nections are used to communicate with a node and the PLC status is speci fied in all of the connections Name allocated area Contents Target Node PLC Operating Flag Each flag indicates the operating status of the Information Note 120 Layout set to default settings Words n 2 to n 5 Layout set to user settings Words n 32 to n 47 Note Corresponds to the PLC sta tus s PLC Operating Flag
167. Attribute Value The error clear codes are listed in the following table Error code Data cleared Hex FFFE Current error clears the highest priority error 0008B Interrupt task error 009A Basic I O error 009B PLC Setup error 02F0 Inner Board non fatal error 0300 to 035F Special I O Unit error 00A0 to 00A1 SYSMAC BUS error 0500 to 055F Special I O Unit settings error 00E7 I O verification error When registered and actual I O tables are different When disconnecting or connecting I O Units 00F7 Battery error 0200 to 020F CS CJ series CPU Bus Unit error last 2 digits are binary code for the Unit No For parity errors generated when data transferred between CS CJ series CPU Bus Unit and CPU Unit For watchdog timer errors in CS CJ series CPU Bus Unit 0400 to 040F CPU Bus settings error last 2 digits are binary code for the Unit No System error FAL FAL instruction executed 4101 to 42FF Note Error clear codes are 1 word 2 byte data so the above codes are specified with the low byte first The low to high bytes for the above codes are set as high to low bytes in I O memory when setting the codes as data for operand S of CMND 490 For example to specify battery error OOF7 Hex specify the error code as F7 Hex followed by 00 Hex as shown in the following diagram 10 C4 oo 65 F7 00 2F The class ID depends on the unit version i Version
168. Bus Unit System Setup and the FINS node address The values read with this command however are not necessarily the settings actually used for operation The settings that are actually used for operation can be confirmed using CONTROLLER DATA READ page 392 and ADDRESS INFORMATION READ page 414 This command is supported for CJ series EtherNet IP Units only Command Block 27 67 Command code Response Block Command Response Number of IP address Subnet mask code code addresses FINS node number Parameters Number of Addresses Response The number of sets of FINS node addresses IP addresses and subnet masks being returned The EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port is always 0001 1 decimal FINS Node Address Response Node address set on the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port hexadecimal 415 FINS Commands Addressed to EtherNet IP Units or Built in EtherNet IP Ports Appendix E IP Address Response The local IP address set in the CPU Bus Unit System Setup for the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port is returned in order starting from the leftmost bytes in hexadecimal If the local IP address set in the allocated words in the DM Area is enabled 0 0 0 0 is returned Subnet Mask Response The subnet mask set in the CPU Bus Unit System Setup for the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port is returned in order starting from the leftmost bytes in hexadecimal Response Codes
169. CMP status TCP status UDP status code code 407 FINS Commands Addressed to EtherNet IP Units or Built in EtherNet IP Ports Appendix E Parameters IP Status Response Twelve types of IP status information occupying 4 bytes each are returned in the following sequence Each value is returned as an 8 digit hexadecimal value 1 Total number of IP packets received 2 The number of IP packets discarded due to an error with the checksum in the packet header 3 The number of IP packets discarded because the received packet was larger than the overall packet length value in the packet header 4 The number of IP packets discarded because the minimum size of the IP header data could not be stored in the first short buffer See note when an attempt was made to store the packet 5 The number of packets discarded for one of the following reasons The IP header length value in the IP header was smaller than the smallest size of the IP header The size of the first short buffer See note was smaller than the IP header length value in the IP header when storing the packet 6 The number of IP packets discarded because the IP header length was larger than the overall packet length value in the packet header 7 The number of fragmented packets received 8 The number of received fragmented IP packets discarded because a queue for reassembly could not be secured 9 The number of fragmented IP packets discarded because they could not b
170. CX Programmers Edit Parameters Dialog Box At the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port a UDP IP frame received with a FINS UDP port number is recognized as a FINS frame Procedure for Using FINS UDP 1 2 3 1 Make the basic settings Refer to Initial Settings in 3 1 1 Procedures 2 Keep the CX Programmer connected online right click the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port in the PLC IO Table Dialog Box and select Edit Unit Setup Set the following in the CPU Bus Unit Setup Area from the FINS UDP Tab Page of the Edit Parameters Dialog Box e IP Address Conversion e FINS UDP Port No Default 9600 e IP Address List Set only when the conversion method is set to IP ad dress table e Dynamic Change of remote IP addresses 3 Select Transfer to PLC from the PLC Menu and click the Yes Button The setting data will be transferred to the CPU Bus Unit System Setup Area in the CPU Unit 4 Make the routing table settings and transfer them to each PLC See note Set the routing tables with CX Integrator and transfer it to each PLC 5 Create a ladder program that includes the SEND 090 RECV 098 and CMND 490 instructions Note Routing tables are required in the following situations e When communicating with a PLC or computer on another network e g remote programming or monitoring using FINS messages or a CX Pro grammer e When multiple Communications Units are mounted to a single PLC i e CPU Unit e When
171. Cat No W465 E1 05 SYSMAC CS and CJ Series CS1W EIP21 100Base TX CJ1W EIP21 100Base TX CJ2H CPU6L1 EIP 100Base TX CJ2M CPU3_ 100Base TX 10Base T EtherNet IP Units OPERATION MANUAL OMRON CS1W EIP21 100Base TX CJ1W EIP21 100Base TX CJ2H CPU61 EIP 100Base TX CJ2M CPU3_ 100Base TX 10Base T EtherNet IP Units Operation Manual Revised February 2010 Notice OMRON products are manufactured for use according to proper procedures by a qualified operator and only for the purposes described in this manual The following conventions are used to indicate and classify precautions in this manual Always heed the information provided with them Failure to heed precautions can result in injury to people or dam age to property N DANGER Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which if not avoided will result in death or serious injury Additionally there may be severe property damage N WARNING Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which if not avoided could result in death or serious injury Additionally there may be severe property damage Z Caution Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which if not avoided may result in minor or moderate injury or property damage OMRON Product References All OMRON products are capitalized in this manual The word Unit is also capitalized when it refers to an OMRON product regardless of whether or not it appears in the proper name
172. D Note A body format of either 8 bits or 16 bits is possible Response Block 90 Service Code Parameters Service code command response 10 Hex is specified for commands For responses the highest bit will turn ON and 90E Hex will be returned Class ID command Always C4 2F The class ID depends on the unit version The class ID is C4 for unit version 2 0 and 2F for unit version 1 0 Instance ID command Always 00 Hex Attribute ID command Information to write is specified by the attribute ID The attribute IDs are listed in the following table Attribute ID Hex Attribute value size CPU Unit operating mode 1 word 2 bytes 65 CPU Unit errors 1 word 2 bytes 252 Receiving Explicit Messages Section 9 2 e CPU Operating Mode Attribute ID 64 Hex Changes the CPU Unit operating mode The Attribute Values are as follows 0001 Hex PROGRAM mode 0002 Hex MONITOR mode 0004 Hex RUN mode Note The specified code for the above operating modes are 1 word 2 byte data and are specified with the low byte first For example for PRO GRAM mode the code is specified as 01 Hex followed by 00 Hex Ac cordingly the low to high bytes for the above codes are set as high to low bytes in I O memory when setting the codes as data for oper and S of CMND 490 e Clearing CPU Unit Errors when Attribute ID 65 Hex Clears any fatal or non fatal errors in the CPU Unit Sets the error clear code to
173. D 66 Hex Reads the CPU Unit model Read data response The specified information is returned in order e CPU Unit operating mode attribute ID 64 Hex The CPU Unit operating mode is returned in 1 word 2 byte hexadecimal for mat as follows 0001 Hex PROGRAM mode 0002 Hex MONITOR mode 0004 Hex RUN mode PROGRAM mode MONITOR mode RUN mode 251 Receiving Explicit Messages Section 9 2 Note The codes for the above modes are 1 word 2 byte data and are returned in low byte first For example for PROGRAM mode the code is returned as 01 Hex followed by 00 Hex e CPU Unit Errors when Attribute ID 65 Hex The CPU Unit fatal non fatal error data is returned in 1 word 2 byte hexa decimal format as follows 01 Hex Error 00 Hex No error 15 1 0 1 Error e CPU Unit Model when Attribute ID 66 Hex The CPU Unit model is returned in ASCII Size 2 bytes Always 1400 Hex Model 20 bytes fixed Unused area is filled with 20 Hex spaces and returned 20 bytes Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte 14 00 Unitname 20 20 CPU Unit Write Service Code 10 Hex This PLC Object service writes CPU Unit information including the operating mode and clearing errors Command Block C4 10 Ch 0 The class ID depends on the unit version Version 2 0 The class ID is C4 A Version 1 0 The class ID is 2F Class ID Attribute ID Service Code Attribute Value Instance I
174. D is decided independently by the vendor Each Attribute also has Attribute ID Each Object is accessed to by using Class ID Instance ID and Attribute ID In the device you can designate Object by specifying these three IDs When requesting Service you should specify Class ID Instance ID and Attribute ID Instance ID and Attribute ID may not be required depending on the Service The Class ID Instance ID and Attribute ID identify a location in the device and are known as the request path Class ID 2 Attribute 1 cessio 2 Attribute 3 Attribute 2 Attribute 3 Attribute 4 Instance ID 1 Instance ID 1 Class ID 1 Device 382 CIP Message Communications Appendix D Route Path Route Path In the CIP unlike the internet protocol the transmission frame contains a complete relay route from the trans mission node to the reception node The described route is called the route path The route path is described as EPATH type The basic concept of the route path is as follows First of all specify a network port of the transmission node with the destination network and specify a node address called the Link Address on that network For the relay node similarly specify a network port with the destination network and node address on that network Then repeat the same procedure to the final destina tion X Y Z Object A Obj
175. EtherNet IP port according to the follow ing equation If the setting does not conform to this equation a setting error will be generated and the MS Indicator will flash red FINS node address IP address host number m IP Address Table Method and Combined Method With these methods the IP address and the FINS node address setting in the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port have no particular relationship Set both the FINS node address and the IP address so that they are not dupli cated in the network Sending FINS Messages When the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port sends a FINS mes from EtherNet IP Units or sage it is necessary to determine the remote node s IP address UDP port Built in EtherNet IP Ports number and TCP port number The relationships between all addresses such as remote FINS node addresses and IP addresses are managed by an internal table at the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port Remote FINS node Remote IP address Connection Remote port address Example number Example 192 168 250 1 192 168 250 2 192 168 250 254 When the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port is turned ON or restarted the internal table is generated automatically from the various set tings that have been made Depending on the setting method used data such as remote IP addresses may be changed dynamically Dynamic changes can be prohibited 95 IP Addresses in FINS Commun
176. FINS TCP CON NECTION REMOTE NODE CHANGE REQUEST 15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00 n 24 Bit 15 corresponds to connection No 16 bit 00 to connection No 1 etc Note The starting word of the FINS TCP Connection Status Area is different in the CS1W ETN21 and CJ1W ETN21 Ethernet Units it is n 23 in the Ethernet Units If a ladder program using FINS TCP communications was created for Ethernet Units and is being reused for EtherNet IP Units and built in Ether Net IP ports change the word starting word address for this area from n 23 to n 24 FINS TCP With FINS TCP FINS node addresses are exchanged immediately after a Communications connection is established This makes it possible to determine the FINS node Procedure addresses to which the 16 connection numbers and to manage them in an 204 internal table Personal computer Ethernet IP Unit Client Server Example Example IP address C IP address S FINS node number A FINS node number B Passive open Connection request CS Connection established FINS node numbers exchanged Normal data communications n E Local node No sent ENS noe number ASen Remote node No received FINS node number B sent Localnod Norsent Remote node No received After a connection has been established as a FINS TCP server it is termi nated in the following ways e When the connection is closed by the client e When a FINS command to close
177. Frame Transmission Period e Packet interval lt 100 ms The heartbeat frame transmission period is 100 ms e Packet interval 100 ms The heartbeat frame transmission period is the same as the RPI Example In this example 2 tag data link connections are set for node 2 the originator and node 1 the target The packet interval RPI for output data 1 is set to 10 ms The packet interval RPI for output data 2 is set to 15 ms In this case output data 1 is sent from node 1 to node 2 every 10 ms and out put data 2 is sent from node 1 to node 2 every 15 ms as shown in the follow ing diagram Also data is sent from node 2 the originator to node 1 the target with a heartbeat of 100 ms for connection 1 and a heartbeat of 100 ms for connection 2 Node 1 Node 2 Target Output data 1 Originator Connection 1 heartbeat 100 ms interval Output data 2 10 ms Connection 2 heartbeat 100 ms interval Output data 1 15 ms 10 ms Output data 2 Output data 1 Communications System Packet Interval RPI and Bandwidth Usage PPS Section 10 1 In a tag data link the number of packets transferred each second is called the bandwidth used or PPS packets per second The PPS is calculated from the RPI and heartbeat as follows for each connec tion PPS used in a connection pps 1 000 RPI ms 1 000 Heartbeat transmission period ms The following equation is used to calculate
178. I O response time 28 6 ms When the baud rate is 100 Mbps the transmission time can be calculated with the following equation If a network delay does not occur just this transmis sion time is added Transmission time Number of send data words x 2 74 x 8 x 0 00001 ms Note The I O response time may be longer due to noise or other events 290 Tag Data Link Performance for CJ2M Built in EtherNet IP Ports Section 10 4 10 4 Tag Data Link Performance for CJ2M Built in EtherNet IP Ports 10 4 1 Overview The built in EtherNet IP port on a CJ2M CPU Unit CJ2M CPU3L supports tag data links for up to 32 connections with a data size of 20 words per con nection These specifications are different from those of CJ2H built in ports and EtherNet IP Units The maximum number of words that can be transmit ted for tag data links is 640 words This 640 words is the amount of data that is processed for one data transmissions between the CPU Unit and the CJ2M built in port The tag data link specifications of CJ2M built in ports are provided in the fol lowing table If these specifications are insufficient for the required system configuration use a CJ2H built in port on a CJ2H CPU6 CJ1W EIP21 EtherNet IP Unit EIP CPU Unit or a Tag Data Link Specifications for CJ2M Built in EtherNet IP Ports Number of connections CJ2M built in port CJ2M CPU3L 32 Referen
179. ION 5 Determining IP Addresses eeeeeeeeees DI SaM TRAAddresses ses 22 0s cine acd oe nha ace teed atecttecd atoms tact See aeeed Settee Gani Sein TEE ad tates 92 5 2 IP Addresses in FINS Communications 0 00000 ccc cee eee eens 94 5 3 Private and Global Addresses 0 00 e eee eee eens 106 SECTION 6 Tag Data Link Functions eeeeeeeeeeeees IMM 6 1 Overview of Tag Data Links 0 cee eens 112 6 2 Setting Tag Data Links serina e AREARE e E ieee aha esses SRA eee R Re 121 6 3 Ladder Programming with Tag Data Links snusunssenurnnurrrurrr erre 183 SECTION 7 Message Communications Functions 187 Tol OVV eW cess eis cee ENEE ERER EARTE AREA EERE Od STRUTT EE eR a Oates 188 7 2 FINS Message Communications 0 00 0 c eee eee eee ne eee 190 7 3 Explicit Message Communications 0 0 00 eee eee tenes 192 7 4 Message Communications Specifications 0 0 0 0 eee eee eee 193 7 5 Message Communications Error Indications 00 0 enrenar rrr 194 7 6 Message Communications Errors 00 0 0 ee ce eee nes 195 SECTION 8 FINS Communications cccccccccccccccee 197 8 1 Overview of FINS Communications 0 0 00 eee 198 8 2 4 BUNS UDP Method sc i 2ct tran ptimna ba nics antenna atts wanna aa AE R ARER 200 8 3 JFUINS TCP Methods fc 2cc 5 2050c040 5 Gedlng a ede pies Sed eee ee Males ak 202 84 _ Rotiting Tab
180. IP address will be displayed once in flowing text on the 7 segment display on the front of the Unit Note 1 The transfer function for IP address settings is defined by ODVA specifi cations Target devices that do not support these specifications cannot be set When setting the IP address of the target device with the Network 56 Tag Data Link Parameters Section 3 9 Configurator connect the devices one at a time and download the TCP IP Configuration s IP address parameters If TCP IP parameters are set for the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port from the Network Con figurator the EtherNet IP Unit may automatically be reset and restarted Before setting the TCP IP parameters make sure that no system prob lems will occur when the Unit is restarted If the Unit does not restart au tomatically click the Reset the Device Button 2 If the target node address IP address is not set correctly invalid device parameters may be set in the wrong PLC so check the connected PLC before downloading parameters TCP IP Parameters The following TCP IP parameters can be set from the Network Configurator e IP address e Subnet mask e Default gateway e Preferred DNS server e Alternate DNS server e Domain name e Link parameters baud rate and full half duplex 3 9 Tag Data Link Parameters Set the following parameters when using tag data links with an EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port The parameter sett
181. IP specifi cations ODVA Headquarters 4220 Varsity Drive Suite A Ann Arbor Michigan 48108 5006 USA TEL 1 734 975 8840 FAX 1 734 922 0027 Email odva odva org WEB www odva org Sending Explicit Messages Section 9 1 9 1 1 Sending Explicit Messages Using CMND 490 With a CS CJ series EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port a CMND 490 in the CPU Unit s ladder program can send CIP UCMM explicit messages Send the CIP UCMM explicit message s command data in a FINS command following the 2810 hex FINS command code The CIP UCMM explicit message s response is received following the 2810 hex FINS command code and the FINS completion code The following command is used CMND S D C S First command word D First response word C First control data word Command data is set in order starting with the word specified for the CMND 490 operand S first command word and continuing with words with higher addresses in I O memory in the command block format Command Format Example Get_Attribute_All Service to Identity Object Request path 2 10 o0 o0 05 oo 52 o2 20 o 24 01 oa oc 06 00 Command Transport l f Message code ID request size Service code Time Out Ticks Unconnected Send service 52 nex Priority Time Tick Request path size 2 words 02 Hex Instance ID i 8 bit cla s ID 20 Hex 8 bit instance ID 24 Hex Class ID Connection Manager 06 Hex
182. IP21 CJ1W EIP21 CJ2H CPULILI EIP or CU2M CPU3L contain a PLC Object so that other devices can read write the I O memory of the CPU Unit with the built in EtherNet IP port or the CPU Unit to which the EtherNet IP Unit is mounted 192 Message Communications Specifications Section 7 4 7 4 Message Communications Specifications Unit model number CS1W EIP21 CJ1W EIP21 CJ2H CPULIL EIP or CJ2M CPU3 Communications instructions Sending receiving data SEND and RECV instructions FINS commands CMND 490 instruction There are two kinds of FINS commands commands addressed to the CPU Unit and commands addressed to the CS CJ series EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port Sending Ether Net IP CIP UCMM messages CMND 490 instruction Sends CIP UCMM messages to other companies masters slaves or PLCs with a CS CJ series EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port mounted Number of desti nation nodes FINS message com munications 1 N communications Explicit message communications 1 N communications Send functions CIP unconnected UCMM communications only Receive functions CIP unconnected UCMM and CIP connected Class 3 communications Transmission data length not includ ing the command code FINS message com munications e SEND 990 words 1 980 bytes max normally or 727 words 1 454
183. IP21 mounted to CJ1 CPU Unit CJ1W EIP21 CJ2 CJ1W EIP21 mounted to CJ2 CPU Unit CJ2B EIP21 Built in EtherNet IP port in CJ2H CPU Unit CJ2M EIP21 Built in EtherNet IP port in CJ2M CPU Unit CS1W EIP21 CJ1W EIP21 mounted to CS1 CPU Unit Use the following procedure to create connections i e data links by drag ging and dropping devices 1 2 3 1 Set the tags and tag sets for the target device that will be dragged a Refer to 6 2 4 Creating Tags and Tag Sets for information on creating the settings if the target is one of the OMRON EtherNet IP devices giv en above b If the target is another EtherNet IP device refer to the manual of that device and perform settings as required 2 A dialog box as in the following figure for connection allocation will be dis played when you drag the target device and drop it at the OMRON Ether Net IP device a Using One of the Above OMRON EtherNet IP Devices As Target 192 168 250 1 MC1 Edit Connection It will add a connection configuration to originator device Please confiaure the Taa Set each of oriainator device and taraet device Originator Device Target Device Node Address 192 168 250 100 Node Address 192 168 250 1 Comment MC_Master Comment MC1 Input Tag Set Edit Tag Sets Output Tag Set D00100 BByte v MC_Status 4Byte v Type Multi cast connection v Show Detail Chose Connection Select the output tag set from Target Device Area on th
184. Information Note The unit versions of Pre Ver 1 0 Units cannot be confirmed in Unit Manufac turing Information The following dialog box is displayed PLC 10 Table Invalid Manufacturing data In the O Table Window right click and select Unit Manufacturing informa tion CPU Unit The following Unit Manufacturing information Dialog Box will be displayed xix Unit Manufacturing Information File Help Manufacturing Details Revision PCB Revision Software Revision Lot Number Manufacturing ID Serial Number N A Unit version Unit Ver Unit Text CS1H H CPLI63 Program Note The unit version will be displayed in the Unit Manufacturing Information Dialog Box Using Unit Version Label The following unit version label is provided with the EtherNet IP Unit This label can be attached to the front of the EtherNet IP Unit to differentiate between EtherNet IP Units with different unit versions Unit Versions and CX Programmer Versions Use the following versions of the CX Programmer to make the Unit settings for the EtherNet IP Unit Unit version CX Programmer Ver 7 1 or lower Ver 8 0 Ver 8 02 or higher Unit version 1 0 Unit version 2 0 The following auto update must be applied to use CX Programmer version 8 0 CX Common Components CPS Upgrade Software 2008 08 0302 Unit Version Notation In this manual the unit version of a EtherNet IP Unit is given as shown in the fo
185. J2 Output send About 6 432 words max If there are more words the Series data will be separated into multiple transmissions Input receive About 6 432 words max If there are more words the data will be separated into multiple transmissions Note The total amount of send data and receive data that can be transferred at one time is about 12 864 words maximum The number of data exchanges may double as given in the following table according to the relation with the CPU Unit s cycle time and the data process ing time of the EtherNet IP Unit or CJ2H built in port Condition Number of data transmissions CPU Unit s cycle time Number of data transmissions gt EtherNet IP Unit or CJ2H built in port based on the data size data processing time CPU Unit s cycle time Number of data transmissions x 2 lt EtherNet IP Unit or CJ2H built in port based on the data size data processing time Note 1 With CS CJ series PLCs consecutive data area words specified in the tag set will be transferred together if possible Up to 19 send data blocks can be processed in one data transmission up to 20 receive data blocks can be processed in one data transmission If there are more blocks the data will be divided and transferred in separate data transmissions 2 The preceding data processing time approximation is the standard formu la when a higher priority processing event does not occur in peripheral servicing For e
186. LI EIP CJ2M CPU3L CPU Units 2 Twisted pair cable The twisted pair cable connects EtherNet IP Units or built in EtherNet IP ports to the switching hub with an RJ45 Modular Connector at each end Use an STP shielded twisted pair cable of category 5 5c or higher 3 Switching Hub This is a relay device that connects multiple nodes in a star shaped LAN Recommended For details on recommended devices for constructing a network refer to 2 3 1 Switching Hubs Recommended Network Devices Note If a repeater hub is used for EtherNet IP tag data links cyclic communica tions the network s communications load will increase data collisions will occur frequently and stable communications will be impossible Always use a switching hub when using tag data links in the network 1 3 Support Software Required to Construct a Network This section describes the Support Software that is required to construct an EtherNet IP network Make the tag data link settings and Unit setup settings for the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port Both of these settings are stored in the EtherNet IP Unit s non volatile memory See note Support Software is provided for each as described below Note Unlike the Ethernet Units the EtherNet IP Unit s TCP IP settings are not stored in the CPU Unit s CPU Bus Unit System Setup Area The settings are stored in the EtherNet IP Unit itself Unit Setup CX The CX
187. M area IP address settings at their default values 0 0 0 0 Method 2 Setting an IP address in the CPU Unit s allocated DM area gt If you want to set a particular local IP address and store that set ting in the CPU Unit set it in the EtherNet IP Unit s allocated DM area The IP address can be set from the CX Programmer Pro gramming Console or ladder program Method 3 Setting the TCP IP Configuration from the CX Programmer If you want to set a particular local IP address and store that set ting in the EtherNet IP Unit set the IP address from the CX Pro grammer When FINS communications are being used it is necessary to show the cor respondence between the IP addresses and FINS node addresses Refer to SECTION 5 Determining IP Addresses for an explanation of IP addresses as well as the correspondence between FINS node addresses and IP addresses The three setting methods are described in the following paragraphs Method 1 Using the Default IP Address 192 168 250 Node_address When the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port is just mounted in the PLC and the I O table is created the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port will operate with its default IP address This default address is enabled when the local IP address in the allocated DM area and the TCP IP Configu ration are both set to their defaults 0 0 0 0 The default IP address is 192 168 250 Node_address where Node_address is the node ad
188. MRON PRODUCTS ARE PROPERLY RATED AND INSTALLED FOR THE INTENDED USE WITHIN THE OVERALL EQUIPMENT OR SYSTEM PROGRAMMABLE PRODUCTS OMRON shall not be responsible for the user s programming of a programmable product or any consequence thereof xvi Disclaimers CHANGE IN SPECIFICATIONS Product specifications and accessories may be changed at any time based on improvements and other reasons It is our practice to change model numbers when published ratings or features are changed or when significant construction changes are made However some specifications of the products may be changed without any notice When in doubt special model numbers may be assigned to fix or establish key specifications for your application on your request Please consult with your OMRON representative at any time to confirm actual specifications of purchased products DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS Dimensions and weights are nominal and are not to be used for manufacturing purposes even when tolerances are shown PERFORMANCE DATA Performance data given in this manual is provided as a guide for the user in determining suitability and does not constitute a warranty It may represent the result of OMRON s test conditions and the users must correlate it to actual application requirements Actual performance is subject to the OMRON Warranty and Limitations of Liability ERRORS AND OMISSIONS The information i
189. NS Response Codes Main response code Sub response code Value and meaning Local node error Value and meaning Local node send error Item to check Likely cause Lack of available space in internal buffers Section 14 6 Corrective action The load traffic on the Ether net Unit is too heavy Check your user applications Node address set ting error Local IP address The network cannot be used because the IP address setting is incor rect Correct the local IP address Local node busy send failed System load Lack of available space in internal buffers The load traffic on the Ether net Unit is too heavy Check your user applications Remote node error Remote node not in network IP address table and IP router table IP address of remote node not set correctly Set IP address of remote node into IP address table and if internetwork transmis sion is required into the IP router table No Unit with speci fied unit address Instruction s control data There is no Unit with the specified unit address Check the remote node s unit address Response timeout Transfer condi tions Use FINS status read commands Message packet was cor rupted by transmission error Increase the number of trans mit retry attempts Instruction s control data The response monitoring time is too short Set a longer response moni toring t
190. NTP server and written at a particular time or when a designated bit turns ON Note 1 The SNTP Simple Network Time Protocol server is used to control the time on the LAN 2 An error will occur in the following CPU Units when the automatic clock adjustment function is executed under the conditions shown in the table CPU Unit Conditions CPU Units manufactured on or When the CPU execution mode is set to other before January 31 2003 lot num than normal mode priority peripheral servicing bers 030131 or earlier mode parallel processing with synchronous CJ1G CPU H memory access mode or parallel processing CJ1H CPU H with asynchronous memory access mode CS1G CPULILIH AND CS1H CPU H When the CPU Unit operating mode is set to RUN or MONITOR mode 3 The manufacturing date can be determined from the lot number on the side or top corner of the CPU Unit 4 The lot numbers are as follows YYMMDDnnnn in which YY indicates the last two digits of the year MM the month DD the day and nnnn the serial number 5 In accordance with SNTP protocol specifications automatic adjustment will not be possible from February 7 2036 In EtherNet IP Units or built in EtherNet IP ports this function will no longer operate from February 7 2036 an error message will not be displayed 324 Using the Automatic Clock Adjustment Function Section 12 2 12 1 2 Specifications
191. Net IP Ports Appendix E Command Block Command Destination IP address Timeout code value Response Block Command Response code code Parameters Destination IP Address Command The IP address in hexadecimal of the destination node for the PING command echo request packet Timeout Value Command The wait time for the echo reply packet The value is set in seconds The timeout time is set at 20 seconds if the value is specified as 0 If the echo reply packet is not received within the set time limit the code for a timeout error will be set as the results storage response code Remarks PING Command The PING command runs the echoback test using the ICMP protocol When the PING command is executed an echo request packet is sent to the remote node ICMP Correct communications are confirmed when the returned response packet is received normally The echo reply packet is automatically returned by the remote node ICMP Response Codes Response code Description Normal end echo reply received from the remote node Timeout error Command too large Command too small Zero destination address PING command currently being executed High traffic at Unit cannot execute service FINS TCP CONNECTION REMOTE NODE CHANGE REQUEST Requests a remote node change for the FINS TCP connection The default destination IP address in a connection in which the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port is used as a clie
192. O refreshing error 00 hex 00 hex Yes 03CO FINS TCP setting error 01 to 10 hex 01 Automatically allo No Connection number cated FINS node address duplication 02 Destination IP address error 03 Destination port num ber error 03C1 Server settings error 00 hex DNS 01 IP address No 03 hex SNTP 02 Host name 03 Port number 04 hex FTP 04 Other parameter 06 hex BOOTP 07 hex SNMP 08 hex SNMP Trap 09 hex FINS UDP OA hex FINS TCP 03C2 FINS TCP packet discarded 01 to 10 hex 02 hex Reopening No because remote node closed 03 hex Reopening because of reception error 04 hex Reopening because of transmission error 05 hex Reopening because RST received from remote node 06 hex Reopening because of no keep alive response 07 hex Illegal FINS TCP procedure 08 hex Insufficient mem ory during server process ing 09 hex Insufficient mem ory during client process ing OA hex Insufficient mem ory during node switching Connection number 03C3 FINS UDP packet discarded 366 00 hex 01 to FE hex Source node address No Error Log Function Section 14 4 Detail code Saved in First byte Second byte EEPROM Server connection error 00 hex DNS 01 hex Specified host 03 hex SNTP does not exist 04 hex FTP 02 hex No such service at 06 hex BOOTP specified host 03 hex Timeout 06 hex Host name resolu tion error 07 hex Transmission error 08 hex Reception error 09 hex
193. OMRON The following network devices are manufactured by OMRON for EtherNet IP networks Function Number of Error detection ports output Switching Hub W4S1 03B Packet priority control QoS 3 None EtherNet IP control data priority W4S1 05B Failure detection Broadcast 5 None storm LSI error detection 10 W4S1 05C 100Base TX Auto Negotiation 5 Provided 2 3 3 Switching Hub Types Unmanaged Layer 2 L2 These switching hubs use the Ethernet MAC address to switch ports Ordi Switching Hubs nary switching hubs have this function Switching hub functions and settings cannot be changed Managed Layer 2 L2 These switching hubs use the Ethernet address to switch ports Switching hub Switching Hubs functions and settings can be changed using special software tools for switch ing hubs running on a network node Analytical data can also be collected These switching hubs provide more advanced functions that unmanaged layer 2 switching hubs 28 Selecting the Network Devices Section 2 3 2 3 4 Switching Hub Functions This section describes the switching hub functions that are important when using an EtherNet IP network When using an EtherNet IP Unit set the follow ing two functions e Multicast filtering QoS Quality of Service for TCP UDP port numbers L4 Multicast Filtering Multicast filtering transfers multicast packets to the specific nodes only This function is implemented in the switchin
194. Other error OA hex Obtaining IP address error Clock write error 0001 The clock time Clear the error from the could not be updated CPU Unit because a error occurred in the CPU Unit 0002 The clock time Refer to SECTION 12 could not be updated Automatic Clock Adjust because the CPU Unit or ment Function and check operating mode does not the application conditions support this function Ethernet basic setting error 01 hex Ethernet setting 01 hex Checksum error error 11 hex Inconsistent set tings 12 hex Specified baud rate is not supported 02 hex TCP IP basic set 01 hex Checksum error ting error 11 hex Invalid IP address 12 hex Invalid subnet mask 13 hex Invalid default gateway address 14 hex Invalid primary name server 15 hex Invalid secondary name server 16 hex Invalid domain name 17 hex Invalid host name Ethernet advanced setting error 02 hex FINS setting error 01 hex Checksum error 10 hex Invalid IP router table 11 hex Invalid FINS UDP setting 12 hex Invalid FINS TCP setting 13 hex Invalid FTP setting 14 hex Invalid SNTP set ting 15 hex Invalid SNMP set ting 16 hex Invalid SNMP trap setting Packet discarded 00 hex 07 hex SNMP 08 hex SNMP Trap 367 Troubleshooting Section 14 5 Detail code Saved in First byte Second byte EEPROM Link OFF error 00 hex 00 hex Verification error Tag data link only Connection instance n
195. P Ports Appendix E Response Codes 0000 Normal end 1001 Command too large CONTROLLER STATUS READ Reads the controller status Command Block 06 01 eee Command code Response Block Command Response Communications Total number Total number Total number Total number Total number code code status 3 of of of of of packets received receive errors packets sent send errors send collisions Parameters Communications Status 3 Response 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 E O E i Bit 2 EtherNet IP basic setting error Bit 3 IP address table error Bit 4 IP router table error Bit 6 Routing table error Bit 9 EtherNet IP advanced setting error Bit 10 BOOTP server error Bit 11 SNTP server error Bit 14 Address mismatch Bit 15 Non volatile memory error Ethernet Basic Setting Error Meaning No error An error such as an invalid IP address was detected during the validity check of parameters related to the TCP IP Interface Object and Ether Link Object Meaning No error Error detected More than 32 records invalid IP address or invalid FINS node address 394 FINS Commands Addressed to EtherNet IP Units or Built in EtherNet IP Ports Appendix E IP Router Table Error Meaning No error Error detected More than 8 records or invalid IP address Meaning No error Error detected in routing table check Meaning No err
196. P Unit or built in EtherNet IP port to restart before transferring the settings data 11 3 2 List of Settings Required for the FTP Server Function Make the following settings for the unit setup when the server function is used CX Programmer Settings Setting conditions tab Login User set when the default CON FIDENTIAL is not used Password User set Port No Rarely required when the default 21 is not used 305 Section 11 3 Using the FTP Server Function 11 3 3 FTP Tab The CPU Bus Unit System Setup which is set when using the FTP server function is shown in the CX Programmer s Edit Parameters Dialog Box CJ1W EIP21 Edit Parameters TCP IP Ethemet FINS UDP FINS TCP FTP Auto Adjust Time Status Area SNMP SNMP Trap Not Use FTP Use FTP Login Password Port No 0 0 default 21 Set Defaults E Settings Setting Login Details Set the login name to externally connect to the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port via FTP Cancel Default value None CONFIDENTIAL is used Password Set the password to externally connect to the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port via FTP None Port No 306 FTP port number of the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port This setting does not normally need to be changed FTP uses two ports a port for control and a port for data transfer Se
197. P port number to distinguish the application layer FINS communications service in this case e Default value 9 600 e User set value 1 to 65 535 FINS TCP Connection This is the network API used when TCP is used for the FINS com Setup munications service Up to 16 APIs can be used at a time and they are identified by connection numbers 1 to 16 The EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port can thus simulta neously execute the FINS communications service by TCP with up to 16 remote nodes Protection Setting Select this check box to refuse connection requests from any IP address not set as the target IP address when the server client setting is set to a server and the target IP address is set to any value other than 0 0 0 0 This check box can be selected to prevent inappropriate opera tions on the PLC for FINS commands from specific nodes When necessary set the routing tables using the CX Integrator Using FTP Tab Page in Edit Setting Function Parameters Dialog Box Not Use FTP or Specifies whether to use FTP FTP connections from external Use FTP devices will not be possible if Not Use FTP is specified Login Sets the login name for FTP connections to the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port from external devices Password Sets the password for FTP connections to the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port from external devices Port No Sets the FTP port number of the EtherNet IP Unit or
198. PLC Command Note 1 When two or more Communications Units including the EtherNet IP Units and built in EtherNet IP ports are mounted to a CS CJ series PLC and FINS messages are being used the EtherNet IP Units and built in Ether Net IP ports must be registered in the CS CJ series PLC s local network routing table The commands will not be sent if the Unit is not registered in the routing tables 2 When a CS CJ series EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port is con nected to an Ethernet network message communications can be conduct ed between networks including other Ethernet networks as well as other networks such as Controller Link and SYSMAC LINK Up to eight levels of networks can be crossed provided that routing tables containing local network tables and relay network tables have been registered in the CPU Units of each PLC on the network 3 A Programming Device connected to the CPU Unit of a PLC connected to the network can be used to program and monitor another PLC that is on the network Up to eight levels of networks can be crossed for CS1 CJ1 series CPU Units with unit version 2 0 or later CJ2 CPU Units and CX Programmer version 4 0 or higher 190 FINS Message Communications Section 7 2 Up to 8 network levels including the EtherNet IP network can be crossed Controller Link Unit CS CJ series EtherNet IP Unit CS CJ series CPU Unit Controller Link Unit Note FINS comma
199. PU Bus Unit service cycle Local node 1 l 1 i re Send processing _ CPU Bus Unit service processing time Local node 2 A Transmission delay CPU data set Command Response y processing i Transmission delay A Transmission delay i Command Response i Receive processing A Send processing Y Command i Response _r CPU Bus Unit service processing time i Remote node CPU Bus Unit service cycle Remote node CPU Bus Unit Service Cycle Local Node 1 CPU Bus Unit Service Processing Time Local Node 1 Maximum transmission delay Maximum transmission delay CPU Bus Unit service cycle Local node 1 CPU Bus Unit service processing time Local node 1 Send processing Command Transmission delay Command Receive processing Command CPU Bus Unit service cycle remote node CPU Bus Unit service processing time remote node Send processing Response Transmission delay Response Receive processing Response CPU Bus Unit service cycle Local node 2 CPU Bus Unit service processing time Local node 2 The following table shows the service cycle which depends on the CPU Unit s CPU processing mode setting CPU execution mode Processing time details One CPU Unit cycle time Normal Mode See note Priority peripheral servicing Parallel processing with syn chronous memory access Parallel processing with asyn chronous memory access
200. PU Unit 2 n 2 3 n 3 4 n 4 5 n 5 6 n 6 7 n 7 8 n 8 9 n 9 10 n 10 Unit status 1 EtherNet IP Unit CPU Unit 11 nag o20 6COCOt tC lt S CS tS Unit status 2 ee 12 n 12 Communications status 1 EtherNet IP Unit gt CPU Unit 13 na Communications status2 4 neta Communications status3 15 n 15 Reserved EtherNet IP Unit CPU Unit 16 n 16 17 n 17 18 n 18 19 n 19 20 n 20 21 n 21 22 n 22 23 n 23 24 n 24 FINS TCP Connection Status EtherNet IP Unit CPU Unit Note The reserved words are regularly refreshed with all zeroes The functions of the allocated ClO Area words are described in the following section 4 2 2 Details of the Allocated CIO Area Words Unit Control Bits CPU Unit to EtherNet IP Unit n 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Tag Data Link Start Bit Tag Data Link Stop Bit Adjust Clock Bit Switch Status Manipulated Unit operation by Not used Tag Data Link Start The tag data link starts when this bit Bit is switched from OFF to ON Turned OFF by Unit after the tag data link starts operating 71 CIO Area Allocations Section 4 2 Switch Status Manipulated Unit operation by Not used Tag Data Link Stop The tag data link stops when this bit Bit is switched from OFF to ON Turned OFF by Unit after the tag data link stops operating Adjust Clock Bit The clock time is automatically adjusted when this bit is switc
201. Ports Appendix E Total Number of Packets Sent Response The total number of packets sent by the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port is returned Total Number of Errors Sent Response The total number of packet errors detected while the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port was sending is returned Total Number of Send Collisions Response Returns the number of packets damaged by 16 collisions with data from other nodes during EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port transmissions Precautions Counting of the total number of packets received total number of receive errors total number of packets sent total number of errors sent and total number of send collisions is discontinued when the counted value reaches the maximum value Response Codes 0000 Normal end 1001 Command too large INTERNODE ECHO TEST Performs an echoback test internode communications test between specified nodes Command Block Command Test data code Response Block 08 01 P 1 998 bytes max aua OS Command Response Test data code code Parameters Test Data Command Response This command specifies the data to be sent to the specified nodes Up to 1 998 bytes can be specified The response sends back data identical to the data specified in the command An abnormality is assumed if the data returned in the response differs from the test data sent Precautions e The test destination node is the dest
202. Replacement This section describes cleaning inspection and Unit replacement procedures as well as the Simple Backup Function 13 1 Maintenance and Replacement 0 2 0 0 c eee ee eee ee 332 13 1 7 Cleaning 0 56 94 a ek he ke oo a 332 13 12 Inspecttonais gxeste il pie ease Hows Qe a ee 332 13 1 3 Unit Replacement Procedure 0 000000 332 13 2 Simple Backup Function 0 0 0 ee 333 13 3 Using the Backup Tool 0 0 2 0 eee ee eee 336 331 Maintenance and Replacement Section 13 1 13 1 Maintenance and Replacement 13 1 1 Cleaning A Caution 13 1 2 Inspection Inspection Equipment Normally Required Equipment Occasionally Required Equipment Inspection Procedure Environmental This section describes the routine cleaning and inspection recommended as regular maintenance as well as the Unit replacement procedure required if an EtherNet IP Unit needs to be replaced Clean the EtherNet IP Unit regularly as described below in order to keep the network in its optimal operating condition e Wipe the Unit daily with a dry soft cloth e When a spot can t be removed with a dry cloth dampen the cloth with a neutral cleanser 2 solution wring out the cloth and wipe the Unit A smudge may remain on the Unit from gum vinyl or tape that was left on for a long time Remove the smudge when cleaning Never use volatile solvents such as paint thinner benzen
203. Revision 1 01 Catalog The time and date that the EDS file was created will be displayed along with the device information 422 Appendix G Precautions for Using Windows XP Vista or Windows 7 Changing Windows Firewall Settings Better firewall security for Windows XP SP2 or higher Windows Vista and Windows 7 has increased the restrictions for data communications on Ethernet ports When using an EtherNet IP connection 1 to one of the following PLCs from an Ethernet port on a computer you must change the settings of the Windows Firewall to enable using CX Programmer or Network Configurator communications Applicable PLCs 4 e CJ2H CPULILI EIP CJ2M CPU3 e CS1W CJ1W EIP CX Programmer An EtherNet IP connection includes the following cases e An online connection with the network type set to EtherNet IP e An automatic online connection to a PLC on an EtherNet IP network when Auto Online EtherNet IP Node Online is selected from the PLC Menu Network Configurator e A connection made by selecting Option Select Interface Ethernet I F Note Windows Firewall is mainly designed to prevent inappropriate access from external devices e g via the Internet The changes to the Windows Firewall settings described in this document enable EtherNet IP connections to be used by the CX Programmer If the same computer is being used on a company net work or other network
204. TENTS Appendices A CS CJ series Ethernet Unit Function Comparison 0 000000 eee ee eee eee 375 B Ethernet Network Parameters ossei erissa n deora aa Ae e nent n eee 377 C TCP Status Transitions sespe daa AE sie EAEE ia b Baa EEG eat ewe We 379 D CIP Message Communications 0 0 0 eee eee eects 381 E FINS Commands Addressed to EtherNet IP Units or Built in EtherNet IP Ports 391 F EDS File Management 00 eee eens 419 G Precautions for Using Windows XP Vista or Windows 7 00 cece eee eee 423 Bata S 565 4s oe EE E ee oe ee oes VA Revision History iisce eins ase Sine teie es ies ine 435 About this Manual This manual describes the operation of the CS CJ series EtherNet IP Units and the built in EtherNet IP ports on a CJ2 CPU Unit for constructing applications and includes the sections described below Please read this manual carefully and be sure you understand the information provided before attempting to install or operate the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port Be sure to read the precautions provided in the following section Precautions provides general precautions for using the CS CJ series EtherNet IP Units and built in EtherNet IP ports Section 1 introduces the functions and protocols used in EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port communications services Section 2 provides the specifications of EtherNet IP Units and introduces recommended network con
205. TX CJ1W ETN21 10BASE T CJ1W ETN11 CV CVM1 series Ethernet Unit 10BASE 5 CV500 ETNO1 FinsGateway Version 4 xx or lower Version 2003 or higher No Set manually so that automatic settings can be used with the automatic generation method Supports IP address table method Programmable Terminal NS Series Open Network Controller ONC No Set manually FINS communications are not possible with personal computers set automati cally by DHCP IP Addresses in FINS Communications Section 5 2 Models that Can Use the Combined Method Product Model Series Version CS1W ETN21 CS1W ETNO1 CS1W ETN11 CJ1W ETN21 CJ1W ETN11 CV500 ETNO1 Supports combined method 100BASE TX 10BASE 5 10BASE T 100BASE TX 10BASE T 10BASE 5 Yes No No Yes No No CS series Ethernet Unit CJ series Ethernet Unit CV CVM1 series Ethernet Unit FinsGateway Version 4 xx or No lower Version 2003 or higher NS Series Yes Programmable Terminal Open Network Controller ONC No Set manually FINS communications are not possible with personal computers set automati cally by DHCP 5 2 5 Pairing IP Addresses and FINS Node Addresses The following table shows the methods for pairing IP address and FINS node addresses and the relation between fixed and variable address for both FINS UDP and FINS TCP Communi cati
206. Target Indicates that the node s tag Node Flags data link is registered Indicates that the node s tag data link is not registered 85 User Settings Area Section 4 4 Normal Target Node Table EtherNet IP Unit to CPU Unit Target Node PLC Operating Information EtherNet IP Unit to CPU Unit 86 These flags indicate the connection status of the target nodes With revision 2 or higher the flag turns ON after all data for multiple connections for individual target devices is refreshed in the CPU Unit With revision 1 each flag immedi ately turns ON when all connections are established 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 s aa u to o Je 7 e s Ja s e fh fo e1 so so se sz 56 55 54 ss 52 s1 so 49 48 m 76 75 v 73 72 n 70 so ss er oo os es os o4 93 o2 1 so 29 es 7 se 5 os os a2 81 20 111 110 109 108 107 106 105 104 103 102 101 100 o9 o8 or os 127 126 125 175 174 173 191 190 189 223 222 221 239 238 237 Manipulated by Unit operation Normal Target Node Flags Revision 1 Flags immediately turn ON when all connections are established Revision 2 or higher Flags turn ON after all data for multiple connections for the target device is refreshed in the CPU Unit Indicates that all connections are not established These flags i
207. The duration timer sets the maximum time limit for a window advertisement to be received if the transmission window is smaller than necessary and the resend timer is not set If no window advertisement is received within the time limit the number of segments permitted by the transmission window are sent If the trans mission window is set to 0 a window probe 1 octet of data is sent before the timer restarts The number of times no segment was sent or received within the time set on the hold timer The number of times the hold packet is resent Always 0 The number of times the hold packet is sent without response before the connection is cut off 2 Send Information 40 Bytes Ten information items are returned in the following sequence OoNoaPrwnd 9 10 The total number of packets sent The number of data packets sent The number of data bytes sent The number of data packets resent The number of data bytes resent The number of ACK packets sent The number of window probes 1 octet of data sent The number of emergency data packets sent Always 0 The number of window advertisement packets sent The number of control packets SYN FIN RST sent 3 Receive Information 84 Bytes Twenty one information items are returned in the following sequence ak wn gt The total number of packets received The number of packets received continuously The number of bytes received continuously The number of rece
208. The following dialog box will be displayed if there are parameter errors Check the displayed details and review the settings Connection Check Result Network Description 192 168 250 101 EtherNet IP_1 Connection CNO1_01 TagSet2_192 168 250 1 If an inconsistency occurs open the originator s Edit Device Parameter Di alog Box and click the Connection Tab The inconsistent connection will ne be displayed with a 4 icon instead of the normal Sia icon To change the connection setting and select a different target variable select the con nection as shown below and click the Edit Button 180 Setting Tag Data Links Section 6 2 Register Device List Product Name 192 168 250 1 CJ1 Ww E1P21 Variable Target Variable g 192 168 250 2 002 C 4 CN01_01 Input TagSet2_192 168 250 1 TagSet2_192 168 250 2 x r Icon When normal is New Edit All Change Target Node ID To From File 6 2 18 Changing Devices Devices that are registered in a network configuration with the Network Con figurator can be changed Select Change Device from the Device Menu to display a list of the devices that can be changed to Select the desired device A device can be changed only when there is complete or upward compatibility with the device being changed to Device Changes Device after change CJ1W CJ2M EIP21 EIP CJ2 Device before change 2 01 CJ1W EIP21 OK OK if there are less than 33 ta
209. The maximum tag data link I O response time for this system configuration found from the total of 1 to 6 is 124 ms 1 Node 1 PLC 1 input ON response time 11 5 msec 2 Node 1 PLC 1 send data processing time 20 msec 3 Packet Interval RPI 10 msec 4 Network Transmission Delay Time 5 5 msec 5 Node 2 PLC 2 receive data processing time 60 msec 6 Output ON response time 17 msec Maximum I O response performance total of 1 to 6 124 msec Note The I O response time may be longer due to noise or other events 289 I O Response Time in Tag Data Links Section 10 3 Minimum Tag Data Link I O Response Time I O processing eal Data exchange Tag data link I O response time a 2 Network transmission delay time 1 Input ON response 3 Output ON time response time Calcu I l H I lation i i sesseeesesaeseey t i fev Tag data link refresh cycle Transmission Output The minimum tag data link I O response time which occurs when there are no processing delays is calculated as follows 1 Node 1 Input switch delay time 1 5 ms PLC 1 input ON response time CPU Unit cycle time of PLC 1 10 0 ms 2 Transmission time 722 send data words 0 121 msec 3 Node 2 CPU Unit cycle time of PLC 2 15 0 ms PLC 1 output ON response time Output relay delay time 2 0ms Total tag data link
210. Then create FINS local routing tables a local network table and a relay network table Example PLC 1 Routing Table Settings e Local Network Table Unitnumber Local network number 0 1 e Relay Network Table None Example PLC 2 and PLC 3 Routing Table Settings e Local Network Table Local network number e Relay Network Table In order to relay from PLC2 3 to the final network number 1 it is necessary to relay via node address 1 i e the Controller Link Unit on relay network number 2 Final network number Relay network number Relay node address 2 Save the routing table file File Save local routing table file 3 Next to connect online select Communication Settings from the Net work Menu For each PLC register a PLC with a direct serial connection node address 0 and select it 4 With the CX Integrator select Work Online from the Network Menu Select Tools Start Routing table read the saved file and select Op tions Transfer to PLC Click Yes to transfer the routing tables to the con nected PLC on Using FINS Applications Section 8 5 8 5 2 FinsGateway FinsGateway Ver 2003 must be used to communicate using FINS TCP between applications serving as communications drivers and CS1W EIP21 CJ1W EIP21 CJ2H CPULIL EIP or CJ2M CPU3L EtherNet IP Units FinsGateway Ver 3 L or lower versions can be used however when commu nicating by the FINS UDP method only
211. UDP e FINS Node Address Not Registered to IP Address Table The following address is registered to the internal table Remote IP address Local IP address network number FINS node address e Remote UDP port number UDP port number set for local Unit e Connection method FINS UDP With the combined method records of FINS nodes registered to the IP address table are not dynamically changed When the Unit is turned ON or restarted and the IP address of a remote FINS node is not registered in the IP table the IP address can be changed dynamically according to FINS mes sages received from the remote node This can be used effectively when the remote node is a device such as a personal computer and IP addresses are dynamically changed by a method such as DHCP IP Addresses in FINS Communications Section 5 2 Example When FINS Command is Sent FINS node number IP address table reas IP address Node number in IP address table 18 153 214 0 62 IP address 20 153 214 0 129 gt IP address method 23 153 218 51 8 FINS command sent Node number not in IP address table Network number xx xx 00 00 Y PP address Automatic FINS node number xx See note generation FINS command method sent Automatic When FINS Command is Received generation FINS node number method dynamic Node number notinIP ile ci i address table l 25 _153 218 51 10 IP address Changed i i 153 218 51
212. Using the Wizard Refer to 6 2 7 Creating Connections Using the Wizard Create connections between OMRON PLCs following the instructions Tags and tag sets must be set for all devices before starting the Wizard Refer to Basic Operation 1 1 Note Select Device Parameters Wizard from the menus to start operation 4 Creating Connections by Dragging and Dropping Registered Devices Refer to 6 2 8 Creating Connections by Device Dragging and Dropping When a target device is dragged and dropped to the originator device the Edit Connection Dialog Box will be displayed and a connection can be created OMRON EtherNet IP Units or built in EtherNet IP ports are the only originator devices for which connections can be created in this way l Downloading Tag Data Link Parameters Refer to 6 2 10 Downloading Tag Data Link Parameters Check that tag data links are operating correctly by using the indicators on the Ether Net IP Unit refer to 14 2 Using the LED Indicators and Display for Troubleshooting for Troubleshooting and the Network Configurator monitor function refer to 14 1 Check ing Status with the Network Configurator l Check that the output tag data is updated in the input tag by using the CX Program mer s Watch Window or PLC memory function Note Refer to the CX Programmer Operation Manual Cat No W446 for the operat ing procedures Setting Tag Data Links Section 6 2 6 2 3
213. _Master 5 MC1_Enrror M 50 0ms 192 168 250 1 MC1 5 MC Eror 143 Setting Tag Data Links Section 6 2 The settings are as follows Item Description Connection I O Type When creating tag data links for a CS1W EIP21 CJ1W EIP21 CJ2B EIP21 or CJ2M EIP21 select Input Only Tag Type When creating tag data links for other target devices select the connection I O type specified in that device s EDS file Use the nput Only ID type setting when another company s node is the originator and does not support connection set tings with a Tag type setting Connection Type Selects whether the data is sent in multicast or unicast point to point The default setting is multicast e Multicast connection Select this type when the same data is shared by multiple nodes This setting is usually used e Point to Point connection Select this type when the same data is not shared by multiple nodes In a unicast connection other nodes are not bur dened with an unnecessary load Note Refer to 6 1 2 Overview of Operation for details on using multicast and unicast connection as well as count ing the number of connections The Connection Structure Field and the following items will not be displayed if the Hide Detail Button is pressed Packet Interval RPI Sets the data update cycle i e the packet interval of each connection between the originator and target The interval can be set to between 1 and 10 000 m
214. a as input data First select the registered device for which you want to create a connec tion in the Network Configuration Window of the Network Configurator and then select Device Parameters Wizard from the menus EtherNet IP_1 192 168 250 1 192 168 250 2 192 168 250 3 BE PR MCI MC2 MC3 Petal 4 BN weard F 2 Edit 4 Open tal Save as 156 Setting Tag Data Links Section 6 2 The following dialog box will be displayed before the Wizard starts Network Configurator t The connections to a controller configured in selected device will be deleted 5 OK e Click the Yes Button to delete the connections that have been set with OM RON PLCs before starting the Wizard 3 Create the connection following the instructions that are given by the Wiz ard after the Wizard starts See the following figure Connection Configuration Wizard New connections will be added Please select a Tag Set that you would like to receive as input from the Taa Sets list Originator Device Target Device E2 192 168 250 1 MC1 Device 7 MC_Enror 2Byte Tagset A 7 MC_Status 4Byte i p 192 168 250 2 MC2 192 168 250 100 7 MC_Eror 2Byte MC_Master MC_Status 4Byte A 192 168 250 3 MC3 5 MC_Enror 2Byte S MC_Status 4Byte Show Detail a 4 A list of tag sets is displayed on the right side of the Wizard Dialog Box with target devices that support receivin
215. actured by OMRON 28 2 3 3 Switching Hub Types 00 00 28 2 3 4 Switching Hub Functions 0 0 0 0 ee eee ee 29 2 3 5 Precautions When Selecting a Switching Hub 29 13 Section 2 1 EtherNet IP Unit and Built in EtherNet IP Port Specifications 2 1 2 1 1 EtherNet IP Unit and Built in EtherNet IP Port Specifications General Specifications The general specifications conform to those of the CS series and CJ series PLCs 2 1 2 Unit Specifications CS series EtherNet IP Units Model number CS1W EIP21 Type 100Base TX See note Applicable PLCs CS series PLCs Unit classification CS series CPU Bus Unit Mounting location CPU Rack or Expansion Rack Number of Units that can be mounted 8 max including Expansion Racks CPU Unit words used Allocated CIO Area words CPU Bus Unit words 25 words Unit one unit number s words These words contain control bits and flags the target node PLC s operating and error information Unit status communications status registered normal target node information and FINS TCP connection status Allocated DM Area words CPU Bus Unit words 100 words Unit one unit number s words These words contain the IP address display setting area User set area Any usable data area words Target node PLC s operating and error information and registered norm
216. added for unit version 2 0 5 2 IP Addresses in FINS Communications 5 2 1 Specifying Nodes in FINS Communications Services With FINS communications services on an Ethernet network IP addresses UDP port numbers and TCP port numbers are paired with FINS node addresses to specify nodes on the network Application level FINS Node number TCP UDP port TCP port number number Transport level UDP Internet level IP Must be allocated IP address Physical level Ethernet ial aaa Automatically allocated Ethernet address _ Use the Node Address Setting Switches NODE NO on the front of the Eth erNet IP Unit or for the built in EtherNet IP port on the front of the CPU Unit to set the FINS node address Allocating Addresses to EtherNet IP Units and Built in EtherNet IP Ports FINS Message Reception for EtherNet IP Units or Built in EtherNet IP Ports 94 The IP address FINS UDP port number and FINS TCP port number set for the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port are mainly used when receiv ing FINS communications messages Application level FINS eane IN Transport level UDP mupp TCP TCP port number number Internet level IP IP address A Physical level Ethernet Ethernet address _ Receives communications data 77 conforming to Ethernet address IP address UDP po
217. addition the number of data transmissions is calculated as a maximum of 4 3 1 because it is necessary to consider a delay of one CPU Unit cycle time in transferring received data Calculation formula CPU Unit cycle time 15 msec Number of transmis Number of data transmission words 15 648 3 sions based on the data words 6 432 words using a CJ2 CPU size Unit EtherNet IP Unit data 0 0008 x 6 432 1 0 Maximum number of 6 15 msec processing time transmission words per cycle 288 I O Response Time in Tag Data Links Section 10 3 Calculation formula Number of data trans 10 msec gt 6 15 msec missions To meet the condition to enable processing in one data transmission the number of transmissions is the same as plus 1 Delay of one CPU Unit cycle time Total Cycle time x Number of data trans 60 msec 5 Receive data process missions ing time 6 Output ON response time This is the delay time for the external output device from when the output bit turns ON in the memory of the CPU Unit until the output is actually performed In this system configuration the delay time for an output relay is 2 0 ms Also one CPU cycle time is required until the data is stored in the memory area of the CPU Unit CPU Unit cycle time of PLC 2 15 msec Output relay delay time 2 0 msec Total 17 0 msec 6 Node 2 PLC 2 output ON response time
218. address code code number of stored of records table records table records of stored records records Parameters Number of Records Command Response The number of records to read is specified between 0000 and 0020 0 to 32 decimal in the command If this value is set to 0 the number of stored records is returned but the IP address table records are not returned The response returns the actual number of records read Maximum Number of Stored Records Response The maximum number of records that can be stored in the IP address table is returned The maximum number of stored records is fixed at 0020 32 records Number of Stored Records Response The number of IP address table records stored at the time the command is executed is returned as a hexadec imal number IP Address Table Records Response The number of IP address table records specified in the number of records parameter is returned The total number of bytes in the IP address table records is calculated as the number of records x 6 bytes record The configuration of the 6 bytes of data in each record is as shown in the following diagram 405 FINS Commands Addressed to EtherNet IP Units or Built in EtherNet IP Ports Appendix E 1 6 bytes FINS node IP address number FINS Node Address Node address for communications via the FINS command in hexadecimal IP Address IP number used by TCP IP protocol in hexadecimal Precautions If the IP address
219. ag data link settings have not been set in the Unit Use the Network Configurator to set the tag data link settings in the Unit and then restart the Unit The MS indicators is lit green on the EtherNet IP Unit or CPU Unit but the NS indicator con tinues to flash red e Identify the error code shown on the 7 segment display based on the tables in 14 2 Using the LED Indicators and Display for Troubleshooting and eliminate the cause of the error 369 Troubleshooting Section 14 5 14 5 4 Tag Data Link Problems The tag data isn t Observe the following precautions when writing application simultaneous programs e Maintain the simultaneity of data in connection units between the PLC and EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port lf another company s device is being used refer to that device s user s manual for details At startup the e When received data is used in the ladder program use the received data is All Tag Data Links Operating Flag in Communications Status OFF unexpectedly 1 or the Target Node PLC Operating Flag as a condition If the Target Node PLC Operating Flag is used the PLC status must be included in tag sets of both the sending and receiv ing nodes If the Output OFF function Output Inhibit is enabled in the output produce tag settings all of the output data will be OFF if a fatal error occurs in the CPU Unit or the Output OFF Bit is turned ON Check the status of the output produ
220. al software tool OMRON W4S1 series Switching None Provided L4 QoS is set using Hubs a switch No soft ware tool is neces sary Note If the Network Configurator is used to set the connection type in the connec tion settings to a multicast connection multicast packets will be used If the connection type is set to a point to point connection multicast packets will not be used 2 3 5 Precautions When Selecting a Switching Hub The functions supported by the switching hub may affect tag data link trans mission delays and the configuration In addition if the switching hub supports advanced functions special settings are required for those functions 29 Selecting the Network Devices Section 2 3 When selecting a switching hub it is necessary to consider whether the switching hub will be selected based on the kind and amount of communica tions that will be performed in the network or the kind of switching hub that you want to use Refer to the following precautions when selecting a switching hub Refer to 10 2 Adjusting the Communications Load to estimate the communi cations load for tag data links Selecting the Switching Hub Based on the Types of Network Communications Executing Tag Data Links Only Executing Tag Data Links and Message Communications We recommend using an L2 switching hub without multicast filtering or an L2 switching hub with multicast filtering Using an L2 switching hub with multic
221. al connection with 129 nodes In this case bidirectional communications can be performed with 129 nodes or more by adding an EtherNet IP Unit with the IP address of for example 192 168 250 253 to the same PLC creating an output tag set in the new EtherNet IP Unit and creating connections 192 168 250 254 192 168 250 1 Tagset_in1 Tagset_out Tagset_in Tagset_in2 192 168 250 2 Tagset_in129 Tagset_out Tagset_in 192 168 250 253 Tagset_out253 192 168 250 129 Tagset_out Tagset_in The packet interval is the data I O refresh cycle in the Ethernet circuit when performing tag data links and can be set separately for each connection The packet interval can be set to between 0 5 and 10 000 ms in units of 0 5 ms for the CJ2B EIP21 built in EtherNet IP port on the CJ2H CS1W EIP21 or CJ1W EIP21 It can be set to between 1 and 10 000 ms in units of 0 5 ms for the CJ2M EIP21 built in EtherNet IP port on the CJ2M The default setting is 50 ms With EtherNet IP data is exchanged on the communications line at the packet interval that is set for each connection regardless of the number of nodes A multicast connection or unicast point to point connection can be selected as the connection type in the tag data link connection settings With a multicast connection you can send an output tag set in one package to multiple nodes and make allocations to the input tag sets A unicast conn
222. al target node information CPU Bus Unit System Setup Not used Non volatile memory within Ether Net IP Unit See note The following settings are stored in the EtherNet IP Unit s non volatile memory Note Unlike the regular Ethernet Units the CPU Bus Unit Setup Area in the CPU Unit is not used for these settings 1 Unit setup communications settings for the EtherNet IP Unit such as the IP ad dress DNS server settings host name baud rate FINS UDP settings and FINS TCP settings 2 Tag data link settings device parameters Transfer Media access method CSMA CD specifica A Modulation method tions Baseband Transmission paths Star form Baud rate 100 Mbit s 100Base TX Transmission media Shielded twisted pair STP cable Categories 100 Q at 5 5e Transmission distance 100 m distance between hub and node Number of cascade connections There is no limitation when a switching hub is used Current consumption Unit 410 mA max at 5 V DC Weight 171 g max Dimensions 35 x 130 x 101 mm W x H x D Other general specifications Note Other specifications conform to the general specifications of the CS series If tag data links are being used use 100Base TX Otherwise 10Base T can be used but this is not recommended 14 EtherNet IP Unit and Built in EtherNet IP Port Specifications Section 2 1 CJ series E
223. an attached file in IOM format the data will be stored in the attached file as shown in the following diagram Example Binary data format with a delimiter after every 10 fields I O memory 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1234 5678 9ABC DEFO 1234 5678 9ABC DEFO 1234 5678 10 9ABC DEFO 1234 5678 9ABC DEFO 1234 5678 9ABC DEFO IOM file contents XXIXX xx 12 34 56 78 9A BC DE F0 12 34 Sea ee 48 bytes Reserved by the system m TXT Format The TXT format is a data format using tab delimiters specified by the ladder instructions READ DATA FILE FREAD 700 and WRITE DATA FILE FWRIT 701 in the CPU Unit The format is configured according to the specified FREAD 700 and FWRIT 701 parameters as follows Data format Use of CRs and CR position e Words without delimiters e No CRs e Double words without delimiters e CR after every 10 fields e Words delimited by tabs e CR after each field e Double words delimited by tabs e CR after every 2 fields e CR after every 4 fields e CR after every 5 fields e CR after every 16 fields If data from the I O memory 1234 hexadecimal 5678 hexadecimal 9ABC hexadecimal etc is contained in an attached file in TXT format the data will be converted into ASCII format in words or double words The words are delimited by inserting tabs HT 0
224. and DM Area according to the unit numbers that are set For details refer to SECTION 4 Memory Allocations Setting the Node Address Relationship to IP Addresses 36 Note When there are multiple EtherNet IP Units or Ethernet Units connected to the Ethernet network for the FINS communications service the EtherNet IP Units are identified by node addresses Use the node address switches NODE NO to set the node address between 01 and FE hexadecimal 1 to 254 deci mal Do not set a number that has already been set for another node on the same network NODE NO 01 to FE 1 to 254 decimal The left switch sets the sixteens digit most significant digit and the right switch sets the ones digit least significant digit The node address is factory set to 01 Turn OFF the power supply before setting the node address When IP addresses are generated automatically either dynamic or passive the rightmost byte of the host ID of the IP address is set to the same value as the node address Refer to Section 5 Determining IP Addresses If the same node address value cannot be used the IP address table method or the com bined method must be used for address conversion For details refer to SEC TION 5 Determining IP Addresses If the FINS communications service is not being used on the Ethernet net work then it is all right for the same node address to be set on two or more EtherNet IP Units The setting however must b
225. ands and responses Bits 08 to 15 in the communica tions port completion code correspond to the first byte of the response code and bits 00 to 07 correspond to the second byte For details refer to 14 6 Troubleshooting with FINS Response Codes Communications Port Error Flag and Completion Codes CMND 490 Errors that occur when CMND 490 is used generate a Communications Port Error Flag and are recorded in a communications port completion code only in the following cases e When a response timeout error has occurred e When the number of communications data bytes exceeds the maximum value for the Unit i e 2 000 bytes for the EtherNet IP Unit or built in Eth erNet IP port e When the actual number of response bytes is greater than the number of reception bytes that has been set The response is not stored in this case Errors other than these are recorded in the response codes of the responses stored from the beginning response storage word onwards Be careful of these because there are no Communications Port Error Flags and they are not recorded in a communications port completion code Timing of Communications Flag Changes 228 The Communications Port Enabled Flag remains OFF during communica tions and turns ON when they are completed regardless of whether or not an error occurs e The Communications Port Error Flag retains its status until the next trans mission or reception e The Communications Port Error Flag
226. anged dynamically When the Unit is turned ON or restarted the IP addresses of remote FINS nodes registered with an IP address of 0 0 0 0 can be changed dynamically according to FINS messages received from remote nodes This can be used effectively when the remote node is a device such as a personal computer and IP addresses are dynami cally changed by a method such as DHCP 97 IP Addresses in FINS Communications Section 5 2 Combined Method 98 Example When FINS Command is Sent FINS node number IP address table FINS node IP address number Node number in 18 153 214 0 62 IP address table 20 153 214 0 129 IP address 153 214 0 129 23 153 218 51 8 FINS command sent When FINS Command is Received FINS node number Changed FINS response returned The combined method combines the IP address table method and the auto matic generation method dynamic First the IP address table is referenced Then if the applicable FINS node address is found the corresponding IP address is read If the FINS node address is not found the IP address is calculated using the automatic genera tion method dynamic The internal table will be as follows e FINS Node Address Registered to IP Address Table The following address is registered to the internal table e Remote IP address IP address registered in IP address table e Remote UDP port number UDP port number set for local Unit e Connection method FINS
227. arget Indicates that the node s tag Node Flags data link is registered Indicates that the node s tag data link is not registered Words n 20 to n 23 show the connection status of the target nodes that are connected with the EtherNet IP Unit as the originator With revision 2 or higher the flag turns ON after all data for multiple connections for individual target devices is refreshed in the CPU Unit With revision 1 each flag immedi ately turns ON when all connections are established These words show the status of nodes 0 to 63 only If it is necessary to show the status of nodes higher than node 63 select user settings as the layout pattern For details refer to 4 4 User Settings Area 15 14 13 12 11 410 9 hefwu s e upole s r e s s 2 1 o 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 48 Status Manipulated Unit operation Normal Target Node i Revision 1 Flags immediately Flags turn ON when all connections are established Revision 2 or higher Flags turn ON after all data for multiple connections for the target device is refreshed in the CPU Unit Indicates that the connection is not established Word n 24 shows the status of FINS TCP connections For details refer to SECTION 8 FINS Communications 15 14 13 12 1110 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 TT LEEE ELT TEE EEE Manipul
228. as the tag data link originator The icon will be blue if the connection is normal or red if an error occurred Checking Status with the Network Configurator Section 14 1 Monitor Device Controller Error History Tag Status Ethernet Information Status 1 Status 2 Connection Error History Unit Status Mir K Network Status All Tag Data Link Tag Data Link Ethernet Link Status Target Node Status am Close Status 2 Tab Page The Status 2 Tab Page s Target PLC Status Field shows the status of the tar get node PLCs that are connected with the EtherNet IP Unit as the tag data link originator The icon will be blue if the CPU Unit is in RUN mode or MONI TOR mode gray if it is in PROGRAM mode or red if an error occurred The Connected Status of FINS TCP Connections Field shows the status of FINS TCP connections There will be a check mark in the box when the corre sponding connection is established connected 341 Checking Status with the Network Configurator Section 14 1 Monitor Device Controller Error History Tag Status Ethernet Information Status 1 Status 2 Connection Error History Target PLC Status one RUN ERROR Connected Status of FINS TCP Connections FINS TGP Connection No1 Note The target PLC status is can be used when the PLC status is selected for all the target sets for both originator and target connections For those that are not selected the status will be grayed out
229. ast filtering prevents increased traffic due to unnecessary multicast packets so the tag data links can operate at higher speed If either of the following conditions exists the amount traffic will be the same for both kinds of L2 switching hubs with or without multicast fil tering e The tag data links are set to share the same data with all nodes in the net work The multicast packets are transferred to all nodes in the network just like a broadcast e The tag data link settings are all one to one unicast and multicast pack ets cannot be used If multicast filters are being used settings must be made in the switching hub There must be enough multicast filters for all of the networks being used We recommend using an L2 switching hub with multicast filtering and L4 QoS By setting tag data links for higher priority transmission it is possible to pre vent problems such as transmission delays due to message communications traffic and packet losses due to buffer overflow Settings must be made in the switching hub to enable this function and give higher priority to tag data link packets Special settings must be made in the switching hub when using the multicast filtering function and L4 QoS function Selecting the Switching Hub Based on the Hub s Supported Functions L2 Switching Hub without Multicast Filtering L2 Switching Hub with Multicast Filtering 30 We recommend this kind of switching hub when only tag
230. ated Unit operation by FINS TCP Connec i Turned ON by the Unit when a tion 1 connection is established Turned OFF by the Unit when the connection is terminated FINS TCP Connec i Turned ON by the Unit when a tion 2 connection is established Turned OFF by the Unit when the connection is terminated 81 CIO Area Allocations 82 FINS TCP Connec tion 15 Status Manipulated by Section 4 2 Unit operation Turned ON by the Unit when a connection is established Turned OFF by the Unit when the connection is terminated FINS TCP Connec tion 16 Turned ON by the Unit when a connection is established Turned OFF by the Unit when the connection is terminated DM Area Allocations Section 4 3 4 3 DM Area Allocations 4 3 1 Overview of the Allocated DM Area Words The various kinds of data are stored in the offset positions shown in the fol lowing diagram from the beginning word in the area for each Unit The beginning word m is calculated by the following equation Beginning word m D30000 100 x unit number Offset Bit l 15 08 07 og Pata direction m Not used m 97 Eth t Unit to CPU Unit IP Address Display Setting Area Bru dca acted ne or m 99 J 4 3 2 Details of the Allocated DM Area Words IP Address Display Setting Area m 98 and m 99 Application Simple operation i e The TCP IP Configuration is left
231. ately before resetting Response Codes 1001 Command too large CONTROLLER DATA READ Reads the following data from the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port Model number version IP address subnet mask FINS UDP port number mode settings Ethernet address Command Block 05 01 uf Command code Response Block Command Response Model number Version IP address Subnet FINS UDP Mode Ethernet address code code mask portnumber setting Model number Version Response The model number and version of the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port are returned as ASCII char acters occupying 20 bytes each i e 20 characters each If all bytes are not used the remaining bytes will be all spaces ASCII 20 Hex Example Model CS1W EIP21 CJ1W EIP21 CJ2B EIP21 or CJ2M EIP21 Example Version V2 00 By convention the model number of the built in EtherNet IP port on a CU2H CPULILI EIP CPU Unit is CJ2B EIP21 By convention the model number of the built in EtherNet IP port on a CJ2M CPU3L CPU Unit is CU2M EIP21 IP Address Subnet Mask Response The IP address and subnet mask of the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port are returned as 4 bytes each FINS UDP Port Number Response The UDP port number of the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port for FINS is returned as 2 bytes 392 FINS Commands Addressed to EtherNet IP Units or Built in EtherNet IP Ports Appe
232. ations are first established for each connection and then remote FINS node addresses are mutually converted See note After the FINS node address is converted FINS message com munications are executed In this way remote FINS node addresses and remote IP addresses are paired for each connection Therefore with the FINS TCP method there is no need to set IP address conversions i e pairing FINS node addresses with IP addresses as with FINS UDP On the other hand it is necessary to set the remote IP address for each connection in the FINS TCP Tab Page of the Net work Configurator s Edit Parameters Dialog Box The internal table is changed after connections are established The EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port executes the following pro cessing when the FINS TCP method is used m Local Device FINS TCP Client 1 Connections are established in TCP IP protocol with the remote IP ad dresses set for FINS TCP connections in the FINS TCP Tab Page of the CX Programmer s Edit Parameters Dialog Box 2 The remote node i e the server is notified of the FINS node address for the local device 3 Notification is received from the remote node i e the server of the re mote node s FINS node address 4 The EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port changes the internal table FINS node address IP address and TCP port number 5 FINS messages can then be sent and received IP Addresses in FINS Communicati
233. aximum time of 60 s is reached 2MSL timer The 2MSL timer starts at the TCP socket that first closes the socket and will run for 60 s in the TIME_WAIT status IP reassemble timer 12s A fragmented IP packet is discarded if it cannot be reassembled within 12 seconds ARP timer 20 min 3 min If a complete ARP table entry with an Ethernet address is not referred to for 20 minutes it is removed from the table An incomplete ARP table entry no response yet returned to the ARP request is removed from the table after 3 minutes Window size initial value of max imum window size 4 096 bytes The initial value of the maximum capacity used to control the conver gence of TCP sockets Actually the node negotiates with the remote node and uses the smaller of the values for the two nodes The window size will fluctuate with the available space in the TCP reception buffers of the remote node when processing communications Fragment size 1 500 bytes Data packets are fragmented into 1 500 byte IP packets UDP data is separated into 1 472 byte fragments before sending Segment size 1 024 bytes TCP data is separated into 1 024 byte units unless the segments are dif ferent in which case it will be separated into 536 byte units TTL Time to Live 30 Decremented each time an IP router is passed Keep alive timer First time 5 min Resend 5s x 5 times The keep alive timer is u
234. ber to use when connecting from an SNMP man ager It is normally not necessary to change this setting SNMP Contact Informa tion Specifies the contact information as text This information can be read from the SNMP manager SNMP Location Informa tion Specifies the location information as text This information can be read from the SNMP manager Authentication Check 1 2 Specifies the SNMP managers that can access the PLC To restrict access to only specific SNMP managers specify the SNMP managers using IP addresses or host names Community names can also be specified e g public Ether one or two settings can be made Using SNMP Trap Tab Page in Edit Parameters Dialog Box SNMP Trap 64 Setting Not use SNMP Trap ser vice or Use SNMP Trap service Function Specifies whether to use the SNMP trap If not using the SNMP trap service is specified SNMP traps cannot be sent to the SNMP manager SNMP Trap Port Sets the port number to use to connect to the SNMP manager It is normally not necessary to change this setting Trap 1 2 Sets the SNMP manager destinations for SNMP traps The SNMP managers can be specified using IP addresses or host names Community names can also be specified e g public Either one or two trap destinations can be set Communications Test Section 3 11 3 11 Communications Test If the basic settings in particular the IP address
235. ble data IF you have not saved the data it will be discarded YES Continue NO Cancel 153 Setting Tag Data Links Section 6 2 If the creating the data link table is continued the data link table will be cre ated with the same size of data link for all registered nodes Examples are shown below Automatic Allocation Results for Node 1 IP Address 192 168 250 1 a1fd878d csv DatalinkToo File Edit Datalink Help je HB S eax ls X amp v Nodes Datalink Table data of selected node rea1 Area2 Total RPI Faaa gure IN OUT Link CH Size Link CH Size _TagSetName _ Size _Node Target Variable ms 192 168 250 1 wooo 50 D00050 100 TagSet1_192 168 250 1 150 7 192 168 250 2 2 N woso 50 D00150 100 TagSet2_192 168 250 1 150 192 168 250 2 TagSet2_192 168 250 2 50 0 192 168 250 3 N W100 56 D00250 100 TagSet3_192 168 250 1 150 192 168 250 3 TagSet3_192 168 250 3 50 0 4 r G 4 The number of ion PPS without PPS with connection Multicast filter Multicast filter IN OUT Output with no overload is marked Total Size The displayed size does not include the size of PLC Status 1 word A tagset created by this tool always includes PLC Status F2 Fi F3 Fa FS F6 Er Fe Fo F10 Shi
236. ble to send and receive FINS messages Setting FINS TCP The procedure for setting FINS TCP connections involves the items described Connections below The settings are made individually for each connection numbers 1 to 16 on the FINS TCP Tab Page of the Edit Parameters Dialog Box of the CX Programmer m Local Device Server 1 2 3 1 Set the server 2 Set IP addresses for the devices to be connected If the option for protection of IP addresses is selected set the IP addresses for clients where connections are permitted This step can be omitted 3 Automatic FINS node address allocation If the client generally a personal computer supports FINS TCP and if it is to be used without setting a FINS node address the value set here from 239 to 254 can be allocated to the client The default settings should nor mally be used m Local Device Client 1 2 3 1 Set the client 101 IP Addresses in FINS Communications Section 5 2 2 SetIP addresses for the devices to be connected Set the IP address for the remote EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port i e the server connected by FINS TCP This setting must be made if this EtherNet IP Unit will be used as a FINS TCP client 5 2 3 Application Examples Responding to Computers with Changed IP Addresses FINS UDP Communications Method FINS TCP Communications Method 102 Note With FINS UDP whether using the automatic conversion method dynami
237. bleshooting 347 link setting baud rate 55 local network table 207 locking devices precautions xxv Login field 306 Low Voltage Directive xxvi ls command 303 308 309 maintenance 332 maximum tag data link I O response time 286 mdelete command 303 308 312 memory allocation 68 Memory Card 334 restoring data 335 Memory Cards 303 315 deleting files 312 displaying directories 309 See also FTP server transferring files from host 311 transferring files to host 311 MEMORY STATUS READ 411 message communications 7 233 errors 194 specifications 193 message communications functions 187 message communications service required settings 35 mget command 303 308 311 mkdir command 303 308 mode settings reading from Unit 392 mounting procedure 39 mput command 303 308 311 MS indicator 23 multicast communications 114 multicast filter 29 N beginning word of allocated CIO Area 70 network devices required for constructing a network 4 network configuration file reading 178 saving 177 Network Configurator 121 connecting to the network 161 Device Monitor function 340 requirements 10 starting 121 TCP IP settings 55 Network Configurator overview 10 network devices recommended devices 28 networks network memory 411 network parameters 375 Node Address Setting Switch 27 node addresses setting 36 37 noise XXIV Contact Output Units 43 reducing 41 nomencla
238. boxes represent 1 byte each 250 Receiving Explicit Messages Section 9 2 CPU Information Read Service Code 0E Hex Command Block Response Block Parameters Reads CPU Unit information including operating mode fatal non fatal errors and the CPU Unit model OE on 00 The class ID depends on the unit version Version 2 0 The class ID is C4 aay i Version 1 0 The class ID is 2F f Class ID Attribute ID Instance ID Service Code Note A body format of either 8 bits or 16 bits is possible 8E Service Code Attribute Value Service code command response OE Hex is specified for commands For responses the highest bit be ON and 8E Hex will be returned Class ID command Always C4 2F The class ID depends on the unit version The class ID is C4 for unit version 2 0 and 2F for unit version 1 0 Instance ID command Always 00 Hex Attribute ID command The read information is specified by the attribute ID The attribute IDs are listed in the following table Attribute ID Hex Contents Attribute value size CPU Unit operating mode 1 word 2 bytes CPU Unit errors 1 word 2 bytes CPU Unit model 22 bytes e CPU Operating Mode when Attribute ID 64 Hex Reads the CPU Unit operating mode e CPU Unit Errors when Attribute ID 65 Hex Reads if there are any fatal or non fatal errors in the CPU Unit e CPU Unit Model when Attribute I
239. bps If these countermea sures are not possible change the connection settings e g the RPI set tings and adjust the bandwidth for all cascade connections until the total network bandwidth is not exceeded 271 Adjusting the Communications Load Section 10 2 e Is the network bandwidth usage without multicast filtering under 100 Mbps for each node or the usage of capacity without multicast filtering under 100 for each node These appear as Mbit s and Usage of Capacity in the dialog box shown on page 269 If the total bandwidth usage exceeds 100 Mbps the bandwidth of part of the transmission path e g a switching hub or media converter had been exceeded as the result of how the network was wired e g switch hub or cascade connection causing a tag data link to operate abnor mally Check the bandwidth of the transmission path for all cascade con nections If the bandwidth is exceeded rewire the network or increase the bandwidth between switching hubs e g to 1 Gbps If these countermea sures are not possible change the connection settings e g the RPI set tings and adjust the bandwidth for all cascade connections until the total network bandwidth is not exceeded 10 2 4 Changing the RPI 272 1 2 3 You can check the usage of capacity offline without multicast filtering against the tag data link s allowable bandwidth by following the procedures in 10 2 1 Checking Bandwidth Usage for Tag Data Links
240. by individually changing the packet intervals RPI setting for a particular connection In this case the usage of capacity will also change for the device that is the target device of the connection which was adjusted Adjusting the Communications Load Section 10 2 a Click the Close Button at the bottom of the Usage of Device Bandwidth Dialog Box b Double click the device that is set as the originator of the desired con nection The Edit Device Parameters Dialog Box will be displayed Edit Device Parameters Connections Tag Sets Unregister Device List Product Name Connections 2 256 0 1 T 1 Register Device List Product Name 192 168 250 1 CS1W EIP21 Variable Target Variable P3192 168 2502 002 CI W CNO1_01 Dnput TagSet2 1921682501 TagSet2 192 168 250 2 Edit All Change Target Node ID To From Fie c In the Register Device List select the connection for which you want to change the RPI and click the Edit Button Edit Device Parameters Connections Tag Sets Unregister Device List Product Name Connections 2 256 0 1 T 1 Register Device List Product Name 192 168 250 1 CS1W EIP21 Variable Target Variable 192 168 2502 002 CJ1W GNO1_01 put TagSet2_192 168 250 1 TaeSet2 192 168 2502 Edit Delete Edit All To From File Seth d The device s Edit Connections Dialog Box will be displayed Input a new RPI value and c
241. by issuing the FINS command to execute the PING command from the PLC 3 11 3 Host Computer Operation The PING command can be executed from the host computer to send an echo request packet to an EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port The following example shows how to use the PING command in the host com puter Command Method Input the following command at the host computer s prompt ping IP_address host_name The destination is specified by its IP address or host name If the host name is used the host name must be defined in the etc hosts file Note The PING command is not supported by some host computers 65 Communications Test Section 3 11 Application Example Normal Execution Error Occurred 66 In this example a PING command is sent to the node at IP address 130 25 36 8 The in the example represents the host computer prompt ping 130 25 36 8 lt Executes the PING command PING 130 25 36 8 56 data bytes 64 bytes from 130 25 36 8 icmp_seq 0 time 0 ms 64 bytes from 130 25 36 8 icmp_seq 0 time 0 ms 64 bytes from 130 25 36 8 icmp_seq 0 time 0 ms lt Press the Ctrl C Keys to cancel execution 130 25 36 8 PING Statistics 9 packets transmitted 9 packets received 0 packets loss round trip ms min avg max 0 1 16 png 130 25 36 8 lt Executes the PING command PING 130 25 36 8 56 data bytes lt Press the Ctrl C Keys to cancel execution
242. bytes max when broadcasting RECV 990 words 1 980 bytes max e CMND 1 990 bytes max normally or 1 462 bytes max when broadcasting data after the FINS command code Explicit message communications CMND 492 bytes max No of simultaneous instructions One each for 8 ports ports 0 to 7 Refer to 3 25 Network Instructions in the CS CJ Series Programmable Con trollers Instructions Reference Manual W340 for information on ports logi cal ports Response monitoring time Default setting 2 s User setting 0 1 to 6553 5 s Retries 0 to 15 Internetwork con nections Same network type Supports internetwork communications between Ethernet networks con nected to CS CJ series EtherNet IP Units and built in EtherNet IP ports up to 3 levels Different network type Supports internetwork communications between the EtherNet IP network connected to a CS CJ series EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port and other networks such as Controller Link or SYSMAC LINK up to 3 lev els 193 Message Communications Error Indications Section 7 5 7 5 Message Communications Error Indications There are two ways to obtain information on communications errors that occur in message communications checking the EtherNet IP Unit s error log or checking its indicators 194 1 2 3 1 Each time a communications error occurs an error code is placed in an er ror record in the e
243. c the IP address table method or the combined method remote FINS node addresses and remote IP addresses in the internal table are changed after FINS messages are received Therefore even when a FINS command has been received from a personal computer a DHCP client computer for which the IP address is dynamically changed a response can still be sent back to the computer the DHCP client computer from which the command origi nated Personal computer client IP address changed acquired from DHCP server when connected FINS command sent __ IP address FINS command Ethernet EtherNet IP EtherNet IP Unit with fixed IP address IP address FINS response Response sent back to changed IP address With FINS TCP FINS node addresses and IP addresses in the internal table are changed with each connection that is established Therefore even when a FINS command has been received from a personal computer a DHCP client computer for which the IP address is dynamically changed a response can still be sent back to the computer the DHCP client computer from which the command originated Personal computer client IP address changed acquired from DHCP server when connected FINS command sent L IP address FINS command Ethernet EtherNet IP EtherNet IP Unit FINS TCP server with fixed IP address IP address FINS response
244. case that General Status Is 01 Hex Status of Connection Manager Object General Status Additional hex Status hex 0100 Explanation Connection in Use or Duplicate Forward Open 0103 Transport Class and Trigger combination not supported 0106 Ownership Conflict 0107 Connection not found at target application 0108 Invalid Connection Type Indicates a problem with either the Connection Type or Prior ity of the Connection 0109 Invalid Connection Size 0110 Device not configured 0111 RPI not supported May also indicate problem with connection time out multiplier or production inhibit time 0113 Connection Manager cannot support any more connections 0114 Either the Vendor Id or the Product Code in the key segment did not match the device 0115 Product Type in the key segment did not match the device 0116 Major or Minor Revision information in the key segment did not match the device 0117 Invalid Connection Point 0118 Invalid Configuration Format 0119 Connection request fails since there is no controlling connection currently open 011A Target Application cannot support any more connections 011B RPI is smaller than the Production Inhibit Time 0203 Connection cannot be closed since the connection has timed out 0204 Unconnected Send timed out waiting for a response 0205 Parameter Error in Unco
245. ce CJ2H built in port CJ2H CPU6L EIP 256 Packet interval RPI 1 to 10 000 ms in 0 5 ms units 0 5 to 10 000 ms in 0 5 ms units Allowed communications bandwidth per Unit PPS 3 000 pps 6 000 pps Number of tags that can be registered 32 256 Tag types CIO Area DM Area EM Area Holding Area Work Area and network symbols Number of registrable tag sets 32 256 Number of tags per connec tion 8 7 tags when the tag set contains the PLC status Maximum size of 1 tag set 20 words The PLC status uses 1 word when the tag set contains the PLC status 722 words The PLC status uses 1 word when the tag set contains the PLC status Maximum data size per con nection 20 words 722 words Maximum link data size per node 640 words 184 832 words Maximum number of tags that can be refreshed per CPU Unit cycle Output Transmission CPU EtherNet IP 32 Input Reception EtherNet IP CPU 32 Output Transmission CPU EtherNet IP 256 Input Reception EtherNet IP CPU 256 Data that can be refreshed per CPU Unit cycle Tag Data Link System Output Transmission CPU EtherNet IP 640 words Input Reception EtherNet IP CPU 640 words Note The total for output transmission and input reception is 640 words Output Transmission CPU EtherNet IP 6 432 words Input Reception
246. ceive data sent from a producer node when the connection ID in the packet indicates that the node requires the data Since the producer can send the same data with the same characteristics in a multicast either multicast or unicast can be selected the time required for the transfer is fixed and not dependent on the number of con sumer nodes Devices Required for Constructing a Network Section 1 2 1 2 Devices Required for Constructing a Network The basic configuration for an EtherNet IP System consists of one switching hub to which nodes are attached in star configuration using twisted pair cable CX One Support 3 Switching hub Software 2 Twisted pair cable 1 Built in EtherNet IP port on CJ2 CPU Unit CJ2H CPULIL EIP CJ2M CPU3L 1 CS1W EIP21 EtherNet IP Unit for CS series 1 CJ4W EIP21 EtherNet IP Unit Ethernet LAN port The devices shown in the following table are required to configure a network with CS1W EIP21 and CJ1W EIP21 EtherNet IP Units or the built in EtherNet IP port in CJ2H CPULILI EIP CJ2M CPU3L CPU Units Network device Contents 1 CS1W EIP21 EtherNet IP These are Communications Units or built in ports Units for CS series PLCs that connect a CS series or CJ series PLC to an Eth CJ1W EIP21 EtherNet IP erNet IP network Units for CJ series PLCs or built in EtherNet IP port in CJ2H CPULI
247. cer PLC The tag data links Check whether the baud rate is set to 10 Mbps or a 10M or start and stop com 100M repeater hub is being used The tag data link perfor municating inter mance is based on the use of switching hubs The bandwidth mittently listed in the specifications CJ2M 3 000 pps other CPU Units 6 000 pps is achieved when the Unit auto negotiates to full duplex at 100 Mbps Refer to 14 1 Checking Status with the Network Configurator for details on checking the error counters on the Monitor Device Window s Ethernet Information Tab Page The error and discarded packet counters indicate problems such as noise in the communications path the use of substandard cables damaged cables connectors loose connectors abnormally high communications load or incorrect wiring loops in the switching hub wiring Contact the switching hub manufacturer to determine whether there are any problems with the transfer capacity of the switching hubs in the communications path If switching hubs are arranged in a cascade connection there may be a heavy load concentrated at a mid level switching hub In the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port itself processing is performed with a higher priority than message communi cations so specifications provide for a 3 000 pps bandwidth for the CJ2M and a 6 000 pps bandwidth for other CPU Units in tag data link performance only Refer to 14 1 Checking Status with the Network Configurator
248. ching hub appropriate for the ambient condi tions Contact the switching hub manufacturer for details on switching hub s environment resistance specifications Switching Hub Connection Methods Connect two hubs to each other as follows Connect an MDI port to an MDI X port with a straight cable connect two MDI ports with a cross cable and connect two MDI X ports with a cross cable Note It is very difficult to distinguish cross cables and straight cables by appear ance Incorrect cables will cause communications to fail We recommend using cascade connections with straight cables whenever possible MDI ports MDI X port 4s Straight cable cross Switching Cross cable Hub Switching Switching Switching Hub 2 Hub Hub Pel o ER Pal o Pal g Pal g Pal o Pal o Pal o ol alo aju oju o o oju ajo ajn Some switching hubs can automatically distinguish between MDI and MDI X When this kind of switching hub is being used straight cable can be used between switching hubs Note Adjust the link settings of the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port to match the communications settings of the connected switching hub If the set tings do not match the link will become unstable and prevent normal commu nications The following table shows the allowed settings for each switching hub communications m
249. cial I O Unit CPU Bus Unit peripheral port RS 232C port and Inner Board Note CJ2 CPU Units support only Normal Mode For details refer to the CPU Unit s Operation Manual 295 Message Service Transmission Delay Section 10 5 CPU Bus Unit Service The following table shows the CPU Bus Unit service processing time which Processing Time Remote depends on the CPU Unit s CPU processing mode setting Node CPU execution mode Processing time details Normal Mode See note Set peripheral servicing time Default 4 of CPU Unit cycle time 10 for CJ2 CPU Units Priority peripheral servicing EtherNet IP Unit or Time slice peripheral servicing built in EtherNet IP execution time port is given prior ity EtherNet IP Unit or Set peripheral servicing time built in EtherNet IP Default 4 of CPU Unit cycle port is not given time priority Parallel processing with syn Set peripheral servicing time chronous memory access Default 4 of CPU Unit cycle time 10 for CJ2 CPU Units Parallel processing with asyn 1 ms max chronous memory access Note CJ2 CPU Units support only Normal Mode For details refer to the CPU Unit s Operation Manual Note Depending on the actual operating environment the transmission time may be longer than the one calculated with the equations given here The following factors can cause longer transmission times other traffic on the
250. corresponding target node PLC of connections in which the EtherNet IP Unit is the originator The flag corresponding to the target node s target ID will be ON when the PLC Operating Flags for all connections with that target node indicate that the PLC is operating Each node address s flag location i e target ID can be changed from the Network Configu rator The PLC status flags are enabled when the PLC status is included in the communications data for both the originator and target The data in this table is refreshed when neces sary Target Node PLC Error Flag Infor mation Layout set to default settings Words n 6 to n 9 Layout set to user settings Words n 48 to n 63 Note Corresponds to the PLC sta tus s PLC Error Flag Each flag indicates the error status logical OR of non fatal and fatal errors of the correspond ing target node PLC of connections in which the EtherNet IP Unit is the originator The flag corresponding to the target node s target ID will be ON if even one error is indicated in any of the connections with that target node Each node address s flag location i e target ID can be changed from the Network Configu rator The PLC status flags are enabled when the PLC status is included in the communications data for both the originator and target The data in this table is refreshed when neces sary Normal Target Node Flag Table Layout set to default settings Words n
251. cted An address duplication is detected if there is an ARP response This flag remains ON until the power supply is turned OFF and ON again The Ethernet interface will stop There was no ARP response Not used Link OFF Error There was an error estab lishing a link with the switch ing hub A link was established nor mally with the switching hub CIO Area Allocations Unit Status 2 EtherNet IP Unit to by Not used Status Manipulated Section 4 2 Unit operation Status Area Layout Setting Error Indicates that there was an error in the allocated CIO Area s layout settings When this error occurs the allo cated CIO Area layout is set to the default pattern In the following cases how ever the allocated CIO Area layout is set to the user set pattern In this case the user set area will not be refreshed A non existent area has been specified There was not an error in the layout settings CPU Unit n 11 Not used 0 User Settings Area Enabled Multiple Switches ON Error Error Log Stored Status Manipulated by E Online Tag Data Link Operating Operating IP Address Change Unit operation Indicates that the Unit is online The EtherNet IP Unit can perform communications processing Indicates that the Unit is not online This bit is turned OFF in the
252. ctly invalid device parameters may be set in the wrong PLC Check the connected PLC before down loading parameters If incorrect tag data link parameters are set it may cause equipment to operate unpredictably Even when the correct tag data link parameters are set make sure that there will be no effect on equipment before transfer ring the data When network symbols are used in tag settings a connection error will result if the symbols are not also set in the CPU Unit Before downloading the tag data link parameters check to confirm that the network symbols have been set in the CPU Unit On the Connection and Tag Status Tab Pages described in 14 1 1 The Network Configurator s Device Monitor Function check whether the network symbol tag and connection set tings are correct When a communications error occurs the output status depends on the specifications of the Unit being used When a communications error occurs for a Unit that is used along with output devices check the operat ing specifications and implement safety countermeasures The EtherNet IP Unit is automatically restarted after the parameters have been downloaded This restart is required to enable the tag set and con nection information that have been set Before downloading the parame ters check to confirm that restarting will not cause any problems with the equipment Do not disconnect the Ethernet cable or reset or turn OFF the power to the EtherNet IP Unit whi
253. d add tags either double click the tag set or select the tag set and click the Edit Button The Edit Tag Set Dialog Box will be displayed Edit Tag Set PLC Status Name D00000 NotInclude Include Tag List CandidateT ag List Name Over i Name Over Size Bit D00000 S 2Byte Advanced Cancel The Tag List on the left side of the dialog box shows the tags that are al ready registered and the Candidate Tag List on the right side of the dialog box shows the other tags that have not been registered yet To add a tag select it in the Candidate Tag List and click the lt Button When the PLC status is being included in the tag set select the Include Option at the upper right corner of the dialog box PLG Status Not Include Include If you want to change the tag set s name it can be changed in this dialog box To save the changes click the OK Button at the bottom of the Edit Tag Set Dialog Box Click the OK Button at the bottom of the Edit Device Parameters Dialog Box 133 Setting Tag Data Links Section 6 2 18 If you want to just add new tags and register the tag set first register the tags with steps 1 to 9 In this example input tags D00004 and D00005 have been newly added In Consume Out Produce Name 5 D00000 5 D00001 D00002 5 D00003 5 D00004 D00005 New Edit Delete Usage count 6 256 Cancel 19 When you are finished registering th
254. d in the control programs can be set for the tags Using network symbols is supported only by the CJ2H CPU6L EIP21 and CJ2M CPU3L This section first describes the basic procedure for creating tags and tag sets for using the Network Configurator s device parameter edit ing function 1 Creating Tags and Tag Sets Using the Network Configurator s Device Pa rameter Editing Function Next the following two procedures which can be used to effectively use net work symbols in tags are described 2 Importing Network Symbols Created with the CX Programmer to the Net work Configurator 3 Importing Network Symbols That Were Registered to Tags with the Net work Configurator to the CX Programmer 1 Creating Tags and Tag Sets Using the Network Configurator s Device Parameter Editing Function Note The network symbols described in this section can be used only if you are using a CU2H CPU6LI EIP21 or CU2M CPU3L CPU Unit Creating a Tag Set 1 2 3 1 Double click the icon of the device for which a tag set is being created to display the Edit Device Parameters Dialog Box Right click the icon to dis play the pop up menu and select Parameter Edit 126 Setting Tag Data Links Section 6 2 EtherNet IP_1 4 Open tal Save as Register to other Device gt D External Data L amp Cut Copy X Delete Change Node Address Change Device Co
255. data too large The data to be transmitted in the response buffer is larger than the allocated response buffer Fragmentation of a primitive value The service specified an operation that is going to fragment a primitive data value i e half a REAL data type Not enough data The service did not supply enough data to perform the specified operation Attribute not supported The attribute specified in the request is not supported Too much data The service supplied more data than was expected Object does not exist The object specified does not exist in the device Service fragmentation sequence not in progress The fragmentation sequence for this service is not currently active for this data No stored attribute data The attribute data of this object was not saved prior to the requested service Store operation failure The attribute data of this object was not saved due to a failure during the attempt Routing failure request packet too large The service request packet was too large for transmission on a network in the path to the destination The routing device was forced to abort the service Routing failure response packet too large The service response packet was too large for transmission on a network in the path from the destination The routing device was forced to abort the ser vice Missing attribute list entry data The service did not supply an at
256. device is displayed by default Usage of Capacity The percentage of the allowable communications bandwidth used for tag data links for the device is displayed Bandwidth used Allowable tag data link bandwidth The values outside parentheses are for when multicast filtering is used The values inside parentheses are for when multicast filtering is not used Mbit s The bandwidth used for communications by the device of the 100 Mbps network bandwidth is shown The values outside parentheses are for when multicast filtering is used The values inside parentheses are for when multicast filtering is not used Usage of IP Multi The number of multicast IP addresses actually used for com cast Addresses munications by the device is shown 269 Adjusting the Communications Load Section 10 2 Checking the Usage of Capacity and Network Bandwidth for Tag Data Links Checking the Total Number of Multicast IP Addresses in the Network Checking the Total Maximum Network Bandwidth Item Description Total usage of IP The number of multicast IP addresses used in the entire net multicast addresses work is shown This value is used to estimate the number of multicast filters for switching Network Total of The total network bandwidth used for tag data link communica Max Mbit s tions in the entire network is shown Tag data links will not operate normally if 100 Mbps is exceeded for the network bandwidth
257. device parameters from the Network Configurator If the error recurs replace the Ether Net IP Unit or fora built in EtherNet IP port the CPU Unit If the ladder pro gram uses the OUT instruction to turn ON the CPU Bus Unit Restart Bit change the OUT instruction to the SET instruc tion and download the parameters again Identify the error log data correct the settings and then download the Unit Setup from the tab pages of the Edit Parameters Dialog Box of the CX Programmer Flashing red 354 Ethernet Basic Settings Error Download the set tings from the TCP IP or Ethernet Tab Pages of the Edit Parameters Dialog Box of the CX Pro grammer or down load the TCP IP settings from the Network Configu rator Using the LED Indicators and Display for Troubleshooting Errors Related to the Network Indicator 7 segment Section 14 2 The 7 segment display alternates between the node address and error code Ethernet Link Not Detected The link with the switching hub could not be detected Note This error will not occur when data links are not set for version 2 0 or higher Unit operation Flag status e The Unit will be offline and unable to communicate Errors will be returned to all communications requests e Data exchanges refreshing will con tinue with the CPU Unit The Unit Error Occurred Flag n 10 bit 00 N
258. dicates that a verification error has not occurred Also turned OFF when a verifica tion error is cleared Not used Tag Data Link Error Indicates that there were two or more errors in a connection as an originator This status does not indicate the following errors e Connection as a target Connection timeout due to a Link OFF Error with the switching hub Indicates that the errors listed above did not occur Not used 77 CIO Area Allocations 78 Invalid Communi cations Parameter Status Manipulated by Section 4 2 Unit operation ON when there was an error in the validation check of tag data link parameters stored in the Unit s non volatile mem ory and a checksum error occurred Includes parame ters related to basic Ethernet settings The tag data links will stop OFF when the validation check of parameters in non volatile memory was normal Tag Refresh Error ON when a specified data area or address range is not supported in tag data links OFF when the specified data areas and addresses are sup ported in tag data links Tag Database Error ON if a tag database error occurs in the CPU Unit when a symbol name is used incor rectly in a setting for the Eth erNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port tag data link status area allocations setting etc CU2H CPU6 EIP or CJ2M CPU3L only OFF w
259. distance 15 16 transmission distance 14 DM Area allocations 83 DNS server 54 automatic clock adjustment errors 328 DNS Tab 326 domain name 55 downloading tag data link parameters 168 dynamic changes of remote IP address prohibiting 99 Index E EC Directives xxvi Edit Parameters 52 61 EDS file management 419 EDS files 10 419 creating 420 installing 419 saving 420 searching 421 electromagnetic fields xxiv EM File Memory 315 using 315 EMC Directives xxvi EMI Standard xxvi EMS Standard xxvi EPATH type 383 error codes table of error codes 365 error flags Target Node PLC Error Flags 73 87 error log clearing 364 codes 365 overflow 364 specifications 364 ERROR LOG CLEAR 399 error log function 364 ERROR LOG READ 398 error processing 339 errors automatic clock adjustment 328 controller status 394 error log clearing 399 reading 398 error messages 313 flags FINS communications 394 message communications 194 195 Ethernet communications addresses reading from Unit 392 network parameters 375 parameters 375 377 Ethernet Connectors 44 Ethernet Units reading status 411 EtherNet IP Datalink Tool 57 EtherNet IP Unit Features 2 EtherNet IP Units resetting 391 ETN11 compatible mode 99 explicit message communications 187 233 explicit message communications service 106 108 explicit messages list of PLC object services 249 receiving 24
260. dress is given in 4 digit hexadecimal Address H The higher 2 digits when the first word address is given in 4 digit hexadecimal No of Read Words command The number of words of read data is speci fied in 1 byte 2 digit hexadecimal The range is 01 to 64 Hex 1 to 100 deci mal Read data response The specified area word and byte data is returned in order from word L low byte bits 0 to 7 to word H high byte bits 8 to 15 The actual address L address H and number of write data bytes that can be specified depends on the model of the CPU Unit and the data area being written Do not exceed the boundary of the data areas for the PLC you are using Byte Data Write Service Code 1E Hex 258 Byte Data Write writes data to an I O memory area in a CPU Unit The write word data is in byte units The command block is specified in high to low byte order as shown in the following diagram Receiving Explicit Messages Section 9 2 Command Block C4 1E 2F The class ID depends on the unit version ME oo S EE E Version 2 0 The class ID is C4 im Version 1 0 The class ID is 2F Class ID Address L Word data L Word data L Service Instance ID Address H ode Word data H Word data H Write data 200 bytes max Note A body format of either 8 bits or 16 bits is possible Response Block 9E Service Code Parameters Service code command respo
261. dress set with the rotary switches on the front of the EtherNet IP Unit This address is also used as the FINS node address The following table shows the various settings in the Unit Setup when the IP address and TCP IP Configuration are all set to their default values Setting Operating status IP address 192 168 250 Node_address Subnet mask 255 255 255 0 class C mask Default gateway None IP routing disabled Preferred DNS server None Alternate DNS server None Host name None Domain name None Baud rate Auto detect Setting the Local IP Address Section 3 7 Method 2 Setting the Address in the CPU Bus Unit s Allocated DM Area With this method an IP address is not set in the TCP IP Configuration left at its default setting and an IP address is set in the allocated DM Area words the IP Address Display Setting Area in words m 98 and m 99 The IP address can be written in the two IP Address Display Setting Area words using the CX Programmer or the Programming Console To enable the new IP Address setting the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port must be restarted or the PLC s power must be turned OFF and then ON again Beginning word m D30000 100 x unit number 15 14 13 12 1110 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 m 98 1 2 3 4 m 99 5 6 7 8 IP Address 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Hex The following table shows the various Unit Setup when only the IP Addres
262. ds transferred x 0 0013 0 0118 ms 10Base T Command 0 0157 ms Response Number of words transferred x 0 0019 0 0157 ms Command 0 704 ms Response Number of words being transferred x 0 003 0 704 ms The following table shows the CPU Bus Unit service cycle which depends on the CPU Units CPU processing mode setting CPU execution mode Processing time details Normal Mode See note One CPU Unit cycle time Priority peripheral servicing EtherNet IP Unit or Time slice instruction execution built in EtherNet IP time port is given prior ity EtherNet IP Unit or One CPU Unit cycle time built in EtherNet IP port is not given priority Parallel processing with syn One CPU Unit cycle time chronous memory access Parallel processing with asyn 0 2 ms peripheral servicing time 1 ms max for chronous memory access peripheral servicing of each Special I O Unit CPU Bus Unit peripheral port RS 232C port and Inner Board Note CJ2 CPU Units support only Normal Mode For details refer to the CPU Unit s Operation Manual The following table shows the CPU Bus Unit service processing time which depends on the CPU Unit s CPU processing mode setting CPU execution mode Processing time details Normal Mode See note 4 of CPU Unit cycle time 10 for CJ2 CPU Units Priority peripheral servicing EtherNet IP Unit or Time slice peripheral servicing built in EtherNet IP
263. dware 2 Open the Administrative Tools and select Windows Firewall with Advanced Security from the dialog box that is displayed 3 Select Inbound Rules under Windows Firewall with Advanced Security on Local Computer on the left side of the Windows Firewall with Advanced Security Dialog Box P Windows Firewall with Advanced Security File Action View Help gt a h Advance ro n o pA as 6 w GA oe F D e amp B Monitoring 4 Select New Rule under Inbound Rules in the Actions Area on the right side of the dialog box Actions Inbound Rules a Wa New Rule 5 Make the following settings for each step in the New Inbound Rule Wizard Dialog Box clicking the Next But ton to move between steps Rule Type Select Custom Program Select All Programs Protocol and Ports Select ICMPv4 as the protocol type X Select Any IP address for everything Select Allow the connection Select Domain Private and Public Enter any name e g Omron_EIP 6 Click the Finish Button The rule that you defined will be registered in the Inbound Rules e g Omron_EIP Close the Windows Firewall with Advanced Security Dialog Box Name Group 7 When you attempt to connect the CX Programmer or Network Configurator to a PLC on an EtherNet IP net work through an Ethernet port the Windows Security Alert Dialog Box will be displayed 8 Click the Unblock Button 424 Pr
264. e Advanced OK Cancel 4 You can change tag set names in this dialog box To confirm a change click the OK Button in the dialog box 5 Perform steps 1 to 3 for all the devices that will perform tag data links 3 Importing Network Symbols That Were Registered to Tags with the Network Configurator to the CX Programmer If the CJ2H CPU6LI EIP or CJ2M CPU3L is used you can specify network symbols for tags using the Network Configurator The procedure to import net work symbols that were created using the Network Configurator into the CX Programmer is described below Exporting Tags and Tag Sets with the Network Configurator 1 2 3 1 Select To From File Export to file on the Tag Sets Tab Page in the Edit Device Parameters Dialog Box to export the tag and tag set information to a CSV file Edit Device Parameters 192 168 250 1 CJ2B EIP21 Connections Tag Sets In Consume Out Produce Name Over Size Bit ID S Node1_In_1 10Byte Auto 4 Node1_In_1 10Byte E Nodet_In_2 10Byte Auto Node1_In_2 10Byte E Nodel_In_3 2Byte Auto 4 Node1_In_3 2Byte New Edt Delete Expand ll Collapse All Edit Tags l Delete all of unused Tag Sets Usage Count 6 256 Import To From File Export to File OF Import From File 139 Setting Tag Data Links Section 6 2 Importing the Tag and Tag Set CSV File with the CX Programmer 1 2 3 1 In the pr
265. e actual request service processing In CIP routing the node Unit performing the routing subtracts the timeout time for 1 hop deletes its own address from the routing information and relays the message to the next node Unit Set the following timeout values for command processing The maximum number of relay nodes Units is 16 If the number is more than 16 the explicit message send command may time out even if the con ditions of network and each node Unit are normal If more than 16 relay nodes Units have been set a constant time must be specified for the re quest service processing timeout time normally 0000 hex e Priority Time Tick and Time Out Ticks 5 s x Number of relay nodes Units Request processing timeout e Message monitoring time Priority Time Tick and Time Out Ticks e CMND 490 timeout set value Message monitoring time A timeout may occur sooner than the actual set value depending on the point where the timeout occurs in the path General status 01 hex and Additional status 0204 hex A FINS timeout error response 0205 hex may occur if the CMND 490 timeout set value or message monitoring time is less than the Priority Time Tick and Time Out Ticks Note 1 For details on the parameters of explicit messages refer to the EtherNet IP and CIP specifications 2 The Open DeviceNet Vendor Association Inc ODVA can be contacted at the following address to obtain copies of the EtherNet IP and CIP specifi
266. e or chemical wipes These substances could damage the surface of the Unit Be sure to inspect the system periodically to keep it in its optimal operating condition In general inspect the system once every 6 to 12 months but inspect more frequently if the system is used with high temperature or humid ity or under dirty dusty conditions Prepare the following equipment before inspecting the system Have a standard and Phillips head screwdriver multimeter alcohol and a clean cloth Depending on the system conditions a synchroscope oscilloscope ther mometer or hygrometer to measure humidity might be needed Check the items in the following table and correct any items that are below standard Standard Inspection Ambient and cabinet temperature 0 to 55 C Thermometer conditions Ambient and cabinet humidity 10 to 90 with no condensa Hygrometer tion or icing Dust dirt accumulation None Visual Installation Are the Units installed securely No looseness Phillips head screwdriver Are the Ethernet cable connectors No looseness Visual fully inserted and locked 13 1 3 Unit Replacement Procedure Precautions 332 Replace a faulty EtherNet IP Unit as soon as possible If the built in EtherNet IP port is faulty replace the CPU Unit as soon as possible We recommend having spare Units available to restore network operation as quickly as possi ble Observe the following precautio
267. e target device In the following example the settings are all at their default values Setup TCP IP Configuration Target IP Address New Configuration TCP IP Configuration Get the IP address via BOOTP server Not use DNS Use the following IP address O Use DNS IP Address 0 0 Subnet Mask 0 0 Default Gateway 98 0 Set to the Device Speed amp Duplex Speed amp Duplex Auto Set to the Device Reset the Device Get from the Device 3 Enter the IP address to set and press the Get from the Device Button The present setting will be obtained Change the IP address in the New Con figuration Box if required Setup TCP IP Configuration Target IP Address 182 r 16B 250 1 New Configuration TC nfiguration Get the IP address via BOOTP server Not use DNS Use the following IP address O Use DNS IPAddress 192 168 1 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 Default Gateway 2 o OF Set to the Device Speed amp Duplex Speed amp Duplex Auto Set to the Device Reset the Device C Get from the Device lJ 4 Press the Set to the Device Button The IP address will be transferred to the device The applicable device is the device specified in the Target IP Address Box The device must be reset to enable the transferred setting If the device is not reset when the new IP address is transferred click the Re set the Device Button When the EtherNet IP Unit is reset the
268. e target with node 2 for a total of two connections Caution is required because the number of connections consumed is the same as for unicast connections even when multicast connections are set O Originator pede T Target O Multicast Multicast T Node2 4 Node 3 O T 264 Communications System Section 10 1 10 1 3 Network Transmission Delay Time In an EtherNet IP network the tag data link packets are sent once each packet interval RPI but several delays occur between the transmission of packets from each node and the arrival of the packets at the destination nodes The following diagram shows the 4 major delay sources Total network transmission delay 1 Send processing delay 2 Ca ble delays 3 Switching hub delay 4 Receive processing delay 1 Send eal I EtherNet IP_ 4 4 Receive proossing Bra Unit processing delay delay Switching hub 2 Cable delay 3 Switching hub delay 2 Cable delay The lengths of these delays depend on many factors such as the tag data link connection settings number of connections and data sizes number of nodes the switching hub being used and cable lengths Each delay is described in detail below 1 Send Processing The send processing delay is the delay that occurs within the EtherNet IP Unit Delay or built in EtherNet IP port when data packets are sent once each packet interval This delay varies with the RPI error shown in the f
269. e MEMCARD directory will be displayed if there is a Memory Card in the CPU Unit ft gt Ils Make sure the Memory Card is inserted 200 PORT command successful 150 opening data connection for Is IPaddress port 0 bytes MEMCARD 226 Transfer complete 15 bytes received in 0 seconds bytes s ftp gt E 321 Host Computer Application Example Section 11 9 4 Change to the MEMCARD directory ftp gt cd MEMCARD Change to MEMCARD directory 250 CWD command successful ftp gt E 5 Change data type to binary ftp gt type binary Binary data type set 200 Type set to I ftp gt E 6 Transfer the file RESULT IOM to the workstation ftp gt get RESULT IOM File read 200 PORT command successful 150 opening data connection for result iom IPaddress port bytes 226 Transfer complete bytes received in seconds bytes s ftp gt E 7 Write the file PLAN IOM to the Memory Card ftp gt put PLAN IOM File written 200 PORT command successful 150 opening data connection for plan iom IPaddress port 226 Transfer complete bytes received in seconds bytes s ftp gt E 8 End FTP ftp gt bye FTP ended 221 Goodbye m 322 SECTION 12 Automatic Clock Adjustment Function This section provides an overview of the automatic clock adjustment function including details on specifications required settings operations from CX Pro
270. e Network Configurator s Device Monitor Function 1 The connection status has the same meaning as the Connection Manag ers General and Additional error response codes as defined in the CIP specifications 2 The Open DeviceNet Vendor Association Inc ODVA can be contacted at the following address to obtain a copy of the CIP specifications ODVA Headquarters 4220 Varsity Drive Suite A Ann Arbor Michigan 48108 5006 USA TEL 1 734 975 8840 FAX 1 734 922 0027 358 Connection Status Codes and Error Processing Section 14 3 Connection status Additional Status hex General Status hex Email odva odva org WEB www odva org The following table shows the possible originator target configurations Configuration Configuration 1 CJ2H CPU CPU3 Originator CS1W EIP21 CJ1W EIP21 EIP CJ2M CPU3 CS1W EIP21 CJ1W EIP21 CJ2H CPU EIP CJ2M Configuration 2 CS1W EIP21 CJ2H CPU CPU3 CJ1W EIP21 EIP CJ2M Other company s device Configuration 3 Other company s device CPU3 CS1W EIP21 CJ1W EIP21 CJ2H CPU EIP CJ2M The following table shows the likely causes of the errors causes for each con figuration and connection status code Source of error Normal status code The connection has been opened and the tag data link is communicating normal
271. e UDP send buffer UDP receive buffer 9 016 bytes Maximum capacity of the UDP receive buffer FINS receive buffer 16 383 bytes Maximum capacity of the FINS receive buffer RAW send buffer 2 048 bytes Maximum capacity of the RAW send buffer RAW receive buffer 2 048 bytes Maximum capacity of the RAW receive buffer Hold timer 75 s See note The hold timer is used for active open processing of TCP sockets An ETIMEDOUT error will occur if connection is not completed within 75s Resend timer Initial value 250 ms Maximum value 64 s The resend timer is used to monitor completion of reception of arrival confirmations when transferring data via TCP sockets If the timer setting is exceeded before arrival confirmation is received data is resent Resends are performed from the first timeout 1 s through the 12th time out 64 s An ETIMEDOUT error will occur after the 12th timeout Continue timer Initial value 1s Maximum value 60s The continue timer starts if preparations have been completed to send data but the send window is too small either 0 or too small to send the data and the remote node has not requested that communications be restarted Confirmation of the window size is requested from the remote node when the continue timer times out The initial value of the timer is 5 s and confirmation processing will continue consecutively with increas ingly longer times until the m
272. e Unit port will not cause any problems in the system before restart ing it 2 If the target node address IP address is not set correctly invalid device parameters may be set in the wrong PLC so check the connected PLC before downloading parameters Settings on the TCP IP Tab Page Settings for the following items are provided on the TCP IP Tab Page of the Edit Parameters Dialog Box in the CX Programmer e IP address e Subnet mask e Default gateway e Broadcasting e Preferred DNS server e Alternate DNS server e Domain name IP router table 53 TCP IP and Link Settings IP Address Subnet Mask Default Gateway Broadcasting Section 3 8 Sets the local IP address of the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port Set the local IP address on the TCP IP Tab Page when not setting the IP address in the CPU Unit s allocated DM Area or using the default IP address default IP address 192 168 250 Node_address When the IP address is set on the TCP IP Tab Page it will be stored as the IP address in the DM Area words allocated to the Unit port as a CPU Bus Unit For the subnet mask all bits corresponding to the bits in the IP address used as the network ID are set to 1 and the bits corresponding to the host number are set to 0 The EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port supports CIDR Classless Inter Domain Routing The subnet mask can be set to 192 0 0 0 to 255 255 255 252 CIDR is supported b
273. e any questions or comments Warranty and Limitations of Liability WARRANTY OMRON s exclusive warranty is that the products are free from defects in materials and workmanship for a period of one year or other period if specified from date of sale by OMRON OMRON MAKES NO WARRANTY OR REPRESENTATION EXPRESS OR IMPLIED REGARDING NON INFRINGEMENT MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR PARTICULAR PURPOSE OF THE PRODUCTS ANY BUYER OR USER ACKNOWLEDGES THAT THE BUYER OR USER ALONE HAS DETERMINED THAT THE PRODUCTS WILL SUITABLY MEET THE REQUIREMENTS OF THEIR INTENDED USE OMRON DISCLAIMS ALL OTHER WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED LIMITATIONS OF LIABILITY OMRON SHALL NOT BE RESPONSIBLE FOR SPECIAL INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES LOSS OF PROFITS OR COMMERCIAL LOSS IN ANY WAY CONNECTED WITH THE PRODUCTS WHETHER SUCH CLAIM IS BASED ON CONTRACT WARRANTY NEGLIGENCE OR STRICT LIABILITY In no event shall the responsibility of OMRON for any act exceed the individual price of the product on which liability is asserted INNO EVENT SHALL OMRON BE RESPONSIBLE FOR WARRANTY REPAIR OR OTHER CLAIMS REGARDING THE PRODUCTS UNLESS OMRON S ANALYSIS CONFIRMS THAT THE PRODUCTS WERE PROPERLY HANDLED STORED INSTALLED AND MAINTAINED AND NOT SUBJECT TO CONTAMINATION ABUSE MISUSE OR INAPPROPRIATE MODIFICATION OR REPAIR XV Application Considerations SUITABILITY FOR USE OMRON shall not be responsible for conformity
274. e communications FINS message EtherNet IP message communications Explicit message Note With the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port message communica tions are possible even if the I O link function is disabled Ethernet EtherNet IP network 189 FINS Message Communications Section 7 2 7 2 FINS Message Communications Messages containing FINS commands can be exchanged over the Ethernet network between nodes that support FINS messages Note FINS message communications can be executed without any particular restrictions over the Ethernet network with OMRON Ethernet Units CS1W ETN21 or CJ1W ETN21 computers CX One or Fins Gateway applications and NS series Programmable Terminals Type of FINS message Data send receive commands Any kind of FINS command Network SEND RECV instructions CMND 490 instructions communications instructions PLC to PLC both must CS CJ series PLC CS CJ series PLC CS CJ series PLC CS CJ series PLC be CS CJ series PLCs with a CS CJ series Eth Command to erNet IP Unit built in 4 iF C EtherNet IP Unit EtherNet IP port or Command Ethernet Units See note 1 Note Inter network com munications are possible with j Command to Ethernet networks CPU Unit or other networks such as Controller Link See note 2 Data length excluding SEND instruction 990 words RECV CMND instruction 1 990 bytes max command code instruction 990 words CS CJ series
275. e higher priority to tag data link packets Special settings must be made in the switching hub when using the multicast filtering function and L4 QoS function There must be enough multicast filters for the network being used 1 Ask the switching hub manufacturer for setting procedures for the switch ing hub 2 Install the switching hub so that its environmental resistance capabilities are not exceeded Ask the switching hub manufacturer for information on the environmental resistance of the switch hub 31 Selecting the Network Devices Section 2 3 32 SECTION 3 Installation and Initial Setup This section explains how to install and make the initial settings required for operation of the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port 3 1 Overview of Initial Setup Procedures 000 0002 eee eee S2I2L Procedures srissirieccs studies Qed ee Gee ee SHE Ree GS 3 2 Switch Settings 032 cae Wes cea ok tothe ia we ete eS oe 3 2 1 CS series EtherNet IP Units 000000000000 3 2 2 CJ series EtherNet IP Units and CJ2 Built in EtherNet IP Port 3 3 Mounting toa PLC ss ose nda Boe oad ib sa dle aap wes 3 3 1 Mounting to a CS series PLC 0 00 0 eee eee 3 3 2 Mounting toa CJ series PLC 0 eee eee 3 3 3 Mounting eos st cis etek Sis ep ee it ahi eee be 3 3 4 Handling Precautions 0 0 3 4 Network Installation 0 0 eee ee eee 3 4 1 Basic Installation
276. e made within a range of 01 to FE If a value outside of this range is set the MS indicator will light red the 7 segment display will indicate code H4 node address setting error and the EtherNet IP Unit will stop operating Switch Settings Section 3 2 3 2 2 CJ series EtherNet IP Units and CJ2 Built in EtherNet IP Port Setting the Unit Number Note The unit number is used to identify individual CPU Bus Units when more than one CPU Bus Unit is mounted to the same PLC Use a small screwdriver to make the setting taking care not to damage the rotary switch The unit num ber is factory set to 0 Setting range 1 Turn OFF the power supply before setting the unit number 2 If the unit number is being set for the first time or changed then I O tables must be created for the PLC 3 With CS series and CJ series PLCs dedicated areas are automatically allocated in the CIO Area and DM Area according to the unit numbers that are set For details refer to SECTION 4 Memory Allocations Setting the Node Address Relationship to IP Addresses Note With the FINS communications service when there are multiple EtherNet IP Units connected to the Ethernet network the EtherNet IP Units are identified by node addresses Use the node address switches to set the node address between 01 and FE hexadecimal 1 to 254 decimal Do not set a number that has already been set for another node on the same network Setting range
277. e reassembled within 12 seconds after being received 10 Always 0 11 The number of packets addressed to other networks that have been discarded 12 Always 0 Note Refer to MEMORY STATUS READ on page 411 for details on the short buffer ICMP Status Response Ten types 46 items of ICMP status information occupying 4 bytes each are returned in the following sequence Each value is returned as an 8 digit hexadecimal value 1 The number of times the ICMP error routine was called The ICMP error routine uses ICMP packets to inform the source about errors The routine is called when an illegal packet is received error in IP option processing or error in relay processing or if the object port does not exist when using UDP 2 Always 0 3 Always 0 4 Total number of outputs of each packet type during ICMP output The 19 statistical values are returned in the order shown below Contents are defined for 13 types only all other types contain 0 Only 0 3 14 16 and 18 are counted by the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port Echo reply Undefined always 0 Destination unreachable Source quench Routing redirect 408 FINS Commands Addressed to EtherNet IP Units or Built in EtherNet IP Ports Type number Description Undefined always 0 Echo Undefined always 0 Time exceeded Parameter problem Time stamp Time stamp reply Information request Information
278. e registered IP Address Table Records Command Specify the IP address table records The number of records specified must be provided The total number of bytes in the IP address table records is calculated as the number of records x 6 bytes record The configuration of the 6 bytes of data in each record is as shown in the following diagram 1 6 bytes FINS node IP address number FINS Node Address Node address for communications via the FINS command hexadecimal IP Address IP address used by TCP IP protocol hexadecimal Precautions e The registered IP address table will not be effective until the PLC or EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port is restarted 403 FINS Commands Addressed to EtherNet IP Units or Built in EtherNet IP Ports Appendix E An error response will be returned if the IP address conversion method in the system mode settings is set for automatic generation on the FINS UDP Tab Page of the Unit Response Codes Response code Description Normal end echo reply received from the remote node Command too large Command too small The number of records specified does not match the sent data length The number of records is not between 0 and 32 The FINS node address is not between 1 and 126 The IP address is 0 IP address conversion method is set for automatic generation IP ADDRESS WRITE Write the local IP address and the subnet mask in the CPU Bus Unit System Setup
279. e required tags click the OK Button at the bottom of the Edit Tags Dialog Box 20 At this point a confirmation dialog box will be displayed to check whether the registered tag names will be registered without changes as tag sets Tags are just being added in this case so click the No Button Just the tags will be registered without registering the tags as tag sets Network Configurator The new Tags will be registered as Tag sets 134 Setting Tag Data Links 21 22 23 24 Section 6 2 To register the newly added tags in a tag set either double click the de sired tag set or select the tag set and click the Edit Button Edit Tag Set PLC Status Name D00000 Not Include O Include Tag List CandidateT ag List Size Bit 2Byte 2Byte Name Over D00004 D00005 Name Over D00000 D00001 Advanced The Tag List on the left side of the dialog box shows the tags that are al ready registered and the Candidate Tag List on the right side of the dialog box shows the other tags that have not been registered yet Select the tags that you want to add from the Candidate Tag List and click the K Button Edit Tag Set PLC Status Name D00000 Not Include O Include Tag List CandidateT ag List Size Name Over Size Bit 2Byte 2Byte 2Byte 2Byte Name Over D00000 D00001 D00004 D00005 OK Cae Up to 8 tags can be registered in a tag set or up to
280. e right side of the Edit Connection Dialog Box and then select the input tag set to re ceive the output tag set in the Originator Device Area on the left 159 Setting Tag Data Links Section 6 2 e If there is no applicable input tag set at the originator you can create a new one by using the Edit Tag Sets Button and Edit Tag Button b Using Other EtherNet IP Devices as Target 192 168 250 4 ERT1 MD32SLH 1 Edit Connection It will add a connection configuration to originator device Please confiaure the Taa Set each of oriainator device and taraet device Connection 0 Type 01_Output and Input v Originator Device Target Device Node Address 192 168 250 100 Node Address 192 168 250 4 Comment MC_Master Comment ERT1 MD32SLH 1 Input Tag Set Edit Tag Sets Output Tag Set D00100 8Byte z Input_136 8Byte Connection Type Multi cast connection Dutput Tag Set Edit Tag Sets Input Tag Set D00200 2Byte s Output_35 2Byte Connection Tore Point to Point connection ype Regist Close The connection I O type list box in the upper part of the Connection Settings Dialog Box displays the connection I O types that can be se lected Select the connection I O type according to your application The connection I O types that can be selected depend on the target device Items that can be selected will depend on the connection I O type that is selected Select the output input or
281. e set using I O memory addresses A maximum of two tags area 1 and area 2 can be set in one tag set Select Network EtherNet IP Datalink Tool from the menus in the Network Configurator after you have registered all the devices to start the EtherNet IP Datalink Tool 150 Setting Tag Data Links Node List Note Data Link Table Information Section 6 2 01f9e423 csv DatalinkTool fo e es File Edit Datalink Help eHSE BREx RARvV Nodes Datalink Table data of selected node x 4 Areat Area2 TagSet Total Target RPI T Device 5 En ae eaaa 4 IN OUT l Link CH Size Link CH Size Name Size Node Variable ms 192 168 250 1 CJ1W EIP21 e aooo 10 Dooooo 100 TagSeti_19 110 192 168 250 2 Ci1W EIP21 CJ 2 IN 0010 10 Do0100 100 TagSet2_19 110 192 188 250 2 TagSetz_19 50 0 110 192 188 250 3 TagSet2_19 50 0 110 192 168 250 4 TagSet4_19 50 0 J 192 168 250 3 CJ25 EIP21 3 IN 0020 10 00200 100 TagSet3_19 192 168 250 4 CS1W EIP21 4 fin 0020 10 00300 100 TagSet_13 5 E EST The number of PPS Without PPS with connection Multicast filter Multicast filter IN OUT Output with no overload is marked Total Size The displayed size does not include the size of PLC Status 1 word 4 tagset created by this tool always includes PLC Status
282. eaning D0000 00 OA Number of send words 10 D0001 00 02 Destination network number 2 D0002 04 00 Destination node number 4 Destination unit address 0 Response required Communications port No used 7 D0003 07 05 Number of retries 5 D0004 Response monitor time 10 s Send Data Creation Ten words of data from word CIO 0000 is stored from D00010 onwards Ten words of data from D00010 at the local node is sent to D00020 onwards at network number 2 node number 4 unit address 0 the PLC Reset Input Creation Send Error Display Communicating between OMRON PLCs Section 8 6 Continued from previous page Execution condition 99207 000001 see note 1 120000 120003 120002 MOV 21 0010 D00005 MOV 21 0003 D00006 MOV 21 2000 D00007 MOV 21 0705 D00008 MOV 21 0000 D00009 DIFU 13 120003 120002 A21907 120002 120003 A21907 m 120002 A20207 See note 1 m Note 1 When the Communications Port Enabled Flag for port 7 is ON and SEND 090 is not being executed the trans mission execution program will start when execution condition CIO 000001 turns ON Input CIO 120002 remains ON from the start of RECV 098 execution until completion Control Data Creation Word Contents Meaning D0005 00 10 Number of reception words 16 D0006 00 03 Source network numb
283. easily set the data link parameters using only memory addresses and the settings will conform to Controller Link data link parameters Refer to 3 9 Tag Data Link Parameters or SECTION 6 Tag Data Link Functions 2 Using the Tag Data Link Setting Function in the Network Configurator to Set the Parameters With this method you can set the connections that define the tag data links for each EtherNet IP node Tag data links can be set with a high degree of flexibil ity using both memory addresses and network variables Refer to SECTION 6 Tag Data Link Functions for information on how to make these settings Settings Required for the Message Communications Service Execute a CMND 490 instruction in the CS CJ series CPU Unit s user program Refer to SECTION 9 Message Communications 35 Switch Settings Section 3 2 3 2 Switch Settings 3 2 1 CS series EtherNet IP Units Setting the Unit Number Note The unit number is used to identify individual CPU Bus Units when more than one CPU Bus Unit is mounted to the same PLC Use a small screwdriver to make the setting taking care not to damage the rotary switch The unit num ber is factory set to 0 OVV _ an No 1 Turn OFF the power supply before setting the unit number 2 If the unit number is being set for the first time or changed then I O tables must be created for the PLC 3 With CS series and CJ series PLCs words are automatically allocated in the CIO Area
284. ecautions for Using Windows XP Vista or Windows 7 Appendix G An EtherNet IP connection will be accepted from CX Programmer or Network Configurator and EtherNet IP connections will be enabled in the future as well 425 Precautions for Using Windows XP Vista or Windows 7 Appendix G 426 Numerics 7 segment display 24 A Adjust Time field 326 328 alternate DNS server 54 applications precautions xxiv Auto Adjust Time field 326 327 Auto Adjust Time Tab 326 327 automatic clock adjustment Automatic Clock Adjustment Switch 328 errors error codes 328 error log 328 SNTP 328 overview 324 procedure 325 requirements 324 settings 326 specifications 325 Auxiliary Area related data 88 B Backup Tool 336 bandwidth usage relationship to packet interval RPI 263 baud rate 55 268 CJ series 15 16 CS series 14 bits Automatic Clock Adjustment Switch 328 boots recommended models 28 BROADCAST DATA SEND 397 broadcast test command 397 reading results 397 BROADCAST TEST RESULTS READ 397 buffers 377 411 bye command 303 308 312 Index C cables connections 44 installation 43 precautions 41 cd command 303 308 310 cdup command 303 308 CIDR 3 94 CIO Area allocations 70 CIP 3 381 CIP communications services 6 CIP message communications 381 cleaning 332 close command 303 308 312 CMND 490 instruction 190 220 224 commands FTP commands 308 c
285. eceive 256 words of data from another PLC The maximum transmission delay is calculated based on the following operating conditions e Local node s CPU cycle time 10 ms 300 e Local node s CPU execution mode Normal e Local node s CPU peripheral servicing time Default 4 e Remote node s CPU cycle time 15 ms e Remote node s CPU execution mode Normal e Remote node s CPU peripheral servicing time Default 4 Baud rate 100Base TX Item Calculated value CPU Bus Unit service cycle local node 1 10 ms CPU Bus Unit service processing time local node 1 0 4 ms Send processing command 0 550 ms 0 5 ms Transmission delay command 0 0118 ms 0 1 ms Receive processing command 0 704 ms 0 7 ms CPU Bus Unit service cycle remote node 15 ms CPU Bus Unit service processing time remote node 0 6 ms Send processing command 256 x 0 002 0 550 1 062 1 1 ms Transmission delay command 256 x 0 0013 0 0118 0 3446 0 3 ms Receive processing command 256 x 0 003 0 704 1 472 1 5 ms CPU Bus Unit service cycle local node 2 10 ms CPU Bus Unit service processing time local node 2 0 4 ms Maximum transmission delay 10 04 0 54 0 1 0 7 15 06 4 1 1 0 3 1 5 10 0 4 40 6 ms SECTION 11 FTP Server This section describes the functions provided by the FTP server 11 1 Overview and Sp
286. ecifications 00 0 e eee ee eee 302 Tse Overviews ree seron eo Sake eal ee en ea 302 11 1 2 Specifications mesran pnts aa et la ow aoa 303 11 2 FTP Server Function Details 0 0 00 eee eee eee ee 303 1 2 1 File Types sa eos bids be oa tba os pike Redes eee a eK 303 11 2 2 Connecting to the FTP Server 00 000000 304 11 3 Using the FTP Server Function 0 0 00 0c eee eee eee ee 305 T 3 J Procedure 4 mis cit pS tats Cate e eRe ei R ee iin wade 305 11 3 2 List of Settings Required for the FTP Server Function 305 11 323 RTRTaby 3 60 00 55 setts aba i nea oh ek do ed Sta SS 306 11 4 FTP Server Application Example 0 00 0 ce eee eee 307 11 5 Using FTP Commands 0 0 0 eee cee eee 308 11 5 1 Table of Commands 0 00 00 eee ee eee 308 11 5 2 Using the Commands 0 0 0 e eee eee 308 11 5 3 Error Messages and FTP Status 000 313 11 6 Checking FTP Status 0 0 eee ee eee 314 11 6 1 FTP Status Fl g srneci toene iee eee eee 314 11 7 Using File Memory 0 0 0 2 eee eee ee 315 TEI Pile Memorys s 232 0 204 6 toe 256 aak eel pe RUA ae 315 117 2 Pile Ty pesis c nnne a posormew hte eS g 8 84 gee ee 48a tet oe ete 315 11 7 3 Initializing File Memory 00 0 0 00 00 00 0005 317 11 7 4 I O Memory Data Format 0 0 00 00 00 e ee eee 317 11 8 FTP File Transfe
287. ect B Q Q When sending data from X to Z Route Path Port A 3 Port C 1 Send data from the network port of X Port A to 3 on that circuit and the data reaches Y Then send it from the network port of Y Port C to 1 on that circuit Through this procedure the destination node Z can be designated Description by EPATH Type In CIP the EPATH type is used to describe the route path and request path With this method the route path and request path are divided into segments and a value is assigned to each segment so the route path description shows the path to the final destination when the data segments are joined together The segment includes the segment type information and the segment data Segment 1 Segment 2 Segment 3 Segment 4 es Details of Segment Type The interpretation method of a segment is included in the first 1 byte which consists of two parts a 3 bit Seg ment Type and a 5 bit Segment Format Segment Type Segment Format 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 383 CIP Message Communications Appendix D According to CIP Specifications the Segment Type specifications are decided as follows Segment Type Description 7 6 5 Port Segment Logical Segment Network Segment Symbolic Segment Data Segment Data Type Data Type Reserved olololo A310 0 Maaa oj oj oj gt o The specifications of Segment Format are different for each Se
288. ection 192 168 250 1 100M Off line 2 Select Network EtherNet IP Datalink Tool from the menus to start the EtherNet IP Datalink Tool 58 Tag Data Link Parameters Section 3 9 3 Select Datalink Wizard from the menus in the Datalink Tool when it has started BB 00004490 csv DatalinkTool File Edit Mertelii Help fo Check Table Nodes Area Normalization ink Table data of selected node Areal Area IN OUT LinkCH Size LinkCH Size TagSet Total Target RPI Name Size Node Variable ms IP Address Device 192 168 250 3 CJIW EIP21 The number of connection PPS with PPS without ak Multicast filter Multicast filter IN OUT Output with no overload is marked Total Size If it includes PLC Status data NetworkConfigurator will show the additional 2 bytes as a size 1CH 2bytes FA F8 FS F10 Help Edi Cell Shom Pia Show Nex ee e ho ne Move Up Datalink Check the Node TagSet TagSet TagSet Wizard table TagSet Run Datalink Wizard 4 In the Datalink Wizard Dialog Box enter 50 words starting from memory address W000 for area 1 and 100 words starting from D00050 for area 2 and then press the OK Button E Datalink Wizard Datalink Wizard will make the datalink table data Please specify the memory area start address size The nodes which participate the datalink have to be created by Network Configurator Datalink Configuration Areal Start Addr
289. ection separately sends one output tag set to each node and so it sends the same number of packets as the number of input tag sets Therefore using multicast connections can decrease the communications load if one output tag set is sent to multiple nodes Overview of Tag Data Links Section 6 1 If multicast connections are used however use a switching hub that has mul ticast filtering unless the tag set is received by all nodes in the network If a switching hub that does not have multicast filtering is used the multicast packets will be broadcast to the entire network and so packets will be sent to nodes that do not require them which will cause the communications load on those nodes to increase This applies only if one output tag set is sent to multiple nodes using a multi cast connection with one packet the connection type of the connections that receive the output tag set is multicast and the connection I O types packet intervals RPI and timeout values are all the same Note The performance of communications devices is limited to some extent by the limitations of each product s specifications Consequently there are limits to the packet interval RPI settings Refer to 10 2 Adjusting the Communica tions Load and set an appropriate packet interval RPI Starting and Stopping Tag Data Links Tag data links are automatically started when the data link parameters are downloaded from the Network Configurator Thereafte
290. ed Peripheral Servicing Time in the PLC Setup is increased FTP files will be transferred faster 320 Host Computer Application Example Section 11 9 11 9 Host Computer Application Example The following procedure provides an example of FTP operations from a host computer In this example the following assumptions are made e The IP address of the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port is regis tered in etc hosts on the host name as cs1 e The default FTP login name is being used CONFIDENTIAL e A processing results data file called RESULT IOM already exists on the Memory Card in the CPU Unit e A processing instructions data file called PLAN IOM already exists on the workstation The following procedure transfers the processing results file RESULT IOM from the Memory Card in the CPU Unit to the workstation and then the pro cessing instructions file PLAN IOM is transferred from the workstation to the Memory Card in the CPU Unit Underlined text is keyed in from the FTP client The workstation prompt is indi cated as and the cursor is indicated as W 1 2 3 1 Start FTP and connect to the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port ftg cs1 FTP started connected to cs1 220 IPaddress CS1W ETN21 FTP server FTP version ready Name cs1 root W 2 Enter the login name Name cs1 root CONFIDENTIAL Login name 230 Guest logged in ftp gt E 3 Make sure the Memory Card is inserted Th
291. ed due to a change command from the FINS TCP connec tion s remote node Closed by remote node opening again Opening again because of a reception error Opening again because of a send error Opening again because of an RST response in keep alive Opening again because there was no response in keep alive Correctly set the Unit Setup FINS TCP connection num ber remote IP address and remote port number Establishing connec tion Command data A connection is already established with the specified remote node Correct the settings for the FINS TCP connection num ber the remote IP address and the remote port number Cannot change con nection Unit Setup and com mand data The specified connection number is not set as a FINS TCP client in the Unit Setup Correct the settings for the Unit Setup the FINS TCP connection number the remote IP address and the remote port number Cannot execute because service was interrupted Command data While a remote node change was being pro cessed for the specified connection number a request for a change was received and the pro cessing was stopped Correct the settings for the FINS TCP connection num ber the remote IP address and the remote port number No such Unit Envi ronment error 374 Parameters Unit Setup IP address conversion failed Check the IP address and subnet mask in
292. ed in the section deals only with FINS communications in reference to EtherNet IP Units or built in EtherNet IP ports FINS commands issued from a PLC are sent via the SEND 090 RECV 098 and CMND 490 instructions programmed into the user ladder diagram program Although an outline of these instructions is provided in this section refer to the CS CJ series Programmable Controllers Programming Manual W340 for further details on programming these instructions 8 1 Overview of FINS Communications ereere rren 198 8 1 1 Communications On an Ethernet Network 198 8 1 2 Using the FINS UDP and FINS TCP Methods 199 8 1 3 FINS Communications Service Specifications 199 8 2 FINS UDP Method s pes riesana pee eee eee eee eee ale 200 8 2 1 VOVERVIEW sce baie oie ee ete ihe hehe wees banale nes 200 8 3 FINS TCP Method i ne sis ek ye bb gi Re ba eh ee BA depose Wie ete 202 8 3 1 OVERVIEW 6 oree eh RN ba SON Se ie dee 202 8 4 Routing Tables css cc034 c65 ok ded bed i ede da Deda wei 207 8 4 1 Routing Table Overview 0 0 0 e eee eee eee eee 207 8 4 2 Connecting and Using a Peripheral Device for the PLC 208 8 4 3 Routing Table Setting Examples 00 0 209 8 5 Using FINS Applications 0 0 00 0 eee ee eee 211 8 5 1 CX Programmer CX Server 0 cece eee 211 825 2 FinsGatewayir eis cee S eh eae nee SoS NE ob diets ep ee ade
293. ed these precautions Failure to abide by the following precautions could lead to serious or possibly fatal injury e Always connect to a ground of 100 Q or less when installing the Units Not connecting to a ground of 100 Q or less may result in electric shock e Always turn OFF the power supply to the CPU Unit and Slaves before attempting any of the following Not turning OFF the power supply may result in malfunction or electric shock e Mounting or dismounting Power Supply Units I O Units CPU Units Memory Packs or Master Units e Assembling the Units e Setting DIP switches or rotary switches e Connecting cables or wiring the system e Connecting or disconnecting the connectors A Caution Failure to abide by the following precautions could lead to faulty operation of the EtherNet IP Unit built in EtherNet IP port or the system or could damage the Ethernet Unit Always heed these precautions e Interlock circuits limit circuits and similar safety measures in external cir cuits i e not in the Programmable Controller must be provided by the customer xxiv Application Precautions 5 e Always use the power supply voltages specified in the operation manuals An incorrect voltage may result in malfunction or burning e Take appropriate measures to ensure that the specified power with the rated voltage and frequency is supplied Be particularly careful in places where the power supply is unstable An incorrect pow
294. eds lt File name Save as type Electronic Data Sheet eds Device Information Vendor Device Type Product Name Revision 3 Input the folder and file names and click the Save Button The EDS file will be saved Searching EDS Files EDS File Search To search the devices EDS files displayed in the Hardware List use the following procedure 1 Select EDS file Find The following window will be displayed Find EDS File Find what Cancel Match case 2 Input the character string and click the Find Next Button 3 When there is a matching device found the cursor will move to that position 4 To quit the search operation click the Cancel Button Note 1 The device will be found if it is located below the present cursor position 2 To search all the devices select Hardware in the Hardware List before performing the search pro cedure Displaying EDS File Properties EDS File Property To display the properties of the EDS file use the following procedure 1 Select the desired hardware device from the Hardware List 421 EDS File Management Appendix F 2 Select EDS File Property The following window will be displayed CJ1W EIP21 Rev 1 Property General CJ1W ElP21 Description CJ1W EIP21 EDS File Create Date 05 19 2006 00 00 00 Modify Date 05 19 2006 00 00 00 Revision 1 0 Vendor Omron Corporation Device Type Communications Adapter Product Code 11
295. efault settings e The allocated CIO Area lay out is set to user settings but one of the following prob lems occurred A Layout Setting Error occurred Not used Multiple Switches ON Error ON when two or more control bits are ON simultaneously Unused bits are ignored Turned OFF when the next control bit operation starts CIO Area Allocations Section 4 2 Error Log Stored Status Manipulated by Unit operation Indicates that an error record is registered in the error log Indicates that no error records are registered in the error log Also turned OFF when an error log clear request is received Communications Word n 12 contains status flags related to the tag data links as shown in the Status 1 following diagram EtherNet IP Unit to CPU Unit n 12 n 12 All Tag Data Links Operating Tag Data Links Operating Verification Error Status Manipulated by Verification Error Tag Data Link Error Invalid Communications Parameter Tag Refresh Error Tag Database Error Unit operation Indicates that the information registered for a target node in the tag data link parameters is different from the actual node information Main causes e The specified target does not exist The variable name does not match The connection size is differ ent Connection resources are insufficient In
296. efinition Dialog Box Ethernet Node Definition Node number IP address io fo fo lo TCP setting TCP port number 0 keep alive E Cancel C e Node address Set the remote FINS node address IP address Set the remote IP address e Destination port number Set the FINS TCP port number for the remote node Normally the PLC s default setting of 9600 should be specified e Keep alive setting Sets the keep alive function Normally this should be selected 3 Starting FinsGateway ETN_UNIT Service Select ETN_UNIT from Services under the Basic Tab in the FinsGateway Setup Window and then click the Start Button 218 Using FINS Applications Section 8 5 m System Configuration Example 3 Connecting the CX Programmer Online CX Programmer CX Integrator Ethernet port Node number IP address 192 168 250 1 FinsGateWay Version 2003 Using the FINS TCP Method In this example an online connection is made by FINS TCP to a PLC on an Ethernet network PLC1 in the diagram below from a CX Programmer CX Integrator connected to the Ethernet network Conditions e FINS TCP method 1 EtherNet IP Unit IP address conversion Automatic generation method dynamic EtherNet IP Unit node number 2 EtherNet IP Unit IP address 192 168 250 2 Target PLC1 Ethernet or EtherNet IP Network number none FINS TCP method CX Programmer s Change PLC Dialog Box PLC name PLC1 Network cla
297. egistered target node information normal target node information target node PLC operating infor mation and target node PLC error information Offset Bit ye 15 08 07 g0 ON ey 0 Registered target neds EtherNet IP Unit gt CPU Unit 16 words 15 a N Wetec ee CtC 1 ormal target node i i 16 words EtherNet IP Unit CPU Unit 31 ee Target node PLC ting informati 1 arget node S Operating Information 1 7 i 16 words EtherNet IP Unit CPU Unit MTP eee 48 Target node PLC s error information EtherNet IP Unit CPU Unit 16 words a Registered Target These flags indicate the registration status of the target nodes and are valid Node Table only when the EtherNet IP Unit is the originator of the connection For details EtherNet IP Unit to on the default settings refer to 4 2 2 Details of the Allocated CIO Area Words CPU Unit 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0 13 itt le s 7 Js s 4 a 2 1 fo 2 45 3 e1 6o so se 57 se 55 4 53 52 s1 50 49 48 4 z z 74 73 v2 7 o 69 oe 67 s es 64 _ 5 o3 92 o1 oo 9 se a7 se as om es e2 or 20 6 111 110 109 108 107 106 105 104 103 102 101 100 s9 oe o7 o6 7 az 126 125 8 9 150 158 157 o 175 174 173 11 12 207 206 205 13 14 ae 238 237 15 _255 254 258 a Manipulated Unit operation by Registered
298. els 28 switching hub types 28 SYSMAC BUS 2 220 SYSMAC LINK 220 T tag data link parameters downloading 113 168 setting 113 uploading 171 verifying 172 Tag Data Link Start Bit 72 Tag Data Link Stop Bit 72 tag data links checking bandwidth usage 269 data areas 116 delay time 265 functions 115 T O response time 283 ladder programming 183 maximum I O response time 286 overview 112 required settings 35 specifications 115 status flags 186 tag data links cyclic communications 6 tag set 116 tag sets creating 126 Target Node PLC Error Flags 73 87 Target Node PLC Operating Flags 73 87 TCP communications sockets status 379 status 409 TCP status transitions 379 TCP IP 52 terminal blocks xxiii timeout errors 371 timers 377 to 61 troubleshooting 368 twisted pair cable recommended models 28 twisted pair cables precautions 41 type command 303 308 311 U unicast communications 114 unit numbers setting 36 37 Unit replacement 332 unit setup 4 61 Unit Status 1 Flags 73 Unit Status 2 Flags 75 Unregister Device List 142 uploading tag data link parameters 171 user command 303 308 309 user name specifying 309 User Settings Area 85 using FTP commands 308 V verifying tag data link parameters 172 Index W wiring precautions 44 433 Index 434 Revision History A manual revision code appears as a suffix to the
299. ends on the orig inator s specifica tions Contact the originator device s manufacturer Connection Status Codes and Error Processing Connection status General Status hex Unique O Additional Status hex MRON Error Source of error Codes Handling Section 14 3 Configuration 1 Configuration 2 Configuration 3 01 0810 Error code returned from target New data could not be obtained from the CPU Unit when open ing connection The Unit will automatically retry and attempt to open the connection again This error may occur if the CPU Unit s cycle time was long when opening the con nection the speci fied EM bank was converted to file memory or some problem in the PLC caused the PLC to stop If the cycle time was too long the problem will be resolved automat ically If the EM bank is set as file memory change the storage loca tion for the tag data If the PLC has stopped identify and cor rect the error If the PLC system is stopped iden tify the cause of the error from the CPU Unit error data The meaning of this error code is defined by each vendor so it depends on the tar get s specifications Contact the target device s manufac turer The meaning of this error code is defined by each vendor so it depends on the origi nator s specifica tions Contact the origina tor device s manufac turer Err
300. er 3 D0007 20 00 Source node number 32 Source unit address 0 Response required Communications port No used 7 D0008 07 05 Number of retries 5 D0009 Response monitor time Default A total of 16 words of data beginning from word A100 at network number 3 node number 32 unit address 0 the PLC is received at word CIO 2000 onwards of the local node Reset Input Creation Reception Error Display Reception Data Processing If there is no reception processing completion error the 16 words of data received from word CIO 2000 on wards is stored at D00040 onwards With CS CJ series PLCs the Communications Port Enabled Flags at bits 0 to 7 in word A202 turn OFF even when the PCMR 260 instruction is be ing executed using the ports corresponding to those flags 2 Before using the sample program as is confirm that the memory areas words and bits used in the sample program are not already being used in the user program o r by Special I O Units 231 Precautions on High Traffic in FINS Communications Section 8 7 8 7 Precautions on High Traffic in FINS Communications 232 When applications are constructed using FINS communications services communications errors from multiple response timeouts may occasionally occur due to high traffic depending on the system configuration and the appli cation programs This section describes precautions for systems with high traffic in FINS c
301. er entering all of the settings in the data link table select Save from the File Menu A consistency check will be performed on the table and the re sults will be displayed a Table Inconsistencies The following Check Result Dialog Box will be displayed Correct the data link table according to the displayed information E Check Result Check Result Type Node Line No Contents Error 192 168 250 2 2 Target node is not yet input Please input target node IP Address Error 192 168 250 2 2 Target variable is not yet input Please input target variable Error 192 168 250 2 2 RPTis not yet input Please input RPI Error 192 168 250 1 2 The combination of the target node and target variable is invalid be Error 192 168 250 1 3 The combination of the target node and target variable is invalid be Error 192 168 250 2 2 The combination of the target node and target variable is invalid be Error 192 168 250 3 1 The combination of the target node and target variable is invalid be Error 192 168 250 3 2 The combination of the target node and target variable is invalid be gt Copy To Clipboard To save the check results click the Copy To Clipboard Button and paste the results to other file such as the text pad Click the OK Button The following message will be displayed Click the OK Button again to return to the EtherNet IP Datalink Tool Window DatalinkTool t Failed to save file because Datalink table data is invalid 155 Se
302. er supply may result in malfunction e Install external breakers and take other safety measures against short cir cuiting in external wiring Insufficient safety measures Make sure that all the Backplane mounting screws terminal block screws and cable connector screws are tightened to the torque specified in the relevant manuals Incorrect tightening torque may result in malfunction Leave the label attached to the Unit when wiring Removing the label may result in malfunction if foreign matter enters the Unit Remove the label after the completion of wiring to ensure proper heat dis sipation Leaving the label attached may result in malfunction Use crimp terminals for wiring Do not connect bare stranded wires directly to terminals Connection of bare stranded wires may result in burning Observe the following precautions when wiring the communications cable Separate the communications cables from the power lines or high ten sion lines Do not bend the communications cables past their natural bending ra dius Do not pull on the communications cables e Do not place heavy objects on top of the communications cables e Always lay communications cable inside ducts Use appropriate communications cables Make sure that the terminal blocks expansion cable connectors and other items with locking devices are locked in place Wire all connections correctly according to instructions in this manual Double check a
303. ere is an interrupt for data transmission processing the CPU Unit s cycle time is extended by that interrupt processing time Refer to 10 3 2 EtherNet IP Unit or CJ2H Built in Port Data Processing Time for details 10 3 2 EtherNet IP Unit or CJ2H Built in Port Data Processing Time The following formula approximates the time required for the EtherNet IP Unit or CJ2H built in port to process data transmissions with the CPU Unit i e the data processing time Approximation of the data processing time for an EtherNet IP Unit or CJ2H Built in Port 0 0008 x Number of data transmission words 1 0 ms 283 I O Response Time in Tag Data Links Section 10 3 The maximum number of tag data link words that can be transferred by one EtherNet IP Unit or CJ2H built in port is 184 832 words However if the num ber of tag data link words exceeds the number of words that can be exchanged with the CPU Unit at one time the data will be divided and trans ferred in multiple data exchanges The following table shows the number of words that each CPU Unit can exchange at one time CPU Unit Number of words per data transmission CS CJ Series Output Send About 7 405 words max If there are more words the data will be divided Input Receive About 7 405 words max If there are more words the data will be divided Note The total amount of send data and receive data that can be exchanged at one time is about 14 810 words maximum SYSMAC C
304. eriodic maintenance operations and troubleshooting proce dures needed to keep the EtherNet IP network operating properly We recommend reading through the error processing procedures before operation so that operating errors can be identified and corrected more quickly Appendices provide information on EtherNet IP network parameters the buffer configuration TCP status transitions ASCII characters maintenance and inspections xi Relevant Manuals The following table lists CS and CJ series manuals that contain information relevant to EtherNet IP Units or built in EtherNet IP ports Manual number CS1W EIP21 CJ1W EIP21 CJ2H CPU6 CJ2M CPU3 EtherNet IP Units Operation Manual this manual Contents Provides information on operating and installing Ether Net IP Units including details on basic settings tag data links and FINS communications Refer to the Communications Commands Reference Manual W342 for details on FINS commands that can be sent to CS series and CJ series CPU Units when using the FINS communications service Refer to the Ethernet Units Operation Manual Construction of Applications W421 for details on con structing host applications that use FINS communica tions CS1W ETN21 CJ1W ETN21 Ethernet Units Oper ation Manual Construction of Net works Provides information on operating and installing 100Base TX Ethernet Units including details on basic settings a
305. ers superior communications quality 8 1 3 FINS Communications Service Specifications Item Specifications Number of nodes 254 Message length 2 012 bytes max Number of buffers 192 Protocol name FINS UDP method FINS TCP method Protocol used UDP IP TCP IP Number of connections 16 Port number 9600 default Can be changed 9600 default Can be changed Protection No Yes Specification of client IP addresses when Unit is used as a server Other Items set for each UDP port Broadcast Items set for each connection e Server client specification Remote IP address specification e IP Address Conversion When client Specify the IP address of the remote Unit server When server Specify IP addresses of clients permitted to con nect e Automatic FINS node address allocation Specify automatic allocation of client FINS node addresses e Keep alive Specify whether remote node keep alive is to be used TCP IP Setting e Remote node keep alive time Internal table This a table of correspondences for remote FINS node addresses remote IP addresses TCP UDP and remote port numbers It is created automatically when power is turned ON to the PLC or when the Ethernet Unit is restarted and it is automatically changed when a connection is established by means of the FINS TCP method or when a FINS command received The following functions are enab
306. ess The node address is set with the Node Address Setting Switches on the front of the EtherNet IP Unit or CPU Unit e If you want to set a particular IP address and store that local IP address in the CPU Unit set it with the CPU Unit s allocated DM Area words CS CJ Series only e If you want to set a particular IP address and store that local IP address in the EtherNet IP Unit or CPU UNit set the IP address in the TCP IP set tings of the Unit Setup from the CX Programmer e If you want to set a particular IP address and obtain the IP address auto matically from the BOOTP server TCP IP settings of the Unit Setup from the CX Programmer For details refer to 3 8 TCP IP and Link Settings 5 1 4 Subnet Masks Operation and management of a network can become very difficult if too many nodes are connected on a single network In such a case it can be help ful to configure the system so that a single network is divided up into several subnetworks This can be done by using part of the host number as a subnet number Internally the network can be treated as a number of subnetworks but from the outside it acts as a single network and uses only a single Net work ID To establish subnetworks the Host ID in the IP address is divided into a Sub net ID and a Host ID by using a setting called the Subnet Mask The Subnet Mask indicates which part of the Host ID is to be used as the Subnet ID All bits in the Subnet Mask that correspond to t
307. ess Size Size rea Node2 Node3 Start 6s Address Size Size Size Memory Memory D Start Address Start Address 50 Size words 50 Size words 1100 Enable Output Inhibit 5 The data link settings will be automatically created in the window of the EtherNet IP Datalink Tool Select File Save to end The settings will be saved in the Network Configurator 59 Tag Data Link Parameters Section 3 9 BB 00053639 csy DatalinkTool Eile Edit Datalink Help e H4SaGax Av Nodes Datalink Table data of selected node Areal Area2 f TagSet Total Target RPI IN OUT LinkCH Size LinkCH Size Name Size Node Variable ms 192 168 2501 CJWW EIP21 1 wooo 50 DO0050 100 TagSet1_192 150 gt BE J1WN EIP21 2N wo50 50 D00150 100 TagSet2_192 150 192 168 250 2 TagSet2_192 50 0 3N W100 50 D00250 100 TagSet3_192 150 192 168 250 3 TagSet3_192 50 0 4 F 3 7 z F 3 X IP Address Device The number of S PPS without PPS with connection 4 praten filter Multicast filter 100 IN OUT Output with no overload is marked Total Size If it includes PLC Status data NetworkConfigurator will show the additional 2 bytes as a size 1CH 2bytes F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 Fe F9 F10 Edit Cell Show Prev Show Next Insert Delete Move Down Move Up Datalink Check the Node Node TagSet TagSet TagSet TagSet Wizard table 6 In the Device Confi
308. et y processing Maximum transmission delay CPU Bus Unit service cycle local node CPU Bus Unit service processing time local node Send processing Transmission delay Receive processing CPU Bus Unit service cycle remote node CPU Bus Unit service processing time remote node CPU Bus Unit Service The following table shows the service cycle which depends on the CPU Unit s Cycle Local Node CPU processing mode setting CPU execution mode Processing time details Normal Mode See note Priority peripheral servicing Parallel processing with syn chronous memory access One CPU Unit cycle time Parallel processing with asyn chronous memory access 0 2 ms peripheral servicing time 1 ms max for peripheral servicing of each Special I O Unit CPU Bus Unit peripheral port RS 232C port and Inner Board Note CJ2 CPU Units support only Normal Mode 294 Message Service Transmission Delay Section 10 5 CPU Bus Unit Service Processing Time Local Node Send Processing Transmission Delay Receive Processing CPU Bus Unit Service Cycle Remote Node For details refer to the CPU Unit s Operation Manual The following table shows the CPU Bus Unit service processing time which depends on the CPU Unit s CPU processing mode setting CPU execution mode Processing time details Normal Mode See note Set peripheral servicing time Priority peripheral servicing Default
309. et IP Unit automatically turns OFF the Tag Data Link Stop Bit Do not force this bit ON or OFF until it is automatically turned OFF by the Unit Adjust Clock Bit Bit 5 Automatically adjust the time on the clock by switching this bit from OFF to ON The SNTP server used to adjust the time is set in the Unit Setup Once the clock time has been adjusted the EtherNet IP Unit automatically turns OFF the Adjust Clock Bit Do not force this bit ON or OFF until it is auto matically turned OFF by the Unit Target Node PLC These words show the operating status of the target node PLCs that are con Operating Information nected with the EtherNet IP Unit as the originator This status information is EtherNet IP Unit to enabled when the PLC status is included in the communications data in both CPU Unit n 2ton the originator and target node 5 These words show the status of nodes 0 to 63 only If it is necessary to show the status of nodes higher than node 63 select user settings as the layout pattern For details refer to 4 4 User Settings Area The flags are valid only when the corresponding Normal Target Node Flag is ON If the corresponding Normal Target Node Flag is OFF the Target Node PLC Operating Flag indicates the previous operating status 72 CIO Area Allocations Section 4 2 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 n 3 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 ma afefe lal of ofa off orl sel
310. ether the connection will operate in FINS TCP server mode or client mode e Target IP address for client Specifies the IP address of the target FINS TCP server e Target IP address for server Specifies allowed client IP addresses when protection is enabled e Automatically allocated FINS node address for server Specifies the address to allocate when automatically allocating a FINS node ad dress to the target FINS TCP client e Keep alive Specified whether to use the keep alive function Note Normally this function is used and the option is selected e Enable protect via IP address Note Select this option only when protecting as the server 3 Select Transfer to PLC from the PLC Menu and click the Yes Button The setting data will be transferred to the CPU Bus Unit System Setup Area in the CPU Unit 4 Make the routing table settings and transfer them to each PLC See note 1 et the routing tables with CX Integrator and transfer it to each PLC 5 Create a ladder program that includes the SEND 090 RECV 098 and CMND 490 instructions 1 Routing tables are required in the following situations e When communicating with a PLC or computer on another network e g remote programming or monitoring using FINS messages or a CX Programmer e When multiple Communications Units are mounted to a single PLC i e CPU Unit 205 FINS TCP Method Section 8 3 When routing tables are used for one or more other nodes
311. eturned The data format is DeviceNet compatible 2 bytes total so the returned Error Code is converted to the 1 byte general status and a 1 byte additional status high byte only 1 The EXPLICIT MESSAGE SEND command is used to send an EtherNet IP defined explicit message to another company s node and receive a response Unlike other FINS commands the destination of a EXPLICIT MESSAGE SEND command s control data is the local node s EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port and the actual destination node is specified in the command s route path Always specify the local node s EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port in the CMND 490 instruction s control data An error will occur if another node s Master Unit is specified as the destination When an EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port receives an explicit message it automatically returns a response to the message A time of 2 s is used for request service processing timeouts Set the CMND 490 instruction s timeout set value to 2 s or longer When there is a timeout the error code will be 0102 hex When the CMND 490 instruction s timeout set value is less than 2 s a FINS timeout error response of 0205 hex may occur For details on the parameters of explicit messages refer to the EtherNet IP specifications The Open DeviceNet Vendor Association Inc ODVA can be contacted at the following address to obtain copies of the EtherNet IP and C
312. etwork Error Occurred Flag n 10 bit 01 and Link OFF Error Flag n 10 bit 09 will go ON The Link Status Flag n 13 bit 14 will go OFF Countermeasure Check the follow ing items Is the cable con nected ls the cable dam aged or loose e Is there excessive noise 355 Using the LED Indicators and Display for Troubleshooting Indicator 356 7 segment Server Con nection Error An error occurred in communica tions with the DNS server Unit operation Flag status The DNS Server Error Flag n 14 bit 05 will turn ON Section 14 2 Countermeasure Perform one of the following Correct the DNS server settings e Check the com munications path EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port cable connec tions hubs rout ers and servers and correct any problems An error occurred with the BOOTP server 1 There was no response from the BOOTP serv er The BOOTP server at tempted to set an invalid IP address in the EtherNet IP Unit or built in Ether Net IP port Case 1 The Unit will continue sending requests to the BOOTP server until there is a response In the meantime the Unit will be offline and unable to communi cate Errors will be returned to all com munications requests Data exchanges refreshing will con tinue with the CPU Unit Case 2 The Unit will operate with the default IP address 192
313. etwork delay time In this system it is 5 2 ms Delay item Calculation formula Max delay time Send processing delay 10m sec x 15 10 msec 100 1 49 msec Cable delay 545 nsec 50 m 100 272 5 nsec Switching hub delay 2 msec Approx 0 7 msec 2 7 msec Receive processing 1 0 connection x 0 043 1 0 msec delay Total O Q Or 5 2 msec 4 Network Transmission Delay Time 5 Node 2 PLC 2 Receive Data Processing Time This is the time to transfer the data received by the EtherNet IP Unit or CJ2H built in port to the memory area in the CPU Unit Receive data is transferred in the order that it is received but if the amount of data that can be processed in one transmission is exceeded multiple cycles are required to transfer the data Also data transmission is performed only once per CPU Unit cycle Therefore if data transfer has ended in the cycle in which data is received the start of transmission for received data will be delayed by one CPU Unit cycle time In this system configuration data transfer is performed a maximum of three times based on the data size of node 2 PLC 2 to transfer received data for node 1 PLC 1 and node address 3 PLC 3 Also the cycle time of PLC 2 is 15 ms the effect on the CPU Unit cycle time is 2 3 ms and the data pro cessing time for the EtherNet IP Unit or CJ2H built in port is 6 15 ms The number of data transmissions is thus calculated as 3 In
314. etwork number identifies the network and the host number identifies the node or host on the network The network numbers in an IP address are divided into three classes A B and C so that the address system can be selected according to the scale of the network Classes D and E are not used The configuration of the IP address for each of these classes is shown in the following diagram Bit 31 23 0 Class A 0 Network number 7 bits Host number 24 bits Bit 31 15 0 Class B 1 0 Network number 14 bits Host number 16 bits Bit 31 7 0 ClassC 1 1 0 Network number 21 bits Host number 8 bits Bit 31 0 Class D 1 1 110 Multicast address Cannot be used Bit 31 0 ClassE 1 1 1 1 Identification address Cannot be used The number of networks in each class and the number of nodes possible on the network differ according to the class Number of networks Number of hosts Small 274_2 max 16 777 214 max Medium 2 6_2 max 65 534 max Large 28 2 max 254 max The 32 bits of an IP address are divided into four sections of eight bits each and expressed as a punctuated number IP addresses are represented by the decimal equivalent of each of the four octets in the 32 bit address each sepa rated by a period For example the binary address 10000010 00111010 00010001 00100000 would be represented as 130 58 17 32 Note The same network number must be
315. evice diaa Download Verify External Data gt w amp Cut Ra ran The following dialog box will be displayed Network Configurator N Downloading parameters to selected devices will start e OK 3 Click the Yes Button to download the tag data link parameters to the Eth erNet IP Unit The following dialog box will be displayed if any of the CPU Units is not in PROGRAM mode e Display When All EtherNet IP Units and Built in EtherNet IP Ports are Revision 2 or Higher 169 Setting Tag Data Links 170 Section 6 2 List of Device that are executing The following devices are not in program mode Product Name Comment 4 192168 2501 CJ2B EIP21 192 168 2502 CJIW EIP21 C J2 Download after changed to Program mode Download with Current mode B If the Download after changed to Program mode Button is clicked all CPU Units will be changed to PROGRAM mode and the parameters will be downloaded Confirm safety for all controlled equipment if the CPU Units are changed to PROGRAM mode The operating mode can be re turned to the previous setting after the parameters have been downloaded The Download with Current mode Button can be clicked to download load the parameters even when one or more CPU Units is in RUN or MON ITOR mode e Display When Even One EtherNet IP Unit Is Revision 1 List of Device that are executing The following devices are not in program mode Product Name Comment E 1921682
316. f 0 1 s The same data can be broadcast to all nodes on the network by setting the destination node number to FF Hex The range of node addresses is different for networks other than Ethernet Note 224 The message services function does not guarantee that a message will reach the destination node A message may be lost during transmission due to fac tors such as noise In order to prevent this from occurring when using mes sage services it is common to set up retry processing at the node from which instructions are issued With the SEND 090 RECV 098 and CMND 490 instructions retry processing is executed automatically by specifying the num ber of retries so specify a number other than 0 Communicating between OMRON PLCs Section 8 6 Commands Addressed to CS CJ series CPU Units The following table provides a list of FINS commands that can be processed by a CS CJ series CPU Unit For details refer to the CS CJ series Program mable Controllers Communications Commands Reference Manual W342 For details on FINS commands that can be processed by the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port refer to Appendix E FINS Commands Addressed to EtherNet IP Units or Built in EtherNet IP Ports I O memory area access Command code MR SR MEMORY AREA READ Function Reads the contents of consecutive I O memory area words MEMORY AREA WRITE Writes the contents of consecutive I O memory area wo
317. f the week CLOCK WRITE Changes the present year month date minute second or day of the week Message display MESSAGE READ CLEAR Reads and clears messages and reads FAL FALS messages Access rights ACCESS RIGHT ACQUIRE Acquires the access right as long as no other device holds it ACCESS RIGHT FORCED ACQUIRE Acquires the access right even if another device already holds it ACCESS RIGHT RELEASE Releases the access right that has been acquired Error log ERROR CLEAR Clears errors or error messages ERROR LOG READ Reads the error log ERROR LOG POINTER CLEAR Clears the error log pointer 225 Communicating between OMRON PLCs Section 8 6 Command Function code MR SR File memory FILE NAME READ Reads file memory data SINGLE FILE READ Reads a specified length of file data from a specified position within a single file SINGLE FILE WRITE Writes a specified length of file data from a specified position within a single file FILE MEMORY FORMAT Formats initializes the file memory FILE DELETE Deletes specified files stored in the file memory FILE COPY Copies files from one file memory to another file memory in the same sys tem FILE NAME CHANGE Changes a file name MEMORY AREA FILE TRANSFER Transfers or compares data between the I O memory area and the file memory PARAMETER AREA FILE TRANSFER Transfers or compares
318. for network management DNS client functionality allows you to use host names instead of IP addresses to specify SNTP servers and SNMP managers This is useful for example when server IP addresses change for system revisions because the IP addresses are automatically found when host names are used 1 Aseparate DNS server is necessary to use host names with the DNS cli ent 2 The DNS server is specified directly using its IP address A subnet mask can be set to use classless IP addresses allowing more flexi bility in address settings A variety of functions are provided to quickly identify and handle errors e Self diagnosis at power ON e PING command to check the connection with another node e Error Log functions record the time of occurrence and other error details The CIP Common Industrial Protocol is a shared industrial protocol for the OSI application layer The CIP is used in networks such as EtherNet IP Con trolNet and DeviceNet Data can be routed easily between networks that are based on the CIP so a transparent network can be easily configured from the field device level to the host level The CIP has the following advantages e Destination nodes are specified by a relative path without fixed routing tables e The CIP uses the producer consumer model Nodes in the network are arranged on the same level and it is possible to communicate with required devices whenever it is necessary The consumer node will re
319. for specified connection number aborted because change request received during pro cessing FINS TCP CONNECTION STATUS READ Reads the FINS TCP connection status Command Block ala Command FINS TCP code connection No 401 FINS Commands Addressed to EtherNet IP Units or Built in EtherNet IP Ports Appendix E Response Block Command Response FINS TCP Connection Local IP address Local TCP Remote IP Remote TCP TCP transition code code connection service port number address port number No FINS TCP Connection No Command Response Command Specifies in two bytes the FINS TCP connection number 1 to 16 for which the status is to be read Response Specifies the FINS TCP connection number 1 to 16 for which the status was read Connection Service Response Specifies the service that is being used for the FINS TCP connection as a number 0003 FINS TCP server 0004 FINS TCP client Local IP Address Response Specifies the IP address for the local node in hexadecimal Local TCP Port Number Response Specifies the TCP port number for the local node Remote IP Address Response Specifies the IP address for the remote node in hexadecimal Remote TCP Port Number Response Specifies the TCP port number for the remote node TCP Transitions Response Specifies the TCP connection status using the following numbers For details on TCP status changes refer to Appendix C TCP Status Tra
320. for system use 1 CPU Bus settings error 1 Battery error 1 SYSMAC BUS error 1 Special I O Unit 1 CS1 series CPU Bus Unit error 1 Inner Board error 1 I O verification error 1 PLC system error 1 Unspecified reserved for system use 1 Basic I O Unit error 1 Interrupt task error 1 Unspecified reserved for system use 1 System error FAL 255 Receiving Explicit Messages Section 9 2 Message Exists Does Not Exist When the MSG instruction is executed by the CPU Unit the bit corresponding to the message number will turn ON and be returned in 2 bytes from low to high bytes 15 8765 43210 Message No 0 1 exists 0 does not exist Message No 1 1 exists 0 does not exist Message No 2 1 exists 0 does not exist Message No 3 1 exists 0 does not exist Message No 4 1 exists 0 does not exist Message No 5 1 exists 0 does not exist Message No 6 1 exists 0 does not exist Message No 7 1 exists 0 does not exist e Error Code The highest priority error code of the errors existing when the command is executed will be returned in 2 byte decimal from low to high bytes If there are no errors the error code will be 0000 Note For information on the severity of error codes refer to the CS1 Series CPU Unit Operation Manual W339 or the CU Series CPU Unit Op eration Manual W393 e Error Messages If the above error codes have occurred when FAL FALS instructions are execu
321. ft F2 Help Edit Cell Show Prev Show Next Insert Delete Move Down Move Up Datalink Check the Switch table Node Node TagSet TagSet TagSet TagSet Wizard table focus Hendy CAP NUM Automatic Allocation Results for Node 2 IP Address 192 168 250 2 olfd878d csv DatalinkToo fo es File Edit Datalink Help eH 4 aeax kz AX v Nodes Datalink Table data of selected node Area Area2 Total RPI ee Boake IN OUT Link CH Size Link CH Size TagSetName Size Node Target Variable ms TOZA 250 4 CHWEP i wooo 0 D00050 100 TagSett_192 168 2602 150 162 168 250 1 TagSett_192 168 280 1 50 0 492 168 2502 1 2 Our W050 0 D00150 100 Tagsetz 192 168 250 2 150 z 7 192 168 250 3 3 w100 6 D00250 100 TaoSet3 192 168 250 2 150 162 168 2503 TagSet3_192 166 2803 00 4 IE re The number of a PPS without PPS With connection Multicast filter Multicast filter IN OUT Output with no overload is marked Total Size The displayed size does not include the size of PLC Status 1 word A tagset created by this tool always includes PLC Status Fi F2 F F4 F5 F6 Fr Fe F9 F10 Shift F2 Help Edit Cell Show Prev Show Next Insert Delete Move Down Move Up Datalink C
322. fter every 4 fields e CR after every 5 fields e CR after every 16 fields If word data from the I O memory 1234 hexadecimal 5678 hexadecimal up to DEFO hexadecimal is contained in an attached file in CSV format the word data will be converted into ASCII format in word or double word units The words are delimited by inserting comma delimiters 2C and CRs after specified fields CR LF ODOA 318 Using File Memory Section 11 7 Example Data format using words delimited by commas with CRs after every 10 fields I O memory 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1234 5678 9ABC DEFO 1234 5678 9ABC DEFO 1234 5678 10 9ABC DEFO 1234 5678 9ABC DEFO 1234 5678 9ABC DEFO CSV file contents 31 32 33 34 2c 35 36 37 38 2C 39 41 42 43 2C 1234 5678 9ABC 35 36 37 38 oD 0A 3941 42 43 2c 5 6 7 8 CRI LFI9 A B C TXT file displayed as text 1234 5678 9ABC DEF0 1234 5678 9ABC DEFO 1234 5678 9ABC DEF0 1234 5678 9ABC DEFO 1234 5678 9ABC DEFO Note FREAD 700 will not be able to read the last byte in a file that has been written to the Memory Card if the file contains an odd number of bytes Add 00 hexa decimal to the end of the file if necessary to write an even number of bytes to the Memory Card Note The UM and DM Areas contain binary data Set the data type to binary using
323. g Data Links Section 6 2 Edit Device Parameters Connections Tag Sets In Consume Out Produce Name HNO InData EHNO2_InData New Edit Delete Expand All Collapse All Edit Tags Delete all of unused Tag Sets Usage Count 2 256 Import jii To From File To place more than one input symbol input tag imported from the CX Programmer into one tag set you must delete the input tags that were reg istered to separate input tag sets Select the tag sets for the symbols that are included in the one tag set and click the Delete Button A confirmation message will be displayed Click the No Button to delete only the tag sets Network Configurator A Selected Tag sets and Tags that the Tag sets have will be deleted OK La If you select No it will delete the Tag sets only To create a new tag set for more than one tag click the New Button To place more than one tag in an existing tag set double click the tab set or select it and click the Edit Button The Edit Tag Set Dialog Box will be displayed Imported tags that are not registered in another tag set will be displayed in the Candidate Tag List Area on the right Click the Right Arrow Button to add tags individually 138 Setting Tag Data Links Section 6 2 Edit Tag Set PLG Status Name NOI _InData Not Include O Include Tag List CandidateTae List Name m i Name Ove Size Bit NO1_InData P NO2 InData 4Byt
324. g Normal Target Node Flag is OFF the Target Node PLC Error Flag indicates the previous error status For details on the default settings refer to 4 2 2 Details of the Allocated CIO Area Words 13 12 11 10 9 8 T 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 48 as ra ts i n io to s 7 e Js Je s Je i o 49 2 50 45 51 s so so se sz se ss s4 ss s2 st 50 49 ae 52 z ve 77 76 75 74 zs z 71 7 6o oe e7 6 e5 64 53 95 o4 os o2 or 00 so se a7 a6 os a4 es e2 e1 00 54 a 110 109 108 107 106 105 104 108 102 101 100 o9 o8 or o6 55 56 143 142 141 57 59 191 19 189 188 187 186 185 184 183 182 181 180 179 178 177 176 61 223 22 221 220 219 218 217 216 215 214 213 212 211 210 209 208 62 239 238 237 231 ap asa Manipulated Unit operation by Target Node PLC ON i A fatal or non fatal error occurred Error Flags in the corresponding PLC No error occurred in the PLC 87 Auxiliary Area Data 4 5 Auxiliary Area Data The following table and descriptions cover the words and bits in the CPU Unit s Auxiliary Area that are related to the EtherNet IP Unit 4 5 1 A20200 to A20207 Communications Port Enabled Flags Read only Bits Words Function Bits A20200 to A20207 turn ON when a network instruction SEND RECV CMND or PMCR can be executed with
325. g data link Tag data was not received from the target within the speci fied timeout time The Unit will periodi cally attempt to reconnect to the tar get where the error occurred The Tag Data Link Error Flag n 12 bit 02 Unit Error Occurred Flag n 10 bit 00 and Network Error Occurred Flag n 10 bit 01 will go ON Check the follow ing items e Is the registered node s power supply ON Is the cable con nected e Is the cable dam aged or loose e Is there excessive noise Using the LED Indicators and Display for Troubleshooting Errors Related to Memory Access Indicator 7 segment Section 14 2 The 7 segment display alternates between the node address and error code Unit operation Flag status Countermeasure Flashing E9 red Memory Access Error An error occurred in the Unit s non vola tile memory itself This error will occur in the following cases 1 An error oc curred while writing the er ror log 2 An error oc curred while writing the device pa rameters Note This error does not indicate checksum errors detected when reading data Case 1 The error record remains in RAM only Subsequent writes to non volatile memory are all ignored Other than that normal operation continues Error records con tinue to be written to RAM Case 2 Tag data links and message communica tions will con
326. g hub as IGMP Snooping or GMRP Specific nodes are nodes equipped with an IGMP client that have made transfer requests to the switching hub OMRON EtherNet IP Units are equipped with an IGMP client When the hub does not use multicast filtering multicast packets are sent to all nodes just like broadcast packets which increases the traffic in the network Settings must be made in the switching hub to enable this function There must be enough multicast filters for the network being used QoS Quality of Service This function controls the priority of packet transmissions so that packets can Function for TCP UDP be sent with higher priority to a particular IP address or TCP UDP port The Port Numbers L4 TCP and UDP protocols are called transport layer protocols leading to the name L4 layer 4 QoS function When tag data links and message communications are executed on the same network tag data links can be sent at higher priority to prevent problems such as transmission delays due to message communications traffic and packet losses due to buffer overflow Settings must be made in the switching hub to enable this function and give higher priority to tag data link packets Support for the above two functions is as follows for the different types of switching hubs Multicast Remarks filtering Unmanaged L2 switching hub None None Managed L2 switching hub Provided Provided Both functions must be set with a speci
327. g input data Select the tag sets that you want to receive at the originator device The following tables describes the meanings of the icons and check marks displayed in the tag set list Display position Status All All output tag sets for all devices are selected Device All output tag sets for the applicable device are selected Tag set The applicable output tag sets are selected These are the tag sets that will be set in the connection All All or some output tag sets for some devices are selected Device Some output tag sets for applicable devices are selected All All output tag sets for all devices are not selected Device All output tag sets for applicable devices are not selected Tag set The applicable output tag sets are not selected The connections for this tag set will be deleted Device No applicable tag sets Note Tag sets that are used in connections that are already set are not displayed 157 Setting Tag Data Links Section 6 2 The following display will appear when you click the Show Detail Button Hide Detail Detail Parameter Packet Interval RPI 50 0 ims 0 5 10000 0ms Connection Type Timeout Value Packet Interval RPI x 4 v Multi cast connection v Next gt Cancel The specified values for detailed parameters will be displayed Change the values as required The connection name cannot be set They are automati cally created using t
328. g set must specify at least one tag The size of the data for data exchange is the total size of the tags included in the tag set The size of the output tag set and the size of the input tag set must match In this manual set connection information is called tag data link parameters The following section describes how to set tag data links using the Network Configurator 112 Overview of Tag Data Links Section 6 1 6 1 2 Overview of Operation Setting and Downloading Tag Data Link Parameters The tag data link parameters e g connection information that are described below are created using the Network Configurator and then the parameters are downloaded to all originator devices on the EtherNet IP network Make the following settings using the Network Configurator if tag data link functionality is used with the CJ2B EIP21 built in EtherNet IP port on the CJ2H CJ2M EIP21 built in EtherNet IP port on the CJ2M CS1W EIP21 or CJ1W EIP21 Tag Settings Create input reception tags and output send tags for addresses in the CPU Unit s I O memory areas or for symbols The following are the limits for tags that can be created with the CJ2B EIP21 built in EtherNet IP port on the CJ2H CJ2M EIP21 built in EtherNet IP port on the CJ2M CS1W EIP21 or CJ1W EIP21 e A maximum of 32 tags can be created per Unit for the CJ2M EIP21 A maximum of 256 tags can be created per Unit for other CPU Units A maximum data size of 40 bytes 20 w
329. gh two EtherNet IP Units or built in EtherNet IP port Communications Services Overview Section 1 4 EtherNet IP CS CJ series CPU Unit EtherNet IP Unit Ethernet EtherNet IP etc EtherNet IP Unit FINS FINS commands can be sent to or received from other PLCs or computers on Communications the same Ethernet network by executing SEND 090 RECV 098 or Service CMND 490 instructions in the ladder diagram program This enables various control operations such as the reading and writing of I O memory between PLCs mode changes and file memory operations Note There are no particular restrictions when sending FINS messages to OMRON Ethernet Units CS1W ETN21 or CJ1W ETN21 in an Ethernet network Ethernet EtherNet IP z UDP or TCP FINS IP Jupp or TCP FINS eee eee eee ene ny CS CJ series CPU Unit Jlo Blo O81 o NOt o EtherNet IP Unit Ethernet Unit EtherNet IP Unit User program SEND 090 RECV 098 or CMND 490 instruction Various control operations such as the reading and writing of I O memory between PLCs mode changes and file memory operations can be executed from the host computer by sending the corresponding FINS command with a UDP IP or TCP IP header attached For example it is possible to connect online via Ethernet from FINS communi cations applications such as the CX Programmer and to perform remote pro gramming and monitoring See note
330. gment Type The following sections describe Port Segment Logical Segment and Data Segment which are needed to use the CIP message communications instructions Port Segment The Port Segment is used to specify the path described above Extended Link Port Identifier Segment Type Type Address Size Port Identifier Identifier T 6 5 A O GIU Set the ID of the port in Port Identifier The Port Identifier is 4 bits so it can have a value between 0 and 15 A port identifier of 0 is reserved and not available A port identifier of 1 indicates the backplane port A port identifier of 15 has a special meaning which indicates that the size of Port Identifier is larger than 1 byte and the 4 bit port identifier 15 is followed by 2 byte Port Identifier The port identifier does not exceed 1 byte when using the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port so this special case is not explained here Set the Extended Link Address Size to 1 when that port s Link Address is larger than 1 byte The following diagram shows the Port Segment value when the Extended Link Address Size is set to 0 Extended Link Port Identifier i Link Address _ Segment Type Type Address Size Port identifier Identifier Link Address Address 7 6 5 7 6 5 4 3 2 re d GOTT 384 CIP Message Communications Appendix D Specify the size of Link Address when the Extended Link Address Size is set to 1 The fo
331. gram Do not connect the shield to the EtherNet IP Unit s connector e If a cable connects two hubs connect the shields at only one end Hub Hub Connect shield Connector Connector Connector Connector Connector X Do not connect shield GR 9 EIP Power Unit Supply Unit I I STP Connector GR o j terminal Shield EIP Power Unit Supply Unit STP Connector GR terminal Shield 41 Network Installation Section 3 4 e Press the cable connector in firmly until it locks into place at both the switching hub and the EtherNet IP Unit e Do not lay the twisted pair cable together with high voltage lines e Do not lay the twisted pair cable near devices that generate noise e Do not lay the twisted pair cable in locations subject to high temperatures or high humidity e Do not lay the twisted pair cable in locations subject to excessive dirt and dust or to oil mist or other contaminants Switching Hub Installation Environment Precautions Do not ground the switching hub in the same location as a drive system component such as an inverter e Always use a dedicated power supply for the switching hub s power sup ply Do not use the same power supply used for other equipment such as an I O power supply motor power supply or control power supply e Before installation check the switching hub s environment resistance specifications and use a swit
332. grammer and troubleshooting 12 1 Automatic Clock Adjustment 0 0 0 0 cee eee eee eee 324 I2 1 1 QVEPVIEW so nese veian He be Gee eee OE Mee es 324 12 1 2 Specifications p erenn os eee Ree a ee LE ae amp 325 12 2 Using the Automatic Clock Adjustment Function 325 12 221 Procedure i eiere onien eee dae aed ate ia 325 12 2 2 Settings Required for Automatic Clock Adjustment Function 326 12 2 3 Auto Adjust Time 0 0 0 eee eee eee 327 12 3 Automatic Clock Adjustment Switch 0 00 00 000 0008 328 12 4 Automatic Clock Adjustment Error Processing 004 328 12 4 1 Automatic Clock Adjustment SNTP Errors 328 12 4 2 Error Log Error Codes for the Automatic Clock Adjustment Function 328 323 Automatic Clock Adjustment Section 12 1 12 1 Automatic Clock Adjustment 12 1 1 Overview The EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port can obtain the clock informa tion from the SNTP server see note 1 at a particular time or when a desig nated bit turns ON and then refresh the internal clock information of the CPU Unit to which it is mounted referred to as the local CPU Unit Intranet SNTP server Automatic clock adjustment l l The clock information can be broadcast to other CPU Units on the same Network Ethernet EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port Clock data is obtained from the S
333. gs CS1W EIP21 i OK OK if there are less than 33 tags CJ1W EIP21 i OK OK if there are less than 33 tags CS1W EIP21 OK OK if there are less than 33 tags CJ1W EIP CJ2 OK if no vari OK if no vari OK if there are ables in tags ables in tags less than 33 tags CJ2B EIP21 i OK if no vari OK if no vari OK if there are ables in tags ables in tags less than 33 tags CJ2M EIP21 OK if no vari OK if no vari ables in tags ables in tags 6 2 19 Displaying Device Status Device status is displayed using the following icons in Maintenance Mode To enter maintenance mode select Large Icons Maintenance Mode from the View Menu 181 Setting Tag Data Links Section 6 2 EtherNet IP_1 C42 C42 Cs 192 168 250 1 192 168 250 2 192 168 250 3 192 168 250 4 CJ2B EIP21 JIW EIP21 0J CJ1W EIP21 CJ CJ1W EIP21 CU EG ee ee ee gray Offline Default no configuration turquoise edge green Idle CPU Unit of PLC is in PROGRAM mode a blue Communications normal CPU Unit of PLC is in RUN or MONI TOR mode oO yellow Warning A non fatal error has occurred in the CPU Unit of the y PLC red Alarm A fatal error has occurred in the CPU Unit of the PLC 182 Ladder Programming with Tag Data Links Section 6 3 6 3 Ladder Programming with Tag Data Links 6 3 1 Ladder Programming Related to Tag Data Links E
334. guration Window of the Network Configurator a a mark will be added to each EtherNet IP Unit to show that data links have been set Dem 25 amp 7Vi EtherNet IP_1 GR Network Configurator A EtherNet IP Hardware amp Us Vendor a E Omron Corporation ae Communications Adapte 192 168 250 1 192 168 250 2 192 168 250 3 aE EITTEA CHW EIP21 CHW EIP21 CHW EIP21 Rev 1 ia fal ia 3 Rev2 B CI1W EIP21 CJ2 CJ2B EIP21 Usage of Device Bandwidth 3 CS1W EIP21 B Rey 1 Message Code Date Description lt F LiEtherNet IP T Unknown Intel R PRO 100 VE Network Connection 192 168 250 1 100M O Off line 7 Connect the Network Configurator to the EtherNet IP network and select Network Download from the menus The data link settings will be down loaded to the EtherNet IP Units and the data links will operate 60 Other Parameters Section 3 10 3 10 Other Parameters In addition to the tag data link parameters the EtherNet IP Unit and built in EtherNet IP port also have the following communications and operation parameters e FINS UDP e FINS TCP e FTP e Auto Adjust Time e Status Area e SNMP SNMP Trap These parameters are set as Unit Setup from the CX Programmer The parameter settings are saved in flash memory in the EtherNet IP Unit or CPU Unit See note Note The CPU Bus Unit Setup Area is not used for tag data link settings f
335. h A maximum of 62 records can be returned The format of each record is shown below Protocol 4 bytes The protocol used for the socket is returned as a number 00 00 00 06 TCP 00 00 00 11 UDP Receive Queue 4 bytes The number of bytes in the reception queue Send Queue 4 bytes The number of bytes in the send queue Local IP Address 4 bytes The local IP address allocated to the socket Local Port Number 4 bytes The local port number allocated to the socket Remote IP Address 4 bytes The remote IP address allocated to the socket 413 FINS Commands Addressed to EtherNet IP Units or Built in EtherNet IP Ports Appendix E Remote Port Number 4 bytes The remote port number allocated to the socket TCP Transitions 4 bytes The TCP connection status is returned as one of the numbers shown in the following table Refer to Appendix C TCP Status Transitions for a diagram of transitions Number 00 00 00 00 CLOSED Status Closed 00 00 00 01 LISTEN Waiting for connection 00 00 00 02 SYN SENT SYN sent in active status 00 00 00 03 SYN RECEIVED SYN received and sent 00 00 00 04 ESTABLISHED Already established 00 00 00 05 CLOSE WAIT Received FIN waiting to close 00 00 00 06 FIN WAIT 1 Completed and FIN sent 00 00 00 07 CLOSING Completed and exchanged FIN Awaiting ACK 00 00 00 08 LAST ACK FIN sent and completed Awaiti
336. hat a PLC and all PLC Units be used for the speci fied purpose and under the specified conditions especially in applications that can directly or indirectly affect human life You must consult with your OMRON representative before applying a PLC System to the above mentioned appli cations Safety Precautions N WARNING N WARNING N WARNING Do not attempt to take any Unit apart while the power is being supplied Doing so may result in electric shock Do not touch any of the terminals or terminal blocks while the power is being supplied Doing so may result in electric shock Do not attempt to disassemble repair or modify any Units Any attempt to do so may result in malfunction fire or electric shock Safety Precautions 3 Z N WARNING A Caution A Caution A Caution A Caution Provide safety measures in external circuits i e not in the Programmable Controller including the following items to ensure safety in the system if an abnormality occurs due to malfunction of the Programmable Controller or another external factor affecting the operation of the Programmable Control ler Programmable Controller indicates the CPU Unit and all other Units and is abbreviated PLC in this manual e Emergency stop circuits interlock circuits limit circuits and similar safety measures must be provided in external control circuits The PLC will turn OFF all outputs when its self diagnosis function detects
337. hat was backed up with the simple backup function can be restored to Units or built in ports as shown in the following table Network Configuration designations are given for the model numbers and versions of the backup sources and restore targets The model number must be the same for both the backup source and restore target The CIP revision must be the same or higher CS1W EIP21 CJ1W EIP21 Rev 1 1 Rev 2 1 Yes See note 1 CJ2B EIP21 CJ2M EIP21 CJ1W EIP21 CJ2 Rev 2 1 Rev 2 1 Rev 2 1 CS1W EIP21 CJ1W EIP21 Rev 2 1 CJ2B EIP21 Rev 2 1 CJ2M EIP21 Rev 2 1 CJ1W EIP21 CJ2 Rev 2 1 Note Operating Methods Backing Up EtherNet IP Unit or Built in EtherNet IP Port Setup Files to the Memory Card 334 1 Functions added for revision 2 1 will be set to their default settings The number of settings will be increased so an error will occur in the comparison after data is restored 2 Data backed up for revision 1 1 using a simple backup can be restored to an EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port with revision 2 1 but an error will occur in the comparison When changing the unit version refer to 6 2 18 Changing Devices for information on the Network Configurator device change function Set pins 7 and 8 of the DIP switch on the front panel of the CPU Unit as shown in the following table and press the Memory Card Power Supply Switch for 3 seconds with t
338. he EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port is 9600 To set another number make the setting for the FINS TCP port on the FINS TCP Tab Page of the CX Programmer s Edit Parameters Dialog Box The FINS TCP port number set in the FINS Configuration Tab Page is used by the FINS TCP server s TCP socket The FINS TCP client s TCP socket uses any TCP port number that can be used at that node With the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port and FinsGateway Ver 2003 or higher an unused TCP port is automatically detected and utilized At the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port a TCP IP frame that is received is recognized as a FINS frame according to the remote TCP port number in the frame FINS TCP allows up to 16 FINS TCP connections to be established simulta neously and these 16 connections are managed at the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port by connection numbers When setting FINS TCP con nection settings in the FINS TCP Tab Page of the Network Configurator s Edit Parameters Dialog Box set them individually using these connection num bers 203 FINS TCP Method Section 8 3 FINS TCP Connection Status Word n 24 While a connection with a remote node is established the bit corresponding to the FINS TCP connection status turns ON in the section of the CPU Bus Unit words allocated in the CIO Area The bit turns OFF if the connection is termi nated by a communications error or a FINS command i e
339. he number of corrections FINS UDP can be used for broadcasting e When data is sent via an IP network with multiple layers such as the Internet communications reliability drops The following diagram shows the structure of a UDP packet used for sending and receiving data on an Ethernet network Ethernet Ver 2 iP UDP FINS frame FCS N V J UDP packet As the diagram shows a nested structure is used with the FINS UDP method i e Ethernet Ver 2 IP frame UDP frame and FINS frame A UDP data sec tion FINS frame that exceeds 1 472 bytes is split into packets for transmis sion The split UDP data is then joined automatically at the UDP IP protocol layer There is normally no need to pay attention at the application layer to this split but it may not be possible to send 1 472 byte UDP packets over an IP network with multiple layers When using the FINS communications service in a system such as this select the FINS TCP method FINS UDP Method Section 8 2 UDP Port Numbers for The UDP port number is the number for UDP to identify the application layer FINS UDP i e the FINS communications service in this case When communications are executed by UDP IP this port number must be allocated to the communi cations service The default setting for the UDP port number i e the UDP port number of the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port is 9600 To set another number set the number on the FINS UDP Tab Page of the
340. he CPU Unit Restarting these Units is required to read and enable the new routing tables Confirm that the system will not be adversely affected before allowing the CPU Bus Units to be reset When the settings IP address or tag data link settings of the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port are transferred from a Programming Device all of the destination EtherNet IP Units or built in EtherNet IP ports nodes will be reset in order to enable the transferred settings Transfer settings to the EtherNet IP Units or built in EtherNet IP ports only after verifying that restarting the Units will not cause any problems in the system If a repeater hub is used for EtherNet IP tag data links cyclic communica tions the network s communications load will increase data collisions will occur frequently and stable communications will be impossible Always use a switching hub when using tag data links in the network Before resetting a CPU Bus Unit or Special I O Unit always verify that restart the Unit will not cause any problems in the system Conformance to EC Directives Applicable Directives Concepts Note e EMC Directives e Low Voltage Directive EMC Directives OMRON devices that comply with EC Directives also conform to the related EMC standards so that they can be more easily built into other devices or the overall machine The actual products have been checked for conformity to EMC standards see the following note Whet
341. he CS1W ETN11 CJ1W ETN11 for FINS UDP command data sent from a UDP port number other than the local FINS UDP port number default 9600 set ion the FINS UDP Tab Page e If the command data is addressed to an Ethernet Unit a FINS response will be sent to the source UDP port number If the command data is for any other Unit such as the CPU Unit a FINS response will be sent to the UDP port number set as the FINS UDP port number 99 IP Addresses in FINS Communications Section 5 2 CJ1W EIP21 Edit Parameters TCP IP Ethemet FINS UDP FINS TCP FTP Auto Adjust Time Status Area SNMP SNMP Trap FINS UDP Port Default 9600 C User defined Conversion IP Address T able Destination Node Destination IP Addres Auto dynamic C Auto Static C Combined C IP address table Destination IP add Te Destination IP is changed dynamically Destination IP is Not changed dynamically C ETN11 compatible mode Set Defaults Cancel Note If the ETN11 compatible mode is used the internal table will retain the same content from when it was created after the EtherNet IP Unit was turned ON or restarted This feature provides protection from access via FINS UDP from computers that dynamically change their IP address FINS TCP Communications Method Pairing in the FINS TCP Method Note Internal Processing 1 2 3 100 With the FINS TCP method communic
342. he Ethernet Unit work directory to the specified directory cdup Changes the working directory at the remote host to the parent directory pwd Displays the Ethernet Unit work directory type Specifies the data type of transferred files get Transfers the specified file from the Memory Card to the local host mget Transfers multiple files from the Memory Card to the local host put Transfers the specified local file to the Memory Card mput Transfers multiple local files to the Memory Card delete Deletes the specified file from the Memory Card mdelete Deletes multiple files from the Memory Card close Disconnects the FTP server bye Closes the FTP client quit Closes the FTP client Protection FTP login name consists of 12 letters max CONFIDENTIAL is the default login name Password consists of 8 characters max Protocol FTP port number 20 TCP 21 TCP Number of connec 1 tions Note The PLC however is unable to read or write files at other nodes using FTP because the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port does not support FTP client functions 11 2 FTP Server Function Details 11 2 1 File Types The file system in the CPU Unit that can be accessed by the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port includes files in any Memory Card mounted in the CPU Unit and files in the EM file memory The directory tree is shown below i root MEMCARD Memory card directory EM EM file memor
343. he Memory Card inserted into the slot Release the switch when the BUSY indicator lights DIP switch settings SW7 SW8 Simple Backup Function Note Restoring the EtherNet IP Unit or Built in EtherNet IP Port Setup File from the Memory Card Reading and Setting the Data in the Unit Note Section 13 2 EtherNet IP Unit CPU Unit Memory Card Power Supply Switch 9 All setup data Memory Card All data This operation will create an EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port set tings file and write that file to the Memory Card along with the other backup files When the Memory Card Power Supply Switch is pressed the MCPWR indicator on the front of the CPU Unit will flash once and then remain lit while data is being written If the data is written normally the MCPWR indicator will turn OFF The BUSY indicator will flash while the data is being written The backup operation will fail if it is performed after the device parameters were not downloaded successfully from the Network Configurator or CX Pro grammer Perform the backup operation only if the device parameters were downloaded normally Set pins 7 and 8 of the DIP switch on the front panel of the CPU Unit as shown in the following table and turn the power to the CPU Unit OFF and then ON again with the Memory Card inserted into the slot DIP switch settings SW7 ON SW8 OFF EtherNet IP Unit CPU Unit All setup data This operation wil
344. he area specified by the tag setting is outside of the area address range in the CPU Unit A connection will not be established for a tag for which this error occurs Size error Different sizes are set for the network symbol and the tag settings Connections will not be opened for tags with this error Not exist A network symbol is not set in the symbol table in the CPU Unit for the specified tag setting A connection will not be established for a tag for which this error occurs PLC I F error There is a problem in the bus interface with the CPU Unit Determine the cause based on the indicators and the error log 345 Checking Status with the Network Configurator Section 14 1 If the status is not OK check the tag data link settings or the network symbol settings in the symbol table in the CJ2 CPU Unit Monitor Device Status 1 Status 2 ll Connection Error History Controller Error History Tag Status Ethernet Information Name Status D00010 Ok D00020 Ok 5 D00030 Ok 4 NO1_InData Ok N02 _InData Size error N03 hData Not exist 5 D00000 Ok 346 Using the LED Indicators and Display for Troubleshooting Section 14 2 Ethernet Information Tab Page The Ethernet Information Tab Page shows the communications status at the communications driver level The error counter information can be used to confirm whether communications problems have occurred The tag data link information can be used to confirm charac
345. he bits in the IP address used either as the Network ID or Subnet ID are set to 1 and the remaining bits which correspond to the bits in the IP address actually used for the Host ID are set to 0 The following example shows the Subnet Mask for an 8 bit Subnet ID used in a Class B IP address Bit 31 15 0 Class B 1 0 Network ID 14 bits Host ID 16 bits Subnet mask 1111111111111111 1111111100000000 FF FF FF 00 gt 4 gt 4 gt Network number Subnet number Host number Set the same Subnet Mask value for all of the nodes on that subnetwork If no subnetworks are used there is no need to set Subnet Masks In that case the following Subnet Mask values will be used depending on the IP address class 255 0 0 0 255 255 0 0 255 255 255 0 93 IP Addresses in FINS Communications Section 5 2 5 1 5 CIDR CIDR or classless interdomain routing is used to assign IP addresses that do not use classes IP addresses that use classes are separated into blocks according to net IDs and host IDs resulting in inefficient usage of IP address space CIDR does not use classes so IP address space can be divided as required to more efficiently use IP address space For example using a subnet mask setting with CIDR enables building a horizontally distributed network exceed ing 254 nodes even if a class C address block e g 192 168 Subnet mask range 192 0 0 0 to 255 255 255 252 CIDR was
346. he following rule default_N where N is a 3 digit number 001 002 etc starting from 1 5 Click the Next Button to switch to the table in the following Wizard Dialog Box Follow the instructions to select and input from the list box the input tag set of the originator device that receives the output tag set of the target device Gonnection Configuration Wizard 192168250100 Please configure the empty Input Tag Set field and click Finish button MG_Master NOTE You can edit an Input Tae Set clicking the Edit Tag Sets button You can delete a connection making the Input Tae Set field empty MC3 Status 4Byte Input Tae Set Tareet Device Output Tag Set Connection Type RPI Timeout MC1_Error 2Byte lt 1921682501 MC1 MC Error 2Byte Multi cast connection 500 ms RPI x 4 MC1 Status 4Byte lt 1921682501 MC1 MC Status 4Byte Multi cast connection 500 ms RPIx 4 MC2_Error 2Byte lt 1921682502 MC2 MC Error 2Byte Multi cast connection 500 ms RPIx 4 bi 192 168 2502 MC2 MC Status 4Byte Multi cast connection 500 ms RPIx4 i 1921682503 MC3 MC Error 2Byte Multi cast connection 500 ms RPI x 4 Mice Status je Byte 1921682503 MC3 MO Status 4Byte Multicast connection 500 ms RPI x 4 Edit Tag Sets l lt Back Finish Cancel e The blank area in the Input Tag Set Column is the connection that you are creating e The rows in which there are in
347. he origina tor s connection set tings Error code returned from target The Major Minor Revisions did not match when opening con nection Check the major and minor revi sions set for the target device and connection If nec essary obtain the EDS file and set it again Depends on the tar get s specifications Contact the target device s manufac turer Confirm that the tar get device s EDS file is correct Check the origina tor s connection set tings 360 Error code returned from target The tag set specified in the con nection s target variables does not exist Check whether the originator and target tag sets and tags are set correctly CJ2 CPU Units Only Check sym bol settings in the CPU Unit Depends on the tar get s specifications Contact the target device s manufac turer Check the origina tor s connection set tings Check whether the target s tag sets and tags are set cor rectly CJ2 CPU Units Only Check symbol set tings in the CPU Unit Connection Status Codes and Error Processing Section 14 3 Connection status Source of error Handling General Additional Configuration 1 Configuration 2 Configuration 3 Status Status hex hex 01 011A Error code returned from origi An unexpected An unexpected net Follow the operating nator network load may work load may have
348. he other node s host name to the DNS server These settings register the IP addresses of the preferred and alternate DNS servers that will perform the search At this time the EtherNet IP Unit is not equipped with any Section 3 8 TCP IP and Link Settings Domain Name IP Router Table functions that require a DNS server so these settings are not used The functionality required to use a DNS server is not provided on EtherNet IP Units with unit version 1 0 The DNS server cannot be used with these Units Sets the domain name of the domain to which the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port belongs The EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port does not use a domain name in actual communications Set the IP router table to route EtherNet IP communications for specific nodes through an IP router other than the default gateway Settings on the Ethernet Tab Page Link Setting The following settings are provided on the Ethernet Tab Page of the Unit Setup for the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port e Link settings baud rate and half full duplex Sets the communications baud rate Setting Meaning Auto default The baud rate with the switching hub is detected automat ically If possible the Unit operates in 100Base T full duplex 10 Mbps Half Duplex Operates in 10Base T half duplex 10 Mbps Full Duplex Operates in 10Base T full duplex 100 Mbps Half Duplex Operates in 100Base TX half duplex
349. heck the Switch table Node Node TagSet TagSet TagSet TagSet Wizard table focus Ready CAP NUM 154 Setting Tag Data Links Section 6 2 Automatic Allocation Results for Node 3 IP Address 192 168 250 3 o1fd878d csv DatalinkTool Ee File Edit Datalink Help eH64aeaxlsgxvl Nodes Datalink Table data of selected node Areat Area2 Total RPI IN OUT Link CH Size Link CH Size TagSet Name Size Node Target Variable 192 168 250 1 CJ1W EIP21 1 p 50 D00050 100 TagSeti_192 168 250 3 150 192 168 250 1 TagSet1_192 168 250 1 192 168 250 2 2 N D00150 100 TagSet2_192 168 250 3 150 192 168 250 2 TagSet2_192 168 250 2 5 3 OUT j D00250 100 TagSet3_192 168 250 3 150 z 4 coil IP Address Device 192 168 250 3 The number of pi PPS Without PPS With connection Multicast filter Multicast filter IN OUT Output with no overload is marked Total Size The displayed size does not include the size of PLC Status 1 word A tagset created by this tool always includes PLC Status Fl F2 F3 Fa F5 F6 Fr Fe Fo F10 Shift F2 Help Edit Cell Show Prev Show Next Insert Delete Move Down Move Up Datalink Check the Switch table Node Node TagSet TagSet TagSet TagSet Wizard table focus Ready CAP NUM 6 Aft
350. hed from OFF to ON Turned OFF by Unit after the clock time has been adjusted Not used Tag Data Link Start Bit Start the tag data links by switching this bit from OFF to ON If the tag data Bit 2 links are already operating the signal will be ignored The tag data link starts operating automatically after the tag data link parameter settings are down loaded from the Network Configurator the CPU Units power is turned ON or the Unit is restarted If the tag data links have been stopped by turning the Tag Data Link Stop Bit n bit 04 from OFF to ON the tag data links can be restarted by turning this Tag Data Link Start Bit n bit 02 from OFF to ON Once the tag data links start the EtherNet IP Unit automatically turns OFF the Tag Data Link Start Bit Do not force this bit ON or OFF until it is automatically turned OFF by the Unit Tag Data Link Stop Bit Stop the tag data links by switching this bit from OFF to ON Once the tag Bit 4 data links have been stopped they will remain stopped until the Unit is restarted or the Tag Data Link Start Bit is turned ON The tag data links will also start operating automatically when the tag data link parameter settings are downloaded from the Network Configurator If the tag data links are already stopped the signal will be ignored Message communications can be performed while the tag data links are stopped Once the tag data links have stopped the EtherN
351. hen a symbol name is not used in a setting for the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port when a tag database error has not occurred or when a previous error has been cleared Not used All Tag Data Links Operating Indicates that tag data links are communicating in all con nections as the originator Indicates that a tag data link failed in on or more connec tions as the originator OFF even if some tag data links are communicating Tag Data Links Operating Indicates that tag data links are communicating in one or more connections as the origi nator Indicates that not even one tag data link is communicating in connections as the origina tor OFF even if the Unit is com municating as a target CIO Area Allocations Section 4 2 Communications Status 2 EtherNet IP Unit to CPU Unit n 13 Communications Status 3 EtherNet IP Unit to CPU Unit n 14 Word n 13 contains status flags related to the Ethernet as shown in the fol lowing diagram 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Link Status FTP Status Manipulated Unit operation by ON when the FTP server is operating i e when there is an FTP client connection FTP Status OFF when the FTP is on standby i e waiting for a cli ent connection Not used Link Status ON when a link is established with the switching hub OFF when the link with the
352. her the products conform to the standards in the system used by the customer however must be checked by the customer EMC related performance of the OMRON devices that comply with EC Direc tives will vary depending on the configuration wiring and other conditions of the equipment or control panel on which the OMRON devices are installed The customer must therefore perform the final check to confirm that devices and the overall machine conform to EMC standards Applicable EMS Electromagnetic Susceptibility and EMI Electromagnetic Interference Standards in the EMC Electromagnetic Compatibility stan dards are as follows EtherNet IP Unit EMS EMI CS1W EIP21 EN61000 6 2 EN61000 6 4 CJ1W EIP21 Radiated emission 10 m regulations Low Voltage Directive Always ensure that devices operating at voltages of 50 to 1 000 V AC and 75 to 1 500 V DC meet the required safety standards for the PLC EN61131 2 SECTION 1 Overview of EtherNet IP This section introduces the functions and protocols used in EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port communications services 1 1 EtherNet IP Unit Features 0 0 nemin n ee eee 2 1 2 Devices Required for Constructing a Network 000 4 1 3 Support Software Required to Construct a Network 4 1 4 Communications Services Overview 0 00 0 c eee eee eee 6 1 5 Network Configurator Overview 0 0
353. herNet IP Note For an EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port with version 2 0 or higher change the class ID of the PLC Object from 2F hex to C4 hex When using a PLC Object with a DeviceNet Unit or EtherNet IP Unit with ver sion 1 0 and converting to EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port with a version 2 0 or higher the class ID must be changed according to the commu nications application 248 Receiving Explicit Messages 9 2 1 List of PLC Object Services Section 9 2 PLC Objects provide the following services Status Read Write for CPU Units Instance ID Request Contents Services Service Class ID code CPU Unit Informa OE Hex C4 Hex tion Read 2F Hex See note CPU Unit Write 10 Hex CPU Unit Status 40 Hex Read 00 Hex service data Attribute ID Reads the operating mode of the 64 Hex CPU Unit Attribute ID Reads if there is a fatal or non fatal 65 Hex error in the CPU Unit Attribute ID Reads CPU Unit model 66 Hex Attribute ID Changes the operating mode of the 64 Hex CPU Unit Attribute Value Attribute ID Clears errors 65 Hex Attribute Value None Reads the detailed status of the CPU Unit Operation status Stop run CPU standby Operating modes PROGRAM MON ITOR RUN Fatal error information Error flags including memory errors I O bus errors system errors Messages Message No when MSB instruction executed
354. herNet IP Unit that is to be verified To select multiple nodes hold down the Shift Key while clicking the icons In the following ex ample the 192 168 250 1 and 192 168 250 2 nodes are selected With the icons selected right click and select Parameter Verify from the pop up menu EtherNet 1P_1 i C42 EARR PA Parameter gt CJ2B EIP21 PIKA a Reset lt Upload Register to other Device gt Downl Usage of Device Bandwidtl Download External Data gt vi Y A 3 The following dialog box will be displayed Network Configurator t Verifying parameters to selected device will start e OK Yes No Click the Yes Button or the No Button 4 One of the following dialog boxes will be displayed Differences Not Found in the Comparison Network Configurator J 192 168 250 1 CJ2B EIP21 No configuration differences found Differences Found in the Comparison 174 Setting Tag Data Links Section 6 2 Comparison Result Description Local Device Q Wrong Device Comment CJ2B EIP21 Q Wrong Connection s CNO1_01 Register Unregister Q Wrong Tag Set s TagSet1_19 Register Unregister Q Wrong Tag Set s TagSet2_19 Register Unregister Q wrong Tag s 0000 Registrati Register Unregister Q Wrong Tag s 0010 Registrati Register Unregister Differences Found in the Device Type Network Configurator 3 t Invalid device type e Click the OK Button or
355. ial I O Unit In the CS CJ Series the base unit is recognized as a backplane port CPU Bus Units such as the EtherNet IP Unit are also recognized as nodes on the backplane port The Link Address of a CPU Bus Unit on the Backplane is the unit number 10 hex For example when the unit number is 0 the Link Address is 10 hex When the unit number is F the Link Address is 1F hex The Link Address of a Special I O Unit on the Backplane is the unit number 20 hex For example when the unit number is 0 the Link Address is 20 hex Network e EtherNet IP The Ethernet port s Link Address is described by the IP address The IP address must be described entirely in ASCII For example IP address of 192 168 200 200 will be 31 39 32 2E 31 36 38 2E 32 30 30 2E 32 30 30 386 CIP Message Communications Response Codes General Status Code The General Status Code is stored in the response data after execution of the CMND instruction has been completed General Status Code hex Status Name Success Appendix D Description of Status Service was successfully performed by the object specified Connection failure A connection related service failed along the connection path Resource unavailable Resources needed for the object to perform the requested service were unavailable Invalid parameter value See Status Code 20 hex which is the preferred value to use for this cond
356. ications Section 5 2 FINS header FINS data z Remote node Internal table Di Me bare Application level FINS NEn ra Me Transport level UDP gpppor TCP rep part E 7 5 number number prone ANS Node numbeg Internet level IP SN ma IP address Transport level N A gppsoa ar Physical level Ethernet A WU DPA aY TCP TERIN thernet address Internet level Ro ts L nternet leve 7 IP address y The remote node s IP address UDP TCP A method UDP port number and TCP port Physical level Ethernet S T number are calculated from the node Ethernet address a number in the FINS message and an s e Ethernet frame is generated Ethernet V2 FINS header FINS data 5 2 2 Pairing Addresses in Internal Tables FINS UDP Communications Methods Automatic Generation Dynamic Personal computer 96 When the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port is turned ON or restarted the following values are set for addresses in the internal table Remote IP address Local IP address network number remote FINS node address Remote UDP port number UDP port number set for local Unit Connecti With the dyn can be dyna on method FINS UDP
357. ices involved in tag data links Connection Settings Connections Tab Registering Devices in the Register Device List 1 2 3 1 Display the originator device s Edit Device Parameters Dialog Box by dou ble clicking the device s icon in the Network Configuration Window or right clicking the device s icon and selecting Parameter Edit from the pop up menu 2 Click the Connections Tab at the top of the Edit Device Parameters Dialog Box All of the devices registered in the network except the local node will be displayed Edit Device Parameters Connections Tag Sets Unregister Device List Product Name Z2 192 168 250 2 EMAA 192 168 250 3 CJTW EIP21 C32 Connections 0 256 0 0 T 0 lt Register Device List Product Name 192 168 250 1 CJ2B EIP21 Variable Target Variable To From File OK Cancel 141 Setting Tag Data Links Section 6 2 3 Inthe Unregister Device List select the target device that requires connec tion settings by clicking the device so its color changes to gray and click the Button The selected target device will be displayed in the Reg ister Device List as shown in the following diagram Edit Device Parameters Connections Tag Sets Unregister Device List Product Name 192 168 250 3 C 1W E1P21 CJ2 Connections 0 256 0 0 T 0 lt Register Device List Product Name 192 168 250 1 CJ2B EIP21 Variable Target Variable P2 192 168 250 2 002
358. ich they can be mounted depends on the Backplane Up to four EtherNet IP Units can be mounted to a single PLC If it is mounted in combination with other CPU Bus Units e g Controller Link Units the maximum total number of CPU Bus Units that can be mounted is 8 Tighten PLC Backplane mounting screws to a torque of 0 9 N m and the Unit s screws to a torque of 0 4 N m CS1W BC023 BC033 BC053 BC083 BC103 CPU Backplane CS series CPU Rack with 2 3 5 8 or 10 slots Can be mounted in any slot 2 3 5 8 or 10 slots Expansion Backplane not possible with 2 slot CPU Backplane CS1W B1033 B1053 B1083 B1103 CS series Expansion Backplane CS series Expansion Rack with Up to eight Units can be mounted said laisse gt to the slots shown in the diagrams Can be mounted in any slot on the left 3 5 8 or 10 slots CS1W B1033 B1053 B1083 B1103 CS series Expansion Backplane CS series Expansion Rack with 3 5 8 or 10 slots Can be mounted in any slot v 3 5 8 or 10 slots CPU CPU Unit Note PS Power Supply Unit The CS1W EIP21 EtherNet IP Unit s maximum current consumption is 410 mA Be sure that the total current consumption of all the Units connected to the same CPU Backplane or Expansion Backplane does not exceed the output capacity of the Power Supply Unit 3 3 2 Mounting to a CJ series PLC 38 EtherNet IP Units can be mounted in a CJ series CPU Rack or a CJ series Expa
359. igh load on the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port These high loads may be caused by problems in communications particularly FINS communications and UDP sock ets If these values are consistently high check your applications 1 The number of times an attempt was made to secure a short buffer without WAIT when there were no short buffers available 2 The number of times an attempt was made to secure a short buffer with WAIT when there were no short buffers available 3 The number of times an attempt was made to release and secure a short buffer already being used by an other socket when there were no short buffers available 412 FINS Commands Addressed to EtherNet IP Units or Built in EtherNet IP Ports Appendix E Precautions All the above values are set to 0 if Ethernet communications functions are stopped due to improper settings in the system setup These values are cleared when the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port is started or reset Values will be counted only until the maximum values are reached Response Codes 0000 Normal end 1001 Command too large SOCKET STATUS READ Reads the network socket status of the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port Command Block 27 64 Command code Response Block Command Response Socket status 777777777777 Socket status code code Parameters Socket Status Response Returns eight types of information in records of 32 bytes eac
360. imal value 1 The number of packets discarded because the size of the first short buffer was smaller than the minimum size 28 of the IP header and UDP header when the packet was stored 2 The number of packets discarded due to an incorrect checksum in the UDP header 3 The number of packets discarded because the IP overall length in the IP header was shorter than the UDP overall length in the UDP header Precautions All the above values are set to 0 if network operation stops due to incorrect settings in the system setup Counting will be stopped when a count reaches the maximum value The maximum values are as follows IP ICMP or UDP status 7FFFFFFF 2 147 483 647 decimal TC status FFFFFFFF 4 294 967 295 decimal Response Codes 0000 Normal end 1001 Command too large MEMORY STATUS READ Reads the status of the network memory for the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port The network memory contains 2 991 bytes that are used as required as for communications buffers for communications ser vicing The network memory consists of 23 928 short buffers 128 bytes each and 64 long buffers 1 024 bytes each Command Block Command code 411 FINS Commands Addressed to EtherNet IP Units or Built in EtherNet IP Ports Appendix E Response Block Command Response Memory status code code Parameters Memory Status Response A total of 23 data items in six areas are returned in the following order Each
361. ime Read the error log The transmission frame may be corrupted or the internal reception buffer full Read out the error log and correct the system as required Unit error Controller error Communications controller error Affected con trollers ERC indicator Error occurred in the communications control ler Take corrective action refer ring to troubleshooting proce dures in this section PLC error Affected node s LED indicators CPU Unit error occurred in the PLC at the remote node Clear the error in the CPU Unit Refer to the PLC s oper ation manuals Unit number setting error Unit number The unit number setting is incorrect Confirm that the unit number set on the switch is within the specified range and that the same unit number is not used twice in the same network Service not supported Unsupported com mand Command code The specified command code is not supported by the destination Unit Check the command code FINS header frame length A short frame 4 bytes is being used for the FINS header frame The EtherNet IP Unit does not support short headers Routing error 372 Routing table setting error Routing tables Remote node is not set in the routing tables Set the destination address in the routing tables Routing tables not registered Routing tables Destination is unknown because there are no
362. in the Memory Card with the device parameters in the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port When the Memory Card Power Supply Switch is pressed the MCPWR indica tor on the front of the CPU Unit will flash once and then remain lit while data is being compared The BUSY indicator will flash while data is being com pared If the data matches the MCPWR and BUSY indicators will turn OFF If the MCPWR and BUSY indicators both flash it means that the data does not match or that an error has occurred Data backed up for revision 1 1 using a simple backup can be restored to an EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port with revision 2 1 but an error will occur in the comparison When changing the unit version refer to 6 2 18 Changing Devices for information on the Network Configurator device change function 13 3 Using the Backup Tool Overview 336 The PLC Backup Tool of the CX Programmer can be used to back up com pare and restore data for all Units or only specified Units in the PLC that is connected online Specified backup PLC Backup Tool folder Default folder C Backup yymmdd_hhmmss CPU Unit with Configuration Units CPU Bus Units and Special I O Units Restore compare Back up Using the Backup Tool Section 13 3 Usage The PLC Backup Tool can be used for the following e Backing up all data in a PLC e Comparing all of the data in a PLC with data that was previously backed u
363. ination node specified in the CMND 194 instruction operands e Always specify the unit address of the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port in the CMND 194 instruction 396 FINS Commands Addressed to EtherNet IP Units or Built in EtherNet IP Ports Response Codes Response code Description 0000 Normal end 1001 Command too large 1002 Command too small No test data BROADCAST TEST RESULTS READ Reads the results number of times data received of the broadcast test Command Block 08 02 Command code Response Block Command Response Times code code received Parameters Times Received Response Appendix E The number of times the data has been received normally during the broadcast send test is returned as a hexadecimal number The number of times received is cleared each time the result is read Response Codes 0000 Normal end 1001 Command too large BROADCAST DATA SEND Sends test data simultaneously to all nodes on the network Command Block Command Test data code Parameters Test Data Command This command specifies the data to be sent to the specified nodes Up to 1 460 bytes can be specified 397 FINS Commands Addressed to EtherNet IP Units or Built in EtherNet IP Ports Appendix E Precautions e No response is made to this command e When using this command set the FINS header parameters or the control data for the CMND 194 instruction as follows
364. ing is used Timeouts The default setting is used Example 1 Automatic Connections with the Same Tag Set Names The following connections would automatically be set if there is an output tag set named A_Signal at node A and input tag sets named A_Signal at nodes B and C Node A Output tag set A_Signal c Excluded characters None Node B Node C Connection Input tag set A_Signal O C Connection Input tag set A_Signal O EtherNet IP 147 Setting Tag Data Links 148 1 2 3 Section 6 2 Example 2 Automatic Connections with the Ellipses The following connections would automatically be set if there is an output tag set named O_ Signal at node A and input tag sets named _ Signal at nodes B and C and O_ and I_ were set as ellipses Excluded characters O_ and _ Node A Node B Node C Output tag set O_ Signal Connection Input tag set _ Signal Input tag set _Signal gt Connection e EtherNet IP 1 Set the same tag set names for the output and input tag sets for the con nection The tag set names can also include forward and backward el lipses 2 Select Auto Connection from the Network Menu The connections will be set automatically A dialog box will appear to set forward and backward ellipses for both out p
365. ings Refer to Initial Settings on page 34 When using a user set FTP login name and password With the CX Programmer online right click the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port in the IO Table Dialog Box of the CX Programmer and se lect Edit Unit Setup Set the following on the FTP Tab Page of the Edit Parameters Dialog Box FTP login name FTP password Select Transfer to PLC from the PLC Menu and click the Yes Button The setting data will be transferred to the CPU Bus Unit System Setup Area in the CPU Unit When reading from and writing to the Memory Card Mount the Memory Card into the CPU Unit Connect the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port using the FTP cli ent software Enter the FTP login name and password set in the Unit Setup and log into the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port Note Once logged in the ftp commands can be used such as cd Change Directory and get Obtain File Search in the following directories for the required file in the Memory Card mounted to the CPU Unit or the EM File Memory File memory type Directory Memory Card MEMCARD EM File Memory EM 8 9 Download the files Exit the connection The EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port will be restarted when the settings data is transferred to the CPU Bus Unit System Setup Area so that the new settings are read and become effective Verify that it is safe for the EtherNet I
366. ings are saved in flash memory in the EtherNet IP Unit or CPU Unit See note Note The CPU Bus Unit Setup Area is not used for tag data link settings for an EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port This point is different from the operation of Ethernet Units Refer to SECTION 6 Tag Data Link Functions for details 3 9 1 Network Configurator Setting Procedure The methods for setting tag data links using the Network Configurator can be roughly divided into the following two 1 Using the EtherNet IP Datalink Tool in the Network Configurator to Set the Parameters With this method there is no flexibility in the settings but you can easily set the data link parameters using only memory addresses and the settings will conform to Controller Link data link parameters 2 Using the Tag Data Link Setting Function in the Network Configurator to Set the Parameters With this method you can set the connections that comprise the tag data links for each EtherNet IP node Tag data links can be set with a high degree of flexibility using both memory addresses and network variables Refer to SEC TION 6 Tag Data Link Functions for details on how to perform these settings This section presents a setting example using the EtherNet IP Datalink Tool Using the EtherNet IP Datalink Tool The method that is described here is used to set memory addresses in tables to specify data links between EtherNet IP Units or built in EtherNet IP ports on CS CJ se
367. interface EtherNet IP Units Ethernet port CPU Unit s Ethernet port EtherNet IP Unit s Ethernet port Location on Network A single node address is used only when directly connected to EtherNet IP Number of Units that can be A single Network Configurator per network More than one Configurator cannot be connected to Network used in the same system Main func Network control e The network configuration can be created and edited regardless of whether the Net tions functions work Configurator is online or offline e The network configuration can be read from a file or the network Hardware control The EDS files used by the Network Configurator can be installed and deleted functions Supported file formats Configurator network configuration files nvf Configuration files ncf created using the Network Configurator for EtherNet IP version 2 can be imported by selecting External Data Import from the File Menu 10 Network Configurator Overview Section 1 5 1 5 3 Precautions When Using the Network Configurator Only an OMRON EtherNet IP Unit can be set as the originator for a connec tion using the Network Configurator e The Network Configurator can be connected to the EtherNet IP network through the following ports e CS1 CJ1 series CPU Unit s serial port peripheral or RS 232C or Ethernet port on EtherNet IP Unit e CJ2 series CPU Unit s serial port USB or RS 232C Ethernet port on
368. ion is included on features system configuration component names component functions installation setting procedures and troubleshooting Use together with the CJ series CJ2 CPU Unit Software User s Manual W473 xii CJ2H CPU6 CJ2H CPU6 CJ2M CPU CJ series CJ2 CPU Unit Software User s Manual Provides software information for the CJ2 CPU Units Information is included on CPU Unit operation internal memory programming setting procedures and CPU Unit functions Use together with the CJ series CJ2 CPU Unit Hardware User s Manual W472 Manual number CJ2H CPU6 CJ2H CPU6 EIP CJ2M CPU CS1G H CPU CS1G H CPU CJ1G H CPU CJ1M CPU CJ1G CPU NSJO NSJD B G5D B M3D Programmable Con trollers Instructions Reference Manual Contents Describes the ladder diagram programming instructions supported by CS series and CJ series PCs Use this manual for CJ2 CPU Units CS1G H CPU H CS1G H CPU v1 Programmable Con trollers Operation Manual Provides an outline of and describes the design installa tion maintenance and other basic operations for the CS series PLCs Information is also included on features system configuration wiring I O memory allocations and
369. ions FINS TCP client computer Explicit messages with CX Programmer etc or CIP client computer with Network Configurator etc Ethernet EtherNet IP Communications in intranet Firewall eee C EtherNet IP Unit Private address P router Internet IP router Firewall _ EtherNet IP Unit Private address EtherNet IP Unit Private address FINS communications FINS TCP client computer Explicit messages with CX Programmer etc or CIP client computer with Network Configurator etc Communications in Intranet Communications in Intranet J Conditions for Using Communications Applications When the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port has a private address communications applications can be used under the following conditions m FINS Communications Service e The FINS communications service can be executed on the intranet between EtherNet IP Units and built in EtherNet IP ports with private addresses only A device such as a personal computer with a FINS application including the CX Programmer cannot connect online and communicate over the Internet with an EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port that has a pri vate address FINS communications are also not possible over the Inter net between EtherNet IP Units a
370. ions can be used to send explicit messages Explicit messages can be sent to the following destinations EtherNet IP Units made by other manufacturers e Other PLCs with a CS CJ series EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port Example CS CJ series EtherNet IP Unit j Other manufacturer s CS CJ series CPU Unit EtherNet IP node CS Cu series CPU Unit When the destination is another company s EtherNet IP node an explicit mes sage can be sent to the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port using FINS command code 28 01 or 28 10 through the Connection Manager class s Unconnected Send service as shown in the following diagram Other company s CPU Unit EtherNet IP Unit EtherNet IP node Explicit FINS Explicit i message i header message CMND 490 EtherNet IP Note Use 28 01 for the network FINS command code FINS Response Response header At e When sending an explicit message set the local node s EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port as the destination of the FINS command and not the actual destination other company s EtherNet IP node Specify the node address of the actual destination in the command data of the explicit message send command There are two ways to send an explicit message send command 1 2 3 1 CIP UCMM MESSAGE SEND command 28 10 Messages can be routed through multiple CIP network layers Messages can be routed through 16 network levels The explicit message
371. it 226 Communicating between OMRON PLCs Section 8 6 Execution Communications condition Port Enabled Flag e I JH H KEEP 011 A Input A remains ON from start to completion of commu Reset B nications instruction esei A Creat d and control data i i reates operand and control data in a given 4 Operand area p g control data created with MOV and XFER Communications ae s instructions Executes communications instructions SEND RECV CMND Communications A Port Enabled Flag i T DIFU 013 B Creates reset input Turns reset B ON after execution of communications in struction Communications A Port Error Flag Send Error Flag display II Retry can be executed as 4 pe Communications Exclusive control so execution is not simultaneous ort Enabled Flag A Use exclusive control so that no other communica II 1 H KEEP 011 C tions instructions are started before execution of the above communications instruction is complete Reset D Continued in same way The execution status of the SEND 090 RECV 098 and CMND 490 instruc tions is always reflected by the communications flags i e the Communica tions Port Enabled Flag and the Communications Port Error Flag The CS CJ series CPU Unit s communications flags are allocated in the Auxiliary Area as shown in the following table Address Bits Flag name Contents OFF Execution enabled
372. it Flash memory 8 MB HMC EF861 e Complete user program 15 MB HMC EF171 Specified portions of I O Memory 30 MB HMC EF371 e Parameter area data e g PLC Setup Max capacity of EM Area All EM Area banks in CPU Unit from specified bank in 1 0 Memory specified in PLC Setup 11 7 2 File Types E File Names Files are distinguished by assigning file names and extensions The following characters can be used in file names and extensions Alphanumeric characters A to Z and 0 to 9 Names converted to all caps 1 amp S T _ The following characters cannot be used in files names and extensions 1 lt gt spaces File names are not case sensitive and will be converted to all caps in the PLC file system File names can be up to 8 character long with 3 character exten sions An error will occur if a file name or extension is too long The first period in a file name will be taken as the delimiter between the file name and extension Extensions are determined by the file type E Directories Up to five levels of directories including root as the first level can be created as file storage locations A maximum of 65 characters can be used in direc tory names 315 Using File Memory Section 11 7 File Names Handled by CPU Unit The files described in the following table can be read or written by the CPU Unit File type Data file File name kkk kk kkk Extension Contents S
373. ithin a product Class A set of objects that all represent the same kind of system component A class is a generalization of an object All objects in a class are identical in form and behavior but may contain different attribute values Instance A specific and real physical occurrence of an object For example New Zealand is an instance of the object class Country The terms Object Instance and Object Instance all refer to a specific Instance Attribute A description of an externally visible characteristic or feature of an object Typically attributes provide status information or govern the operation of an Object For example the ASCII name of an object and the repeti tion rate of a cyclic object Service A function supported by an object and or object class CIP defines a set of common services and provides for the definition of Object Class and or Vendor Specific services Specifying an Object Address Request Path This is the basic concept involved in accessing an Object or Attribute Each Object Class has a Class ID There are two types of Class ID one is standardized by ODVA and the other is decided independently by each device vendor Each Object Instance also has ID This is called Instance ID Different Instance ID is assigned to each Object As for Object Class standardized by ODVA Instance ID is given to it according to the ODVA method On the other hand vendor s own Instance I
374. ition Path segment error The path segment identifier or the segment syntax was not understood by the processing node Path processing shall stop when a path segment error is encountered Path destination unknown The path is referencing an object class instance or structure element that is not known or is not contained in the processing node Path processing shall stop when a path destination unknown error is encountered Partial transfer Only part of the expected data was transferred Connection lost The messaging connection was lost Service not supported The requested service was not implemented or was not defined for this Object Class Instance Invalid attribute value Invalid attribute data detected Attribute list error An attribute in the Get_Attribute_List or Set_Attribute_List response has a non zero status Already in requested mode state The object is already in the mode state being requested by the service Object state conflict The object cannot perform the requested service in its current mode state Object already exists The requested instance of object to be created already exists Attribute not settable A request to modify a non modifiable attribute was received Privilege violation A permission privilege check failed Device state conflict The device s current mode state prohibits the execution of the requested ser vice Reply
375. ive 20 words aaa Recenve 20words Send 20 words Receive 20 words ye p Receive 20 words z Receive 20 words Receive 20 words Receive 20 words Send 20 words pS i y Receive connections 16 20 words x 16 320 words 10 4 2 Tag Data Link I O Response Time 292 With tag data links if the data in the data link area for a node changes due to an input to that node a certain amount of time is required for the data in data link area at another node to be updated and output The I O response time for tag data links can be calculated for a CJ2M built in port in the same was as it can for a CJ2H built in port refer to 10 2 4 Chang ing the RPI Here formulas to calculate guideline I O response times are pro vided Tag data link delays are ignored because the data link size handled by the built in CJ2M port is small Maximum I O Response Time Input ON delay Cycle time of sending PLC x 2 RPI Cycle time of receiv ing PLC x 2 Output ON delay Minimum I O Response Time Input ON delay Cycle time of sending PLC Cycle time of receiving PLC Output ON delay PLC 1 PLC 2 Node 1 Connection Node 2 RPI 12 ms cay Cycle time 5 ms Cycle time 10 ms Output ON response Input ON response time time 2 0 ms 1 5 ms All connections EtherNet IP HF Output Data link Tag Data Link Performance for CJ2M Built in EtherNet IP Ports Section 10 4 Note For example the
376. ived packets discarded due to an incorrect checksum The number of packets discarded because the TCP header was smaller than the minimum size for a TCP header or was larger than the IP packet The number of packets discarded because the TCP header and IP header could not be stored in the first short buffer The number of resent packets received 410 FINS Commands Addressed to EtherNet IP Units or Built in EtherNet IP Ports Appendix E 8 The number of bytes in the resend packets 9 The number of duplicated resend packets received 10 The number of bytes in the duplicated resend packets received 11 The number of out of range data packets received Always 0 12 The number of bytes in the out of range data packets received Always 0 13 The number of packets where the data was larger than the window 14 The number of bytes in the packets where the data was larger than the window 15 The number of packets received after closing 16 The number of window probe packets received 17 The number of resent ACK packets received 18 The number of ACK packets received with no data set 19 The number of ACK packets received 20 The number of ACK packets received for received transmission acknowledgements ACK 21 The number of window advertisement packets received UDP Status Response Three items of UDP information occupying 4 bytes each are returned in the following sequence Each value is returned as an 8 digit hexadec
377. ize is exceeded the data refreshing with the CPU Unit will extend over two or more cycles 4 If status layout is selected in the user settings the maximum number of tags that can be received is 19 tags 5 If parameters are changed in the EtherNet IP Unit however the Ether Net IP Unit will be restarted When other nodes are communicating with the affected node the communications will temporarily time out and au tomatically recover later 6 Because the EtherNet IP Unit is equipped with an IGMP client version 2 unnecessary multicast packets can be filtered by using a switching hub that supports IGMP snooping 7 The EtherNet IP Unit uses the TCP UDP port numbers shown in the fol lowing table Protocol Port number Remarks UDP 2222 TCP UDP 44818 UDP 53 Service Tag data links Fixed value Class 3 UCMM DNS Port numbers in the Unit Setup can be changed with the CX Programmer FINS UDP service FINS TCP service FTP SNTP SNMP SNMP trap UDP 9600 TCP 9600 TCP 20 21 UDP 123 UDP 161 UDP 162 EIP or CJ2M 8 Network symbols can be used only with a CJ2H CPU6 CPU3L CPU Unit EtherNet IP Unit and Built in EtherNet IP Port Specifications 2 1 4 Dimensions 192 168 250 1 SUBNET MASK 255 255 255 0 100BASE TX 192 25 sl 255 255 255 0 100BASE TX 10BASE T SYSMAC CJ
378. k adjustment is to be specified by IP address or by host domain name i e by host name IP Address Set the IP address for the SNTP server that is to be used for automatic clock adjustment This setting is enabled only when server specification by IP address has been selected Host name Set the host domain name i e the host name for the SNTP server that is to be used for automatic clock adjustment This setting is enabled only when server specification by host name has been selected Port No Set the port number for connecting to the SNTP 0 server that is to be used for automatic clock adjust Number ment This setting does not normally need to be 123 is changed used 327 Automatic Clock Adjustment Switch Section 12 3 Contents Default Retry timer Set the time to elapse before retrying when a connec tion to the SNTP server fails This setting does not normally need to be changed Adjust Time This sets in the CPU Unit s clock data the time differ ence made up from the SNTP server s clock data To use the clock data from the SNTP server just as it is input 0 12 3 Automatic Clock Adjustment Switch The Automatic Clock Adjustment Switch is allocated in the ClO Area as shown below The first word n of the CIO Area is calculated using the following equation n CIO 1500 25 x unit number Automatic Clock The Unit control bit is shown in the following diagram Adjus
379. king tag data links in a CS1W EIP21 CJ1W EIP21 Type CJ2B EIP21 or CJ2M EIP21 select Input Only Tag type When making tag data links in other devices select the con nection I O type specified in that device s EDS file Use the Input Only ID type setting when another company s node is the originator and does not support connection set tings with the Tag type setting The connections I O is automatically displayed based on the selected connection Input Only Just n is displayed Target Variable Selects and allocates the target node s tag set In Selects the target s output produce tag set e Out Selects the target s input consume tag set Originator Vari Selects and allocates the originator node s tag set able In Selects the originator s output produce tag set e Out Selects the originator s input consume tag set Connection Selects whether the data is sent in a multicast or unicast The Type default setting is multicast e Multicast connection Select when the same data is shared by multiple nodes This setting is usually selected e Point to Point connection Select when the same data is not being shared by multiple nodes In a unicast transmission other nodes are not bur dened with an unnecessary load Note Refer to 6 1 2 Overview of Operation for details on using multicast and unicast transmissions and counting the number of connections Sets the packet
380. ks Section 6 2 6 2 2 Tag Data Link Setting Procedure 124 The section describes the procedure for setting tag data links i e connection information For data links between PLCs the connection information is set only in the originator i e the node that receives data 1 Creating a Network Configuration Register all EtherNet IP Units or built in EtherNet IP ports for which connections will be created in the EtherNet IP Network Configuration Window Refer to 6 2 3 Reg istering Devices Note If a system has already been installed connect online to the EtherNet IP net work and upload the network configuration Refer to 6 2 11 Uploading Tag Data Link Parameters l 2 Creating Connections Set the connections using one of the following methods 1 Basic Operation 1 1 Create tags and tag sets for all registered devices EtherNet IP Unit or built in port Refer to 6 2 4 Creating Tags and Tag Sets 1 2 Create a connection for the originator device i e registered device that receives data as input data Refer to 6 2 5 Connection Settings 2 Generating a Connection Using the EtherNet IP Datalink Tool Refer to 6 2 5 Connection Settings The EtherNet IP Datalink Tool is used to create data links between PLCs by specifying I O memory addresses in the same manner as for Controller Link The following functions can be used with Network Configurator version 3 10 or higher 3 Creating Connections
381. l Connections The percentage of the allowed tag data link bandwidth being used Usage of Capacity was 39 67 with the RPI set to 10 0 ms for all of the connections so the RPI will be set to 5 0 ms with a target of 80 or less of the allowable bandwidth Click the Set Packet Interval RPI Button at the bottom of the Usage of Device Bandwidth Dialog Box The Set Packet Interval RPI Dialog Box will be displayed Input 5 0 ms as the new RPI value and click the OK Button Set Packet Interval RPD Packet Interval RPD 5 ms 05 100000 ms Target Device 192 168 250 1 GS1W EIP21 192 168 250 2 CS1W EIP21 M 192 168 250 3 CS1W EIP21 M 192 168 250 4 CS1 W EIP21 192 168 250 5 CS1W EIP21 192 168 250 6 CS1W EIP21 192 168 250 7 CS1W EIP21 192 168 250 8 CS1W EIP21 Sil 192 168 250 9 CS1W EIP21 192 168 250 10 C51 W EIP21 192 168 250 11 GJ1W EIP21 192 168 250 12 GJ1W EIP21 192 168 250 113 CJT W EIP21 192 168 250 114 GJ1W EIP21 192 168 250 115 CJ1W EIP21 192 168 250 16 GJ1W EIP21 m19 m19 M19 M19 gt 4 Adjusting the Communications Load Section 10 2 If the packet interval for all connections has been set to the same setting the dialog box will show that the usage of capacity for the tag data link s allowable communications bandwidth is 73 00 and the fastest set value is 5 0 ms Usage of Device Bandwidth Comment 192 168 250 1 CS1W EIP21 192 168 250 2 CS1W EIP21 192 168 250 3 CS1W EIP21 19
382. l I O Units connected in the PLC will be displayed as shown below Select Connect Network Port Select a network port that you would like to connect Browse 39 0 GJ2H GPU67 EIP 0 CJ2B E1P21 6 Click the icon to the left of the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port CJ1W EIP21 CJ2 or CJ2B EIP21 The TCP ports on the EtherNet IP Unit will be displayed as shown below 164 Setting Tag Data Links Section 6 2 Select Connect Network Port Select a network port that you would like to connect B fowse m y BackPlane 0 CJ2H CPU67 EIP i o sa a Select the TCP port of the EtherNet IP Unit 7 Select the port for the EtherNet IP Unit and then click the OK Button The Network Configurator will be connected to the EtherNet IP network If the Network Configurator goes online normally On line will be displayed in the status bar at the bottom of the window Connecting to an EtherNet IP Network via an Ethernet Unit Note 1 Windows firewall settings must be changed when this connection is made for the first time using Windows XP SP2 or higher Vista or Windows 7 Refer to Appendix G Precautions for Using Windows XP Vista or Win dows 7 Using EtherNet IP with Windows XP Vista or Windows 7 for in formation on how to make the changes 2 Use the CX Integrator to correctly set the FINS routing tables for the CS CJ series CPU Unit that will be the relay node a Network Configurato
383. l read the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port setup data file from the Memory Card and restore the data in the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port When the power supply is ON the MCPWR indicator on the front of the CPU Unit will turn ON flash once and then remain lit while data is being read The BUSY indicator will flash while data is being read After the data has been read correctly the MCPWR and BUSY indicators will turn OFF If the MCPWR indicator flashes five times or if only the BUSY indicator turns OFF it means that an error has occurred If the restoration from the Memory Card fails an H8 error will be displayed on the 7 segment display on the front panel If this happens the data on the Memory Card may not be correct Confirm that the backup operation was completed normally before performing the restore operation 335 Using the Backup Tool Comparing EtherNet IP Unit or Built in EtherNet IP Port Data with the Setup File in the Memory Card Note Section 13 3 Set pins 7 and 8 of the DIP switch on the front panel of the CPU Unit as shown in the following table and press down the Memory Card Power Supply Switch for 3 seconds DIP switch settings SW7 SW8 i i Memory Card EtherNet IP Unit CPU Unit Power Supply Switch All data All setup data Memory Card Compare This operation will compare the data in the EtherNet IP Unit or built in Ether Net IP port setup file
384. le Tools Option Help Cea 4 amp EtherNet IP_1 E Network Configurator B S EtherNet IP Hardware E E Vendor f Omron Corporation 5 J Communications Ade 192 168 250 1 192 168 250 2 192 168 250 3 B CJIW EIP21 CS1W EIP21 CS1W EIP21 CJ1W EIP21 g CS1w ElP21 a DeviceType Network Configuration Window Displays the layout and network configuration of devices that are set Hardware List and monitored Displays the devices that can be added to the network Usage of Device Bandwidth Message Code Description LiEtherNet IP__ T Unknown Intel R PRO 100 VE Network Connection _192 168 200 30_100M_O Offline _ 122 Setting Tag Data Links Section 6 2 When two or more networks are being managed a new Network Configura tion Window can be added by selecting Network Add Untitled Network Configurator File Edit Yiew Network Device EDSFile Tools Option Help Dem a 2a a 8 CO EtherNet IP_1 EtherNet IP_2 ey Network Configurator DeviceNet Hardware EtherNet IP Hardware B Vendor U Omron Corporation Communications Ade ciw eir21 CS1W EIP21 e B DeviceType To change the name displayed in the Network Tab Page select Network Property The name set in the Comment Field of the Network Property Win dow can be changed Network Property Generic Type EtherNet IP a we a Comment EtherNet1P_1 123 Setting Tag Data Lin
385. le the parameters are being downloaded For EtherNet IP Units or built in EtherNet IP ports with revision 2 or later the CPU Unit can download tag data link parameters in either RUN mode or MONITOR mode They can also be downloaded in PROGRAM mode For EtherNet IP Units with revision 1 tag data link parameters can be downloaded only when the CPU Unit is in PROGRAM mode Even for Units with revision 2 or later all CPU Units must be in PRO GRAM mode to download the parameters if any Units with revision 1 are included in the network Setting Tag Data Links Section 6 2 1 2 3 1 Connect the Network Configurator online 2 There are two ways to download the parameters Downloading to All Devices in the Network Select Network Download The following dialog box will be displayed Network Configurator t Enable all devices to set the parameter e OK e Downloading Individually to Particular Devices Select the icon of the EtherNet IP Unit to which you want to download To select multiple nodes press and hold the Shift Key while selecting addi tional icons In the following example 2 nodes are selected 192 168 250 1 and 192 168 250 2 After selecting the icons click the right mouse button over the icon to dis play the pop up menu and select Parameter Download EtherNet 1P_1 FE Edit 68 250 4 ga Monitor Ww EIP21 E 4 Open Reset F td Save as lt Upload Register to other D
386. lected i PLG IO Table NewPLC1 File Edit View Options Help a ola dele sla bhalla A S T CJ2H CPU65 EIP q Built in Port Inner Board Fy 1500 OJ2B EIP21 Built In EtherNet IP Port for CJ2 Unit 0 g 0900 Inner Board unm Change Unit No 9 0000 Main Rack Unit Comment q 00 11525 CJ1wWw EIP 7 7 01 0000 Empty Slot 7 02 0000 Empty Slot 7 03 0000 Empty Slot 7 04 D000 Empty Slot Start with Settings Inherited 7 05 0000 Empty Slot Start Only q1 06 0000 Empty Slot 7 07 0000 Empty Slot q1 08 0000 Empty Slot 7 09 0000 Empty Slot 0000 Rack 01 Unit Setup Save Parameters Load Parameters t ey 0000 Rack 02 d 0000 Rack 03 J2H CPU65 EIP Offline 121 Setting Tag Data Links Section 6 2 When the Network Configurator starts the following window will be displayed Untitled Network Configurator File Edit View Network Device EDSFile Tools Option Help Dew a 3 Op EtherNet IP_1 Network Configurator E EtherNet IP Hardware S Us Vendor gg Omron Corporation w gg DeviceType Usage of Device Bandwidth Message Code Description ___LiEtherNet IP__T Unknown _ Intel R PRO 100 VE Network Connection _192 168 200 30 100M off line _ Main Window The Main Window consists of a Hardware List and a Network Configuration Window as shown in the following diagram Untitled Network Configurator File Edit View Network Device EDSFi
387. led by using this table IP address conversion using the FINS UDP method e Automatic FINS node address conversion after a connection is established using the FINS TCP method e Automatic client FINS node address allocation using the FINS TCP method e Simultaneous connection of multiple FINS applications 199 Section 8 2 FINS UDP Method 8 2 FINS UDP Method 8 2 1 Overview FINS UDP Features FINS UDP Frame Format 200 The FINS UDP method is a FINS communications method that uses the UDP IP protocol UDP IP is a connectionless communications protocol When a message is sent from one node to another the two nodes have an equal rela tionship and there is no clear connection If using TCP is like making a tele phone call then UDP is more like delivering a memo by hand Although the UDP protocol is fast data communications are less reliable than with TCP In particular when sending large amounts of data involving significant routing the user must program measures such as retries into applications in order to improve reliability Data transmission 1 Data transmission 2 Data transmission 3 Data is sent in one direction with no confirmation of whether the data was received Because there are few procedures involved data can be sent at high speed but with less reliability than with TCP The FINS UDP method has the following features e Because FINS UDP is a connectionless protocol there is no limit to t
388. les 4 2 h ae heehee ihe deh E ages home ecard aks 207 8 5 Using FINS Applications stena sce nye eee SOARS amp OAM SOA OS SR 211 8 6 Communicating between OMRON PLCs 00 220 8 7 Precautions on High Traffic in FINS Communications 0 00 0000 232 SECTION 9 Message Communications ccecccescceccees 233 9 1 Sending Explicit Messages 0 eect eee 234 9 2 Receiving Explicit Messages 0 0 0 eee eee ete ERARE 248 TABLE OF CONTENTS SECTION 10 Communications Performance and Communications Load 261 10 1 Communications System 0 0 ccc eee eee ees 262 10 2 Adjusting the Communications Load 0 0 cee ee eee nee 268 10 3 I O Response Time in Tag Data Links 0 00 00 eee eee ee eee 283 10 4 Tag Data Link Performance for CJ2M Built in EtherNet IP Ports 291 10 5 Message Service Transmission Delay 00 0 ee eee 294 SECTION 11 ETP SORVERs 6665602 S565 GASES SSR eats OUT 11 1 Overview and Specifications 0 0 0 eect eee ees 302 11 2 FTP Server Function Details seasta nn a E cee ence nee 303 11 3 Using the FTP Server Function 0 0 00 E E E E teen eee 305 11 4 FTP Server Application Example 0 0c cece eens 307 1 5 Using FTP Commands si erneieren aa esis ac gilding Sie ee S n GbR ae ghee A Oa 308 11 6 Checking PEP Status nsp A ag Sat eed oid ei dd Caen is we aes 314 11 7 Using Piles Memory
389. lick the OK Button 275 Adjusting the Communications Load Section 10 2 192 168 250 2 CJ1W EIP21 Edit Connection It will add a connection configuration to originator device Please confiaure the Taa Set each of originator device and taraet device Originator Device Target Device Node Address 192 168 250 1 Node Address 192 168 250 2 Comment CJ1W EIP21 Comment CJ1W EIP21 Input Tag Set Edit Tag Sets Output Tag Set TagSet2_192 168 250 1 22Byte fk TagSet2_192 168 250 2 22Byte v Connection 3 Type Multicast connection v Detail Parameter Packet Interval RPI 50 0 ins 0 5 10000 0 ms Connection Name Fum f Possible to omit CNOI_O1 Timeout Value Packet Interval RPI x 4 hs Connection Structure 192 168 250 1 CJ1W E1P21 3 TagSet2_192 168 250 1 M 50 0ms 192 168 250 2 CJ1W EIP21 5 TagSet2_192 168 250 2 4 Ifthe usage of capacity cannot be adjusted to the desired level when the setting described above has been performed reconsider the network con figuration considering the following points Refer to 10 2 3 Adjusting De vice Bandwidth Usage e Reduce the number of nodes and number of connections e Split the network 5 Check the bandwidth usage again If the connection settings have been changed click the Detail Button in the Usage of Device Bandwidth Area at the bottom of the Network Configura tion Window and check bandwidth usage according to the instructions in 10 2 1 Checki
390. lished Seven segment Display When the power is turned ON or the Unit is restarted all of the segments will flash twice the IP address set in the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port will be displayed on the 7 segment display just once from right to left Afterwards the rightmost 8 bits of the IP address is displayed in hexadecimal 24 during normal operation Example 1 Displaying IP Address 192 168 250 10 lt gt gt A eo lt gt gt The IP address is displayed in decimal flowing from right to left 19 9 eo 2 aL ED D o ya If the Unit is operating normally the last digit of the Unit s IP address is displayed in hexadecimal Flashing The tag data link is stopped Lit The tag data link is operating Nomenclature and Functions Section 2 2 If an error occurs the error code will be displayed alternately with the right most byte of the affected device s IP address For details on error codes refer to SECTION 14 Troubleshooting and Error Processing Displaying Multiple Error Sources e A d6 error failed to establish connection occurred with IP address 192 168 250 8 e A d6 error failed to establish connection occurred with IP address 192 168 250 9 A d5 error verification error target nonexistent occurred with IP address 192 168 250 64 e A C6 error multiple switches ON and EA error EtherNet IP expansion
391. ll wiring and switch settings before turning ON the power supply Incorrect wiring may result in burning Mount terminal blocks and connectors only after checking the mounting location carefully Check the user program ladder program and other programs and parameters for proper execution before actually running it on the Unit Not checking the program may result in unexpected operation Confirm that no adverse effect will occur in the system before attempting any of the following Not doing so may result in an unexpected operation e Changing the operating mode of the PLC e Force setting force resetting any bit in memory e Changing the present value of any word or any set value in memory After replacing a Unit resume operation only after transferring to the new CPU Unit Special I O Unit or CPU Bus Unit the contents of the DM Area HR Area programs parameters and other data required for resuming operation Not doing so may result in an unexpected operation Before touching a Unit be sure to first touch a grounded metallic object in order to discharge any static build up Not doing so may result in malfunc tion or damage XXV Conformance to EC Directives 6 6 6 1 6 2 xxvi e When transporting the Unit use special packing boxes and protect it from being exposed to excessive vibration or impacts during transportation e CPU Bus Units will be restarted when routing tables are transferred from a Programming Device to t
392. llowing diagram shows the Port Segment value in this case Extended Link Segment Type Address Size Port Identifier Link Address Size 7 6 5 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 gt 4 3 2 1 0 7 PELL LELELLLU Link Address ft tt ttt tts Link Address 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Always set the Link Address to an even number of bytes If there is an odd number of bytes pad the Link Address with 00 so that it has an even number of bytes Logical Segment The Logical Segment is used to specify the request path Segment Format Bits a gt Segment Type Logical Type Logical Format 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 edl OO U Logical Type Description 4 3 Class ID Instance ID Member ID Connection Point Attribute ID Special Do not use the logical addressing definition for the Logical Format Service ID Do not use the logical addressing definition for the Logical Format 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 O O a aa OG O Oo gt oO oj o Reserved Logical Format Description 1 0 8 bit logical address 16 bit logical address 32 bit logical address Reserved The 32 bit logical address format is reserved and cannot be used The 8 bit and 16 bit logical address can be used for the Class ID and Instance ID which specify the request path 385 CIP Message Communications Appendix D The 8 bit logical address can be used for the Attribute ID Use the Attribute ID when req
393. llowing table Product nameplate Notation used in this manual Special remarks Ver 1 0 or later number Ethernet Unit Ver 1 0 or later See note Information without reference to specific Unit shown to right of the lot Versions applies to all versions of the Unit number Note Some Support Software products call the EtherNet IP Unit version the revi sion Revision is also sometimes used in this manual CIP Revisions and The CIP revisions corresponding to the unit versions of the EtherNet IP Unit Unit Versions are given in the following table Unit version CIP revision Version 1 0 Revision 1 01 Version 2 0 Revision 2 01 or 2 02 xx This section provides general precautions for using the CS CJ series EtherNet IP Units and built in EtherNet IP ports PRECAUTIONS The information contained in this section is important for the safe and reliable application of EtherNet IP Units or built in EtherNet IP ports You must read this section and understand the information contained before attempting to set up or operate an EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port NOB WN e Intended Audience General Precautions 0 0 cee eee eee eee Safety Precautions Operating Environment Precautions 00002 e eee eee Application Precautions 0 0 cece eee ee eee ene Conformance to EC Directives 0 0 0 2 eee eee eee eee Applicable Directives 0 0 0 cece cece eee eens 6 1
394. lowing dialog box will be displayed Network Configurator Selected devices will be reset e OK e Clicking the Yes Button The following dialog box will be displayed Reset Device Reset Type Emulate cycling power O Return to the out of box configuration and then emulate cycling power j Cancel Select one of the following options and click the OK Button e Emulate cycling power Restarts the Unit e Return to the out of box configuration and then emulate cycling power Returns the Unit to its factory default settings and restarts the Unit e Clicking the No Button The device parameters are not cleared or reset 6 2 15 Saving the Network Configuration File Device parameters set in the Network Configurator or device parameters uploaded from the network can be saved as a network configuration file 1 2 3 1 Select File Save As The following dialog box will be displayed Save in O My Documents File name Untitled nvf Save as type Network Configuration File v3 nvf v Cancel Option Select target network The File name Field will contain Untitled nvf as the default file name 2 Input the file name and click the Save Button 177 Setting Tag Data Links Section 6 2 Save in O My Documents File name Equip1 nv Save as type Network Configuration File v3 nvf v Cancel Option C Select target network The network configuration file save operation i
395. lows cyclic communications called tag data links in this manual with EtherNet IP devices Data can be exchanged at high speed between Controllers and devices using high volume tag sets up to 640 words for the CJ2M and up to 184 832 words for other CPU Units between PLCs Tag data links cyclic communications can operate at the cyclic period speci fied for each application regardless of the number of nodes Data is exchanged over the network at the refresh cycle set for each connection so the communications refresh cycle will not increase even if the number of nodes is increased i e the synchronicity of the connection s data is pre served Since the refresh cycle can be set for each connection each application can communicate at its ideal refresh cycle For example a processes interlocks can be transferred at high speed while the production commands and the sta tus monitor information are transferred at low speed The communications load to the nodes must be within the Units allowed com munications bandwidth Data can be exchanged with other OMRON FA devices using SEND RECV and CMND instructions from the ladder program because EtherNet IP sup ports OMRON s standard FINS message communications services There are two kinds of message services using UDP IP and TCP IP called FINS UDP and FINS TCP allowing flexible data exchange for different appli cations There are no particular restrictions when sending FINS me
396. lt node address setting of 01 the default IP address is 192 168 250 1 The node address can be set to any number in the setting range 01 to FE as long as the same address is not set on another node in the network If the node address setting is changed during operation the MS Indicator will flash red 27 Selecting the Network Devices Section 2 3 2 3 Selecting the Network Devices 2 3 1 Recommended Network Devices The following table shows the devices recommended for use with the Ether Net IP Model number Inquires Switching Cisco Systems Inc Consult the manufacturer Cisco Systems Inc Main Corpo Hub rate HQ Contec USA Inc Consult the manufacturer CONTEC USA Inc Phoenix Contact Consult the manufacturer Phoenix Contact USA Customer Service Twisted pair 100BASE TX cable Fujikura F LINK E 0 5mm x 4P Fujikura America Inc EtherNet IP compliant cable are Connectors STP Plug Modular Panduit Corporation MPS588 Panduit Corporation US Headquar plug ters Boots Tsuko Company MK boot IV LB Tsuko Company Japan Headquar ters Note 1 Always use a switching hub when using tag data links in the network 2 If a repeater hub is used for EtherNet IP tag data links cyclic communi cations the network s communications load will increase data collisions will occur frequently and stable communications will be impossible 2 3 2 Network Devices Manufactured by
397. ly Handling Configuration 1 Configuration 2 Configuration 3 Error code returned from target Attempted to open multiple con nections at the same connec tion This error does not occur Depends on the tar get s specifications Contact the target device s manufac turer for details on preventing the error from occurring in the future Depends on the orig inator s specifica tions Contact the origina tor device s manufac turer for details on preventing the error from occurring in the future Error code returned from target Attempted to open a connection with an unsupported transport class This error does not occur Confirm that the tar get supports Class 1 Confirm that the originator supports Class 1 Duplicate consumers Attempted to open multiple con nections for single consumer data If the tag data link is stopped or started this error may occur accord ing to the timing but the system will recover automati cally Depends on the tar get s specifications Contact the target device s manufac turer If the tag data link is stopped or started this error may occur according to the tim ing but the system will recover automat ically Error code returned from target Attempted to close a connec tion but that connection was already closed This error does not occur This error does not occur This is not an erro
398. ly Specific Devices In this example we want faster tag data links for devices 192 168 250 1 and 192 168 250 10 only Click the Set Packet Interval RPI Button at the bottom of the Usage of Device Bandwidth Dialog Box to display the Set Packet Inter val RPI Dialog Box In the Target Device Area deselect all devices other than 192 168 250 1 and 192 168 250 10 by removing the corresponding check marks Input 5 0 ms as the new RPI value and click the OK Button Set Packet Interval RPD Packet Interval RPD 5 ms 05 100000 ms Target Device 192 168 250 1 CS1W EIP21 J 192 168 2509 CS1W EIP21 1 9 O 192 168 250 2 CS1W EIP21 192 168 250 10 CS1W EIP21 19 C 192 168 250 3 CS1W EIP21 O 192 168 250 4 CS1W EIP21 7 192 168 250 5 CS1 W EIP21 J 192 168 250 6 CS1W EIP21 C 192 168 250 7 GS1W EIP21 FJ 192 168 250 8 CS1W EIP21 lt C 192 168 250 11 CJ1W EIP21 C 192 168 250 112 C1 W EIP21 7 192 168 250 13 CJ1W EIP21 J 192 168 250 14 CJ1W EIP21 O 192 168 250 115 CJ1W EIP21 C 192 168 250 16 J1W EIP21 0O19 019 The percentage of the allowed tag data link bandwidth being used Usage of Capacity increases to 74 67 for devices 192 168 250 1 and 192 168 250 10 which indicates that the RPI is set to a higher speed for these devices connections 279 Adjusting the Communications Load Section 10 2 The Usage of Capacity values also indicate that the Usage of Capacity has increased from 39 67 t
399. me name in the remote host Memory Card or EM File Memory will be overwritten by the contents of the transferred file If an error occurs during file transfer the file being transferred will be deleted and the transmission will end in an error mput FILE NAME Allows the use of a wildcard character to transfer multiple local files to the remote host Memory Card or EM File Memory 311 Using FTP Commands delete Format Function mdelete Format Function close Format Function bye Format Function quit Format Function 312 Section 11 5 Any existing file with the same name in the remote host Memory Card or EM File Memory will be overwritten by the contents of the transferred file If an error occurs during file transfer the file being transferred will be deleted and the transmission of that file will end in an error However mput execution will continue and remaining files will be transferred delete FILE NAME Deletes the specified remote file from the Memory Card or EM File Memory mdelete FILE NAME Allows the use of a wildcard character to delete multiple remote files from the Memory Card or EM File Memory close Disconnects the FTP server of the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port bye Ends the FTP client quit Ends the FTP client Using FTP Commands Section 11 5 11 5 3 Error Messages and FTP Status Error Messages The error mes
400. ment Hex display See note Routing table error Flashing red Nochange IP address duplication error No change Lit red CPU Unit service monitoring error i No change Flashing red Other CPU error Not lit Too many retries cannot send Node address setting error cannot send Remote node not part of network cannot send No Unit with specified unit address cannot send CPU Unit error occurred cannot send Destination address not set in routing tables cannot send Routing tables not registered cannot send Routing tables error occurred cannot send Too many relay connections cannot send Maximum command length exceeded cannot send No change No change No change Header error cannot send Reception buffer full packet discarded Invalid packet discarded Local node busy cannot send Unexpected routing error Service not supported in present mode packet discarded Transmission buffer full packet discarded Maximum frame length exceeded routing impossible Packet discarded due to response time out Note The 7 segment display alternately displays the error and the node address of the node where the error occurred 195 Message Communications Errors Section 7 6 196 SECTION 8 FINS Communications This section provides information on communicating on EtherNet IP Systems and interconnected networks using FINS commands The information provid
401. menus Double click IO Table and Unit Setup Icon in the project workspace in the CX Programmer The PLC IO Table Window will be displayed Select Op tions Create from the menus fe Untitled CX Programmer Stopped NewPLC1 Task1 Section1 Diagram FA File Edit View Insert PLC Program Simulation Tools Window Help Oa R R ln h 18 38 36 Program Name Task1 NewProject jams NewPLC1 CJ1H H Stop Program Mode Symbols g Settings Memory card Error log Ua Section Name Section1 LLLLELLLLLELLEELELE ES 2 Assy P_0_02s ASS 0 02 second c ASS LELEEEELEELELLLELL ELS Creating I O Tables Section 3 6 tH PLC 10 Table NewPLC1 File Edit view oS Help Transfer to PLC all Transfer from the PLC dle g Compare with PLC Inner Bo y 0000 ES 0000 R 0000 R 0000 R Verify Delete Online Add Unit Rack Slot Start Addresses Units Profile information Dip Switch Information 5 The EtherNet IP Unit will be displayed at the position it is mounted in the PLC Note If itis not displayed select Options Transfer from PLC from the menus 1H PLC 10 Table NewPLC1 File Edit View Options Help e alB 22 blae F CJIH CPU67H e Inner Board 2g 0000 Main Rack 00 1525 CJ1W EIP21 EtherNet IP Unit for C3 Unit 1 1 01 0000 Empty Slot 7 02 0000 Empty Slot 71 03 0000 Empty Slo
402. mes the CPU Unit cycle times The following table gives the send data processing times and breakdown for node 1 PLC 1 in this sys tem configuration Refer to 10 3 2 EtherNet IP Unit or CJ2H Built in Port Data Processing Time for details on the calculation formula for each item Calculation formula CPU Unit cycle time 10 msec for PLC 1 Number of transmis Number of data transmission words 11 552 2 sions based on the data words 6 432 words using a CJ2 CPU size Unit EtherNet IP Unit data 0 0008 x 6 432 1 0 Maximum number of 6 15 m sec processing time transmission words per cycle 287 I O Response Time in Tag Data Links Section 10 3 Calculation formula Number of data trans 10 m sec gt 6 15 m sec missions To meet the conditions the number of trans missions is the same as Total CPU Unit cycle time of PLC 1 x Num 20 m sec 2 Send data process ber of data transmissions ing time 3 Packet Interval RPI This is the communications refresh cycle set for each connection using the Network Configurator In this system it is the refresh cycle for connection 1 10 ms which includes W000 01 4 Network Transmission Delay Time This is the total of the send processing delay receive processing delay switching hub delay and cable delay Refer to 10 1 3 Network Transmission Delay Time for details on the calculation formula for n
403. meters 002000 176 6 2 15 Saving the Network Configuration File 0 177 6 2 16 Reading a Network Configuration File 178 6 2 17 Checking Connections 00 0 0 e eee eee eee 180 6 2 18 Changing Devices 0 0 c eee eee 181 6 2 19 Displaying Device Status 0 00 181 6 3 Ladder Programming with Tag Data Links 0 0 183 6 3 1 Ladder Programming Related to Tag Data Links 183 6 3 2 Status Flags Related to Tag Data Links 186 111 Overview of Tag Data Links Section 6 1 6 1 Overview of Tag Data Links 6 1 1 Tag Data Links Tag data links enable cyclic data exchanges on an EtherNet IP network between PLCs or between PLCs and another device I O memory addresses e g in the ClO or DM Area and symbols can be assigned to tags The set tings for tag data links are made using the Network Configurator Refer to 6 2 Setting Tag Data Links for information on how to make the settings Note Symbols can be used in tags only for the CJ2H CPU6LI EIP and CJ2M CPU3L1 If you are using a CU1W EIP21 or CS1W EIP21 EtherNet IP Unit that is mounted to a CJ2H CPU6LI or any CPU Unit other than the CJ2H CPU6LI EIP use I O memory addresses to set the tag data links With tag data links one node requests the opening of a communications line called a connection
404. mm 1m m EIP and CJ2M CPU3LI NS COMM 100M 9 10M The MS Module Status indicator indicates the status of the node itself and the NS Network Status indicator indicates the status of the network The COMM 100M and 10M indicators indicate the status of Ethernet com munications The MS and NS indicators can be green or red The COMM 100M and 10M indicators are yellow These indicators can be lit flashing or not lit The fol lowing table shows the meaning of these indicator conditions Refer to SECTION 14 Troubleshooting and Error Processing for details on using these indicators for troubleshooting 23 Nomenclature and Functions Indicator Module Status LED status Lit Section 2 2 Indicated operating status Fatal error Flashing Recoverable error Lit Normal Not lit Power supply OFF Network Status Lit Fatal error Flashing Recoverable error Lit Tag data link and message connections established Flashing Tag data link and message connections not established Not lit Offline or power supply OFF Communication Yellow Lit Transferring data Not lit Not transferring data 100 Mbps Yellow Lit 100BASE TX link established Not lit 100BASE TX link not established 10 Mbps Yellow Lit 10BASE TX link established Not lit 10BASE TX link not estab
405. mmand successful 150 opening data connection for Is IPaddress port Obytes MEMCARD Results EM 226 Transfer complete bytes received in 0 seconds bytes s Change to MEMCARD ftp gt cd MEMCARD 4 directory 250 CWD command successful L Results ftp gt get ABC DEF IOM lt Transfer DEF IOM from 200 PORT command successful ABG directory 150 opening data connection for abc def iom IPaddress port bytes gt Results 226 Transfer complete k kkk bytes received in seconds bytes s SS A 307 Using FTP Commands Section 11 5 11 5 Using FTP Commands This section describes the FTP commands which the host computer FTP cli ent can send to the FTP server of the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port The descriptions should also apply to most UNIX workstations but slight differences may arise Refer to your workstation s operation manuals for details 11 5 1 Table of Commands The FTP commands which can be sent to the EtherNet IP Unit or built in Eth erNet IP port are listed in the following table Command Description Connects the specified host FTP server Specifies user name for the remote FTP server ls Displays the Memory Card file names dir Display the Memory Card file names and details rename Changes a file name mkdir Creates a new directory in the working directory in the remote host rmdir Deletes a new directory from the
406. mment n m Property 2 Click the Tag Sets Tab at the top of the Edit Device Parameters Dialog Box There are two kinds of tag sets input consume and output produce Edit Device Parameters Connections Tag Sets In Consume Out Produce Name New Edit Tags Delete all of unused Tag Sets Usage Count 0 256 Import To From File OK Cancel 127 Setting Tag Data Links Section 6 2 Creating and Adding Tags 3 Click the Edit Tags Button The Edit Tags Dialog Box will be displayed Register the input Consume tags and output produce tags separately In Consume Qut Produce Name Usage count 0 256 4 Click the In Consume Tab and click the New Button The Edit Tag Dialog Box will be displayed Over Load 5 Inthe Name Field enter the character string for the CPU Unit s I O memory address or a network symbol e g 100 W100 DO Input_signal Addresses in the following I O memory areas can be set CPU Unit s data area Address Text to input in Name Field CIO Area 0000 to 6143 Holding Area HOOO to H511 Work Area W000 to W511 DM Area D00000 to D32767 EM Area Bank 0 hex E0_00000 to E0_32767 Bank 18 E18_00000 to E18_32767 hex Note a The H W D and E characters can also be input in lower case as h w d and e 128 Setting Tag Data Links Section 6 2 b Be sure to directly enter the CPU Unit s I O
407. mmer Operation Manual Cat No W446 for details on the operating procedures This section describes how to register the CJ1W EIP21 in the I O tables by creating the I O tables on a computer with the CX Programmer In this example the computer is connected to the PLC using a serial cable The CJ1W EIP21 is connected to a CJ1H CPU67 CPU Unit 1 Start the CX Programmer and then select PLC Auto Online Direct Connection from the menus CX Programmer File View fafa Tools Help DS 7 TE EtherNet IP Node Online s feed A 47 Creating I O Tables Section 3 6 2 3 48 The Direct Online Dialog Box will be displayed Select a serial connection select the name of the applicable computer serial port and then press the Connect Button Direct Online Goes online automatically Select connection type and press Connect button Connection Type erial connection i also when using USB Serial conversion cable Serial port of PC COM3 X MV Connects at baud rate 115 200 bps C USB connection Connection will automatically be made to the PLC connected directly to the PC via serial cable It is not possible to automatically connect to a Compo Way F component If the connection process is successful the system will be connected on line Here check the operating mode of the PLC If the operating mode is not PROGRAM mode change the mode by selecting PLC Operating Mode Program from the
408. n command data The specified parame ters are incorrect Check the command data and set the parameters correctly The UDP TCP socket number was not within the proper range Be sure the socket number is between 1 and 8 The local UDP port num ber might be set to 0 Set the local UDP port num ber correctly No data area code Variable type in command data A correct memory area code has not been used or EM Area is not avail able Check the command s data area code in the Results Stor age Area and set the appro priate code Address out of range error First word address in command data The first word is in an inaccessible area Check the data area range and set a first word that is in an accessible area The specified bit number is not 00 Check the command s data area code in the Results Stor age Area The bit address must be 00 for EtherNet IP Units Address range over flow Command data The address range speci fied in the command is not correct Set the address in the com mand data so that the start address plus the number of words does not exceed accessible memory Response too long Command data The response frame is longer than allowed Correct the number of data elements or other parameters in the command data for which the response is being returned Parameter error Parameters in command data The specified parame
409. n i e target ID can be changed from the Network Configurator The PLC status flags are enabled when the PLC status is included in the communications data for both the originator and target The data in this table is refreshed when neces sary Target Node PLC Error Flag Infor mation Layout set to default settings Words n 6 to n 9 Layout set to user settings Words n 48 to n 63 Note Corresponds to the PLC status s PLC Error Flag Each flag indicates the error status logical OR of non fatal and fatal errors of the corresponding target node PLC of connections in which the Eth erNet IP Unit is the originator The flag corre sponding to the target node s target ID will be ON if even one error is indicated in any of the connections with that target node Each node address s flag location i e target ID can be changed from the Network Configurator The PLC status flags are enabled when the PLC status is included in the communications data for both the originator and target The data in this table is refreshed when neces sary Normal Target Node Flag Table Layout set to default settings Words n 20 to n 23 Layout set to user settings Words n 16 to n 31 Note Does not correspond to the PLC status Each flag indicates the connection status of the corresponding target node PLC of connections in which the EtherNet IP Unit is the originator The flag corresponding to the target node s tar get ID
410. n EtherNet IP is returned The normal response is 00 hex For details refer to the description of the Response Codes in Appen dix D CIP Message Communications Additional status size response Sending Explicit Messages Section 9 1 This hexadecimal value is returned to indicate the number of words of data in the additional status field Additional status response The additional status defined in EtherNet IP is returned For details refer to the description of the Response Codes in Appendix D CIP Message Commu nications Service response data response The reception data determined by the service code is returned Description e The CIP UCMM MESSAGE SEND command is used to send an Ether Net IP defined explicit message to another company s node and receive a response Unlike other FINS commands the destination of a CIP UCMM MESSAGE SEND command s control data is the local node s EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port and the actual destination node is specified in the command s route path When an EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port receives an explicit message it automatically returns a response to the message When specifying the timeout time the proper values are different for last hop and relay hop methods With the last hop method set the timeout time for the actual request service processing With the relay hop method the timeout for the relay path must be added to the timeout time for th
411. n is made by FINS UDP to a PLC on an Ethernet network PLC1 in the diagram below from a CX Programmer CX Integrator connected to the Ethernet network Conditions e FINS UDP method e IP Address Conversion Automatic Dynamic generation method CX Programmer CX Integrator Node number 1 EtherNet IP Unit IP address 192 168 250 1 IP address conversion Automatic generation method dynamic EtherNet IP Unit node number 2 EtherNet IP Unit IP address 192 168 250 2 Gem Target PLC1 Ethernet port Ethernet or EtherNet IP Network address None FINS UDP method CX Programmer s Change PLC Dialog Box Settings for target PLC PLC1 s Change PLC Dialog Box PLC name PLC1 Network classification Ethernet Network Tab Page FINS transmission source address 0 FINS destination Network number O Node address 2 Frame length 2 000 bytes Response monitor time 2 seconds Driver Tab Page Workstation node address 1 Automatic generation method Not selected IP address 192 168 250 2 Eth erNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port IP address Port number 9600 CX Programmer s FINS UDP Tab Page in Edit Parameters Dialog Box FINS UDP Port Default 9600 IP Address Conversion Automatic Dynamic generation method IP Router Table None 211 Using FINS Applications Note 212 Section 8 5 Example Inputs to the CX Programmer s Setup Window E
412. n this manual has been carefully checked and is believed to be accurate however no responsibility is assumed for clerical typographical or proofreading errors or omissions xvii xviii Unit Versions of CS CJ series Unit Versions A unit version has been introduced to manage Units in the CS CJ Series according to differences in functionality accompanying Unit upgrades Notation of Unit Versions The unit version is given to the right of the lot number on the nameplate of the on Products products for which unit versions are being managed as shown below E CS1W EIP21 CJ1W EIP21 A Product nameplate omron csiw O0 we OO UNIT Lot No Unit version TN No for unit version 1 0 ke Lot No 0404010000 Ger 1 OMRON Corporation MADE IN JAPAN E CJ2H CPUL1_ EIP CJ2M CPU3 p Product nameplate OMRON CJ2 H O0 OO UNIT Indicates that the unit version of the CPU Unit is 1 0 Indicates that the unit version of the built in EtherNet I P port is 2 0 Lot No 080701 CPU Ver 1 0 EIP Ver 2 0 N OMRON Corporation MADE IN JAPAN In this manual the version of the EtherNet IP port built into the CJ2H CPULILI EIP CJ2M CPU3L CPU Unit is given as the unit version Confirming Unit Versions CX Programmer version 4 0 can be used to confirm the unit version using the with Support Software Unit Manufacturing
413. nator Device Target Device Node Address 192 168 250 100 Node Address 192 168 250 1 Comment MC_Master Comment MC1 Input Tag Set Edit Tag Sets Output Tag Set MC1_Status 4Byte v MC_Status 4Byte Connection 3 3 Multi cast connection v Type Hide Detail Detail Parameter Packet Interval RPI 50 0 ms 0 5 10000 0 ms 5 Connection Name Timeout Value Packet Interval RPI x 4 v Possible to omit Connection Structure 192 168 250 100 MC_Master 5 MC1_Eror M 50 0ms 192 168 250 1 MC1 5 MC Error Using Other EtherNet IP Devices as the Target 192 168 250 4 ERT1 MD32SLH 1 Edit Connection It will add a connection configuration to originator device Please confiaure the Taa Set each of oriainator device and taraet device Connection 1 0 Type 01_Qutput and Input v Originator Device Target Device Node Address 192 168 250 100 Node Address 192 168 250 4 Comment MC_Master Comment ERT1 MD32SLH 1 Input Tag Set Edit Tag Sets Output Tag Set D00100 Byte gt Input_136 8Byte Connection Type Output Tag Set Edit Tag Sets Input Tag Set D00200 2Byte v Output_35 2Byte Point to Point connection v Multicast connection Connection Type Hide Detail Detail Parameter Packet Interval RPI 50 0 ns 0 5 10000 0 ms w Connection Name Possible to omit Timeout Value Packet Interval RPI x 4 Connection Structure 192 168 250 100 MC
414. nd FINS communications Refer to the Commu nications Commands Reference Manual W342 for details on FINS commands that can be sent to CS series and CJ series CPU Units when using the FINS communi cations service CS1W ETN21 CJ1W ETN21 Ethernet Units Oper ation Manual Construction of Applications Provides information on constructing host applications for 100Base TX Ethernet Units including functions for send ing receiving mail socket service automatic clock adjust ment FTP server functions and FINS communications CS1W ETNO1 CS1W ETN11 CJ1W ETN11 Ethernet Units Oper ation Manual Describes the installation and operation of the 10Base 5 and 10Base T Ethernet Units CS1G H CPU CS1G H CPU CS1W SCU CS1W SCB CJ2H CPU6 CJ2H CPU6L CJ2M CPU CJ1G H CPU CJ1G CPU CJ1M CPU CJ1W SCU CP1E E CP1E N CP1H X CP1H Y Communications Commands Refer ence Manual Describes the C series Host Link and FINS communi cations commands used when sending communications commands to CS series CJ series CP series and SYS MAC One NSJ series CPU Units CJ2H CPU6 CJ2H CPU6 CJ2M CPU CJ series CJ2 CPU Unit Hardware User s Manual Provides hardware information for the CJ2 CPU Units Informat
415. nd or built in EtherNet IP ports with private addresses Either FINS TCP or FINS UDP can be used for the FINS communications service With FINS UDP all of the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port IP address conversion methods can be used 107 Private and Global Addresses Section 5 3 e With FINS UDP when the IP address private address of a computer serving as a DHCP client is changed the IP address conversion method of the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port will be the automatic generation method dynamic the combined method or the IP address table method When FINS TCP is used IP addresses can be changed automatically E Explicit Message Communications Service e The explicit message communications service can be executed on the intranet between EtherNet IP Units and built in EtherNet IP ports with pri vate addresses only e A device such as a personal computer CIP applications including the Network Configurator cannot connect online and communicate over the Internet with an EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port that has a pri vate address Explicit message communications are also not possible over the Internet between EtherNet IP Units and built in EtherNet IP ports with private addresses Note Network Security and Firewalls Setting up an intranet through a global address involves network security con siderations Before doing so be sure to consult with a network specialist and consider ins
416. ndicate the operating status of the target node PLCs and are valid only when the EtherNet IP Unit is the originator The flags are valid only when the corresponding Normal Target Node Flag is ON If the corresponding Normal Target Node Flag is OFF the Target Node PLC Operating Flag indi cates the previous operating status For details on the default settings refer to 4 2 2 Details of the Allocated CIO Area Words User Settings Area Section 4 4 32 12 11 10 33 28 Fa TE PE ra FE Fa Es re Es ES ES Ea 34 fa Te T a a raeae sae aa ana eae 36 76 74 73 72 71 70 69 68 67 66 65 64 38 111 110 109 108 107 106 105 104 103 102 101 100 99 98 97 A 39 na 112 40 143 142 141 41 43 191 19 189 188 187 186 185 184 183 182 181 180 179 178 177 176 45 223 222 221 220 219 218 217 216 215 214 213 212 211 210 209 208 46 239 238 237 231 The corresponding PLC is oper Operating Flags ating The program is being exe cuted The PLC is not operating Target Node PLC These flags indicate the error status logical OR of fatal and non fatal errors Error Information of the target node PLCs and are valid only when the EtherNet IP Unit is the EtherNet IP Unit to originator The flags are valid only when the corresponding Normal Target CPU Unit Node Flag is ON If the correspondin
417. ndix E Mode Setting Response The mode setting in the system setup is returned 15 14 13 12 1110 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 L Bit 1 Broadcast setting Bits 2 and 3 IP address conversion method Bit 4 UDP port number setting for FINS Bit 5 TCP port number setting for FINS TCP Bit 8 Transmission speed baud rate Bit 9 SNTP server specification method Broadcast Address Setting Meaning Broadcast with host number set to all ones 4 3BSD specifications Broadcast with host number set to all zeroes 4 2BSD specifications Meaning Automatic generation method dynamic Automatic generation method static IP address table reference method Combined method IP address table reference automatic generation dynamic FINS UDP Port Number Setting Bit 4 Meaning 0 Default 9600 1 Unit Setup value FINS TCP Port Number Setting Bit 5 Meaning 0 Default 9600 1 Unit Setup value Baud Rate Setting Bit 8 Meaning 0 Automatic detection 1 Fixed SNTP Server Specification Method Bit 9 Meaning 0 IP address 1 Host name Ethernet Address Response The Ethernet address of the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port is returned Note This Ethernet address is listed on the label on the side of the EtherNet IP Unit or for a built in EtherNet IP port on the CPU Unit 393 FINS Commands Addressed to EtherNet IP Units or Built in EtherNet I
418. nds sent and received by the CS CJ series EtherNet IP Unit include commands addressed to the CS CJ series CPU Unit and commands addressed to the CS CJ series EtherNet IP Unit 191 Explicit Message Communications Section 7 3 7 3 Explicit Message Communications Explicit messages defined in EtherNet IP can be used to send service requests to other companies EtherNet IP masters slaves and OMRON PLCs with CS CJ series EtherNet IP Units and built in EtherNet IP ports Note Specific FINS commands commands 2810 and 2801 are used to send explicit messages Explicit message Sending Receiving Network communi CIP UCMM messages can be sent to an EtherNet IP Automatically responds to explicit mes cations instruction Unit or built in EtherNet IP port by a CMND 490 sages from other devices instruction containing FINS command code 2810 Hex Functions supported Masters slaves made by other manufacturers e Masters made by other manufacturers in remote devices Supported services determine supported functions PLC with a CS CJ series EtherNet IP Unit e PLC with a CS CJ series EtherNet IP Unit or built in or built in EtherNet IP port Supports the EtherNet IP port reading writing of the local CPU Unit s sta Supports the reading writing of a remote CPU Unit s tus information and I O memory data status information and I O memory data Note The CS CJ series EtherNet IP Units and built in EtherNet IP ports CS1W E
419. network win dow sizes of network nodes other traffic at the EtherNet IP Unit or built in Eth erNet IP port itself e g simultaneous tag data link communications and the system configuration Example Calculation In this example SEND 090 is used to send 256 words of data between two PLCs The maximum transmission delay is calculated based on the following operating conditions e Local node s CPU cycle time 10 ms e Local node s CPU execution mode Normal e Local node s CPU peripheral servicing time Default 4 e Remote node s CPU cycle time 5 ms e Remote node s CPU execution mode Normal e Remote node s CPU peripheral servicing time Default 4 e Baud rate 100Base TX Item Calculated value CPU Bus Unit service cycle local 10 ms node CPU Bus Unit service processing 0 4 ms time local node Send processing 256 x 0 002 0 550 1 062 1 1 ms Transmission delay 256 x 0 0013 0 0118 0 3446 0 3 ms Receive processing 256 x 0 003 0 704 1 472 1 5 ms CPU Bus Unit service cycle remote 5 ms node CPU Bus Unit service processing 0 2 ms time remote node Maximum transmission delay 10 0 4 1 1 0 3 1 5 5 0 2 18 5 ms 296 Message Service Transmission Delay Section 10 5 RECV 098 Instruction Execution of RECV 099 in user program CPU Bus Unit service cycle Local node 2 1 i CPU Bus Unit service processing time Local node 1 C
420. ng ACK 00 00 00 09 FIN WAIT 2 Close completed and ACK received Awaiting FIN 00 00 00 0A TIME WAIT Precautions All the above values are set to 0 if Ethernet communications functions are stopped due to improper settings in the system setup Response Codes After closing pauses twice the maximum segment life 2MSL 0000 1001 ADDRESS INFORMATION READ Reads FINS node addresses and IP addresses Normal end Command too large Command Block 27 65 Len aunt Command code Response Block UR oO or V Address information Number of addresses Command Response code code Parameters Number of Addresses Response Returns the number of pairs of FINS node addresses and IP addresses With the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port this value is always 0001 1 decimal 414 FINS Commands Addressed to EtherNet IP Units or Built in EtherNet IP Ports Appendix E Address Information Returns the FINS node addresses and IP addresses Each pair requires 6 bytes and has the following configu ration 1 6 ii FINS node IP address number FINS Node Address Node address set in the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port hexadecimal IP Address IP address set in the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port hexadecimal Response Codes 0000 Normal end 1001 Command too large IP ADDRESS READ Reads the local IP address and subnet mask in the CPU
421. ng Bandwidth Usage for Tag Data Links It is particularly im portant to check the usage of capacity when an individual connection s RPI setting was changed without using the Set Packet Interval RPI Button at the bottom of the Usage of Device Bandwidth Dialog Box 6 Run user tests to verify that there are no problems with the new settings 10 2 5 RPI Setting Examples The following examples explain how to calculate the packet intervals RPI in the following network configuration 276 Adjusting the Communications Load Section 10 2 Example Conditions Untitled Network Gonficurator EDSR Eile Edit View Network Device EDS File Tools Option Help Dei a a a a O EtherNet IP 1 amp Network Configurator a e a a z S EtherNet IP Hardware i i Vendor a ey Omron Ce ti Saon Corporation te 1921682501 1921882502 1921682503 1921682504 1921682505 1921682506 1921882507 1921682508 OR p CS1W EIP21 CS1W ElP21 CS1W EIP21 CS1W EIP21 CS1W ElP21 CS1W EIP21 CS1W ElP21 CS1W EIP21 i one ere ite ja Ja ja ja Ja ite 12 E E EEE E E E 192 168 250 9 192 168 250 10 192 163 250 11 192 168 250 12 192 168 250 13 192 168 25014 192 168 250 15 192 168 250 16 CS1W EIP21 CJ1W EIP21 CJ1W EIP21 CJ1W EIP21 CJ1W EIP21 CJ1W EIP21 CJ1W EIP21 a iine SINET tl td a i 2 a Ed ia S Communications Adapter ja ju 12 ja m qm u qu 192 168 25017 192168 25018 192 168 25019 192 168 250 20 CJTW EIP21 CJIW EIP2
422. ng Hubs with Multicast Filtering 100 Mbps Hubs Example If the RPI is set to 50 ms for all connections and the usage of capacity is 40 the usage of capacity may increase to 80 when the RPI is reduced to 25 ms for all connections Performing message communications or other network operations from the Network Configurator such as monitoring or other operations that place a load on the network or from the user application when the tag data link band width usage of capacity is between 80 and 100 can create an excessive load on the network and result in timeouts If timeouts occur increase one or all of the RPI settings or reduce the usage of capacity 10 2 3 Adjusting Device Bandwidth Usage Is the network bandwidth without multicast filtering usage under 100 Mbps for each node This appears as Mbit s in the dialog box shown on page 269 gt If any node exceeds 100 Mbps change the connections settings such as the RPI Is the usage of capacity without multicast filtering under 100 for each node This appears as Usage of Capacity in the dialog box shown on page 269 If any node exceeds 100 change the connections settings such as the RPI Is the total network bandwidth usage under 100 Mbps This appears as Network Total of Max Mbit s in the dialog box shown on page 269 If the total bandwidth usage exceeds 100 Mbps the bandwidth of part of the transmission path e g a switching hub o
423. ng hub Multicast filtering This function transfers multicast packets to specific nodes only QoS function This function performs priority control on packet transfers The following table shows the tag data link settings that can be made for indi vidual EtherNet IP Units as well as the setting ranges Contents Settings Network bandwidth Physical Ethernet baud rate 100 Mbps or 10 Mbps Allowed tag data link Maximum number of tag data CJ2M 3 000 pps max communications band link packets that can be pro Other CPU Units 6 000 width cessed in 1 second pps pack pps max ets per second Connection resources Number of connections that can CU2M 32 max be established Other CPU Units 256 max Packet interval Refresh cycle for tag data CJ2M 1 to 1 000 ms RPI Requested Packet Other CPU Units Interval 0 5 to 10 000 ms in 0 5 ms units When the tag data link settings exceed the capabilities of the switching hub being used increase the RPI value Particularly when using a switching hub that does not support multicast filtering the settings must be made consider ing that multicast packets will be sent even to nodes without connection set tings In addition if the required tag data link performance cannot be achieved with the switching hub s capabilities reevaluate the overall network configuration and correct it by taking steps such as selecting a different switching hub or splitting the netw
424. ngs completed operation is com pleted normally 351 Using the LED Indicators and Display for Troubleshooting Errors Related to the Tag Data Links Indicator 7 segment Section 14 2 The 7 segment display alternates between the node address and error code Verification Error target non existent The target regis tered in the device parame ters does not exist Unit operation Flag status The Unit will periodi cally attempt to reconnect to the tar get The Verification Error Flag n 12 bit 00 Unit Error Occurred Flag n 10 bit 00 and Network Error Occurred Flag n 10 bit 01 will go ON Countermeasure Check the follow ing items e Is the registered node s power supply ON e Is the cable con nected ls the cable dam aged or loose e Is there excessive noise Connection Failed The connection could not be established because device parameters such as the variable name and size did not match in the originator and target or con nection resources are insufficient The Unit will periodi cally attempt to reconnect to the tar get The Verification Error Flag n 12 bit 00 and Unit Error Occurred Flag n 10 bit 00 will go ON Correct the device parameter settings and download the device parameters again from the Net work Configurator 352 Tag Data Link Error A timeout occurred in the ta
425. ngs for the EtherNet IP Unit such as the IP ad dress DNS server settings host name baud rate FINS UDP settings and FINS TCP settings 2 Tag data link settings device parameters Media access method Transfer specifica CSMA CD tions Modulation method Baseband Transmission paths Star form Baud rate 100 Mbit s 100Base TX Transmission media Shielded twisted pair STP cable Categories 100 Q at 5 5e Transmission dis tance 100 m distance between hub and node Number of cascade connections There is no limitation when a switching hub is used Current consumption Unit 410 mA max at 5 V DC Weight 94 g max Dimensions 31 x 90 x 65 mm W x H x D Other general specifications Note Other specifications conform to the general specifications of the CJ series If tag data links are being used use 100Base TX Otherwise 10Base T can be used but this is not recommended 15 Section 2 1 EtherNet IP Unit and Built in EtherNet IP Port Specifications CJ2 CPU Built in EtherNet IP Port Model number CJ2H CPULILI EIP CJ2M CPU3 Type 100Base TX See note Unit classification CJ2 CPU Unit built in port CJ2 CPU Bus Unit CPU Unit words used Allocated CIO Area words CPU Bus Unit words 25 words Unit one unit number s words These words contain control bits and flags
426. nit is the orig Eliminate the red Fatal Error occurred in the inator of the tag data cause of the error CPU Unit link connection it in the CPU Unit stops communica The tag data link tions will restart auto e If the Unit is the tar matically when the get of the tag data cause of the error link connection and is eliminated the PLC status is included in the com munications data the corresponding Target Node PLC Error Flag will be turned ON Output OFF An Output OFF The tag data link s Turn OFF the CPU Error output inhibit send data will be Unit s Output OFF condition cleared to 0 in accor Bit A50015 The occurred in the dance with the Output tag data link s send CPU Unit OFF settings and data will be data transfer will con restored automati tinue with that data cally when this bit is turned OFF Errors Related to the The 7 segment display alternates between the node address and error code Control Bits Indicator Unit operation Flag Countermeasure status 7 segment Multiple Two or more The error code will be Execute control bit Switches ON software displayed on the 7 operations one ata switches were segment display for time ON simulta 30 seconds and the neously or a Multiple Switches ON second soft Error Flag n 11 bit ware switch was 14 will go ON turned ON The error display will before a prior be cleared the next operation was time that a setti
427. nitor ing error Servicing from the CPU Unit was not com pleted within the fixed interval The monitoring time is normally 11s Unit operation Flag status If the Unit is the orig inator of the tag data link connection it stops communica tions If the Unit is the tar get of the tag data link connection and the PLC status is included in the com munications data the corresponding Target Node PLC Error Flag will be turned ON Note Recovery is possible for this error When operation is restored tag data link startup processing will be performed and opera tions will return to normal Section 14 2 Countermeasure Check and correct the CPU Unit s operating environ ment Flashing red 350 CPU Unit watchdog timer error An error occurred in the CPU Unit If the Unit is the orig inator of the tag data link connection it stops communica tions e If the Unit is the tar get of the tag data link connection and the PLC status is included in the com munications data the corresponding Target Node PLC Error Flag will be turned ON Replace the CPU Unit Using the LED Indicators and Display for Troubleshooting Section 14 2 Errors Related to the CPU The 7 segment display alternates between the node address and error code Unit Indicator Unit operation Flag Countermeasure status 7 segment Flashing CPU Unit A fatal error e If the U
428. nnected Send Service 0206 Message too large for Unconnected message service 0207 Unconnected acknowledge without reply 0301 No buffer memory available 0302 Network Bandwidth not available for data 0303 No Tag filters available 0304 Not Configured to send real time data 0311 Port specified in Port Segment Not Available 0312 Link Address specified in Port Segment Not Available 0315 Invalid Segment Type or Segment Value in Path 0316 Path and Connection not equal in close 0317 Either Segment not present or Encoded Value in Network Segment is invalid 0318 Link Address to Self Invalid 0319 Resources on Secondary Unavailable 031A Connection already established 031B Direct connection already established 031C Miscellaneous 031D Redundant connection mismatch 031F No connection resources exist for target path 0320 07FF Vendor specific 389 CIP Message Communications Appendix D Priority Time Ticks and Time Out Ticks Format of the Priority Time Tick Time tick Base value ms Maximum time out time ms that can be set in the time out ticks 0000 hex 255 0001 hex 510 0010 hex 1 020 0011 hex 2 040 0100 hex 4 080 0101 hex 8 160 0110 hex 16 320 0111 hex 32 640 1000 hex 65 280 1001 hex 130 560 1010 hex 261 120 1011 hex 522 240 1100 hex 1 044 480 1101 hex 2 088 960 1110 hex 4 177 920 11
429. no response from the target Check the power supply The connection opening pro and cable wiring of the devices in the communications path cess timed out including the target and switches 01 0205 Error code returned from target This error does Depends on the tar Depends on the orig There was a parameter error in NOt occur get s specifications inator s specifica the frame used to open the con Contact the target tions Contact the nection device s manufac originator device s turer manufacturer 01 0302 Error occurred at originator or Check the origina Check the target s Check the originator error code returned from target tor and target con connection settings and target connec The tag data link s allowable nection settings number of connec _ tion settings number bandwidth pps was exceeded number of con tions and RPI of connections and nections and RPI RPI 01 0311 Error code returned from target This error does Depends on the tar Depends on the orig There was a parameter error in not occur get s specifications inator s specifica the frame used to open the con Contact the target tions Contact the nection device s manufac originator device s turer manufacturer 01 0312 Error code returned from target This error does Depends on the tar Depends on the orig There was a parameter error in Not occur get s specifications inator s specifica the
430. normal response is returned to a transmitted CIP UCMM MES sae SEND eal if it was ll al normally 2810 Hex 0000 Hex Command Response Transport No of bytes code code received _ 502 bytes max gt 00 00 00 Hex Hex Hex Service response data variable length Reserved General status Reserved Service code response The following response is returned if an error occurs in a transmitted CIP UCMM MESSAGE SEND command 2810 Hex 0000 Hex l Command Response Transport No of bytes code code ID received lt 502 bytes max ee gt 00 Hex Additional status Service variable length response data Additional status size variable length General status Reserved Service code response The following response is returned if the CIP UCMM MESSAGE SEND com mand could not be sent or timed out 2810 Hex See note Command Response code code Note There may be additional data depending on the response code e g for a relay error Parameters Transport ID command response When multiple CIP UCMM MESSAGE SEND commands are being sent the Transport ID identifies the commands This Transport ID is returned unchanged in the response Message monitoring time command Specifies the monitoring time in 10 ms units in order to monitor the time from
431. not be sent or times out 28 01 Command Response code code Parameters Destination node address command The node address of the destination of the explicit message The node address of the local EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port is specified in the control data for the CMND 490 but the node address of the actual destination is specified here in the FINS command The destination node address cannot be set to 00 hex or FF hex Service code command response A service code defined for EtherNet IP In a normal response bit 15 of the ser vice code specified in the command will be turned ON and returned In an error response 94 Hex will always be returned 241 Sending Explicit Messages Description 242 Note Section 9 1 Class ID command The class ID of the destination of the explicit message Instance ID command The instance ID of the destination of the explicit message Service data command response The data defined for the services codes No of bytes received response The number of bytes received from the destination node address remote node Destination node address remote node The node address of the OMRON Special I O Slave Unit or Slave manufac tured by another company to which the explicit message was sent is returned Error code response An error code defined in EtherNet IP 1 byte general status and 2 byte addi tional status is r
432. ns when replacing a faulty Unit e After replacement verify that there are no errors with the new Unit e When a Unit is being returned for repair attach a sheet of paper detailing the problem and return the Unit to your OMRON dealer Simple Backup Function Settings Required Note after Unit Replacement Section 13 2 e If there is a faulty contact try wiping the contact with a clean lint free cloth dampened with alcohol To prevent electric shock when replacing a Unit always stop communications in the network and turn OFF the power supplies to all of the nodes before removing the faulty Unit After a Unit has been replaced verify that the following steps have been made correctly e Set the node address and unit number e Connect the Ethernet cable Set the configuration data parameter settings again and download them 13 2 Simple Backup Function Overview Note The simple backup function can be used to back up not only all of the data in the CPU Unit but also all of the data stored in memory in the EtherNet IP Unit or data for the built in EtherNet IP port All of this data will automatically be backed up to the Memory Card The simple backup function can be used for the following EtherNet IP Units and built in EtherNet IP port e CS series EtherNet IP Unit CS1W EIP21 mounted to a CS1D CS1 H CPU Unit e CJ series EtherNet IP Unit CJ1W EIP21 mounted to a CJ1 H CJ1M CJ2H CPULILI EIP CPU Unit e A
433. nse IE Hex is specified for commands For responses the highest bit will turn ON and 9E Hex will be returned Class ID command Always C4 2F The class ID depends on the unit version The class ID is C4 for unit version 2 0 and 2F for unit version 1 0 Instance ID command The type of memory area to which the data will be written is specified as shown in the following table Instance ID Hex CPU Unit memory area Word range for write 01 CIO 0000 to 6143 03 DM D00000 to D32767 04 WR W000 to W511 05 HR H000 to H1535 08 to 20 EM banks 0 to 18 En_00000 to En_32767 n 0 to 18 Address L Address H command The address of the first word to which the data will be written is specified in hexadecimal as shown below Address L The lower 2 digits when the first word address is displayed in 4 digit hexadecimal Address H The higher 2 digits when the first word address is displayed in 4 digit hexadecimal Write data response The specified area and write data is returned in order from word H higher byte bits 8 to 15 to word L lower byte bits O to 7 For byte data write specify an even number Important Points The actual address L address H and number of write data bytes that can be specified depends on the model of the CPU Unit and the data area being written Do not exceed the boundary of the data areas for the PLC you are using Word Data Write Service Code 1F Hex Word Data Write writes da
434. nsion CPU Rack Connect the EtherNet IP Unit in any of the positions shown below using the sliders on the top and bottom of the Unit Up to seven EtherNet IP Units can be mounted for a CJ2H CPULILI EIP CPU Unit enabling up to eight EtherNet IP ports if you include the built in EtherNet IP port Up to two EtherNet IP Units can be mounted for a CJ2M CPU3L CPU Unit If EtherNet IP Units are mounted in combination with other CPU Bus Units e g Controller Link Units the maximum total number of CPU Bus Units that can be mounted is 16 Mounting to a PLC Section 3 3 CPU Rack 10 Units max End cover End cover Expansion Backplane 10 Units max Up to eight EtherNet IP Units can be mounted End cover Expansion Backplane 10 Units max i E End Expansion Backplane 10 Units max ne Cover PS Power Supply Unit CPU CPU Unit IC I O Control Unit Il I O Interface Unit Note The CJ1W EIP21 EtherNet IP Unit s maximum current consumption is 410 mA Be sure that the total current consumption of all the Units connected to the same CPU Backplane or Expansion Backplane does not exceed the output capacity of the Power Supply Unit 3 3 3 Mounting Mount the EtherNet IP Unit to the Backplane using the following procedure 1 2
435. nsitions Status Meaning 00000000 CLOSED Connection closed 00000001 LISTEN Waiting for connection 00000002 SYN SENT SYN sent in active status 00000003 SYN RECEIVED SYN received and sent 00000004 ESTABLISHED Already established 00000005 CLOSE WAIT FIN received and waiting for completion 00000006 FIN WAIT 1 Completed and FIN sent 00000007 CLOSING Completed and exchanged FIN Awaiting ACK 00000008 LAST ACK FIN sent and completed Awaiting ACK 00000009 FIN WAIT 2 Completed and ACK received Awaiting FIN 0000000A TIME WAIT After closing pauses twice the maximum seg ment life 2MSL 402 FINS Commands Addressed to EtherNet IP Units or Built in EtherNet IP Ports Appendix E Response Codes Response code Description Normal end Node address setting error Local IP address setting error CPU Unit error execution not possible Command too large Command too small Connection number not set from 1 to 16 IP ADDRESS TABLE WRITE Writes the IP address table Command Block Command Number IP address Te IP address code of records table records table records Response Block Command Response code code Parameters Number of Records Command The number of records to write is specified in hexadecimal between 0000 and 0020 0 to 32 decimal in the command If this value is set to 0 the IP address table will be cleared so that no records ar
436. nt is the destination IP address set under the FINS TCP Tab Page in the Unit Setup By sending this command to the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port the destination IP address for the specified connection can be changed to another IP address Remote node changes can be made only for connection numbers specified as FINS TCP clients in the Unit Setup 400 FINS Commands Addressed to EtherNet IP Units or Built in EtherNet IP Ports Appendix E Command Block Command FINS TCP Remote IP Remote TCP code connection No address port number Response Block aloof Command Response code code Parameters FINS TCP Connection No Command Specifies in two bytes the FINS TCP connection number 1 to 16 for which the change is to be made Remote IP Address Command Specifies the remote node s IP address must be non zero in hexadecimal Remote Port Number Command Specifies the remote TCP port number must be non zero with this command Response Codes Response code Description Normal end Node address setting error Local IP address setting error CPU Unit error execution not possible Command too large Command too small Connection number not set from 1 to 16 Remote IP address set to 0 Remote TCP port number set to 0 Connection already established with specified remote node Specified connection number not set as FINS TCP client in Unit Setup Remote node change processing
437. o 43 00 for all of the other devices which connect with devices 192 168 250 1 and 192 168 250 10 Usage of Device Bandwidth Comment Usage of Capac Mbit s without Usage of IP mult P 192 168 250 1 CS1W EIP21 74 67 106 33 9 642 13 989 P 192 168 250 2 CS1W EIP21 43 00 106 33 5 295 13 989 P 192 168 250 3 CS1W EIP21 43 00 106 33 5 295 13 989 192 168 250 4 CS1W EIP21 43 00 106 33 5 295 13 989 P 192 168 250 5 CS1W EIP21 43 00 106 33 5 295 13 989 192 168 250 6 CS1W EIP21 43 00 106 33 5 295 13 989 P 192 168 250 7 CS1W ElP21 43 00 106 33 5 295 13 989 192 168 250 8 CS1W EIP21 43 00 106 33 5 295 13 989 P 192 168 250 9 CS1W EIP21 43 00 106 33 5 295 13 989 P 192 168 250 10 CS1W EIP21 74 67 106 33 9 642 13 989 192 168 250 11 1TW EIP21 43 00 106 33 5 295 13 989 192 168 250 12 Tw EIP21 43 00 106 33 5 295 13 989 P 192 168 250 13 Tw EIP21 43 00 106 33 5 295 13 989 192 168 250 14 1TW EIP21 43 00 106 33 5 295 13 989 192 168 250 115 Tw EIP21 43 00 106 33 5 295 13 989 P 192 168 250 16 1W EIP21 43 00 106 33 5 295 13 989 192 168 250 117 Tw EIP21 43 00 106 33 5 295 13 989 192 168 250 18 Tw EIP21 43 00 106 33 5 295 13 989 192 168 250 19 Tw EIP21 43 00 106 33 5 295 13 989 192 168 250 20 TWw EIP21 43 00 106 33 5 295 13 989 parararararsrarsrdrsrarararsrarer dr ar ar NVNMNMNMNYNYMN NY NY NM DHY MYM MN MH MH MH MH fh CJ C CJ CJ CJ CJ CJ CJ CJ C
438. ode Switching hub setting EtherNet IP Unit setting Auto 10 Mbps fixed 100 Mbps fixed negotiation Auto negotiation 10 Mbps Full duplex fixed Half duplex 42 Network Installation Section 3 4 Switching hub setting EtherNet IP Unit setting Auto 10 Mbps fixed 100 Mbps fixed negotiation Half Half sip duplex duplex aupiex Note Best Recommended OK Allowed Not allowed 3 4 4 Using Contact Outputs Common to All Units When an EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port and Contact Output Unit are mounted in the same Rack or connected to the same PLC communica tions errors may occur due to noise generated by the contact outputs Use one or more of the following measures when installing Contact Output Units and EtherNet IP Units on the same Rack 100 Mbps Full duplex Half duplex Mounting Location Mount or connect any Contact Output Units as far away from the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port as possible Contact Output Unit i Contact outputs EtherNet IP Unit L To switching hub Cable Location Separate the transceiver cable or twisted pair cable connecting the EtherNet IP Unit as far from the wiring to the Contact Output Units as possible The coaxial cable must also be placed as far away from the Contact Output Units and their wiring as possible Contact outputs o EtherNet IP Unit
439. oject global symbol table for the CJ2H CPU6LI EIP or CJ2M CPU3L right click and select Import Network Variable from the pop up menu Untitled CX Programmer NewPLC1 Symbols FH File Edit View Insert PLC Program Simulation Tools Window Help Dei amp 64 me GM As Si z a DA p ane a zixl Name Data Type Address Value Net Variable Rack Location BE NewProject P_First_Cycle_Task BOOL 4200 15 fd NewPLC1 CI2H Offline PGE BOOL cFoo0 A jig Data Types PGT BOOL cro0s is sun iin PHR WORD A452 Don A a UE SAUR P_IO_Verify_Error BOOL 402 09 a Settings PLE BOOL cro02 G Memory A Pi P_Low_Battery BOOL 4402 04 rograms a NewProgram1 00 PLT Bou ar Symbols P_Max_Cycle_Time UDINT A262 E sectiont Se SSRs END PLNE o S Insert Symbol P_OF oe Poff Import Network Variable 14 13 15 F Function Blocks P_On P_Outpi lt 4 Yalidate Symbols E 2 You can add a tag as a network symbol by selecting and executing the CSV file exported using the Network Configurator Untitled CX Programmer NewPLC1 Symbols ED Eile Edit view Insert PLC Program Simulation Tools Window Help Deh ek SQ amp 2 meet FM Ate amp Si 3 att ed DA RaT a lx Data Type Address Value Net Variable Rack Location amp NewProject BOOL CF009 fd NewPLC1 CI2H Offline BOOL CF114 Data Types n BOOL CF113 53 Symb
440. ollowing graph so the send processing time is the maximum value for each RPI Packet interval RPI RPI error 0 5 to 1 000 ms 15 RPI ms 100 1 000 ms to 10 000 ms 5 of the RPI RPI error 2 Fees es ame eee ce ls cl ea E E E NE LAE A N N EAE yl i gE E eS lea git al el ee gee aia ls ee 0 i L L L L 1 L O 1 000 2 000 3 000 4 000 5 000 6 000 7 000 8 000 9 000 10 000 RPI ms 2 Cable Delay The cable delay is the time required for the data signal to pass through the cable and reach the destination When an STP shielded twisted pair cable of category 5 5e or higher is being used the maximum cable delay is 545 ns 100 m The cable delay represents a very small percentage of the total tag data link delay 265 Communications System 3 Switching Hub Delay 4 Receive Processing Delay Example Calculation of the Tag Data Link Delay 266 Section 10 1 The switching hub delay is the delay time between the arrival of the packet at the switching hub and the output of the packet from the hub s transmission port This delay depends on the total number of connections used for recep tion and data sizes used in the tag data links In addition this delay depends on the switching hub maker and model but the delay can be approximated with the following table For a precise estimate contact the switching hub manufacturer The following values are the delays
441. ols BOOL 4500 15 QT 10 Table and Unit Setup BOOL 200 12 3 Settings BOOL CFO10 GF Memory PW A Programs WR WORD B451 it an Medeor words Niatauta four S symbols ct Node _Out_2 WORD S NjA Auto OUTPUT Sectiont ct Node _Out_3 WORD NjA Auto OUTPUT end c Nodet_In_t WORD 5 NjA Auto INPUT F Function Blocks c Node1_In_2 WORD S NjA Auto INPUT c Node1_In_3 WORD NjA Auto INPUT Project lt ERROR DOO0N1 is not allowed as a symbol name since it may be confused with an address M Compile J Find Report Transfer For Help press F1 NewPLC1 Offline Note The following precautions apply when importing e Tags that have a specified I O memory address cannot be imported e Tags are imported as network symbols in a one dimensional WORD array To change the data type use the Symbol Editor of the CX Program mer 140 Setting Tag Data Links Section 6 2 6 2 5 Connection Settings Note After creating the tag sets click the Connections Tab at the top of the Edit Device Parameters Dialog Box and set the following connection information e The target devices with which connections will be opened e Whether the tag sets are input or output tag sets e The length of the packet intervals RPI Make the Connections settings in the originator only The Connections set tings are not necessary in the target device Make the Connections settings after creating tag sets for all of the dev
442. ommunications m Conditions for High Traffic A heavy communications load may occur at an EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port if FINS messages and CIP messages from multiple nodes are concentrated on that EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port The EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port and the CPU Unit may have insuf ficient processing capacity for the volume of FINS messages commands that are coming from the network For example suppose that approximately 20 ms are required to process a sin gle FINS frame i e 20 ms from the time that the command is received at the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port until a response is sent If 100 or more FINS frames commands are received at once from multiple communi cating nodes it will take approximately 2 seconds to send a response to the last command If a timeout is set at the remote node for 2 seconds or less then a timeout will be generated A retry will begin due to the timeout and the traffic to the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port will thus be increased even further until ultimately the responses to all the nodes will be too slow At this point the system is overloaded m Avoiding Errors due to High Traffic To avoid high traffic from FINS communications the communications load must be kept down to a reasonable level To accomplish this follow the proce dure below 1 Specify the node where FINS frames seem to be concentrated 2
443. ommunications high traffic conditions 232 message communications 187 233 message communications errors 195 communications cables xxv Communications Port Enabled Flags 226 Communications Port Error Flags 226 communications specifications 17 Communications Status 1 Flags 77 Communications Status 2 Flags 79 Communications Status 3 Flags 79 communications test 65 component names 21 connecting to the FTP server 304 connection setting 141 Connections settings Edit All Connections 144 Connections Tab 141 connectors modular plug recommended models 28 Contact Output Units precautions 43 control bits 71 CONTROLLER DATA READ 392 CONTROLLER STATUS READ 394 CPU Bus Units precautions Xxvi 427 428 creating a tag set 126 creating tag sets 126 creating tags 128 crimp terminals xxv current consumption CJ series 15 16 CS series 14 CX Integrator 46 creating routing tables 208 CX Programmer 8 46 connecting to PLC 211 cyclic communications required settings 35 D Datalink Tool 57 default gateway 54 delays message service delays 294 delete command 303 308 312 Device Monitor function 340 device parameters clearing 176 editing 127 devices registering 125 DHCP client computer 102 DHCP service automatic IP address setting by DHCP service 102 dimensions CJ series 15 16 19 CS series 14 19 dir command 303 308 309 distance CJ series transmission
444. omputer that has the Network Configurator installed e Network address Same number as the network address of the Ethernet Unit of the PLC that will be the relay node e Node address Last value in the computer s IP address e g 1 for 192 168 250 1 c Remote Information EtherNet IP Unit Enter the information for the EtherNet IP Unit of the PLC that will be the relay node e Network address Network address set in the routing tables 166 Setting Tag Data Links Section 6 2 e Node address Last value in the IP address of the Unit above e g 3 for 192 168 251 3 Unit number of CPU Bus Unit Unit number of the Unit above d Remote Information Ethernet Unit Enter the information for the Ethernet Unit of the PLC that will be the relay node 4 Once the settings have been registered the Setup Interface Dialog Box will be displayed again Check the registered information that has been en tered and then click the OK Button Setup Interface E Host PC Information Host Name OMRONO2 IP Address 192 168 251 1 Network Address 001 Node Address 001 Remote Information Registration Name EIP X EtherNet IP Unit Network Address 002 Node Addres 003 Unit No 02 Ethernet Unit Port No 9600 IP Address 192 168 250 3 OK i Cancel 5 The following dialog box will be displayed Select TCP 2 which represents the EtherNet IP port and then click the OK Button Select Connect Network Port Ex Selec
445. on 1 tag set 8 7 tags when the tag set contains the PLC status Maximum link data size per node 184 832 words 640 words Maximum data size per connection 252 words or 722 words See note 2 Note Data synchronicity is maintained within each connection 20 words Note Data synchronic ity is maintained within each con nection Number of registrable tag sets 256 1 connection 1 tag set 32 1 connection 1 tag set Maximum size of 1 tag set 722 words The PLC status uses 1 word when the tag set contains the PLC status 20 words The PLC status uses 1 word when the tag set contains the PLC sta tus Maximum number of tags that can be refreshed per CPU Unit cycle See note 3 Output Transmission Output Transmission CPU EtherNet IP CPU EtherNet IP 19 256 Input Reception Input Reception EtherNet IP gt CPU EtherNet IP CPU 20 See note 4 256 Output Transmission CPU EtherNet IP 32 Input Reception EtherNet IP CPU 32 Data that can be refreshed per CPU Unit cycle See note 3 Output Transmission Output Transmission CPU EtherNet IP CPU EtherNet IP 7 405 words 6 432 words Input Reception Input Reception EtherNet IP gt CPU EtherNet IP CPU 7 405 words 6 432 words Output Transmission CPU EtherNet IP 640 words Input Reception EtherNet IP CPU 640 words
446. on the same network It is not necessary to set routing tables if one Communications Unit is mounted to the PLC and the nodes are connected as one network 2 If EtherNet IP is selected for CX Programmer communications FINS message communications and remote programming monitoring from the CX Programmer will be possible as long as CIP routing is possible for the entire communications path Routing tables do not need to be set If FINS messages are sent from a PLC however then routing tables must be set 206 Routing Tables Section 8 4 8 4 Routing Tables When the FINS communications service is used routing tables must be cre ated in advance Routing tables are required in the following circumstances e When communicating with a PLC or computer on another network e g remote programming or monitoring using FINS messages or a CX Pro grammer e When multiple Communications Units are mounted to a single PLC i e CPU Unit e When routing tables are used for one or more other nodes on the same network It is not necessary to set routing tables if one Communications Unit is mounted to the PLC and the nodes are connected as one network The rout ing tables are required not only for nodes communicating via the FINS com munications service but also for all relay nodes on the network 8 4 1 Routing Table Overview The routing tables describe the transmission path for FINS messages when the FINS communications are used It consi
447. on z zz ready XXX XX XX XX IP address of EtherNet IP Unit or built in Ether Net IP port yyyyyyyyyy EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port model number e g CS1W EIP21 z zz Firmware version of EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port FTP server 221 FTP server busy Goodbye busy Setting Restrictions The following restrictions apply to login names and passwords e The login name and password must consist of alphanumeric characters hyphens and or underscores They are not case sensitive A login name consists of 12 characters e A password consists of 8 characters e Always set a password when setting a new login name The login name will not be valid unless a password is set for it e If a login name is not set or contains illegal characters the default login name CONFIDENTIAL must be used No password is required and any password that is set will be ignored FTP File Transfer Mode FTP has two file transfer modes ASCII mode and binary mode Before start ing to transfer files use the type command specifies the data type of trans ferred files to select the required mode Always select binary mode for binary files extensions IOM STD or OBJ in the CS CJ series file memory and other program files with extensions such as CXP Using the FTP Server Function Section 11 3 11 3 Using the FTP Server Function 11 3 1 Procedure 1 2 3 Note Make the basic sett
448. ons method FINS UDP Method of pairing of IP addresses and FINS node addresses By pairing FINS node addresses with IP addresses in Ethernet IP address determination IP address conversion Automatic gen eration method static Client personal computer of PLC Server PLC FINS node address IP address FINS node address IP address Automatic gen eration method dynamic Fixed or variable IP address table method Fixed Fixed or variable Combined method Fixed Fixed or variable FINS TCP By automatic conver sion of FINS node addresses at Ether Net IP Unit and remote node and then sending and receiving data Connection method auto matic FINS node address conversion Automatic Fixed or can be allo cated auto matically when not determined Fixed or variable 105 Private and Global Addresses Section 5 3 5 3 Private and Global Addresses 5 3 1 Private and Global Addresses There are two kinds of IP addresses private and global e Global addresses These are IP addresses that connect directly to the Internet Allocated by application to NIC each address is unique in the world and as many as 4 3 million can be allocated worldwide e Private addresses These are IP addresses for Intranet LAN use and cannot connect directly to the Internet Frames that include private IP addresses are restricted by the
449. ons Section 5 2 m Local Device FINS TCP Server 1 2 3 1 A request to open a connection is received in TCP IP protocol from the re mote device i e the client either a personal computer an EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port and the connection is established 2 Notification is received from the remote node i e the client of the remote node s FINS node address 3 The local device provides notification of the local FINS node address The EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port changes the internal node correspondence table FINS node address IP address and TCP port number 5 FINS messages can then be sent and received Personal computer or EtherNet IP Unit client EtherNet IP Unit server CPU Unit 1 The connection is established EN denie Local FINS node number A i i 7 y l 2 The local device such as a personal shea f Local IP address S Local IP address T computer sends notification that its 7 FINS node number is A j IP address FINS node number transmission Ethernet EtherNet IP FINS node number transmission ri The FINS node number 3 The EtherNet IP Unit sends notification that is converted for each its FINS node number is B connection number IP address 4 The internal node correspondence table is changed 5 It then becomes possi
450. or An error was detected during the validity check of vendor specific parameters for the TCP IP Interface Object and Ether Link Object Meaning No error Error detected A time out occurred during communications with the BOOTP server Meaning No error Error detected The setting of the host specification IP address or host name of the SNTP server is not correct or communications with the SNTP server timed out Meaning No error Error detected The address conversion method was set for automatic generation but the last eight bits of the local IP address does not match the local node address FINS node address or the host section other than the last byte of the local IP address is non zero Meaning No error Error detected The non volatile memory s service life has expired or the memory has failed Total Number of Packets Received Response The total number of packets received by the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port is returned Total Number of Receive Errors Response The total number of packet errors detected while the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port was receiving is returned The following types of error are detected e Short packet errors e Alignment errors e CRC errors e Frame length errors received frame 1 515 bytes or more e Communications controller overflow errors 395 FINS Commands Addressed to EtherNet IP Units or Built in EtherNet IP
451. or an EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port This point is different from the operation of Ethernet Units Using FINS UDP Tab Page in Edit Setting Function Parameters Dialog Box FINS UDP FINS UDP Port Specifies the local UDP port number to use in the FINS communi cations service The UDP uses the UDP port number to distinguish the application layer FINS communications service in this case e Default value 9 600 e User set value 1 to 65 535 Conversion Selects one of the following methods to convert from the FINS node address to an IP address FINS UDP only e Automatic generation dynamic setting e Automatic generation static setting IP address table Combined method IP Address Table Sets the IP address table that defines the relationship between FINS node addresses and IP addresses This table is effective only when FINS UDP is being used and the IP address conversion method is set to the IP address table Dynamic change the tar Selects dynamic change of other FINS UDP nodes IP addresses get IP addresses To disable dynamic changes deselect this option by removing the check mark When necessary set the routing tables using the CX Integrator 61 Other Parameters Section 3 10 Using FINS TCP Tab Page in Edit Setting Function Parameters Dialog Box FINS TCP FINS TCP Port Specifies the local TCP port number to use in the FINS communi cations service The TCP uses the TC
452. or code generated in origina tor New data could not be obtained from the CPU Unit when open ing connection The Unit will automatically retry and attempt to open the connection again This error may occur if the CPU Unit s cycle time was long when opening the con nection or the specified EM bank was converted to file memory If the cycle time was too long the problem will be resolved automat ically If the EM bank is set as file memory change the storage loca tion for the tag data The meaning of this error code is defined by each vendor so it depends on the tar get s specifications Contact the target device s manufac turer The meaning of this error code is defined by each vendor so it depends on the origi nator s specifica tions Contact the origina tor device s manufac turer 363 Error Log Function Section 14 4 14 4 Error Log Function Errors detected by the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port are stored in the error log along with the date and time of their occurrence The error log can be read and cleared from the Network Configurator Some error log records are cleared when the CPU Unit s power goes OFF and other records are not cleared 14 4 1 Error Log Data Specifications Each error is recorded as one record in the error log Item Specifications Record length 10 bytes record Number of records 64 records max Data type Binary
453. or non fatal error status OMRON PLCs only 6 The corresponding Target Node PLC Error Flag in words n 6 to n 9 is OFF When you want to use the Target Node PLC Error Flag the PLC status must be included in the tag sets for both the originator and target Include the PLC status by using the Network Configurator to select the Include Op tions in the Edit Tag Set Dialog Boxes For details refer to 6 3 2 Status Flags Related to Tag Data Links The following programming can be used to confirm that normal communica tions are being performed for each target node If the PLC status is included in the tag data the status of the PLC can also be detected 183 Ladder Programming with Tag Data Links Section 6 3 Programming for Revision 2 or Higher Tag Data Link Normal Target Node PLC Operating PLC Error Operating Flag 1 Flag 1 Flag 1 Node 1 Data Link Normal Operation Flag n 11 bit 01 n 20 bit 01 n 2 bit 01 n 6 bit 01 Normal Target Node PLC Operating PLC Error Flag 2 Flag 2 Flag 2 Node 2 Data Link Normal Operation Flag n 20 bit 02 n 2 bit 02 n 6 bit 02 Programming for Revision 1 and Revision 2 Tag Data Link All Tag Data Links Operating Operating l Normal Operation Flag n 11 bit 01 n 12 bit 14 PLC Operating PLC Error Flag 1 Flag 1 Node 1 Data Link Normal Operation Flag n 2 bit 01 n 6 bit 01 PLC Operating PLC Error Flag 2 Flag 2 Node 2 Data Link Normal Operation Flag n 2
454. ords can be used per tag for the CJ2M EIP21 A maximum data size of 1 444 bytes 722 words can be used per tag for other CPU Units With the CJ2H CPU6LI EIP or CJU2M CPU3L you can create tags by import ing network symbols i e I O allocation settings that were created using the CX Programmer into the Network Configurator Output tags can be defined to clear output data to 0 or to hold the output data when PLC outputs are turned OFF Setting Tag Sets Create output tag sets and input tag sets and position them Up to eight tag sets can be created The following are the limits on tag sets that can be cre ated with the CJ2B EIP21 built in EtherNet IP port on the CJ2H CJU2M EIP21 built in EtherNet IP port on the CJ2M CS1W EIP21 or CJ1W EIP21 e A maximum of 32 tag sets can be created per Unit for the CU2M EIP21 A maximum of 256 tag sets can be created per Unit for other CPU Units A maximum data size of 40 bytes 20 words can be used per tag set for the CJ2M EIP21 A maximum data size of 1 444 bytes 722 words can be used per tag set for other CPU Units The PLC status can be specified in a tag set to indicate the CPU Unit s operat ing status operating information and error information Setting Connections The target device output tag set and the originator device input tag set are associated as connections A maximum of 256 connections can be opened per Unit for the CJ2B EIP21 built in EtherNet IP po
455. ority Time tick command The timeout time specified by the Priority Time Tick is used as a base value to specify the actual timeout value For details refer to the description of the Pri ority Time Ticks and Time Out Ticks at the end of Appendix D CIP Message Communications Time Out Ticks command Specifies the base value of the timeout time For details refer to the descrip tion of the Priority Time Ticks and Time Out Ticks at the end of Appendix D CIP Message Communications Message request size command Specifies the number of bytes of data from the second service code to the request data The data size is specified in LSB MSB order For example if there are 400 bytes the data size is 0190 hex bytes which is entered as 90 01 hex Padding data command If the message request size specifies an odd number of bytes use 00 hex as padding in the last byte The padding data is not required if there is an even number of bytes Route path size command Specifies the number of words of data that are specified in the route path field Route path command Specifies the path route path to the target device For details refer to the description of the Route Path in Appendix D CIP Message Communications No of bytes received response This hexadecimal value is returned to indicate the number of bytes of data received after the service code response General status response The general status defined i
456. ork The following sections show how to check the device bandwidth being used by the tag data links in the designed network and how to set the appropriate values If the Network Configurator is used to set the connection type in the connec tion settings to a multicast connection multicast packets will be used If the connection type is set to a point to point connection multicast packets will not be used Adjusting the Communications Load Section 10 2 10 2 1 Checking Bandwidth Usage for Tag Data Links The Network Configurator can display the bandwidth actually used for tag data links at each EtherNet IP Unit based on the connections set in the net work configuration The device bandwidth used by tag data links can be checked by clicking the Detail Button in the Usage of Device Bandwidth Area at the bottom of the Net work Configuration Window EtherNet IP_1 Ee 192 168 250 1 192i CS1W EIP21 W Usage of Device Bandwidth 12 250 2 Comment Usage of Capacity Mbit s without M Usage of IP multic 192 168 2501 CS1W EIP21 1 00 4 00 0 048 0 048 Mbit s 192 168 2502 CJ1W EIP21 1 00 41 00 0 048 0 048 Mbit s Set Packet Interval RPD Total usage of IP multicast addresses 2 Network Total of Max Mbit s O 048Mbit s Item Description The IP address of the device Comment A description of the device The comment is displayed below the device icon The model number of the
457. ormally the tag data links in an EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port are started by grouping the tags created with the Network Configurator into a tag set and establishing a connection with the target device using that group of tags One connection is used per group tag set Up to 32 connections for the CJ2M and up to 256 connections for other CPU Units can be registered The following table gives the tag and tag set specifications Tags Tag sets CS1W EIP21 CJ1W EIP21 CJ2H CPULILJ EIP CJ2M CPU3 CS1W EIP21 CJ1W EIP21 CJ2H CPULILI EIP CJ2M CPU3 Total size of all tags lt 184 832 words Total size of all tags lt 640 words Maximum size of 1 tag set lt 722 words The maximum size is 721 words when the tag set includes the PLC status Maximum size of 1 tag set lt 20 words The maximum size is 19 words when the tag set includes the PLC status Maximum size of 1 tag lt 722 words The maximum size is 721 words when the tag set includes the PLC status Maximum size of 1 tag lt 20 words The maximum size is 19 words when the tag set includes the PLC status Number of tags per tag set lt 8 7 tags tag set when the tag set includes the PLC status Note Input and output variables cannot be combined Number of registrable tags lt 256 Number of registrable tags lt 32 Number of registrable
458. ory Card when the automatic file transfer function is used at startup Contains all of the parameter data for one CPU Unit There is no need for the user to distinguish the various types of data contained in the file All parameters in the file will be automati cally transferred to specified locations in memory at startup startup Program AUTOEXEC files Complete user pro gram Parameter AUTOEXEC area file PLC Setup Registered I O tables Routing tables CPU Bus Unit Setup and other setup data Note 1 Refer to information on file memory in the CS CJ series Programmable Controllers Operation Manual W339 2 All files transferred automatically at startup must have the name AUTOEX EC 316 Using File Memory Section 11 7 11 7 3 Initializing File Memory Memory 1 Insert the Memory Card into the CPU Unit Cards 2 Initialize the Memory Card from a Programming Device Programming Consoles included EM File Mem 1 Specify in the PLC Setup the first bank to convert to file memory ory 2 Initialize EM File Memory from the CX Programmer 11 7 4 I O Memory Data Format E IOM Format The IOM format is a data format used for binary data specified by the ladder instructions READ DATA FILE FREAD 700 and WRITE DATA FILE FWRIT 701 in the CPU Unit If five words of data from the I O memory 1234 hexadecimal 5678 hexadeci mal 9ABC hexadecimal etc is contained in
459. other causes of invalid replies Reserved by CIP for future extensions Key Failure in path The Key Segment that was included as the first segment in the path does not match the destination module The object specific status shall indicate which part of the key check failed Path Size Invalid The size of the path which was sent with the Service Request is either not large enough to allow the Request to be routed to an object or too much rout ing data was included Unexpected attribute in list An attempt was made to set an attribute that is not able to be set at this time Invalid Member ID The Member ID specified in the request does not exist in the specified Class Instance Attribute Member not settable A request to modify a non modifiable member was received Group 2 only server general failure This error code may only be reported by DeviceNet group 2 only servers with 4K or less code space and only in place of Service not supported Attribute not supported and Attribute not settable Reserved by CIP for future extensions 388 Reserved for Object Class and service errors This range of error codes is to be used to indicate Object Class specific errors Use of this range should only be performed when none of the Error Codes pre sented in this table accurately reflect the error that was encountered CIP Message Communications Appendix D Example of Additional Status in
460. p in the computer e Using the restore function to transfer all of the PLC data to a system with the same configuration e Transferring data to a new Unit after replacing a faulty Unit Procedure Select PLC Backup Tool from the CX Programmer s Tool Menu You can also select OMRON CX One CX Programmer PLC Backup Tool from the Windows Start Menu EA PLC Backup Tool Backup Menu Backup from PLC Collectively backs up the data in a PLC to save as files Compare Compares the data between backup files and PLC Restore to PLC Transfers the backup files to PLC Communication Settines Communication Settines Sets the method of communications with backup restore target PLO Current Settings PLC Model CJ2H Network Type EtherNet IP IP 192 168 250 1 Backup Menu Button Function Backup from PLC Click this button to back up data All of the data in the target PLC will be backed up to the com puter Compare Click this button to compare data The data in the PLC can be compared to the data ina backup file or the data in two backup files can be compared Any differences will be displayed Restore to PLC Click this button to restore data The data ina backup file will be transferred to the PLC to restore the status that existed when the data was backed up Communications Settings Button Function Communications Settings Click this button to set communications condi
461. patterns for the layout of the allocated CIO Area words the default settings and user settings The layout can be selected in the Status Area settings in the Edit Parameters Dialog Box from the CX Programmer To set a customer areas select User defined for the Layout Type on the Sta tus Area Tab Page The beginning word n is calculated by the following equation Beginning word n CIO 1500 25 x unit number Bit 15 8 7 0 Data direction Unit control bits CPU Unit gt EtherNet IP Unit Reserved EtherNet IP Unit gt CPU Unit Target Node PLC Operating Information 4 words only EtherNet IP Unit gt CPU Unit Target Node PLC Error Information 4 words only EtherNet IP Unit gt CPU Unit Unit status 1 Unit status 2 Communications status 1 Communications status 3 EtherNet IP Unit gt CPU Unit a N EE 2 EtherNet IP Unit gt CPU Unit Reserved EtherNet IP Unit gt CPU Unit Registered Target Node 4 words only EtherNet IP Unit gt CPU Unit Normal Target Node EtherNet IP Unit gt CPU Unit 4 words only FINS TCP Connection Status EtherNet IP Unit gt CPU Unit Note The reserved words are regularly refreshed with all zeroes CIO Area Allocations Section 4 2 User Settings Offset Bit 15 8 7 0 Data direction 0 n Unit control bits CPU Unit gt EtherNet IP Unit 1 n 1 Reserved EtherNet IP Unit C
462. pecified ranges of 1 0 Memory Description e Contains word 16 bit data from a starting word through an end word in one memory area The following areas can be used CIO HR WR AR DM and EM Program file KRKKKEEK Complete user pro gram Contains all the programs for cyclic tasks and interrupt tasks as well as task infor mation for one CPU Unit Parameter area file kkk kk kkk PLC Setup Registered I O tables Routing tables CPU Bus Unit Setup and other setup data Contains all of the parameter data for one CPU Unit There is no need for the user to distinguish the various types of data contained in the file The file can be automatically read to or written from the CPU Unit simply by speci fying the extension STD Files Data files trans ferred at AUTOEXEC 1 0 Memory data for the specified number of words starting from There does not necessarily need to be a data file in the Memory Card when the automatic file transfer function is used at D20000 startup The AUTOEXEC IOM file always contains DM Area data starting at D20000 All data in the file will be transferred to memory starting at D20000 at startup There must be a program file in the Mem ory Card when the automatic file transfer function is used at startup Contains all the programs for cyclic tasks and interrupt tasks as well as task infor mation for one CPU Unit There must be a parameter file in the Mem
463. plains how to manage and use IP addresses 5 1 5 2 5 3 IPAddress 025 oy ots ue eens Ween e edt Se EM ARES 5 1 1 IP Address Configuration 0 0000 cee eee eee 5 1 2 Allocating IP Addresses 0 00 0 eee eee eee eee 5 1 3 EtherNet IP Unit IP Address Settings 5 1 4 Subnet Masks nee sick dy sas eee pe si ae Sein see ee a 5 1 55 CIDR ait inti siea eke S E cent eae Gs IP Addresses in FINS Communications 0000002 ee eee 5 2 1 Specifying Nodes in FINS Communications Services 5 2 2 Pairing Addresses in Internal Tables 0 5 2 3 Application Examples 0 0 eee eee eee eee 5 2 4 Related Products and Communications Setting Methods 5 2 5 Pairing IP Addresses and FINS Node Addresses Private and Global Addresses 0 0 0 cece ee eee 5 3 1 Private and Global Addresses 00 0 0 00 00 00 5 3 2 Using a Private Address for the EtherNet IP Unit 5 3 3 EtherNet IP Unit with a Global Address SECTION 5 Determining IP Addresses 92 92 92 93 93 94 94 94 96 102 103 105 106 106 107 109 91 IP Addresses Section 5 1 5 1 IP Addresses 5 1 1 IP Address Configuration IP addresses are made up of 32 bits of binary data divided into four 8 bit fields called octets These four octets provide the network number net ID and host number host ID The n
464. played Select Connect Network Port Select a network port that you would like to connect Feed TCP 2 Device Information Vendor ID Product Name Device Type Revision Refresh Coa 4 After clicking TCP 2 click the OK Button The Network Configurator will be connected to the EtherNet IP network If the Network Configurator is con nected online properly On line will be displayed in the status bar at the bot tom of the window Connecting through the CPU Unit s USB or RS 232C Port CJ2 CPU Units Only Connect to the EtherNet IP Unit s Ethernet port via the CPU Unit s USB port or RS 232C port 1 2 3 1 Select Option Select Interface CJ2 USB Serial Port to set the com munications interface 163 Setting Tag Data Links Section 6 2 2 Select Network Connect The Setup Interface Dialog Box will be dis played Setup Interface Port Type v Port OMRO v Baud Rate 115200 Bit s Cor 3 Set the port type to either USB or serial 4 Set the port to use and then click the OK Button Leave the baud rate at the default setting The following dialog box will be displayed Select Connect Network Port Select a network port that you would like to connect Browse J Device Information Vendor ID Product Name Device Type Revision Refresh Option Cancel 5 Select the Backplane Icon and click the Refresh Button The CPU Unit CPU Bus Units and Specia
465. put tag sets are connections that are already set e To prevent duplicate settings input tag sets that have been used are not displayed in the list box for input tag sets e If there is no applicable input tag set you can edit a tag set or create a new one by using the Edit Tag Sets Button and Edit Tag Button 6 Once the input tag set settings have been completed click the Finish But ton You can check the set connection by selecting Network View Devic es Connection Structure Tree from the menus e The Wizard can be ended even if the input tag set includes a blank row In that case a connection is not created for the blank row e You can delete a connection by deleting the input tag sets that were previ ously set 158 Setting Tag Data Links Section 6 2 6 2 8 Creating Connections by Device Dragging and Dropping You can create a connection to the originator by dragging a target device and dropping it at the originator device Network Configurator version 3 10 or higher is required to drag and drop devices to make connections Example Drag the target device at 192 168 250 1 and drop it at the orig inator device at 192 168 250 100 Drag amp Drop FJ gt gt EtherNet IP_1 wo 091682504 i lt 187168250100 MO Master Note The EtherNet IP originator device i e a device in which connections can be set must be one of the following OMRON EtherNet IP devices Device name Remarks CJ1W EIP21 CJ1W E
466. r Tag sets Number of tags per tag set 8 max 7 max if PLC status is included Number of words per tag set 20 max 40 bytes for CJ2M 722 max 1 444 bytes for other CPU Units Number of tag sets per Unit 32 max for CJ2M 256 max for other CPU Units Connections Number of connections per Unit 32 max for CJ2M 256 max for other CPU Units 115 Overview of Tag Data Links Section 6 1 Item Specification Connection type Each connection can be set for 1 to 1 unicast or 1 to N mul ticast communications Default Multicast Packet interval RPI 1 to 10 000 ms for CJ2M and 0 5 to 10 000 ms for other CPU Units in 0 5 ms units The packet interval can be set separately for each connection System Configuration Conditions for Setting Tags Using Symbols or I O Memory Addresses Local tags for tag data links can be set using I O memory addresses or net work symbols Support for network symbols however depends on the model of CPU Unit as shown in the following table Communications with the remote node are possible regardless of whether the remote node tags are set using I O memory addresses or network symbols Name in hardware list CPU Unit EtherNet IP Unit or Symbol name I O memory of Network built in EtherNet IP port specification address Configurator specification CJ2B EIP21 CJ2H CPU6 CJ2H CPU OK CJ2M EIP21 CJ2M CPU3 CJ2M CPU3 OK
467. r Communications Controller Error IP Address Duplication Error Link OFF Error Status Area Layout Setting Error 73 CIO Area Allocations 74 Unit Error Occurred Status Manipulated by Section 4 2 Unit operation Indicates that an error occurred that is related to EtherNet IP Unit operation This flag is turned ON when any bit in Unit Status 1 is ON Bits 1 to 15 are logi cally ORed Indicates that a Unit error did not occur This flag is turned OFF when the error is cleared Network Error Occurred One or more network related errors occurred The bits in Communica tions Status 1 and 3 are log ically ORed Indicates that a network error did not occur This flag is turned OFF when the error is cleared Not used Unit Memory Error Indicates that an error occurred in accessing the Unit s internal non volatile memory device error Indicates that a non volatile memory error did not occur This flag is not cleared even if it occurs one time Flag remains ON Communications Controller Error Indicates that an error occurred in the communica tions controller Indicates that a communica tions controller error did not occur This flag remains ON until the power supply is turned OFF and ON again IP Address Duplica tion Error An ARP was sent with the specified IP address indi cating that an IP address duplication was dete
468. r because the connec tion is already closed Error code returned from target Attempted to open a connection with an unsupported connection type This error does not occur Check which con nection types can be used by the target Contact the manu facturer Only multicast and point to point can be set Check which con nection types can be used by the origina tor An error will occur if a connection other than multicast or point to point is set 359 Connection Status Codes and Error Processing Connection status General Additional Status Status hex hex Source of error Error code returned from target The connection size settings are different in the originator and target Handling Section 14 3 Configuration 1 Configuration 2 Configuration 3 Check the connection sizes set in the originator and target Error code returned from target The target was unable to open the connection because of its operating status such as down loading settings Check whether the tag data link is stopped at the tar get Restart the tag data link com munications with the control bit Depends on the tar get s specifications Contact the target device s manufac turer Check whether the tag data link is stopped at the origi nator Restart the tag data link commu nications with the control bit Error code returned from target
469. r tag data links can be stopped and started for the entire network or individual devices from the Net work Configurator Starting and stopping tag data links for individual devices must be performed for the originator Software switches in allocated words can also be used to start and stop tag data links for the entire network Refer to 6 2 13 Starting and Stopping Tag Data Links for details 6 1 3 Tag Data Link Functions and Specifications Communications Standard EtherNet IP implicit communications connection type type cyclic communications Setting method After setting tags tag sets and connections with the Network Configurator the tag data link parameters must be down loaded to all devices in the EtherNet IP network With a CJ2H CPU6LI EIP or CJU2ZM CPU3L CPU Unit a sym bol table can be created with the CX Programmer and then imported into the Network Configurator to allocate tags After the parameters are downloaded the EtherNet IP Units are restarted to start the tag data links Applicable CPU Unit data CIO Area DM Area EM Area Holding Area Work Area and symbols See note Number of words per tag 20 max 40 bytes for CJ2M 722 max 1 444 bytes for other CPU Units Number of tags per Unit 32 max for CJ2M 256 max for other CPU UNits Note With the CJ2H CPU6LI EIP or CJ2M CPU3L network symbols I O allocation settings created using the CX Programmer can be imported into the Network Configu rato
470. r 0 x 110C File read error FINS error 0 x 1104 An error occurs when reading the file File read error FINS error 0 x 110B File write error FINS error 0 x 2106 An error occurs when reading the file File write error FINS error 0 x 2107 FINS error MRES 0 x XX SRES 0 x XX Some other FINS error has occurred Length of directory name too long The path name of the directory is too long No space to create entry FINS error 0 x 2103 There are too many files to create a new one No such device FINS error 0 x 2301 The file device cannot be found No such file or directory The specified file or directory does not exist No such file or directory FINS error 0 x 2006 No such file or directory FINS error 0 x 2106 Not enough memory The communications buffers are full Not enough space in the system The file device is full FINS error 1104 PLC communication error timeout File access timed out Socket canceled The socket was canceled Socket error NN A socket bind error occurred The error code will be given at NN Socket receive error NN A data reception error occurred The error code will be given at NN Socket send error NN A data send error occurred The error code will be given at NN Timeout 900 seconds closing control connection The connection was closed because the client did not respond for 15 minutes Too many open files Too many sockets
471. r Time aei aa Ee e RER ARRE eee 320 11 9 Host Computer Application Example 0 00020 e eee eee 321 301 Overview and Specifications Section 11 1 11 1 Overview and Specifications 11 1 1 Overview The EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port has a built in FTP File Trans fer Protocol server function so other computers on the Ethernet can read or write upload download large files in the EM file memory by executing FTP commands from the FTP client software FTP can be used for EtherNet IP Units with unit version 2 0 Intranet FTP client Specify the file and upload or download Jo using FTP commands such as get and put Ethernet EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port Download y Upload Large file Files in the EM File Memory or the Memory Card mounted to the CPU Unit Note Only one FTP client can connect at the same time 302 FTP Server Function Details Section 11 2 11 1 2 Specifications Executable com open Connects the specified host FTP server mands user Specifies user name for the remote FTP server ls Displays the Memory Card file names dir Display the Memory Card file names and details rename Changes a file name mkdir Creates a new directory in the working directory in the remote host rmdir Deletes a new directory from the working directory in the remote host cd Changes t
472. r all of the connections at the same time a Click the Set Packet Interval RPI Button at the bottom of the Usage of Device Bandwidth Dialog Box Set Packet Interval RPD b The Set Packet Interval RPI Dialog Box will be displayed Input a new RPI value and click the OK Button Set Packet Interval RPD Packet Interval RPD 500 ms 05 100000 ms Target Device IT 192 168 250 1 CS1W EIP21 m 192 168 250 2 CJ1W EIP21 273 Adjusting the Communications Load Section 10 2 274 Method 2 Changing a Particular Device s RPI Setting The usage of capacity can be adjusted for only a particular device by changing the packet intervals RPI for all of the device s connections to gether In this case the usage of capacity will also change for the devices that are the target devices of the connection which was adjusted a Click the Set Packet Interval RPI Button at the bottom of the Usage of Device Bandwidth Dialog Box Set Packet Interval RPD b The Set Packet Interval RPI Dialog Box will be displayed In the Tar get Device Area deselect the target devices that are not being adjust ed by removing the check marks Set Packet Interval RPD Packet Interval RPD 50 0 ms 05 10000 0 ms Target Device O a 192 168 250 2 CJ1W EIP21 c Input anew RPI value and click the OK Button Method 3 Changing a Particular Connection s RPI Setting The usage of capacity can be adjusted
473. r details on pairing FINS node addresses with IP addresses and UDP TCP port numbers refer to 5 2 IP Addresses in FINS Communications Application Layer Transport Layer IP Address Ethernet Address Internet Layer Ethernet Physical Layer The FINS communications service is a communications method based on UDP IP and it is supported by most OMRON Ethernet related products In this manual it is called the FINS UDP method In addition to supporting the FINS UDP method the CJ2H CPULILI EIP CJ2M CPU3L CS1W EIP21 and CJ1W EIP21 support FINS communications using TCP IP In this man ual this is called the FINS TCP method 198 Overview of FINS Communications Section 8 1 8 1 2 Using the FINS UDP and FINS TCP Methods It is recommended that FINS UDP and FINS TCP be used as follows When remote devices do not support the FINS TCP method Use the FINS UDP method for FINS communications with those devices When FINS nodes are connected on the same Ethernet segment Use the FINS UDP method between those nodes Note FINS UDP offers a slight advantage in performance e When FINS nodes are connected over multiple IP network layers Use the FINS TCP method between those nodes Note FINS TCP offers superior communications quality e When the quality of connections is unreliable as with wireless LAN Use the FINS TCP method between those nodes Note FINS TCP off
474. r media converter had been exceeded as the result of how the network was wired e g switch hub or cascade connection causing a tag data link to operate abnor mally Check the bandwidth of the transmission path for all cascade con nections If the bandwidth is exceeded rewire the network or increase the bandwidth between switching hubs e g to 1 Gbps If these countermea sures are not possible change the connection settings e g the RPI set tings and adjust the bandwidth for all cascade connections until the total network bandwidth is not exceeded Is the network bandwidth usage under 100 Mbps for each node If any node exceeds 100 Mbps change the connections settings such as the RPI Is the usage of capacity under 100 for each node If any node exceeds 100 change the connections settings such as the RPI Is the total network bandwidth usage under 100 Mbps This appears as Network Total of Max Mbit s in the dialog box shown on page 269 If the total bandwidth usage exceeds 100 Mbps the bandwidth of part of the transmission path e g a switching hub or media converter had been exceeded as the result of how the network was wired e g switch hub or cascade connection causing a tag data link to operate abnor mally Check the bandwidth of the transmission path for all cascade con nections If the bandwidth is exceeded rewire the network or increase the bandwidth between switching hubs e g to 1 G
475. r of stored records is fixed at 0008 8 records Number of Stored Records Response The number of IP router table records stored at the time the command is executed is returned in hexadecimal IP Router table Records Response The number of IP router table records specified in the number of records parameter is returned The total num ber of bytes in the IP router table records is calculated as the number of records x 8 bytes record The configu ration of the 8 bytes of data in each record is shown below 1 8 bytes Pees Rese IP Network address Router IP address Network ID IP Network Address The network ID from the IP address in hexadecimal The network ID part corresponding to the address class determined by the leftmost 3 bits set here is enabled Router IP Address The IP address in hexadecimal of a router connected to a network specified with IP addresses Precautions If the IP router table contains fewer records than the number specified in the number of records parameter all the records contained in the IP router table when the command is executed will be returned and the command execution will end normally Response Codes Response code Description Normal end Command too large Command too small PROTOCOL STATUS READ Reads the protocol status or the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port Command Block 27 62 Command code Response Block Command Response IP status I
476. r on J Windows computer aE E ua mmm Ethernet CS CJ series CPU Unit EtherNet IP CS CJ series CJ2 CPU Unit 1 2 3 1 Select Option Select Interface Ethernet CS CJ1 ETN EIP Unit I F 165 Setting Tag Data Links Section 6 2 2 Select Network Connect The following Setup Interface Dialog Box will be displayed f Setup Interface Ee Host PC Information Host Name OMRONO2 IP Address 192 168 251 1 Network Address Node Address Remote Information Registration Name f gt EtherNet IP Unit Network Address Node Addres Unit No Ethernet Unit Pott No IP Address Setup Cancel 3 Click the Setup Button in the Setup Interface Dialog Box The Registration of the connection Dialog Box will be displayed Enter the network informa tion for the connection destination and then click the Add Button to regis ter the settings Registration of the connection Exa Register List Registration Name EIP Registratio Node Unit Port I Host PC Information Network Address Node Address Remote Information EtherNet IP Unit Network Address N Node Address w Unit No Ethemet Unit Port No 9600 7 IPAddress 192 168 250 3 Dette au Cose The registration information details are as follows a Registration name Enter any name b Host PC information Enter information for the c
477. r the error log Command code Function name ERROR LOG READ ERROR LOG CLEAR For details refer to Appendix E FINS Commands Addressed to EtherNet IP Units or Built in EtherNet IP Ports 364 Error Log Function Section 14 4 14 4 4 Error Log Error Codes CPU Unit watchdog timer error Detail code First byte 00 hex Second byte 00 hex Saved in EEPROM Yes CPU Unit service monitoring error Monitoring time ms Yes Other CPU error Bit D11 Unit not in Registered I O Tables Other bits are reserved for system use I O bus error 00 hex 00 hex CPU Unit initialization error 00 hex 00 hex Event timed out MRC main command SRC subcommand CPU Unit memory error 01 hex Read error 02 hex Write error 03 hex Routing tables 50 hex CPU Bus Unit Area CIO or DM CPU Unit fatal error 00 hex 00 hex Tag database error 00 hex 00 hex Resend count exceeded send failed Node address setting error send failed Remote node not in network send failed No Unit with specified unit address send failed CPU Unit error send failed Destination address not in routing tables send failed Not registered in routing tables send failed Routing table error send failed Too many relay points send failed Command too long send failed Header error send failed In
478. ration to a different input tag set it is necessary to de lete the tag from the tag set in which it was originally registered 131 Setting Tag Data Links 132 Section 6 2 Open the Edit Device Parameters Dialog Box select the tag set containing the tag that you want to delete and click the Delete Button in the Edit Tag Dialog Box If there are other tags registered in that tag set it is possible to delete just one tag by selecting the tag that you want to delete in the Edit Tag Set Dialog Box and clicking the Button Edit Device Parameters Connections Tag Sets In Consume Out Produce Name Over Size Bit ID DO0000 2Byte Auto kE Door hh SS SS SS D00002 2Byte Auto D00003 2Byte Auto New Edt Delete Expandall Collapse All Edit Tags _ Delete all of unused Tag Sets Usage Count 4 256 Import To From File Cancel At this point a confirmation dialog box will be displayed to confirm that you want to delete the selected tag set and the tags contained in that tag set Network Configurator Selected Tag sets and Tags that the Tag sets have will be deleted OK e TF you select No it will delete the Tag sets only If the No Button is clicked only the tag set will be deleted Click the No But ton Setting Tag Data Links 13 14 15 16 17 Section 6 2 In order to edit a registered tag set an
479. ration will continue The unit number of the CPU Bus Unit involved is stored in word A427 0 No setting error 1 Setting error A40207 CPU Bus Unit Error Flag Non fatal error Bit A40207 is turned ON when an error occurs during the transmission of data between the CPU and CPU Bus Units The ERR ALM indicator on the front of the CPU Unit will flash but CPU operation will continue The Unit where the error occurred will stop The unit number of the CPU Bus Unit involved is stored in word A422 0 No unit number error 1 Unit number error A40300 to A40308 Memory Error Location When a memory error occurs the Memory Error Flag A40115 is turned ON and one of the following flags is turned ON to indicate the memory area where the error occurred A40300 User program A40304 PLC Setup A40305 Registered I O Tables A40307 Routing Tables The ERR ALM indicator on the front of the CPU Unit will light and CPU operation will stop 0 Normal 1 Error A41000 to A41015 88 CPU Bus Unit Num ber Duplication Flags The Duplication Error Flag A40113 and the corresponding flag in A410 will be turned ON when a CPU Bus Unit s unit number has been duplicated Bits 00 to 15 correspond to unit numbers 0 to F The ERR ALM indicator on the front of the CPU Unit will light and CPU operation will stop 0 No duplication 1 Duplication Auxiliary Area Data Word s A41700 to A41
480. rds MEMORY AREA FILL Writes the same data to the specified range of I O memory area words MULTIPLE MEMORY AREA READ Reads the contents of specified non consecutive I O memory area words MEMORY AREA TRANSFER Copies the contents of consecutive I O memory area words to another I O memory area Parameter access registered I O tables routing tables etc PARAMETER AREA READ Reads the contents of consecutive parameter area words PARAMETER AREA WRITE Writes the contents of consecutive parameter area words PARAMETER AREA FILL CLEAR Writes the same data to the specified range of parameter area words Program area access PROGRAM AREA READ Reads the UM User Memory area PROGRAM AREA WRITE Writes to the UM User Memory area PROGRAM AREA CLEAR Clears the UM User Memory area Operating mode changes RUN Changes the CPU Unit s operating mode to RUN or MONITOR STOP Changes the CPU Unit s operating mode to PROGRAM Machine configura tion reading CPU UNIT DATA READ Reads CPU Unit data CONNECTION DATA READ Reads the model numbers of the device corresponding to addresses Status reading CPU UNIT STATUS READ Reads the status of the CPU Unit CYCLE TIME READ Reads the maximum minimum and average cycle time Time data access CLOCK READ Reads the present year month date minute second and day o
481. re used The length of the cables between the Units is 50 m for all connections Send processing delay 5 ms x 15 5 100 0 7475 ms Cable delay 545 ns x 50 m 100 272 5 ns Switching hub delay 0 7 ms Receive processing delay 1 16 x 0 043 ms 1 688 ms Tag data link delay 0 7475 ms 0 0002725 ms 0 7 ms 1 688 ms 3 14 ms Communications System Section 10 1 PLC 17 5 ms 200 words 200 words x 16 5 ms 200 words 267 Adjusting the Communications Load Section 10 2 10 2 Adjusting the Communications Load 268 Note In an Ethernet network using a switching hub the network bandwidth is not shared by all of the nodes independent transmission paths are established between individual nodes through the switching hub A dedicated communications buffer is established in the switching hub for communications between the nodes and full duplex communications simulta neous transmission and reception are performed asynchronously with other transmission paths The communications load in other transmission paths does not affect communications so packet collisions do not occur and stable high speed communications can be performed The switching hub functions shown in the following table determine the perfor mance of tag data links Item Description Buffer capacity This is the amount of data that can be buffered when packets accumulate at the switchi
482. replace the Memory Card or EtherNet IP Unit or for a built in EtherNet IP port the CPU Unit Flashing red 348 I O bus error An error occurred while exchanging data with the CPU Unit e If the Unit is the orig inator of the tag data link connection it stops communica tions e If the Unit is the tar get of the tag data link connection and the PLC status is included in the com munications data the corresponding Target Node PLC Error Flag will be turned ON Check and correct the CPU Unit s operating environ ment Using the LED Indicators and Display for Troubleshooting Section 14 2 Indicator Unit operation Flag Countermeasure 7 segment status Flashing CPU Unit A parity error Records the error in Register the rout red memory error occurred during the error log If the ing tables in the an operation routing tables were CPU Unit again such as reading being read the rout and restart the the routing ing tables are treated CPU Unit tables as missing Replace the CPU Unit if the error recurs A memory error If a symbol tag Download the tag has occurred for name is specified in data to the CPU the tag data the tag data link or Unit again base inthe CPU Unit Status Area Replace the CPU Unit CJ2H refreshing the user Unit if the error CJ2M CPU Unit specified status area recurs only is stopped and tag data links will oper ate as follows
483. ries PLCs 57 Tag Data Link Parameters Section 3 9 The following method can be used to easily set the data links shown in the fol lowing figure using a wizard in the EtherNet IP Datalink Tool Node 1 CJ1H CPU67H Node 2 CJ1H CPU67H Node 3 CJ1H CPU67H IP address 192 168 250 1 IP address 192 168 250 2 IP address 192 168 250 3 EtherNet IP wo 50 words w50 50 words w100 50 words Area 2 D50 100 words D150 100 words D250 100 words 1 2 3 1 Start the Network Configurator select the applicable EtherNet IP Unit in the Tree View on the left and then paste it into the Device Configuration Pane on the right Note If an EtherNet IP system has already been installed you can create a similar device configuration by connecting to the EtherNet IP network and selecting Network Upload from the menus Refer to 6 2 9 Connecting the Network Configurator to the Network for infor mation on connecting Untitled Network Configurator File Edit View Network Device EDSFile Tools Option Help Doi a amp _ EtherNet IP_1 y Network Configurator a EtherNet IP Hardware i Vendor ro Omron Corporation ae Sommunications Adapte 192 168 250 1 192 168 250 2 192 168 250 3 CJTW EIP21 CJ1W EIP21 CJTW EIP21 C 1w ElP21 CJ2 CJ2B E1P21 Usage of Device Bandwidth CS1W EIP21 S Rev 1 Message Code Description lt F LiEtherNet IP T Unknown Intel R PRO 100 VE Network Conn
484. rmat Function Is Format Function Q Format Function rename Format Function Section 11 5 user user name Specifies the user name Specify the FTP login name set in the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port system setup The default FTP login name is CONFIDENTIAL If a non default login name is used it must be followed by the password In this case enter the FTP password set in the system setup The user name is automatically requested immediately after connection to the FTP server ls 1 REMOTE_FILE NAME local_file_ name Displays the remote host Memory Card or EM File Memory file names Set the switch I to display not only the file names but the creation date and size as well If the switch is not set only the file names will be displayed You can specify a file name in the Memory Card or EM File Memory if desired If a local file name is specified the file information will be stored in the speci fied file in the host computer dir REMOTE FILE NAME local_file_name Displays the file names date created and size of the files in the remote host Memory Card or EM File Memory It displays the same information as com mand Is l Specify a file name in the Memory Card or EM File Memory as the remote file name If a local file name is specified the file information is stored in the specified file in the host computer rename CURRENT FILE NAME NEW FILE NAME
485. rmation can be obtained from the device on the network if the network is online 3 The device can be added to the Hardware List as a new device just like installing an EDS file Note Device parameters cannot be set with the Network Configurator s EDS file creation function Obtain a proper EDS file from the manufacturer of the device to make device parameter settings for the device Deleting EDS Files EDS File Delete To delete an EDS file use the following procedure 1 Select the device from the Hardware List 2 Select EDS File Delete The following confirmation window will be displayed Network Configurator amp C 1W EIP21 Rev 1 will be deleted OK 3 Click the Yes Button The selected device will be deleted from the Hardware List together with the EDS file Saving EDS Files EDS File Save To save the EDS file use the following procedure 1 Select the device from the Hardware List 2 Select EDS file Save As The following window will be displayed to specify the name of the folder where the EDS file will be saved and the name of the EDS file 420 EDS File Management Appendix F Save EDS File Save in Eds O 2 eo R 3F68M DRT141 eds E 3G3MV PDRT2 eds E 3G3FV PDRT1 SIN eds E 3G3PV PDRT1 SINV1 eds E 3G3FV PDRT1 SINV1 eds E 3G3PV PORT2 eds E 3G3FV PDRT2 eds E 3G3RY P105T8 DRT E eds E 3G3MV PDRT1 SIN eds E 3G3RY PDRT2 eds 3 3G3MV PDRT1 SINY1 eds E 3G8F7 DRM21
486. rnet Unit combined method Com munications are not pos FinsGateway Version 4 xx or sible with personal lower computers with variable IP addresses Version 2003 or Yes higher 103 IP Addresses in FINS Communications Models Supporting Automatic Generation Method Static Models Supporting IP Address Table Method 104 Product Programmable Terminal Model Series Version NS Series Open Network Controller ONC Product CS series Ethernet Unit 100BASE TX Model Series Version CS1W ETN21 Section 5 2 Supports automatic generation method dynamic No Set manually so that automatic settings can be used with the automatic generation method Supports automatic generation method static Yes 10BASE 5 CS1W ETNO1 10BASE T CS1W ETN11 Yes Simply called auto matic generation method CJ series Ethernet Unit 100BASE TX CJ1W ETN21 Yes 10BASE T CJ1W ETN11 CV CVM1 series Ethernet Unit 10BASE 5 CV500 ETNO1 FinsGateway Version 4 xx or lower Yes Simply called auto matic generation method Version 2003 or higher Yes Programmable Terminal NS Series Open Network Controller ONC Product CS series Ethernet Unit 100BASE TX Model Series Version CS1W ETN21 10BASE 5 CS1W ETNO1 10BASE T CS1W ETN11 CJ series Ethernet Unit 100BASE
487. rom File eve Information about the connection with device 192 168 250 20 is registered in the Register Device List Double click this connection to edit the settings 192 168 250 20 CJ1W EIP21 Edit Connection It will add a connection configuration to originator device Please confiaure the Taa Set each of oriainator device and taraet device Originator Device Target Device Node Address 192 168 250 1 Node Address 192 168 250 20 Comment CJ1W EIP21 Comment CJ1W EIP21 Input Tag Set Edit Tag Sets Output Tag Set TagSet20_192 168 250 1 22B yt v TagSet20_192 168 250 20 22Byte v Multi cast connection v Connection Type Detail Parameter Packet Interval RPI 50 0 ms 0 5 10000 0 ms Timeout Value Packet Interval RPI x 4 Pornectn Name CN01_19 Connection Structure 5 TagSet7_192 168 250 7 3 TagSet8_192 168 250 1 M 50 0ms 192 168 250 8 CJ1W EIP21 5 TagSet8_192 168 250 8 amp 3 TagSet9_192 168 250 1 M 50 0ms 192 168 250 9 CJ1W EIP21 5 TagSet9_192 168 250 9 J 281 Adjusting the Communications Load Section 10 2 282 In the Edit Connection Dialog Box input 1 0 ms as the new RPI value and click the OK Button The tag data link bandwidth being used by device 192 168 250 1 Usage of Capacity increases to 54 67 which indicates that a RPI is set to a higher speed for this device Usage of Device Bandwidth P 192 168 250 1 P 192 168 2
488. rom the CPU Unit b Over Load function disabled Output data will be maintained even when all outputs from the PLC are turned OFF from the CPU Unit e Area 1 Link CH The I O memory address of the first word in link area 1 e Area 1 Size The number of words in link area 1 See note e Area 2 Link CH The I O memory address of the first word in link area 2 e Area 2 Size The number of words in link area 2 See note Note With the Network Configurator the PLC status will be shown at the beginning of each area The PLC status includes the CPU Unit op erating status operating information and error information 151 Setting Tag Data Links Setting Procedure 152 1 2 3 Section 6 2 e Tag Set Name If the Wizard is used the names will be automatically assigned using consecutive IP addresses in the following form for both input and output tags TagSet1_192168 250 1 There is no reason to be concerned with these names If the Wizard is not used then names will not be automatically assigned and they must be entered directly into the data link table Total Size The total number of words in areas 1 and 2 This value is auto matically displayed after the sizes of areas 1 and 2 are entered Node For an input tag this is the IP address of the node that provides the output For an output tag will be entered automatically Target Variable The target tag set name For an input tag this is the name of the targe
489. router from being sent outside the LAN Generally as shown below global addresses in the intranet are allocated only to IP routers such as broadband routers interfacing with the Internet All other nodes in the intranet including the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port are allocated private addresses Intranet Personal computer CX Programmer etc Firewall I Private address IP router Not output to Internet Internet Global address Intranet ae Firewall Communications Services That Require Global Addresses for EtherNet IP Units and built in EtherNet IP ports 106 ee ee ee ee A E E E E E E E i i oe CPA address router l Private address required a 1 Not output to Internet Private address Personal computer CX Programmer etc I I Ethernet EtherNet IP G m A global address is required for the IP addresses of the EtherNet IP Units and built in EtherNet IP port when the following communications services are used over the Internet e FINS communications services e Explicit message communications services Private and Global Addresses Section 5 3 5 3 2 Using a Private Address for the EtherNet IP Unit a a a i Ten a a a mS sg C Intranet Intranet FINS communicat
490. routing tables are used for one or more other nodes on the same network It is not necessary to set routing tables if one Communications Unit is mounted to the PLC and the nodes are connected as one network 201 FINS TCP Method 8 3 FINS TCP Method 8 3 1 Overview FINS TCP Features 202 Section 8 3 The FINS TCP method is a FINS communications method that uses the TCP IP protocol TCP IP is a connection type communications protocol Before a message is sent from one node to another it is necessary to establish a vir tual circuit i e a connection Once a connection has been established com munications are quite reliable The arrival of data that is sent via the connection is confirmed by an acknowledgement ACK response and retries are executed automatically as required When FINS TCP is used it must be determined which node is the server and which nodes are the clients For communications between a personal computer and a PLC the computer should normally be set as the client and the PLC as the server For communi cations between two PLCs either one can be set as the client and the other as the server Node Client Node Server _ Ration o enia oredan ennasiay established Notification of establishing connection 7 7 as Acknowledgement Acknowledgement _ a aa An acknowledgement is received whenever a connection is established or data is sent so
491. rror log stored in RAM in the EtherNet IP Unit or CPU Unit with the built in EtherNet IP Port Up to 64 records can be stored in the error log The time and date that the error occurred are also recorded together The error log can be read or cleared from the CPU Unit by sending an FINS command to the EtherNet IP Unit Error Log Read Clear The contents of the error log can also be monitored from the Configurator _ Code Mi Code 64 records __ Code ria FINS command Read out gt CPU Unit Monitor gt Configurator When a communications error has occurred details on the error are indi cated by the MS and NS indicators and the 7 segment display on the front panel of the EtherNet IP Unit or CPU Unit with the built in EtherNet IP port This information can be used for troubleshooting Example Routing table error Flashing red SS N LE Not relevant S9 u Communications status 3 15 00 EtherNet IP CPU Unit Unit Message Communications Errors Section 7 6 7 6 Message Communications Errors The following table shows the main errors that may occur when messages are sent or received Refer to SECTION 14 Troubleshooting and Error Processing for corrective measures and details on errors that are recorded in error log but not indicated by the LED indicators Indicators Error code NS 7 seg
492. rt number and FINS node number Ethernet V2 IP UDP FINS header FINS data a IP Addresses in FINS Communications Section 5 2 e Ethernet address A fixed number is assigned to each EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port and it cannot be changed e IP address Use the default IP address 192 168 250 FINS_node number set the address in the allocated DM Area words or set the address on the TCP IP Tab Page of the Edit Parameters Dialog Box from the CX Program mer e FINS UDP port No Use the default FINS UDP port number 9600 or set the number on the FINS UDP Tab Page of the Edit Parameters Dialog Box from the CX Pro grammer e FINS TCP port No Use the default FINS TCP port number 9600 or set the number on the FINS UDP Tab Page of the Edit Parameters Dialog Box from the CX Pro grammer e FINS node address Set the number using the Node Address Setting Switches NODE NO on the front of the Ether Net IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port Pairing IP Addresses with A particular IP address is allocated to each communications node including FINS Node Addresses at EtherNet IP Units and built in EtherNet IP ports The IP address must be Local Nodes paired with the FINS node address 1 to 254 by one of the following methods m Automatic Generation Method Dynamic Static Set the relationship between the IP address and the FINS node address set ting in the EtherNet IP Unit or built in
493. rt on the CJ2H CS1W EIP21 or CJU1W EIP21 A maximum of 32 connections can be opened per Unit for the CJ2M EIP21 built in EtherNet IP port on the CJ2M Counting Connections The number of connections is the total of the number of input tag sets that receive data and the number of nodes that send data for output tag sets Refer to the following figure One connection is consumed for each connec tion setting whether the connection is a multicast connection or a unicast point to point connection 113 Overview of Tag Data Links Section 6 1 Setting the Packet Interval RPI Using Multicast and Unicast Communications 114 Example of Calculating the Number of Connections e EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port with IP address of 192 168 250 254 in bidirectional connection with 128 nodes 192 168 250 254 192 168 250 1 Tagset_in1 Tagset_in2 Tagset_in128 Tagset_out254 0 RT The maximum number of connections for node 192 168 250 254 is 32 for the CJ2M and 256 for other CPU Units Another EtherNet IP Unit must be mounted to the PLC to increase the maxi mum number of connections Refer to the following figure Example of Calculating the Number of Connections e The maximum number of connections 32 for the CJ2M and 256 for other CPU Units per Unit would be exceeded if an EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port with an IP address of 192 168 250 254 is used ina bidirection
494. rvice response data in the response block is in word 2 byte or double word 4 byte units such as word Sending Explicit Messages Section 9 1 data and ERROR CLEAR codes is also returned in the same order from low to high bytes in the response block Example Sending Explicit Messages Using CMND 490 Operation Command Details _ EtherNet IP Unit with unit number 0 PLC s CMND 490 in CPU instruction Unit Network address 01 hex Node address 05 hex Unit address 10 hex ee Explicit messa e EtherNet IP node of other manufacturer The identity object information class ID 01 hex is read from the other com pany s EtherNet IP node at IP address 192 168 250 2 using the CIP UCMM MESSAGE SEND command 28 10 The command data is stored in the DM Area starting at DM01000 and the response data is stored in the DM Area starting at D02000 If the command ends with an error the end code is stored in D00006 and command transmission is retried CMND S D C S D01000 First command word D01000 2810 hex Command Code D01001 0000 hex Transport ID 0000 hex D01002 05DC hex Message monitoring time 15 00 s D01003 5202 hex Slave code 52 hex Unconnected Send Request path size 2 words D01004 2006 hex Request path 20 06 24 01 hex Connection Manager Class ID 06 hex D01005 2401 hex Instance ID 01 hex Words S 6 to S 19 contain the request data D01006 OAOC hex Priorit
495. s Contains software switch and status information e CPU Unit s allocated DM Area words Contains the IP Address Display Setting Area e CPU Units user settings area Contains status information This area can be used only when the allo cated CIO Area words are set to user settings Note The EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port has the following two data areas in its non volatile memory Unlike the Ethernet Units settings are not stored in the CPU Units CPU Bus Unit Sys tem Setup Area e Unit Setup Settings such as the IP address and FINS UDP set tings The Unit Setup is set from the CX Programmer e Device parameter settings Settings such as the tag data link set ting parameters The device parameter settings are made from the Network Configurator 68 Overview of Memory Allocated to the EtherNet IP Unit Section 4 1 CPU Unit EtherNet IP Unit Allocated CIO Area words Allocated to the Unit as a CPU Bus Unit CIO 1500 ClO 1501 Unit number 0 2 CIO 1524 ClO 1525 Unit number 1 t CIO 1549 CIO 1875 Unit number 15 a CIO 1899 User Settings Area Set in Network Configurator gt 2 Allocated DM Area words located to the Unit as a CPU Bus Unit Al D30000 a Unit number 0 D30098 D30099 D30100 a Unit number 1 D30199 D31500 l Unit number 15 D31599 100 words
496. s Display Setting Area is set and the other TCP IP Configuration settings are left at their default values Setting Operating status IP address IP address set in words m 98 and m 99 IP Address Dis play Setting Area of the DM Area words allocated to the EtherNet IP Unit as a CPU Bus Unit Subnet mask Determined by class of the IP address Default gateway None IP routing disabled Preferred DNS server None Alternate DNS server None Host name None Domain name None Baud rate Auto detect Method 3 Setting the TCP IP Configuration from the Network Configurator This method can be used to set IP addresses from the CX Programmer For details refer to 3 8 TCP IP and Link Settings CJ1W EIP21 Edit Parameters TCP IP Ethemet FINS UDP FINS TCP FTP Auto Adjust Time Status Area SNMP SNMP Trap IP Address Notuse DNS Use the following address C Use DNS a IP Address lt 194 168 1 1 Primary DNS Server SubnetMask 255 255 255 0 nooo ee Secondary DNS Server Default Gateway 0 0 0 0 Domain Name C Get IP address from the BOOTP server The BOOTP setting is valid only for next unit IP Router Table testart power restoration Then the BOOTP setting will be cleared The obtained IP address will be automatically IP Address Gateway Address Insert saved as system setting in the unit oe Broadcast All 4 3BSD All0 4 2BSD Se
497. s complete 3 When the network configuration is changed later the existing network con figuration file can be overwritten by selecting File Save or clicking the Button 4 You can select the Select target network Check Box in the Option Area to save a network configuration file with only the required networks Save in O My Documents File name Equipt nyf Save as type Network Configuration File v3 nvf v Cancel Option v Select target network Select the check boxes of the networks to save and click the OK Button Select Target Network Tareet Network EtherNet IP_1 EtherNet IP_2 eres _ 6 2 16 Reading a Network Configuration File A previously saved network configuration file can be read into the Network Configurator 178 Setting Tag Data Links Section 6 2 ci 1 2 3 1 Select File Open or click the a Button The following dialog box will be displayed Look in O My Documents la Equip1 nvf File name Files of type Network Configuration File v3 nvf v Option C Select target network C Add to current network If the network configuration file that you want to read is not displayed change to Look in another folder 2 When you click and select the network configuration file that you want to read that file name will be displayed in the File name Field Look in O My Documents EX Equip nv Files of type Network Configuration File
498. s for the CJ2M and 0 5 and 10 000 ms for other CPU Units in 0 5 ms increments The default setting is 50 ms i e data updated once every 50 ms Timeout Value Sets the time until a connection times out The timeout value is set as a multiple of the packet interval RPI and can be set to 4 8 16 32 64 128 256 or 512 times the packet interval The default setting is 4 times the packet interval RPI Connection Name Sets a name for the connection 32 characters max 2 When the settings have been completed press the Regist Button Connections Settings The connection settings between the originator and all of the target devices Editing All Connections selected in the Register Device List can be edited together in a table 1 2 3 1 Select the Connections Tab and click the Edit All Button The following Edit All Connections Dialog Box will be displayed Edit All Connections Target Device Connection Name Connection I O Type In Out Target Variable Originator Variable Connection Type RPI Timeout Value A 144 Setting Tag Data Links Section 6 2 The following table describes the various settings in the dialog box Setting Function Target Device Selects the target device Connection Any name can be given to the connection up to 32 charac Name ters If this field is left blank a default name will be assigned This Connection Name can be used for comments Connection I O When ma
499. s used with the FINS TCP method i e Ethernet Ver 2 IP frame TCP frame FINS TCP header frame and FINS frame A TCP data section FINS TCP header FINS frame that exceeds the segment size default setting of 1 024 bytes in the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port with automatic adjustment for optimum values between the nodes is split into TCP packets for transmission The split TCP data is then joined automatically at the remote node s TCP IP protocol layer The TCP IP protocol layer however cannot determine where the data has been split so the TCP data sections from multiple packets are all joined together Therefore when using the FINS TCP method FINS TCP headers must be added at the beginning of FINS frames in order to serve as FINS frame delimiters The length of the data in the following FINS frame is stored in the header allowing the frame to be separated out by the remote node With the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port and FinsGateway Ver 2003 or higher the appro priate frames are separated out automatically so there is normally no need to be pay attention to it at the application layer The TCP port number is the number for TCP to identify the application layer i e the FINS communications service in this case When communications are executed using TCP IP this port number must be allocated for the com munications service The default setting for the TCP port number i e the TCP port number of t
500. sage communi OMRON products that use the cations using the CIP protocol FINS protocol Remote e Computer with an Ethernet inter e Computer with an Ethernet inter device face face OMRON PLCs with a CS CJ e Another company s masters or series EtherNet IP Unit built in slaves EtherNet IP port or Ethernet OMRON PLCs with a CS CJ Unit series EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port Features Send and receive the various e Supports message communica FINS commands to provide an tions with other companies Ether even greater range of services Net IP devices than the CIP UCMM messages Gs cJ Series e Provide transparency in mes CS1W EIP21 sage communications with other OMRON networks such as Con CJ1W EIP21 troller Link SYSMAC LINK and CJ2H CPU Ethernet e CJ2M CPU3 CS1 CJ1 CPU Units with unit version 2 0 or later or CJ2 CPU Units Up to 8 levels CPU Units with unit version earlier than 2 0 Up to 3 levels Send FINS communications function IH Receive Message communications functions Send Explicit message communications function Receive iie EE 188 Overview Section 7 1 Overall Structure CPU Unit EtherNet IP Unit CMND 490 instruction CMND 490 instruction 2810 Hex Explicit function OMRON special messag
501. sages returned by the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port are listed in the following table Message Meaning PPP is a directory The path name indicated at PPP is a directory PPP is not a directory The path name indicated at PPP is not a directory Another unit has access authority Another Unit currently has the access right FINS error 0 x 3001 Bad sequence of commands The RNFR command has not been executed Can t create data socket X X X X YY A socket cannot be created Cannot access to device FINS error 0 x 250F A file device error has occurred Cannot get memory blocks A message memory block cannot be allocated Command format error FINS error 0 x 1003 The command format is incorrect Connect error A connection error has occurred Directories of old and new paths are not same The directories before and after changing the name are different Directory name length exceeded max size The directory name is too long Directory not empty FINS error 0 x 2108 The directory must be empty to delete it Fatal error FINS error 0 x 1101 A parameter error has occurred Fatal error FINS error O x 1103 File or directory already exists The specified file or directory name already exists File or directory already exists FINS error 0 x 2107 File or directory name illegal The file or directory name is incorrect File or directory name illegal FINS erro
502. sed for the keep alive function with TCP connec tions It must be used with UCMM Class 3 Note The hold time is 3 s for the UCMM service Class 3 service and tag data link open close processing 377 Ethernet Network Parameters Appendix B 378 Appendix C TCP Status Transitions The TCP socket status can be confirmed using the socket status data returned for the FINS command SOCKET STATUS READ 27 64 GLOSED ACTIVE OPEN snd SYN Passive OPEN LISTEN rev SYN PAR SEND snd SYN ACK snd SYN SYN rcv SYN RECEIVED snd ACK rcv ACK of SYN rev SYN ACK snd ACK ESTABLISHED CLOSE rev FIN snd FIN snd ACK CLOSED WAIT rcv FIN CLOSE rev ACK of FIN snd ACK snd FIN CLOSING LAST AC FIN WAIT 2 i i rev ACK of FIN rcv ACK of FIN Timeout 2MSL gt TIME WAIT CLOSED Le fs rcv FIN snd ACK i Status Meaning CLOSED Connection closed LISTEN Waiting for connection SYN SENT SYN sent in active status SYN RECEIVED SYN received and sent ESTABLISHED Already established CLOSE WAIT FIN received and waiting for completion FIN WAIT 1 Completed and FIN sent CLOSING Completed and exchanged FIN Awaiting ACK LAST ACK FIN sent and completed Awaiting ACK FIN WAIT 2 Completed and ACK received Awaiting FIN TIME WAIT After closing pauses twice the maximum segment life 2MSL
503. send com mand may time out if routing is attempted for more than 16 networks 2 EXPLICIT MESSAGE SEND command for DeviceNet Units 28 01 This command is compatible with the DeviceNet Unit s explicit message send command 28 01 in the ladder program The message must be sent 234 Sending Explicit Messages Section 9 1 in the same network layer and the remote node s IP address range is lim ited The following diagram shows an example of actual node address specifica tions EtherNet IP Unit with unit number 2 The node address of the non OMRON node is set as the destination node address in the FINS command data Dp 5o o S a a ae Tol Command code FINS 2 cit command block command amp Expli Node address of the non OMRON node 06 Hex 15 87 0 Ct 0 i 5 Fj E Explicit message i Destination node address Destination unit address Other company s Local node address 05 FE or 12 Hex EtherNet IP node Note Depending on conditions the destination slave may not always accept an explicit message Always perform retry processing when sending explicit mes sages 235 Sending Explicit Messages Section 9 1 CIP UCMM MESSAGE SEND 28 10 This command sends an explicit message for CIP routing to another node s specified class and receives a response There are two command formats one with a specified route path path to the target device and the other with out the route pa
504. set SP1_IN Target tag set SP1_OUT Packet interval RPI Tag Set Input Tags Tag Set Output Tags Tag set name SP1_IN Tag set name SP1_OUT PLC status PLC status Tag i v Connection Tag ii EtherNet IP There are both input and output tag sets Each tag set can contain only input tags or only output tags The same input tag cannot be included in more than one input tag set Number of Tags in Tag Each tag set can contain one or more tags Sets m Tag Sets with Only One Tag With basic Network Configurator procedures each tag set contains only one tag CPU Unit CPU Unit Tag set SP1_IN Tag set SP1_OUT 1 0 ree tag a tag c I O memory Connection One tag each a A z Each tag is set using a text U j string of the network symbol or I O memory address Tag set SP2_OUT Tag set SP2_IN tag b tag d Connection O 3 EtherNet IP m Tag Sets with Multiple Tags As shown below tags can be created in groups Each tag set can contain up to 8 tags totaling 20 words for the CJ2M or 722 words for other CPU Units 117 Overview of Tag Data Links Section 6 1 CPU Unit CPU Unit Tag set SP1_IN group of tags a b and c I O memory Tag set SP1_OUT I O memory One tag each Each tag is set using a text string of the network symbol or I O memory address
505. setting error occurred at the local EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port IP address 192 168 250 10 The error code is displayed and then the last digit of the target node s IP address is displayed in hexadecimal E E mE CL om l UO mO Y CO dJ EE E fo Hi 0 l M l co oO co m E o T LO l L l LO CD CD Ly ED 0 oo cn fo l m CO d P 0 H LA m 2 Displays errors that occurred within the Unit The last digit of the Unit s IP address is displayed in hexadecimal e There is no particular priority to the order in which the errors are dis played All of the errors are displayed repeatedly in order 25 Nomenclature and Functions Section 2 2 Right and Left Dot LEDs If an error occurred in two or more devices with the same rightmost byte in their IP addresses the Right Dot LED will be lit while the devices error is being displayed Example Displaying the Following Errors e A d6 error failed to establish connection occurred with IP address 10 0 1 8 e A d6 error failed to establish connection occurred with IP address 10 0 2 8 BH 46 4P 89 O 2 2 2 Switch Settings Unit Number Setting The Unit Number Setting Switch sets the unit number of the EtherNet IP Unit Switch or built in EtherNet IP port as a CPU
506. ssages to OMRON Ethernet Units CS1W ETN21 or CJ1W ETN21 in an Ethernet network Mutual connections of Controller Link and EtherNet IP are also supported using the FINS communications service The Controller Link connection allows a PLC on the Controller Link network to be monitored from a PLC on the EtherNet IP network Conversely data can be exchanged with a PLC on the EtherNet IP network from a PLC on the Controller Link network EtherNet IP Unit Features FTP Server Automatic PLC Clock Adjustment Note Manage the Network with an SNMP Manager Note Specify Servers with Host Names Note Set Classless IP Address with CIDR Plentiful Troubleshooting Functions Note Section 1 1 A built in FTP server is provided to enable transferring files in the PLC to and from a host computer This enables transferring large amounts of data from a client without any additional ladder programming The clocks built into PLCs connected to Ethernet can be automatically adjusted to the time of the clock in the SNTP server If all of the clocks in the system are automatically adjusted to the same time time stamps can be used to analyze various production histories A separate SNTP server is necessary to automatically adjust the PLC clocks Internal status information from the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port can be passed to network management software that uses an SNMP manager A separate SNMP manager is necessary
507. ssification FinsGateway Network Tab FINS destination Network number 0 Page Node address 2 Frame length 2 000 bytes Response monitor time 2 seconds CX Programmer s FINS TCP Tab Page in Edit Parameters Dialog Box FINS TCP Port Default 9600 IP Router Table None Not set All defaults are used FinsGateway ETN_UNIT Setup TCP Nodes Tab Page Ethernet Node Definition Dialog Box Node address 2 IP address 192 168 250 2 Destination port number 9600 Keep alive setting Selected yes 219 Communicating between OMRON PLCs Section 8 6 8 6 Communicating between OMRON PLCs FINS commands can be sent from the CPU Unit of a PLC by using the SEND 090 RECV 098 and CMND 490 instructions SEND 090 Writes I O data from the local node to another node RECV 098 Reads I O data from another node to the local node CMND 490 Issues FINS commands for controlling operations such as send ing and receiving I O memory data to and from other nodes reading informa tion regarding other nodes and so on 8 6 1 Communications Specifications The following table shows the specifications for PLC communications using the SEND 090 RECV 098 and CMND 490 instructions Item Specifications Destination 1 1 SEND 090 RECV 098 CMND 490 instructions 1 N SEND 090 CMND 490 instructions broadcasting Data length SEND 090 990 words 1 980 bytes max broadcasting 727 words 1
508. ssing Section 12 4 The error log can be read by sending FINS commands to the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port or by using the mail receive function and specifying the ErrorLlogRead command Meaning Server set ting error Detailed error code 1st byte 00H DNS 03H SNTP 04H FTP O6H BOOTP 07H SNMP 08H SNMP Trap 09H FINS UDP OAH FINS TCP 2nd byte 01 IP address 02 Host name 03 Port number 04 Other parameters Correction Set the server settings correctly based on the information in the detailed error code EEPROM Server connection error 00H DNS 03H SNTP 04H FTP 06H BOOTP 07H SNMP 08H SNMP Trap 01 Specified host does not exist 02 No service at specified host 03 Timeout 04 Closed uni laterally by host 05 Cannot con nect because account infor mation does not match 06 Host name resolution error 07 Transmis sion error 08 Reception error 09 Other error OAH Error in obtained IP address Take either of the following mea sures e Correct the set tings for each server e Inspect the com munications path EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port cable con nections hub router server and correct the situation that is causing the error Clock data write error 0001 Clock data could not be refreshed because of a CPU Unit error Clear the CPU Unit error 0002 Clock
509. structions can also be used to process data only when the data links are operating normally as shown below Node A Data Link Normal Operation Flag Node A data processing Node B Data Link Normal Operation Flag Node B data processing Node C Data Link Normal Operation Flag Node C data processing 5 LI LJ LJ LUI LI Lo 185 Ladder Programming with Tag Data Links Section 6 3 Note Even if an error occurs in communications with a target device the input data from the target device will remain stored in words allocated in memory to the local node To prevent malfunctions write the ladder program so that input data processing will not be performed when the Unit Error Occurred Flag word n 10 bit 00 is ON 6 3 2 Status Flags Related to Tag Data Links The status of the tag data links is reflected in the following words Name allocated area Contents 186 Target Node PLC Operating Flag Information Layout set to default settings Words n 2 to n 5 Layout set to user settings Words n 32 to n 47 Note Corresponds to the PLC status s PLC Operating Flag Each flag indicates the operating status of the corresponding target node PLC of connections in which the EtherNet IP Unit is the originator The flag corresponding to the target node s tar get ID will be ON when the PLC Operating Flags for all connections with that target node indicate that the PLC is operating Each node address s flag locatio
510. sts of two tables A local network table and a relay network table Local Network Table The local network table is a table describing the correspondences among unit numbers of the Communications Units and Boards mounted to each node Example Unit 04 Unit 05 Unit 06 Unit 07 Local Network Table Local network Unit number address 1 04 2 05 3 06 4 07 Network 1 Network 2 Network 3 Network 4 Note 1 The unit number is set 0 to F 1 to 15 using the rotary switch on the front of the EtherNet IP Unit built in port 2 The network address is the number of the network 1 to 127 to which the Communications Unit or Board is connected It is set when the local net work table is created Relay Network Table A relay table is a table that shows the nodes to which data should be sent first in order to send data to a network that is not connected to the local node It shows the correspondence between the address of the final destination net work and the network address and node address of the first relay point of the path to reach there When internetwork communications are carried out the end network can be reached by following the relay points 207 Section 8 4 Routing Tables The following example shows routing tables for sending data from PLC 1 the local node network address 1 node address 1 to PLC 4 the destination node network address 3 node address 2 Node 2
511. t 7 04 0000 Empty Slot 7 05 0000 Empty Slot qj 06 0000 Empty Slot 71 07 0000 Empty Slot qj 08 0000 Empty Slot 1 09 0000 Empty Slot 0000 Rack 01 0000 Rack 02 de 0000 Rack 03 CJLH CPU67H Program Note Creating I O tables is not required if the built in EtherNet IP port of a CU2 CPU Unit is used It is registered as a built in port Inner Board with a model number of CJ2B EIP21 for the CJ2H and a model number of CJ2M EIP21 for the CJ2M You cannot delete a built in port from the I O tables Ti PLC IO Table NewPLC1 DER File Edit View Options Help e alk alle sle eels T CJ2H CPU65 EIP Built in Port Inner Board 7 1500 CJ2B E1P21 Built In EtherNet IP Port for GJ2 7 0900 Inner Board unmounted 0000 Main Rack Rey 0000 Rack 01 0000 Rack 02 0000 Rack 03 49 Setting the Local IP Address Section 3 7 3 7 Setting the Local IP Address 50 This section describes the 3 ways to set the local I O address of an EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port Method 1 Using the default IP address The default IP address is 192 168 250 Node_address The node address is set with the rotary switches on the front of the EtherNet IP Unit or for the built in EtherNet IP port on the front of the CPU Unit This method can be used to make a temporary or preliminary connection to the Ethernet In this case leave the TCP IP Con figuration and the allocated D
512. t Defaults Cancel If the IP address is set in the TCP IP Tab Page that IP address setting will be displayed in the IP Address Display Setting Area words m 98 and m 99 in the DM Area words allocated to the Unit port 51 TCP IP and Link Settings Section 3 8 3 8 TCP IP and Link Settings This section describes the TCP IP related settings such as the local IP address and subnet mask for the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port Note 3 8 1 1 2 3 52 Use the CX Programmer to ma non volatile memory in the Unit ke these settings The settings are stored in Unlike the Ethernet Units the TCP IP settings of the EtherNet IP Unit and built in EtherNet IP port are not tem Setup Area 1 When the EtherNet IP Unit stored in the CPU Units CPU Bus Unit Sys Setting Procedure with the CX Programmer is registered in the I O tables of the CX Pro grammer the EtherNet IP Unit and built in EtherNet IP port will be dis played in the I O tables Refer to 3 6 Creating I O Tables for details i PLC 10 Table NewPLC1 File Edit View Options Help a Sil xml Zia amp lalala T CJ1H CPU67H amp Inner Board g 0000 Main Rack P Eoo 1525 C31 wW E1P21 EtherNet IP Unit fo bit J 01 0000 Empty Slot J 02 0000 Empty Slot 7 03 0000 Empty Slot 7 04 0000 Empty Slot J 05 0000 Empty Slot J 06 0000 Empty Slot J 07 0000 Empty Slot J 08 0000 Empty Slot J 09 0000 Emp
513. t a network port that you would like to connect Browse a TCP 2 Device Information Vendor ID Product Name Device Type Revision Refresh Option OK Cancel The Network Configurator will connect to the EtherNet IP network and On line will be displayed in the status bar at the bottom of the window when connection has been properly made online Note A list of nodes on the EtherNet IP network you are attempting to connect to will be displayed when the Refresh Button or the icon at the left of TCP 2 167 Setting Tag Data Links Section 6 2 is clicked in the dialog box above Refer to the following figure Select Connect Network Port So Select a network port that you would like to connect Browse J ToP 2 E 1921682503 Cu1W EIP21 1921682505 CJ2B EIP21 6 2 10 Downloading Tag Data Link Parameters To make tag data links you must download tag data link parameters such as tag set settings and connection settings to all devices in the EtherNet IP net work When the download operation is executed the tag data link parameters will be transferred to the EtherNet IP Units that require the settings The following procedure shows how to download the tag data link parameters Refer to 6 2 9 Connecting the Network Configurator to the Network for infor mation on how to connect the Network Configurator to the network 168 Note If the target node IP address is not set corre
514. t in EtherNet IP Port Specifications 14 2 2 Nomenclature and Functions 0 0 0 cee ec eee eee nes 21 2 3 Selecting the Network Devices 0 eee eee eens 28 SECTION 3 Installation and Initial Setup 0eee00002 33 3 1 Overview of Initial Setup Procedures 0 0 eee cee 34 3 2 SWitch Setun gs ce aE AAE E EE Cape anne EEE OEE dary 36 323 Mounting toa PEC wes et anes A aw eae Saitek bee eee te teeing 38 3 4 Network Installation 0 eee ene eens 41 3 5 Connecting tothe Network sna ei ea E a eA BAAS ES SB RES A E 44 3 6 Creating VO Tables ea i e eg salad ea Bi CaS FR NAR AGA aK Aaa 46 3 7 Setting the Local IP Address 0 0 0 0 cc cece eee 50 3 8 TCP IP and Link Settings 0 0 nce eee E 52 3 9 Tag Data Link Parameters 0 0 cece eee eee 37 3 10 Other Parametets sis 40nd heeled EEA aes lad aie Based wee ARA E N Bale es 61 3 11 Communications Test cscs esscr 0 ence eens 65 vii Vili TABLE OF CONTENTS SECTION 4 Memory Allocations i625 6065345 s05asneds atiadcadea 67 4 1 Overview of Memory Allocated to the EtherNet IP Unit 0 0 0 68 4 2 ClO Area Allocations issor see he pepe eh Sg Sa ae eee 70 4 3 DM Area Allocations isss irua eeta e pe cece a n eens 83 4 4 User Settings Area occ s tec ste bebe a ABEE a Ra eden Gok kde saa ewes oS 85 4 5 Auxiliary Area Data o sccsg jib ede ee bw ie dg bee chee bd 88 SECT
515. t set that provides the output For an output tag will be entered automatically RPI ms The requested packet interval for an input tag For an output tag will be entered automatically The setting procedure is described here along with setting examples Setting Example A Area 1 memory area Work Area W Area 1 start address 0 Area 1 size 50 words Area 2 memory area DM Area D Area 2 start address 50 Area 2 size 100 words E Allocations Area 1 Area 2 1 Node 1 Node 2 Node 3 IP address 192 168 250 1 IP address 192 168 250 2 IP address 192 168 250 3 EtherNet IP wo ware 50 words 1 1 1 w50 g 50 words 2 2 2 w100 50 words 3 3 3 D50 f ee S ee aeaee D50 100 words 1 1 1 D150 f 100 words 2 2 2 D250 100 words 3 3 3 Select Wizard from the Data Link Menu The Datalink Wizard Dialog Box will be displayed Setting Tag Data Links Section 6 2 Datalink Wizard Ba Datalink Wizard will make the datalink table data Please specify the memory area start address size The nodes which participate the datalink have to be created by Network Configurator Datalink Configuration Areal Area2 Node1 Node2 Node3 Node1 Node2 Node3 Start rae Start Pas a Address Size Address Size IN 5 ons Size N Size OUT 1 1 1 i 1 E
516. t the control port only The data transfer port uses the value set for the control port 1 0 21 is used FTP Server Application Example Section 11 4 11 4 FTP Server Application Example The following procedure shows how to use the FTP server by connection with the default login name CONFIDENTIAL No password is required Note The login name and a password must be set in the CPU Bus Setup for the Ethernet Unit in the CPU Unit to use any login name other than CONFIDEN TIAL Note When general purpose FTP software is used files can be transferred and read using a graphical user interface similar to Explorer 1 2 3 1 Make sure that a Memory Card is inserted in the CPU Unit and turn ON the power supply to the PLC If EM File Memory is to be used create the EM File Memory 2 Connect to the FTP server from a computer on the Ethernet by entering the text that is underlined in the following diagram IP address of the Ethernet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port ftp 150 31 2 83 connected to 150 31 2 83 Results 220 IPaddress CJ1W EIP21 FTP server FTP version ready Name CONFIDENTIAL lt Login name 230 Guest logged in J 3 Enter FTP commands underlined in the following diagram to read and write files The following directory tree is used in this example I root EM L_ MEMCARD ABC subdirectory DEF IOM file C X ftp gt Is lt File names read 200 PORT co
517. t to the EtherNet IP network If the Network Configurator is connected online properly On line will be dis played in the status bar at the bottom of the window The network connec tion icon will be displayed in blue in the Network Tab Page in which the Network Configurator is connected Network connection icon herNet IP_1 EtherNet IP_2 192 168 250 1 192 168 250 2 CS1W EIP21 CS1W EIP21 1 250 1 The connecting network can be switched by selecting Network Change Connect Network Select Connected Network Please select a network where the connected network was supported Target Network O Create new network Use the existing network EtherNet IP_1 vi EtherNet IP_1 EtherNet IP_2 Connecting through the CPU Unit s Peripheral or RS 232C Port Connect to the EtherNet IP Unit s Ethernet port via the CPU Unit s peripheral port or RS 232C port 1 2 3 1 Select Option Select Interface CS CJ1 Serial Port EIP Unit I F 2 Select Network Connect The following dialog box will be displayed 162 Setting Tag Data Links Section 6 2 Setup Interface Interface Toolbus Network Address 0 Node Address 0 Unit No 0 COM Port COM3 Baud Rate 115200 Bits 3 Input the EtherNet IP Unit s unit number in the Unit No Field select the connecting COM port number and click the OK Button Usually the Baud Rate is left at this setting The following dialog box will be dis
518. t will be blank Next you can continue to cre ate connections by selecting the connection I O type and setting a tag set 6 2 9 Connecting the Network Configurator to the Network Connecting through Ethernet Note 1 2 3 This section explains how to connect the Network Configurator to the network The Windows firewall settings must be changed when making this connection for the first time in Windows XP Vista or Windows 7 For details on changing the firewall settings refer to Appendix G Precautions for Using Windows XP Vista or Windows 7 Connect to the EtherNet IP Unit s Ethernet port via the Ethernet network 1 Select Option Select Interface Ethernet I F 2 Select Network Connect If there are multiple Ethernet interfaces on the computer the Select Con nect Network Port Dialog Box will be displayed Select the interface that is to be connected and press the OK Button The following dialog box will be displayed Select Connect Network Port Select a network port that you would like to connect B Device Information Vendor ID Product Name Device Type Revision Refresh OK Cancel 3 Click the OK Button Select the network to be connected 161 Setting Tag Data Links Section 6 2 Select Connected Network Please select a network where the connected network was supported Target Network O Create new network EtherNet P_1 The Network Configurator will connec
519. ta to any I O memory area in a CPU Unit The write word data is in word units The response block data is returned in low to high byte order 259 Receiving Explicit Messages Section 9 2 Command Block The class ID depends on the unit version Version 2 0 The class ID is C4 Version 1 0 The class ID is 2F Word data H 1F 25 Class ID Address L Instance ID Address H Word data L j rn a Word data H Service Code Word data L Write data 200 bytes max Note A body format of either 8 bits or 16 bits is possible Response Block OF Service Code Parameters Service code command response IF Hex is specified for commands For responses the highest bit will turn ON and 9F Hex will be returned Class ID command Always C4 2F The class ID depends on the unit version The class ID is C4 for unit version 2 0 and 2F for unit version 1 0 Instance ID command The memory area to which the data is written is specified as shown in the following table Important Points 260 Instance ID Hex CPU Unit memory area Word range for write 01 CIO 0000 to 6143 03 DM D00000 to D32767 04 WR W000 to W511 05 HR HO00 to H1535 08 to 20 EM banks 0 to 18 En_00000 to En_32767 n 0 to 18 Address L Address H command The address of the first word to which the data is written is specified in hexadecimal as shown belo
520. tag sets lt 256 Number of registrable tag sets lt 32 Communications Services Overview Connection information e Target IP address e Target tag set e Originator tag set e Packet interval RPI Tag Set Inputs Tag set name SP1_IN PLC Status Section 1 4 Connection Tag Set Outputs Tag set name SP1_IN PLC Status Tag i Tag ii Data flow Originator device Target device EtherNet IP Note In this example a connection is established with the originator s tag list con taining tags a to g inputs which are grouped in a tag set called SP1_IN and the target s tag list containing tags i and ii outputs which are grouped in a tag set called SP1_OUT 2 Message Communications Unconnected Message Service User specified CIP commands can be sent to devices on the EtherNet IP net work CIP commands such as those for reading and writing data can be sent and their responses received by executing the CMND instruction from the CS CJ series CPU Unit s user program without using a connection EtherNet IP Unit CS CJ series CPU Unit CIP command Ethernet EtherNet IP _ t CIP messages CIP commands and responses can also be transferred to another CIP based network via the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port using the CIP routing function for message communications In the CS CJ Series CIP routing is possible only throu
521. tall The Network Configurator can support new devices if the proper EDS files are installed To install the EDS file use the following procedure 1 Select EDS File and Install The following window will be displayed Install EDS File Look in Eds 10 2 erem SVSFaaM DRTI41 eds E 3G3MV PDRT2 eds E 3G3FV PDRT1 SIN eds E 3G3PV PDRT1 SINV1 eds E 3G3FY PDRT1 SINV1 eds E 3G3PV PDRT2 eds E 3G3FV PDRT2 eds E 3G3RV P105T8 DRT E eds E 3G3MV PDRT1 SIN eds E 3G3RV PDRT2 eds E 3camv PDRTI SINVI eds E 3cF7 DRM21 eds lt File name Files of type Electronic Data Sheet eds Device Information Vendor Device Type Product Name Revision 2 The device information will be displayed on the bottom of the window when the EDS file is selected 419 EDS File Management Appendix F 3 Select the EDS file to be installed and click the Open Button Next select the icon file ico and the EDS file will be added to the Hardware List If the EDS file already exists the new EDS file will overwrite the previous one If the hardware versions are different an EDS file will be added to the Hardware List for each version Creating EDS Files EDS File Create The EDS files are required by the Network Configurator in order to create a network configuration To create an EDS file use the following procedure 1 Select EDS File Create 2 Set the device information and I O information The device info
522. talling a firewall Once a firewall has been set up by a communications technician on the other hand there may be some applications that cannot be used Be sure to check first with the communications technician 108 Private and Global Addresses Section 5 3 5 3 3 EtherNet IP Unit with a Global Address Intranet FINS TCP client computer with CX Programmer etc or CIP client computer with Network Configurator etc Ethernet EtherNet IP Communications over Internet Firewall IP router Private address laseaseeaebaesaa eee eee eae Poors 1 _ Not output to Internet Internet Global address v Intranet pose toe E SET Firewall Communications in intranet Conditions for Using Communications Applications Private address required Not output to Internet EIEE E EE E i VAE I Global address IP router l Private address Ethernet EtherNet IP I I I I I l I I I I I I I I Sata PLC I I I I I I I EtherNet IP Unit Global address Communications applications can be used over the Internet under the follow ing conditions m FINS Communications Service e A device such as a personal computer a FINS application including the CX Programmer can connect online and communicate over the Internet with an EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port
523. ted with registered messages those messages are returned in 16 byte ASCII If there are no registered messages or if the error codes have not occurred due to execution of FAL FALS instructions the code is returned in ASCII with 20 Hex space in 16 bytes Byte Data Read Service Code 1C Hex Byte Data Read reads any I O memory area data in a CPU Unit The read word data is in byte units The response block data is returned in low to high byte order Command Block 1C SA The class ID depends on the unit version Version 2 0 The class ID is C4 Version 1 0 The class ID is 2F Class ID Address L No of bytes read Service Code Address H Instance ID Note A body format of either 8 bits or 16 bits is possible Response Block 9C Service Code Word data L Word data L Word data H Word data H S 2 Read data 200 bytes max Parameters Service code command response 1C Hex is specified for commands For responses the highest bit will turn ON and 9C Hex will be returned 256 Receiving Explicit Messages Important Points Section 9 2 Class ID command Always C4 2F The class ID depends on the unit version The class ID is C4 for unit version 2 0 and 2F for unit version 1 0 Instance ID command The memory area that will read the data is specified as shown in the following table Instance ID Hex CPU Unit memory area Word range for read 0000 to 6143 DM D00
524. teristics such as the bandwidth usage pps Monitor Device Status 1 Controller Error History General Status 2 Speed 100MBps Full Duplex MAG Address Octets Unicast Packets Non Unicast Packets Discards Errors Error Gounter Alignment Errors Excessive Collisions Carrier Sense Errors Frame Too Lone Tae Data Link Bandwidth Average of TxRx Packets Average of Rx Packets Average of Tx Packets Receive Multicast Packets Link OFF Errors Clear Information 00 00 04 38 40 72 Send 96246 534 718 0 0 Collection s Start Time Connection Tag Status Non Error History Ethernet Information Octets Unicast Packets Unicast Packets Discards Errors FCS Errors Maximum Maximum Maximum 2008 05 23 11 44 16 000 Close 14 2 Using the LED Indicators and Display for Troubleshooting 14 2 1 Errors Occurring at the EtherNet IP Unit or Built in EtherNet IP Port Errors Related to CPU Unit Data Exchange Indicator NS 7 segment Flashing Not lit red Duplicate unit number The same unit number is set on another Unit Unit operation Flag status Operation stops The 7 segment display alternates between the node address and error code Countermeasure Set the unit num bers correctly and restart the Ether Net IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port CPU Unit faulty Flashing red
525. ternal buffers full packet discarded Illegal packet discarded Local node busy send failed Unexpected routing error Service not supported in current mode packet discarded Internal send buffer full packet discarded Maximum frame size exceeded routing failed Response timeout packet discarded FINS Command Bit 15 OFF Bits 08 to 14 Source network address Bits 00 to 07 Source node address FINS Response Bit 15 ON Bits 08 to 14 Destination network address Bits 00 to 07 Destination node address CIP Frame FFFF Communications controller error 00 hex 01 hex IP address duplication Port number always 02 Lower byte of IP address Logic error in setting table 00 hex 02 hex Network parame ters 03 hex Routing tables 04 hex Unit Setup OE hex Unit name 12 hex Status area layout setting error 13 hex Status area layout setting verification error 15 hex Installation in a PLC of another series e g from CJ1 to CJ2 after setting the Unit 365 Error Log Function Section 14 4 Detail code First byte Second byte Saved in EEPROM 0300 Parameter error packet discarded FINS Command No Bit 15 OFF Bits 08 to 14 Source network address Bits 00 to 07 Source node address FINS Response Bit 15 ON Bits 08 to 14 Destination network address Bits 00 to 07 Destination node address CIP Frame FFFF 0347 I
526. ters For details on connecting to the network from the Network Configurator refer to 6 2 9 Con necting the Network Configurator to the Network 1 Connect the Network Configurator to the network 2 There are two ways to upload the parameters e Uploading from All Devices in the Network Select Network Upload The following dialog box will be displayed Network Configurator Uploading all devices parameters From network will start based on the current document K TF you select No it will start as new document e Clicking the Yes Button Parameters will be uploaded only from the devices registered in the Net work Configuration Window Parameters will not be uploaded from devices that are not registered in the Network Configuration Window e Clicking the No Button If parameters are being uploaded from all devices in the network the parameters will be newly uploaded from all devices The current net work configuration information will be lost If parameters are being uploaded from specified devices only the up load operation will be cancelled and the upload will not be performed e Clicking the Cancel Button The upload operation will be cancelled and the upload will not be per formed e Uploading Individually from Particular Devices 171 Setting Tag Data Links Section 6 2 Select the icon of the EtherNet IP Unit from which you want to upload To select multiple nodes press and hold the Shift Key while
527. th Command Block e Relay Hop Format The following format includes the route path routing service data Specify the entire routing path in the command s request path 4 502 bytes max Request path 28 10 52 02 20 06 24 401 Command Transport Message i code ID monitoring Instance ID 01 Hex time 8 bit instance ID 24 Hex Class ID Connection Manager 06 Hex 8 bit class ID 20 Hex Request path size 2 words 02 Hex Service code Unconnected Send service 52 Hex Routing service data 502 bytes max d 00 Message Request path Request data i Route path request size variable length variable length variable length Request path size Padding data Route path size i Time Out Ticks Service code when necessary i Priority Time Tick Routing gt i Last hop gt lt Routing service data data service data e Last Hop Format The following format does not include the route path 2810 Hex Command Transport Message code ID monitoring time lt 502 bytes max gt IPOE ENEE PECE de als OEE E E E Request path size Request data variable length variable length Request path size Service code 236 Sending Explicit Messages Section 9 1 Response Block The following
528. the CPU Bus Unit Area where n CIO 1500 25 x unit number Select Transfer to PLC from the PLC Menu and click the Yes Button The Unit Setup CPU Bus System Setup will be transferred to the CPU Unit the setting data will be transferred to the CPU Bus Unit System Setup Ar ea 325 Using the Automatic Clock Adjustment Function Section 12 2 12 2 2 Settings Required for Automatic Clock Adjustment Function The following settings must be set in the Unit Setup when using the automatic clock adjustment function CX Programmer tab Auto Adjust Time Settings Server specification type Setting conditions Required IP Address Host name One or the other is required depending on the Server specifi cation type setting Port No Rarely required Change when a set ting other than the default setting of 123 is required Get the time informa tion from the SNTP server Required Auto Adjust Time Optional Retry timer Optional Change when the default set ting of 10 seconds is unacceptable Adjust Time Optional Reference 12 2 3 Auto Adjust Time on page 327 DNS See note Note name 326 IP Address Required Port No Rarely required Change when a set ting other than the default setting of 53 is required Retry timer Optional Change when the default set ting of 10 seconds is unacceptable 3 8 TCP IP
529. the SNTP server field 326 327 global address 106 GMRP 29 H half duplex 55 high communications traffic preventing 232 host name 54 429 Host name field 326 327 T O allocations CIO Area 70 DM Area 83 T O memory address 116 T O response time 283 T O tables creating 46 overview 46 ICMP communications status 408 IGMP snooping 29 importing 136 indicators 23 using LED indicators for troubleshooting 347 initial settings 34 installation 33 cable connections 44 location xxiv mounting Unit to PLC 38 precautions 41 INTERNODE ECHO TEST 396 internode test command 396 IP address 54 92 automatic generation 95 automatic generation dynamic 96 automatic generation static 97 automatic IP address setting by DHCP service 102 combined method 98 determining IP addresses 92 global address 106 IP address table method 95 97 private address 106 prohibiting dynamic changes of remote IP address 99 relationship to FINS node address 94 105 responding to computers with changed IP address 102 IP Address Display Setting Area 83 IP Address field 326 327 IP ADDRESS TABLE READ 405 IP addresses allocating 92 configuration 92 IP communications IP addresses reading from Units 392 430 Index reading tables 405 IP router tables reading 406 status 408 IP ROUTER TABLE READ 406 L ladder programming for tag data links 183 LED indicators 23 using for trou
530. the connection FINS TCP CONNEC TION REMOTE NODE CHANGE REQUEST is sent by the client e When there is no response from the client when the keep alive function is in effect FINS TCP Method Note Procedure for Using FINS TCP 1 2 3 Note Section 8 3 After a connection has been established as a FINS TCP client it can be termi nated in the following ways e If the connection is closed by the server e If there is no response from the client when the keep alive function is in effect Even if the connection is closed at the FINS TCP client requests continue to be made to the FINS TCP server every few seconds to open a connection After the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port is powered up or restarted the IP address for the connection used as the FINS TCP client is the remote IP address that was set in the FINS TCP Tab Page of the CX Pro grammer s Edit Parameters Dialog Box To dynamically change the remote IP address i e during CPU Unit operation execute the CMND 490 instruction in the ladder program and send a FINS command FINS TCP CONNECTION REMOTE NODE CHANGE REQUEST command code 27 30 hexadecimal to the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port 1 Make the basic settings Refer to nitial Settings in 3 1 1 Procedures 2 Make the following settings on the FINS TCP Tab Page of the CX Pro grammer s Edit Parameters Dialog Box FINS TCP port default 9600 e Server Client Specifies wh
531. the corresponding port number Bits 00 to 07 correspond to communications ports 0 to 7 Section 4 5 Settings 0 Network communi cations running 1 No network com munications running Communications Port Completion Codes These words contain the completion codes for the corresponding port numbers when network instructions SEND RECV CMND or PMCR have been executed Words A203 to A210 correspond to communications ports 0 to 7 0000 No error Not 0000 Error code A21900 to A21907 Communications Port Error Flags Bits A21900 to A21907 turn ON when an error occurred during execution of a network instruction SEND RECV CMND or PMCR Bits 00 to 07 correspond to communications ports 0 to 7 0 Normal end 1 Error end A30200 to A30215 CPU Bus Unit Initializing Flags Bits A30200 through A30215 turn ON while the corresponding CPU Bus Units Units 0 through 15 respectively are initializing The bits will turn ON either when power is turned ON or when a CPU Bus Unit Restart Bit A50100 to A50115 is turned ON 0 Not initializing 1 Initializing System will automatically turn the flag OFF when ini tialization has been completed A40203 CPU Bus Unit Set ting Error Flag Non fatal error Bit A40203 is turned ON when the CPU Bus Units actually installed differ from the Units registered in the I O tables The ERR ALM indicator on the front of the CPU Unit will flash but CPU ope
532. the target node PLC s operating and error information Unit status communications status registered normal target node infor mation and FINS TCP connection status Allocated DM Area words CPU Bus Unit words 100 words Unit one unit number s words These words contain the IP address display setting area User set area Any usable data area words Target node PLC s operating and error information and registered normal target node information CPU Bus Unit Sys tem Setup Not used Non volatile memory for the CJ2 built in EtherNet IP port The following settings are stored in the non volatile memory for the built in EtherNet IP port Note Unlike the regular Ethernet Units the CPU Bus Unit Setup Area in the CPU Unit is not used for these settings 1 Unit Setup communications settings for the built in EtherNet IP port such as the IP address DNS server settings host name baud rate FINS UDP settings and FINS TCP settings 2 Tag data link settings device parameters Transfer specifica tions Media access method CSMA CD Modulation method Baseband Transmission paths Star form Baud rate 100 Mbit s 100Base TX Transmission media Shielded twisted pair STP cable Categories 100 Q at 5 5e Transmission dis tance 100 m distance between hub and node Number of cascade connections There is no limitation when a switching hub is
533. the total number of packets trans ferred by each EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port in 1 second Unit s total PPS Total PPS of originator connections Total PPS of target connections See note Note Connections set as target connections must be added too The maximum number of packets that the Unit can transfer in 1 second called the allowed Unit bandwidth is 6 000 pps CJ2M 3 000 pps so set the connection below this maximum value Example Node 1 has both originator and target connections with send RPI of 200 ms and 2 ms and receive RPI of 1 ms Node 2 has originator connections only with receive RPI of 200 ms 2 ms and 5 ms Node 3 has target connections only with send RPI of 5 ms and 1 ms Node 1 O Originator T T o T Target la HB Heartbeat RPI 200 ms HB 200 ms RPI 1 ms HB 100 ms O RPI 5ms T HB 100ms Each node s total PPS is calculated as follows e Total PPS of node 1 Unit 1 000 200 ms 1 000 2 ms 1 000 1 ms for data 1 000 200 ms 1 000 100 ms 1 000 100 ms for heartbeat 1 530 pps e Total PPS of node 2 Unit 1 000 200 ms 1 000 2 ms 1 000 5 ms for data 1 000 200 ms 1 000 100 ms 1 000 100 ms for heartbeat 730 pps e Total PPS of node 3 Unit 1 000 5 ms 1 000 1 ms for data 1 000 100 ms 1 000 100 ms for heartbeat 1 220 pps All of the Units are within the allowed Unit bandwidth of 6
534. the type command before reading or writing files using FTP Refer to type on page 311 Note For details on how to use File Memory Instructions refer to the CS CJ Series Instructions Reference Manual W340 319 FTP File Transfer Time Section 11 8 11 8 FTP File Transfer Time File transfers using FTP can require 30 or 40 minutes depending on the capacity of the file Approximate file transfer time are provided in the following table for reference All times are in seconds unless otherwise specified E CS1 CPU Units and CJ1 CPU Units File system Memory Card EM File Memory CPU Unit status Operating mode PROGRAM PROGRAM Cycle time Transfers using 1 KB 0 7 s 0 4s put 30 KB 45s 2 58 60 KB 748s 5 0 s 120 KB 14 4 s 11 0 s Transfers using 1 KB 0 3 s 0 2s get 30 KB 2 8 s 1 98s 60 KB 4 9s 3 85 120 KB 96s 8 6s E CS1 H CPU Units CJ1 H CPU Units CJ1 R CPU Units CJ2 H CPU Units and CJ2M CPU Units File system Memory Card EM File Memory CPU Unit status Operating mode PROGRAM PROGRAM Cycle time Transfers using 1 KB 0 5 s 0 2 s put 30 KB 1 8 s 0 7s 60 KB 3 25 1 5s 120 KB 6 2s 3 6 s Transfers using 1 KB 0 2 s 0 2 s get 30 KB 1 75s 1 0s 60 KB 2 58 2 35 120 KB 49s 4 9s Note 1 The above times assume that the Fixed Peripheral Servicing Time in the PLC Setup is set to the default value of 4 2 Ifthe Fix
535. therNet IP Unit Model number CJ1W EIP21 Type 100Base TX See note Applicable PLCs CJ series PLCs Unit classification CJ series CPU Bus Unit Mounting location CPU Rack or Expansion Rack Number of Units that can be mounted 8 max including Expansion Racks Note Up to seven EtherNet IP Units can be connected to a CJ2H CPULILI EIP CPU Unit Up to two EtherNet IP Units can be connected to a CJ2M CPU Unit CPU Unit words used Allocated CIO Area words CPU Bus Unit words 25 words Unit one unit number s words These words contain control bits and flags the target node PLC s operating and error information Unit status communications status registered normal target node infor mation and FINS TCP connection status Allocated DM Area words CPU Bus Unit words 100 words Unit one unit number s words These words contain the IP address display setting area User set area Any usable data area words Target node PLC s operating and error information and registered normal target node information CPU Bus Unit Sys tem Setup Not used Non volatile memory within Ether Net IP Unit See note The following settings are stored in the EtherNet IP Unit s non volatile memory Note Unlike the regular Ethernet Units the CPU Bus Unit Setup Area in the CPU Unit is not used for these settings 1 Unit Setup communications setti
536. tic method however data in an internal table that has been gener ated is not freely changed EtherNet IP Unit CPU Unit Remote FINS node number Local FINS node number Automatic generation static setting Y y Remote IP address Local IP address IP address FINS command Ethernet EtherNet IP IP address FINS response IP Address Table Method With this method FINS node addresses are converted to IP addresses based on a preset correspondence table IP address table The IP address table is set on the FINS UDP Tab Page of the Edit Parameters Dialog Box of the CX Programmer Nodes can be registered even if they are in different segments and have different network IDs The internal table will be as follows e FINS Node Address Registered to IP Address Table The following address is registered to the internal table e Remote IP address IP address registered to IP address table e Remote UDP port number UDP port number set for local Unit e Connection method FINS UDP e FINS Node Address Not Registered to IP Address Table The following address is registered to the internal table e Remote IP address 0 0 0 0 Remote UDP port number UDP port number set for local Unit e Connection method FINS UDP With the IP address table method records of FINS nodes registered to the IP address table are not ch
537. tinue operating The Unit Error Occurred Flag n 10 bit 00 Unit Memory Error Flag n 10 bit 04 and Non volatile Memory Error Flag n 14 bit 15 will turn ON 0602 Download the Unit Setup from the tab pages of the Edit Parameters Dialog Box of the CX Pro grammer and download the device parameters from the Network Configurator If the error recurs replace the Ether Net IP Unit or for a built in EtherNet IP port the CPU Unit 353 Using the LED Indicators and Display for Troubleshooting Indicator Flashing red 7 segment Device Param eters Error The I O Area set in the device parameters does not exist in the CPU Unit or the EM Area was converted to file memory A checksum error or logic error was detected in the parameters The Unit was mounted to a different PLC e g from CJ1 to CJ2 after the Unit settings were made Flashing red IP Advanced Settings Error Unit operation Flag status There is an error in the parameter set tings stored in the Unit s non volatile memory An error can occur when power is interrupted while data is being written to non volatile memory The Unit Error Occurred Flag n 10 bit 00 and Invalid Communications Parameter Flag n 12 bit 04 will go ON Section 14 2 Countermeasure Download the Unit Setup from the tab pages of the Edit Parameters Dialog Box of the CX Pro grammer and download the
538. tion Type is set to a host name Port No Sets the port number to use to connect to the SNTP server for automatic time adjustment It is normally not necessary to change this setting Retry Timer Sets the time to wait before retrying the connection when connect ing to the SNTP server fails It is normally not necessary to change this setting Adjust Time Sets the time to offset the clock in the CPU Unit when setting the clock in the CPU Unit to the time obtained from the SNTP server To use the time from the SNTP server as is enter 0 for the Adjust Time Using the Status Area Tab Page in Edit Setting Function Parameters Dialog Box Status Area Layout Type Specifies whether to use the default setting or a custom setting for the words allocated to the status area Allocation Area Sets the first word in the status area when the Layout Type is set for a customer setting With CS1 CJ1 CPU Units only an I O memory address can be set With CJ2 or NE1S CPU Units either an I O memory address or a symbol defined in the CPU Unit can be set 63 Other Parameters Using SNMP Tab Page in Edit Parameters Dialog Box Setting Section 3 10 Function SNMP Not use SNMP service or Use SNMP service Specifies whether to use the SNMP If not using the SNMP service is specified an SNMP manager will not be able to connected from an external device SNMP Port Sets the port num
539. tion sends n bytes of command data starting from the beginning word S at the local node to the node at node address N the data in m number of words starting from the beginning word S at the remote node node address M is received at the words starting from the beginning word D at the local node Local node p node number N 15 0 iii ao nae a Com Interpretation gt mand S 1 data n 5 bytes a Z Ld Response D gt Re f sponse D 1 J data m bytes 2 GMNDA S Beginning command storage word D Beginning response storage word C First word of control data below 15 T T T c 1 Number of bytes of command data n 0000 to 07C6 Hex 1 to 1 990 bytes 15 T T T Cr 1 Number of bytes of response data m 0000 to 07C6 Hex 1 to 1 990 bytes 15 11 87 0 15 10 87 3 0 T ca ofo ae Destination network number 00 Hex Local network 01 to 7F Hex 1 to 127 15 87 0 Destination Unit address 00 Hex CPU Unit 10 to 1F Hex Unit 0 to 15 E1 Hex Inner Board FE Hex Unit connected to network Destination node number N 00 to FE Hex 0 to 254 L Number of retries 0 to F Hex 0 to 15 retries Communications port number 0 to 7 Response 0 Required 1 Not required 15 3 10 87 T T T C 5 fi ji L SSS es L Response monitor time 0000 Hex 2 s 0001 to FFFF Hex 0 1 to 6 553 5 s in units o
540. tions 14 6 Troubleshooting with FINS Response Codes The cause of errors that occur when using the SEND 090 RECV 098 or CMND 490 instructions can be identified from the response codes Refer to the description of Communications Port Completion Codes in 8 6 4 Writing Programs for the storage locations of response codes generated by the SEND 090 RECV 098 or CMND 490 instructions This section describes the completion codes produced by EtherNet IP Units For details on completion codes produced by CPU Units other CPU Bus Units or computers equipped with FINS services refer to the device s opera tion manual The 6th 7 and 15 bits of the response codes have specific functions The 6t bit will be ON when a non fatal error has occurred in the PLC at the remote node the 7 bit will be ON when a fatal error has occurred in the PLC at the remote node and the 15 bit will be ON when a network relay error has occurred The following table explains the meaning of the completion codes First byte Second byte Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 65 4 3 2 1 0 Main response code RES Sub response code SRES PLC Fatal Error Flag f PLC Non fatal Error Flag Relay Error Flag Main response Sub response code Item to check Likely cause Corrective action code Value and Value and meaning meaning Normal completion 371 Troubleshooting with FI
541. tment Switch Bit 05 of n n lt Clock Adjustment Switch When the Automatic Clock Adjustment Switch turns from OFF to ON the Eth erNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port obtains the clock data from the SNTP server on the network and applies it to the local CPU Unit After applying the data the switch automatically turns OFF again 12 4 Automatic Clock Adjustment Error Processing 12 4 1 Automatic Clock Adjustment SNTP Errors The following table shows the main causes and remedies for errors that occur in the automatic clock adjustment function SNTP Cause Correction SNTP DNS server address not set Reset each server address IP address or host name SNTP DNS server communications time Inspect the communications path Ether out Net IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port cable connections hub router server and correct the situation that is causing the error CPU Unit internal clock could not be set The automatic clock adjustment function is not supported by certain CPU Units models lot numbers if they are in RUN or MONITOR mode 12 4 2 Error Log Error Codes for the Automatic Clock Adjustment Function When an error occurs while the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port is operating the error code detailed error code and time the error occurred are saved in the error log The following table provides a list of the error codes 328 Automatic Clock Adjustment Error Proce
542. tribute in a list of attributes that was needed by the service to perform the requested behavior 387 CIP Message Communications General Status Code hex Status Name Invalid attribute value list Appendix D Description of Status The service is returning the list of attributes supplied with status information for those attributes that were invalid Embedded service error An embedded service resulted in an error Vendor specific error A vendor specific error has been encountered The Additional Code Field of the Error Response defines the particular error encountered Use of this Gen eral Error Code should only be performed when none of the Error Codes pre sented in this table or within an Object Class definition accurately reflect the error Invalid parameter A parameter associated with the request was invalid This code is used when a parameter does not meet the requirements of this specification and or the requirements defined in an Application Object Specification Write once value or medium already written An attempt was made to write to a write once medium e g WORM drive PROM that has already been written or to modify a value that cannot be changed once established Invalid Reply Received An invalid reply is received e g reply service code does not match the request service code or reply message is shorter than the minimum expected reply size This status code can serve for
543. tribute_All service Request path size 02 hex Link 8 bit class ID 20 hex Class ID 01 hex Identity Object path 8 bit instance ID 24 hex Instance ID 01 hex Route path size 8 words Ethernet port 12 hex Extended Link Address Size 1 hex Ethernet port number 2 hex Route path size 13 bytes 19 2 16 8 Route path IP address 25 192 168 250 2 0 2 The response data is set in the same way starting from the word specified for CMND 490 operand D first response word and continuing with words with higher addresses in I O memory in the response block format Note Request path data or request data that is in word 2 byte or double word 4 byte units such as word data and ERROR CLEAR codes is specified from low to high U bytes in command block format For example to specify word data 1234 hex specify 34 hex and then 12 hex To specify the double word data 12345678 hex specify 78 hex 56 hex 34 hex and then 12 hex The command blocks are shown in the following diagram Command Block Example 1234 hex Example 12345678 hex Service Data Service Data The format from CMND 490 operand S onwards will be set as follows Example 1234 hex Example 12345678 hex From higher byte From higher byte Bit 15 o o7 00 Bit 15 08 nE So From lower byte Bit 15 os 07 00 From lower byte Bit 15 os o7 00 78 paa Cd S n Ls S n a N Similarly when the additional status data and se
544. troubleshooting Use together with the Programmable Controllers Pro gramming Manual W394 CJ1G H CPU CJ1G CPU Programmable Con trollers Operation Manual Provides an outline of and describes the design installa tion maintenance and other basic operations for the CJ series PLCs Information is also included on features system configuration wiring I O memory allocations and troubleshooting Use together with the Programmable Controllers Pro gramming Manual W394 CS1G H CPU CS1G H CPU CJ1G H CPU CJ1G CPU NSJU NSJU Programmable Con trollers Program ming Manual Describes programming tasks file memory and other functions for the CS series CJ series and NS J series PLCs Use together with the Programmable Controllers Opera tion Manual W339 for CS series PLCs and W393 for CJ series PLCs CS1G H CPU CS1G H CPU CJ1G H CPU CJ1G CPU NSJO NSJD B G5D B M3D Programmable Con trollers Instructions Reference Manual Describes the ladder diagram programming instructions supported by CS series and CJ series PCs Use together with the Programmable Controllers Operation Manual W339 for CS series PLCs and W393 for CJ series PLCs
545. tting Tag Data Links Section 6 2 b No Table Inconsistencies The following message will be displayed Click the OK Button DatalinkT ool Check Its is OK 1 eck results is 7 Select Exit from the File Menu The EtherNet IP Datalink Tool will be exited and you ll return to the Network Configurator 8 Returning to the Network Configurator Click the icon for each device and check the settings made with the Ether Net IP Datalink Tool in the Edit Device Parameters Dialog Box 6 2 7 Creating Connections Using the Wizard You can use the Network Configurator s Wizard to easily create connections between OMRON PLCs following the instructions provided by the Wizard Network Configurator version 3 10 or higher is required to use the Wizard Note The Wizard can be used only with the following OMRON EtherNet IP devices CJ1W EIP21 CJ1W EIP21 mounted to CJ1 CPU Unit CJ1W EIP21 CJ2 CJ1W EIP21 mounted to CJ2 CPU Unit CJ2B EIP21 Built in EtherNet IP port in CJ2H CPU Unit CJ2M EIP21 Built in EtherNet IP port in CJ2M CPU Unit CS1W EIP21 CJ1W EIP21 mounted to CS1 CPU Unit Use the following procedure to create connections i e data links with the Wizard 1 2 3 1 Set tags and tag sets for all devices before starting the Wizard Refer to 6 2 4 Creating Tags and Tag Sets for the setting procedure 2 For tag data links between OMRON PLCs a connection is created in the PLC i e the originator device that receives dat
546. ture and Functions CS1W EIP21 CJ1W EIP21 4 Unit number setting switch NODES pO Node address His Q setting switches EtherNet IP IP ADDRESS 192 168 250 1 ee creed SUBNET MASK al ress 255 255 255 0 100BASE TX 10BASE T E Ethernet nlai il connector Fj lt M LED Indicators a lt Q Unit number setting switch lt Node address setting switches EtherNet IP IP ADDRESS 255 255 255 0 100BASE TX 10BASE T Label showing IP address Ethernet connector lt q Backplane Connector 21 Nomenclature and Functions Section 2 2 Built in EtherNet IP Port in CJ2H CPUL_ _ EIP od lt 4 LED Indicators lt q Unit number setting switch lt q Node address setting switches lt q Label showing IP address Ethernet connector Built in EtherNet IP Port in CJ2M CPU3 omron lt M LED Indicators CPU35 PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER lt q Unit number setting switch lt q Node address setting switches SW SETTING v x16 x16 PERIPHERAL J r lt q Label showing OSET IP address 10BASE T EtherNet IP 4 Ethernet connector Ethernet Address Notation A specific Ethernet address is allocated to all devices connected
547. ture and functions 21 Normal Target Node Flags 81 86 NS indicator 23 O online editing xxiii open command 303 308 operating environment precautions xxiv P packet interval RPI relationship to bandwidth usage 263 setting 262 Password field 306 PCMR 260 instruction 227 Index PING 399 PING command 65 PLC object services 249 Port No field 306 326 327 port numbers UDP port reading from Unit 392 power supply xxiv precautions XXV precautions xxi applications xxiv Contact Output Units 43 general xxii handling 40 installation 41 operating environment xxiv power supply xxv safety xxii wiring 44 preferred DNS server 54 private address 106 Programming Console 46 Programming Devices connecting 46 CX Net 46 CX Programmer 46 Programming Console 46 PROTOCOL STATUS READ 407 protocols FTP server 303 reading status 407 put command 303 308 311 320 pwd command 303 308 310 Q QoS 29 quit command 303 308 312 R radioactivity xxiv receiving explicit messages 248 recommended network devices 28 recommended products 41 RECV 098 instruction 190 220 223 accessible data areas 221 delays 297 431 refresh cycle 268 Register Device List 141 Registered Target Node Flags 81 85 registering devices 125 141 relay tables 207 rename command 303 308 replacing a Unit 332 replacing Units precautions xxv restoring data from
548. turns OFF with the execution of the next communications instruction even if there was an abnormal comple tion Communicating between OMRON PLCs Section 8 6 Example Communications Port Enabled Flag a Communications instruction Instruction 1 l Instruction 2 Instruction3 SEND 090 RECV 098 CMND 490 being executed i being executed _ being executed Communications Port Error Flag a Communications Port 0000 0000 i 0000 Completion Code Completion 0202 0000 Normal completion 0000 Normal completion Unit address setting error 229 Communicating between OMRON PLCs Section 8 6 8 6 5 Program Example Execution condition A20207 000000 See note 1 120002 I KEEP 120000 120001 120000 MOV 21 000A D00000 MOV 21 0002 D00001 MOV 21 0400 D00002 MOV 21 0705 D00003 MOV 21 0064 D00004 XFER 70 000A 0000 D00010 SEND 90 D00010 D00020 D00000 120000 A20207 See note 1 DIFU 13 120001 120000 A21907 IK Continued on next page 230 When the Communications Port Enabled Flag for port 7 is ON and RECV 098 is not being executed the send execution program will start when execution condition CIO 000000 turns ON Input CIO 120000 remains ON from the start of SEND 090 execution until completion Control Data Creation Word Contents M
549. twork transmission delay time response processing 5 Receive data 6 Output ON time time 3 RPI processing time response time oT Input 2 gt o ne 3 Qa oO o Cc 2 1 S 4 sles ELEA mboneaientsnaslaeeeeistinen i emnasbinuawicaneten 2 5 hiui Tag data link refresh cycle i o si E eeeeeeeeeeeeeeereereeteseeereereseenneeeseetetereneeeeeeneeeeennneeeeeeteereeeeeeeeebereseseeseseretreeeeeeerererennnneeeeeetereetteeeeneeeeennnenenetteredheeeeeneeeeernneeeteeetettet N oO er A Receive data processing time Caer E PLC 2 processing I cae i 28 Cycle time x 4 EES On Output 1 Node 1 PLC 1 Input ON Response Time This is the delay time for the external input device from when the input occurs until the switch actually turns ON and the time until the input data is stored in the memory area of the CPU Unit for PLC 1 In this system the input switch delay time is 1 5 ms Also one CPU cycle time is required until the data is stored in the memory area of the CPU Unit Therefore the input ON response time is 1 5 ms 10 ms or 11 5 ms 2 Node 1 PLC 1 Send Data Processing Time This is the time until memory data in the CPU Unit is transferred to the Ether Net IP Unit If the amount of data that can be processed in one data transmis sion with the CPU Unit is exceeded data transmission will be performed over multiple cycles of the CPU Unit and so time is calculated for the number of transmissions ti
550. ty Slot 0000 Rack 01 amp 0000 Rack 02 0000 Rack 03 CJIH CPU67H Progr Add Unit Change Confirm Units Change Unit No Unit Comment SYSMAC BUS Master Unit Setup Save Parameters Load Parameters Start Special Application Cut Ctrl x Copy Ctrl C Delete Unit Manufacturing information 2 Right click the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port in the I O table and select Edit Unit Setup Box will be displayed from the menus The Edit Parameters Dialog CJ1W EIP21 Edit Parameters TCP IP Ethemet FINS UDP FINS TCP FTP Auto IP Address Use the following address IP Address CER E Sub net Mask OR Default Gateway Oo OU Ba R Get IP address from the BOOTP server The BOOTP setting is valid only for next unit restart power restoration Then the BOOTP setting will be cleared The obtained IP address will be automatically saved as system setting in the unit Broadcast ANT 4 385D All0 4 2BSD Adjust Time Status Area SNMP SNMP Trap Not use DNS C Use DNS Primary DNS Server Secondary DNS Server Domain Name IP Router Table IP Address Gateway Address p Set Defaults 3 Make the necessary settings on the TCP IP Tab Page of the Edit Parame ters Dialog Box The IP address is set here TCP IP and Link Settings Section 3 8 CJ1W EIP21 Edit Parameters
551. uesting a Service of a particular Object of a particular device Example of CIP Message Creation Setting the Route Path Port Number The following description explains the network port which is used to specify the route path In the CJ2 Series the Backplane is also considered part of the network when specifying the Link Address CPU Unit CJ2 Not supported by CS1 CJ1 CPU Units Each CPU Unit has one backplane port By convention the built in port on a CJ2H CPU6LI EIP or a CJ2M CPU3L CPU Unit functions as a CPU Bus Unit Port ___Port Number Backplane The Backplane port is the Backplane CPU Unit communications routed through CPU Bus Units always travel through the backplane EtherNet IP Unit or CJ2 Built in EtherNet IP Port The EtherNet IP Unit has two ports A CJ2 CPU Unit also has two built in EtherNet IP ports One is a Back plane port and the other is an Ethernet port The Backplane port is the Backplane Communications routed through the CPU Unit a Special I O Unit or another CPU Bus Unit always travel through the backplane C Pon ___ Port Number Backplane 1 Ethernet 2 Link Address The Link Address is a node address on the network which is used to specify the route path The method to set the Link Address is different for each network In the CS CJ Series the Backplane is also considered part of the network when specifying the Link Address Backplane e CPU Bus Unit or Spec
552. um Lower byte of IP address ber 0 to 255 Note For details on identifying the cause of the verification error refer to 14 3 Connection Status Codes and Error Processing This error will not be stored when a target node is missing for version 2 0 or higher Tag data link error 00 hex Lower byte of IP address CPU Bus Unit error Variable CPU Bus Unit memory error 01 Read error 02 hex Network parame 02 Write error ter 06 hex Error log 09 hex Identity data OE hex Unit name OF hex Ethernet basic setting 10 hex Ethernet advanced setting 11 hex MAC address 12 hex Status area layout setting 14 hex Term Tag address resolution memory write error Note If a memory error occurs in the error log area of EEPROM the record will not be stored in EEPROM 14 5 Troubleshooting 14 5 1 CPU Unit s ERR ALM Indicator Lit or Flashing Use the following table to troubleshoot the system when the CPU Units ERR ALM indicator is lit or flashing when the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port is mounted An I O verification Confirm that the Unit is connected properly error occurred e Check the I O table with the I O Table Verification operation and correct it if necessary After correcting it perform the I O Table Create operation A CPU Bus Unit e The CPU Bus Unit model registered in the I O tables does setting error not match the model of CPU Bus Unit actually mounted occurred
553. ut product and input consume tag sets as soon as automatic connec tion setting processing has begun Auto Connection Configuration It will compare Originator s Tag set and Target s If these are the same it will be configured as connection If you would like to ellipsis a part of Tag set please input the following words Consume Variable Forward ellipsis Backward ellipsis Produce Variable Forward ellipsis Backward ellipsis _Output C x JL ome Input the ellipses and click the OK Button Automatic setting will be pro cessed 3 Ifthere are tag sets that meet the conditions for automatic connection set ting they will be displayed Setting Tag Data Links Device Connection Structure Tree Section 6 2 Confirm Auto Connection List The connection configuration will be configured as follows If you would not like to use a multi cast connection please clear off the check box M Originator Addr Originator Variable Target Address Target Variable 192168 2501 NO1_InData 1921682502 NO1_OutData Cancel Click the OK Button to start processing 4 A device connection structure tree will be displayed when processing has been completed s Device s Connection Structure Tree Display Type Based on Slave Device Target Display Option Display Route Path Display the detail of Connection Structure E Network Configurator 2 EtherNet IP_1 192
554. w Address L The lower 2 digits when the first word address is displayed in 4 digit hexadecimal Address H The higher 2 digits when the first word address is displayed in 4 digit hexadecimal Write data response The specified area and write data is returned in order from word L lower byte bits 0 to 7 to word H higher byte bits 8 to 15 The actual address L address H and number of write data bytes that can be specified depends on the model of the CPU Unit and the data area being written Do not exceed the boundary of the data areas for the PLC you are using SECTION 10 Communications Performance and Communications Load This section describes the communications performance in an EtherNet IP network and shows how to estimate the I O response times and transmission delays 10 1 Communications System 00 0 2 ee eee eee 262 10 1 1 Tag Data Link Communications Method 262 10 1 2 Calculating the Number of Connections 264 10 1 3 Network Transmission Delay Time 0 265 10 2 Adjusting the Communications Load 0 000 002 ee eee ee 268 10 2 1 Checking Bandwidth Usage for Tag Data Links 269 10 2 2 Tag Data Link Bandwidth Usage and RPI 270 10 2 3 Adjusting Device Bandwidth Usage 0 271 10 2 4 Changing the RPI 0 0 00 2 cee eee eee 272 10 2 5 RPI Setting Examples 0 0 0
555. when cascade connections are not being used If cascade connections are used more nodes can be connected but the switching hub delays will increase Words per connection Number of connections used for reception 32 64 128 256 2 words 200 words 400 words 600 words 722 words The receive processing delay is the delay that occurs within the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port from the reception of the data packet at the Unit until the completion of reception processing in the Unit This delay depends on the size of the connections used in the tag data links and the number of connections In practice the delay depends on the number of con nections used in tag data links with less than 200 words If the number of con nections is n the maximum delay can be calculated with the following equation Maximum reception processing delay 1 n x 0 043 ms The size of the connections may cause a delay when the data sizes are smaller and a large number of packets may be received in a fixed interval because the data may wait for receive processing This example shows how to calculate the tag data link delay when the follow ing tag data link connection settings have been made In this case 17 EtherNet IP Units or built in EtherNet IP ports are being used and one Unit is receiving 200 words of data from each of the other Units at a packet interval RPI of 5 ms Thus 16 tag data link connections a
556. with any standards codes or regulations that apply to the combination of products in the customer s application or use of the products At the customer s request OMRON will provide applicable third party certification documents identifying ratings and limitations of use that apply to the products This information by itself is not sufficient for a complete determination of the suitability of the products in combination with the end product machine system or other application or use The following are some examples of applications for which particular attention must be given This is not intended to be an exhaustive list of all possible uses of the products nor is it intended to imply that the uses listed may be suitable for the products e Outdoor use uses involving potential chemical contamination or electrical interference or conditions or uses not described in this manual e Nuclear energy control systems combustion systems railroad systems aviation systems medical equipment amusement machines vehicles safety equipment and installations subject to separate industry or government regulations e Systems machines and equipment that could present a risk to life or property Please know and observe all prohibitions of use applicable to the products NEVER USE THE PRODUCTS FOR AN APPLICATION INVOLVING SERIOUS RISK TO LIFE OR PROPERTY WITHOUT ENSURING THAT THE SYSTEM AS A WHOLE HAS BEEN DESIGNED TO ADDRESS THE RISKS AND THAT THE O
557. x First response word at local node First control word Number of command bytes 40 bytes Number of response bytes 100 bytes Destination network address 1 Destination node address 5 Destination unit address FE hex or 10 hex Response communications port 0 no retries Response monitoring time 16 0 s Command code FINS completion code Transport ID Number of bytes received 29 bytes Service code response 81 hex Reserved 00 hex General status 00 hex Reserved 00 hex Words C 6 to C 18 contain the service response data Sending Explicit Messages Section 9 1 Program Example 20011 071 7 000000 l BSET 0000 D00000 D02999 Sets 0000 in D00000 to D02999 First Cycle FI 021 4 eee MOV 0028 D00000 Sets 0028 in D00000 Number of send data bytes 40 021 MOV 0064 D00001 Sets 0064 in D00001 Number of receive data bytes 100 r 021 Mov 0001 D00002 Sets 0001 in D00002 Destination network address 01 021 MOV 0510 D00003 Sets 0510 in D00003 Destination node address 05 destination unit address 10 021 MOV 0000 D00004 Sets 0000 in D00004 Response required port number 0 number of retries 0 r 021 4 Nov o0a0 D00005 Sets 00A0 in D00005 Response monitoring time 16 0 s 021 MOV 2810 D1000 021 z MOV 0000 D1001 021 MOV 05DC D1002 r 021 J MOV 5202 D1003 r 021 5 MOV 2
558. xample Change PLC Settings Change PLC Device Name N ewPLCI Device Type C51G CJ1G X Settings Network Type Ethernet v Settings Comment Cancel Help Example Network Settings Network Tab Page Network Settings Ethernet Network Driver FINS Source Address Network o H N H FINS Destination Address Network o H Node 0 H Jn Frame Length Response Timeout s pa Cancel Help When FinsGateway is selected as the network type make sure that the frame length is set to 2 000 bytes max Using FINS Applications Section 8 5 Example Network Settings Driver Tab Page Network Settings Ethernet Network Driver Workstation Node Number 1 Auto detect IP Address Port Number 192 168 250 3600 Cancel Help m System Configuration Example 2 Using Routing Tables In this example an online connection is made via the Ethernet to a PLC on a Controller Link network PLC 3 below from a CX Programmer CX Integrator connected to the Ethernet network Conditions FINS UDP method e IP address conversion Automatic generation method dynamic CX Programmer CX Integrator Controller Link Unit EtherNet IP Unit IP address conversion Automatic generation method dynamic Node address 1 IP address 192 168 250 1 Gateway between networks PLC1 EtherNet IP Unit node address 2 EtherNet IP Unit IP address
559. xample if an instruction such as SEND RECV or FAL is executed the instruction s processing will have higher priority so the data processing time may be longer 10 3 3 Effect on the CPU Unit s Cycle Time 284 The CPU Unit s cycle time is affected when the EtherNet IP Unit or CJ2H built in port refreshes tag data and status data with the CPU Unit This effect depends on the size of the tag data links and can be approximated with the values in the following table When there are multiple EtherNet IP Units or CJ2H built in ports the effect is cumulative I O Response Time in Tag Data Links CPU Unit Effect of EtherNet IP Unit or CJ2H built in port only CPU Rack 0 1 ms Expansion Rack 0 13 ms Section 10 3 Total effect when tag data links are being used CPU Rack Value from left column 0 1 ms No of words trans ferred x 0 33 us See note 2 Expansion Rack Value from left column 0 1 ms No of words transferred x 0 45 us CPU Rack 0 14 ms Expansion Rack 0 16 ms CPU Rack Value from left column 0 02 ms No of words trans ferred x 0 78 us Expansion Rack Value from left column 0 02 ms No of words transferred x 0 92 us CJ1 0 25 ms 0 25 ms 1 5 ms Number of words x 1 us CJ1M 0 17 ms 0 17 ms 0 1 ms Number of words x 0 7 us CJ1 H 0 1 ms 0 1 ms 0 1 ms Number of words x 0 7 us CS1 0 2 ms 0 2 ms 1 5 ms Number of words x 1 us CS
560. xample of Programming to Detect Normal Status If data in the ladder program is linked by tag data links add conditions 1 to 4 in the ladder program for that data If you want to use target node PLC flags as input conditions add conditions 5 and 6 For details on the various flags refer to 4 2 C O Area Allocations Conditions showing the EtherNet IP Unit s Tag Data Links are enabled 1 The Unit Error Occurred Flag n 10 bit 00 is OFF 2 and the Online Flag n 11 bit 00 is ON 3 andthe Tag Data Link Operating Flag n 11 bit 01 is ON Conditions showing that connections are established with the target device and tag data links are operating 4 The corresponding Normal Target Node Flag in words n 20 to n 23 is ON The location of the Normal Target Node Flags depends on the layout set ting For details on the layout settings refer to 4 2 2 Details of the Allocated CIO Area Words Note With revision 2 or higher the Normal Target Node Flag will turn ON only after the data for all connections for the target device has been refreshed in the CPU Unit With revision 1 the Normal Target Node Flag will turn ON after the data for only one connection for the tar get device has been refreshed in the CPU Unit Condition showing that the Target Node PLC is operating OMRON PLCs only 5 The corresponding Target Node PLC Operating Flag in words n 2 to n 5 is ON Condition showing the Target Node PLC s fatal
561. y Time_Tick OA hex Time Out Ticks OC hex D01007 0600 hex Message request size 6 bytes Words S 8 to S 10 contain the request message request D01008 0102 hex Service 01 hex Get_Attribute_All Request path size 2 words Words S 9 and S 10 contain the request path D01009 2001 hex 8 bit class ID 20 hex Class ID 01 hex D01010 2401 hex 8 bit instance ID 24 hex Instance ID 01 hex Identity object Words S 11to S 19 contain the root path D01011 0800 hex Route path size 8 words D01012 120D hex Extended link address size 1 hex Route path size 13 bytes characters OD hex D01013 3139 hex IP address 19 D01014 322E hex IP address 2 D01015 3136 hex IP address 16 245 Sending Explicit Messages Response 246 D D02000 C D00000 D01016 382E hex D01017 3235 hex D01018 302E hex D01019 3200 hex D00000 0028 hex D00001 0064 hex D00002 0001 hex D00003 0510 hex D00004 0000 hex D00005 00A0 hex D02000 2801 hex D02001 0000 hex D02002 0000 hex D02003 001D hex D02004 8100 hex D02005 0000 hex D02006 2F00 hex D02007 0C00 hex D02008 0C00 hex D02009 0101 hex D020010 3000 hex D020011 5303 hex D020012 0011 hex D020013 0A43 hex D020014 5331 hex D020015 572D hex D020016 4549 hex D020017 5032 hex D020018 3100 hex Section 9 1 IP address 8 IP address 25 IP address 0 IP address 2 Padding data 00 he
562. y directory A connection will be initially made to the root directory Note 1 The date of the MEMCARD directory displayed for Is or dir commands in the root directory will be the date of the file system volume label 2 The login date will be displayed for EM files and for MEMCARD if a volume label has not been created 303 FTP Server Function Details Section 11 2 11 2 2 Connecting to the FTP Server 304 Note The host computer must connect to the FTP server before the FTP server functions can be used The login name and password set in the Unit Setup will be used when connecting The default FTP login name is CONFIDENTIAL and no password is required The FTP server in the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port can con nect to only one client at a time If a client attempts to connect when the FTP server is in use a message will be returned and connection will be refused When general purpose FTP software is used files can be transferred and read using a graphical user interface similar to Explorer Login Name and Password Setting The default login name for FTP is CONFIDENTIAL and no password is set for the default login so login is possible by simply entering CONFIDENTIAL as the login name A user set login name and password can also be set in the User Setup CPU Bus Unit System Setup Login Messages Status Message Normal 220 XXX XX XX XX YYYYYYYYYY FTP server FTP Ver connection si
563. y unit version 2 0 or later If no subnet mask is set or if an illegal value is set the following values will be used depending on the IP address class In normal applications we recommend setting the subnet mask defined for the class Class Subnet mask 255 0 0 0 255 255 0 0 255 255 255 0 With the default setting 0 0 0 0 a subnet mask corresponding to the IP address class is used The following table shows the various parameters in the Unit Setup when only the IP address and subnet mask are set and other settings are left at their default values Setting Operating status Default gateway None IP routing disabled Preferred DNS server None Alternate DNS server None Host name None Domain name None Broadcasting 4 3 BSD specifications IP router table None Sets the default gateway s IP address This setting is not required when the default gateway is not being used Sets the IP address specification method for broadcasting with FINS UDP All 1 s 4 3BSD Broadcasting is performed with the host ID set to all 1 s All 0 s 4 2BSD Broadcasting is performed with the host ID set to all 0 s Normally use the default setting of all 1 s 4 3BSD Preferred DNS Server and Alternate DNS Server 54 When accessing another node from the EtherNet IP Unit or built in EtherNet IP port using the host name the DNS server searches for the other node s IP address from t

SYSMAC CS and CJ Series CS1W-EIP21 (100Base-TX

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents